Taiwan is using its unmatched position in advanced semiconductors as a strategic diplomatic tool, expanding investment in the United States and Europe as allies push Taipei to share more of the economic benefits from the AI boom.

Taiwan is leaning more heavily on its semiconductor industry to strengthen political and economic ties with the United States and Europe, as governments increasingly view advanced chips as critical national-security infrastructure.

The shift was on display at the SEMICON Taiwan 2026 industry gathering, where officials and executives emphasized Taiwan’s role as a trusted supplier to democratic allies and a central player in the global AI economy.

Taiwan is home to companies including TSMC, Foxconn and ASE Technology, giving the island an extraordinary position in the production and packaging of advanced semiconductors.

That dominance has become both an advantage and a vulnerability.

The United States and Europe want more semiconductor manufacturing built on their own soil to reduce the risk of disruption from geopolitical tensions around the Taiwan Strait.

Taiwanese companies are responding.

TSMC is in the middle of a massive U.S. expansion centered on Arizona, where planned investment has reached approximately $265 billion across semiconductor manufacturing and related facilities.

Taiwanese officials have also indicated that companies are preparing roughly $20 billion in additional U.S. investment as part of broader efforts to deepen commercial ties and lower trade barriers.

The strategy extends beyond America.

European officials are pushing for stronger semiconductor cooperation under the EU’s next-generation Chips Act, and Taiwan is seeking a larger role in that effort.

Taiwan’s government increasingly describes its semiconductor industry not simply as an export business, but as a diplomatic asset.

The argument is that countries relying on Taiwanese chips have a direct economic interest in Taiwan’s stability and security.

At the same time, Taiwanese manufacturers acknowledge that concentrating too much production on the island creates strategic risk for customers.

That is why companies are globalizing parts of their supply chains while still keeping their most advanced technology and research capabilities anchored in Taiwan.

The balance is delicate.

Move too little production overseas, and allies may become frustrated by their dependence on Taiwan.

Move too much, and Taiwan risks weakening what has often been described as its “silicon shield” — the idea that its importance to the global technology industry gives major powers an additional reason to protect it.

What It Means for You

The AI boom is no longer just reshaping technology companies.

It is reshaping foreign policy.

Advanced chips are now treated almost like strategic commodities.

Governments care about who makes them, where they are produced and whether supply can survive a geopolitical crisis.

That gives Taiwan enormous leverage.

The island can use investment decisions to strengthen relationships with Washington, Brussels and other capitals that want secure access to AI hardware.

For companies, the result is a semiconductor supply chain that is becoming more geographically diversified — but also more expensive.

New factories in the United States and Europe cost more to build and operate than many facilities in Asia.

Businesses may eventually pay part of that price through higher chip costs.

But governments increasingly see that premium as the cost of security.

Taiwan’s strategy is becoming clear:

Use semiconductor investment to deepen alliances — while keeping enough advanced capability at home to remain indispensable.

In the AI era, that may make chips one of the most powerful diplomatic currencies in the world.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

More than 1,500 pounds of imported ready-to-eat pork products have been recalled over concerns about possible listeria contamination.

Two U.S.-based companies are issuing recalls for a total of about 1,513 pounds of dry-cured pork jowl products, also known as guanciale, the U.S. Department of Agriculture’s Food Safety and Inspection Service (FSIS) announced on Sunday.

The recall is classified as a Class I recall, the USDA’s most serious recall classification, indicating there is a reasonable probability that consuming the products could cause serious adverse health consequences or death.

Florida-based Prime Line Distributors, Inc. and New Jersey-based Ferrarini USA, Inc. recalled two products each over fears they “may be adulterated with Listeria monocytogenes (Lm),” FSIS said in its announcement.

E COLI BLUEBERRY EXPANDING TO FROZEN MIXED BERRY PACKAGES SOLD AT WALMART IN 16 STATES

Prime Line Distributors recalled various weight cardboard cases of two individually vacuum-packed “Prime Line Distributors, Inc. Guanciale Pork Jowl Product of Italy” items and various weight individually vacuum-packaged “Guanciale Pork Jowl Product of Italy” items.

Ferrarini USA recalled various weight cardboard cases with two pieces of individually vacuum-packed “Guanciale Pork Jowl Product of Italy” and various weight individually vacuum-packed “Ferrarini Guanciale Dry-Cured Pork Jowl” products.

Each of these recalled products include a best if used by date of May 16, 2027, and a lot number of 263311US printed on the label. The items also have the establishment number IT 1937 L CE printed inside the Italian mark of inspection or on the items’ case label.

The affected food items were produced at Est. 1937L Bome SRL in Italy on May 21 and imported into the U.S. in July.

The recalled Prime Line Distributors food items were sent to food service and retail companies in Florida, while the Ferrarini USA products were shipped to distributors and food service locations in California, Florida, Idaho, Illinois, Michigan, New Jersey, New York and Texas.

The issue was discovered during routine import reinspection testing, when a product sample confirmed positive for Listeria monocytogenes (Lm).

Consumption of food contaminated with Lm can cause listeriosis, a serious infection that primarily affects older adults, people with weakened immune systems and pregnant women and their newborns.

Listeriosis can cause fever, muscle aches, headache, stiff neck, confusion, loss of balance and convulsions, sometimes preceded by diarrhea or other gastrointestinal symptoms. An invasive infection spreads beyond the gastrointestinal tract.

POPULAR SQUISHY TOYS RECALLED OVER POTENTIALLY DEADLY WATER BEAD HAZARD

In pregnant women, the infection can cause miscarriages, stillbirths, premature delivery or life-threatening infection of the newborn. In addition, serious and sometimes fatal infections can occur in older adults and people with weakened immune systems.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

FSIS advised that people in higher-risk groups experiencing flu-like symptoms within two months of eating contaminated items should seek medical attention.

There have been no confirmed reports of illness in connection with the consumption of these products. Anyone concerned about an illness is urged to contact a healthcare provider.

“FSIS is concerned that some products may be in food service and retail refrigerators and freezers. Food service and retail locations are urged not to serve or sell these products,” the agency said.

Food items affected by the recall should be discarded or returned to the place of purchase.

This post was originally published here

Canada will impose a new wave of retaliatory tariffs on $27.6 billion worth of U.S. goods beginning September 8, escalating a trade fight already hitting steel, dairy, manufacturing and consumer products on both sides of the border.

Canada is preparing to hit back at the United States with a fresh round of tariffs covering $27.6 billion in American imports, matching Washington’s latest trade measures dollar for dollar.

The new Canadian tariffs take effect at 12:01 a.m. on September 8.

Rates will range from 15% to 50%, depending on the product, and are designed to mirror the corresponding U.S. tariffs imposed on Canadian goods.

The measures will target a broad range of American products, including steel and aluminum products, dairy goods, appliances, agricultural equipment, pulp and paper, plastics and electronics.

Some products will face tariffs as high as 50%.

Canada says the retaliation is a direct response to the United States imposing 50% tariffs on $27.6 billion worth of Canadian goods beginning August 22.

Prime Minister Mark Carney’s government has argued that the U.S. measures are unjustified and that Ottawa had little choice but to respond.

The new tariffs add to existing Canadian countermeasures already in place against U.S. goods, including tariffs affecting the automotive sector.

Canada is also rolling out approximately $7.5 billion in additional support for workers and businesses affected by the trade conflict.

That assistance comes on top of nearly $25 billion in previously announced support measures.

The government says the money will help companies adjust supply chains, find new export markets and compete against American products now facing higher Canadian import costs.

But tariffs rarely stop at the border.

When Canada taxes American products, Canadian importers typically pay the tariff first.

Some companies absorb part of that cost.

Others pass it through to retailers, manufacturers or consumers.

That means Canadian businesses relying on U.S. machinery, electronics, ingredients or industrial materials could face higher operating expenses.

American exporters face the opposite problem.

Their products become more expensive in Canada, potentially allowing Canadian or overseas competitors to gain market share.

The trade relationship is especially difficult to unwind because the two economies are deeply integrated.

Auto parts can cross the border several times before a finished vehicle reaches a dealership.

Steel and aluminum flow into factories on both sides.

Agricultural goods, energy products, machinery and consumer products move through supply chains that were built around relatively open trade.

Every additional tariff complicates that system.

Ottawa has already adjusted the retaliation once.

The government removed certain U.S. seafood and fish products from the tariff list after industry concerns, showing how quickly retaliatory measures can create problems for domestic companies that depend on American imports.

Canada is also maintaining a tariff-remission process allowing businesses to request relief when necessary goods cannot reasonably be sourced from Canadian or other foreign suppliers.

What It Means for You

This is where a trade war begins affecting ordinary business decisions.

A 25% tariff can completely change whether a supplier remains competitive.

A 50% tariff can effectively shut a product out of the market.

Companies therefore begin searching for new suppliers, changing production plans or raising prices.

Those changes can remain long after the original political dispute ends.

For American manufacturers, Canada is one of the largest export markets in the world.

Losing even part of that business can hurt factories, farmers and suppliers across the United States.

For Canadian businesses, retaliation creates its own pain because many rely heavily on American goods and equipment.

That is why trade wars create an unusual economic reality:

Both sides can retaliate — and businesses on both sides can still lose.

Unless Washington and Ottawa return to negotiations, September 8 will mark another significant step away from the deeply integrated North American trading system that companies spent decades building.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Some of the world’s largest asset managers are finding opportunity in an unexpected corner of the bond market: emerging economies, where higher real yields and stronger fiscal discipline are attracting capital while developed-market government bonds come under pressure.

BlackRock and JPMorgan Asset Management are among the firms increasing their focus on emerging-market debt as investors reassess where the best risk-adjusted returns are available in global fixed income.

The shift comes during a difficult period for government bonds in the United States, United Kingdom, Japan and other major economies.

Long-term yields have climbed as investors worry about persistent inflation, large government deficits, heavy borrowing needs and renewed geopolitical risk.

Japan’s 10-year government bond yield recently reached 3% for the first time since 1996, while U.S. Treasury yields have moved sharply higher and investors are increasingly discussing whether the benchmark 10-year could again approach 5%.

Against that backdrop, some emerging markets suddenly look comparatively attractive.

One reason is simple:

Real yields are high.

Real yield measures how much an investor earns after inflation.

Countries including Brazil and South Africa continue to offer substantially higher inflation-adjusted returns than many developed economies.

That gives investors a larger cushion if global interest rates remain elevated.

BlackRock has already moved local-currency emerging-market debt to an overweight position, reflecting the firm’s view that valuations and income opportunities have become more attractive.

JPMorgan Asset Management has expressed a similar preference, pointing to unusually high real yields available across several local emerging-market bond markets.

The strategy represents a reversal of the way many investors treated emerging markets for much of the previous decade.

For years, U.S. assets benefited from strong economic growth, a powerful dollar and enormous demand for American stocks and bonds.

Emerging markets often struggled with weaker currencies, inflation and political instability.

But the financial landscape has changed.

Many emerging-market central banks raised interest rates earlier and more aggressively than their developed-market counterparts during the recent inflation cycle.

Several countries also strengthened foreign-exchange reserves, improved monetary credibility and developed deeper domestic bond markets.

Those changes have made their economies less dependent on foreign-dollar borrowing than they were during previous crises.

Investor money is following.

Emerging-market debt attracted approximately $214 billion in inflows through July, the strongest pace in roughly two decades.

Bond issuance from emerging economies has also reached record territory.

The appeal has been strengthened by weakness in the U.S. dollar.

When the dollar falls, investors holding bonds denominated in currencies such as the Brazilian real, Mexican peso or South African rand can receive an additional boost when those investments are translated back into dollars.

But the trade is not without substantial risk.

A renewed surge in U.S. interest rates or sharp strengthening of the dollar could quickly reverse capital flows.

Political instability, commodity-price swings and country-specific fiscal problems remain important risks across emerging markets.

And if the Federal Reserve becomes significantly more aggressive about raising rates, higher U.S. yields could once again pull money away from developing economies.

What It Means for You

This is an important change in where some of the world’s largest investors believe value can be found.

For years, the simplest bond strategy was often to buy debt issued by wealthy developed countries and treat emerging markets as the riskier alternative.

That equation is becoming less obvious.

Governments in the United States, Japan and parts of Europe are carrying enormous debt loads while continuing to borrow heavily.

At the same time, several emerging economies have spent years repairing their finances and fighting inflation aggressively.

That means investors can sometimes receive higher yields from countries whose financial fundamentals have actually been improving.

The result is a remarkable reversal:

While investors worry about government borrowing in some of the world’s richest economies, BlackRock and JPMorgan are finding opportunities in countries that markets once considered considerably more dangerous.

That does not mean emerging-market bonds have suddenly become safe.

It means the definition of where the risk is is beginning to change.

And when institutions managing trillions of dollars start shifting money because of that change, global capital flows can move with them.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — Millions of Americans heading home from Labor Day trips are expected to hit the road Monday, with AAA and INRIX warning that the worst nationwide congestion is likely between 2 p.m. and 5 p.m.

Drivers who can leave before noon are expected to face substantially lighter traffic.

That timing matters because Labor Day return travel often compresses into a relatively short window as families, students and workers all head home before Tuesday.

The result can turn normally manageable highways into hours-long backups.

AAA’s forecast shows some individual routes becoming dramatically slower than usual during peak periods.

One of the most severe examples is the drive from Seattle to Ellensburg, which could take as much as 121% longer than normal at the worst point of the afternoon.

Other major metro areas are also expected to see heavy return traffic on highways leading into New York, Washington, Chicago, Los Angeles, Atlanta and other large cities.

For drivers, the congestion comes with another cost this year: fuel.

Gasoline prices are elevated compared with last Labor Day, meaning sitting in stop-and-go traffic is not just frustrating — it can also become more expensive.

The practical advice is simple.

Travelers who have flexibility should leave earlier in the day, avoid the mid-afternoon peak, and check traffic conditions before beginning the drive.

Those returning later in the evening may also see improvement after the afternoon rush begins to fade.

AAA and INRIX also recommend building extra time into trips because crashes, construction or weather can quickly worsen already-heavy traffic.

For families with young children, elderly passengers or long-distance trips, avoiding the peak window can make a substantial difference in both travel time and stress.

Monday is expected to be the biggest return-home day of the holiday weekend.

For anyone still deciding when to leave, the best window is before lunchtime.

The worst is likely to be right in the middle of the afternoon.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JBizNews U.S. Market Opening Recap — September 7, 2026

There is no U.S. stock-market opening today. The New York Stock Exchange and Nasdaq are closed Monday, September 7, for Labor Day, so there are no opening levels or point changes for the Dow Jones Industrial Average, S&P 500 or Nasdaq Composite. Regular trading resumes Tuesday morning at 9:30 a.m. ET. 

For reference, Friday’s session ended with the Dow at 53,414.25, down 0.5%, the S&P 500 at 7,718.60, down 0.4%, and the Nasdaq Composite at 26,506.99, down 0.3% after a stronger-than-expected August jobs report pushed Treasury yields higher and increased expectations that the Federal Reserve could raise rates this month. 

The most important market-moving development during the holiday session is oil.

Brent crude was trading around $97 a barrel Monday, near a six-week high, while West Texas Intermediate was near $92 as escalating U.S.-Iran attacks threatened shipping through the Strait of Hormuz. Tanker traffic through the waterway has fallen sharply, and Goldman Sachs has warned crude could reach roughly $120 if the conflict produces a more severe supply disruption. 

That leaves investors facing a potentially difficult combination when Wall Street reopens Tuesday: a labor market that is stronger than expected and an oil shock threatening to keep inflation elevated.

Friday’s August employment report showed the U.S. economy added 162,000 jobs, far above forecasts, while unemployment remained at 4.1%. The surprise has already caused major Wall Street firms to rethink the interest-rate outlook. UBS said Monday it now expects two Federal Reserve rate increases in 2026 — one in September and another in December — after previously forecasting no moves this year. Market pricing has also shifted toward a greater probability of a September hike. 

That means Tuesday’s reopening could quickly become a battle between economic strength and inflation risk.

There are no major scheduled U.S. economic reports Monday morning because of the Labor Day holiday. The economic focus shifts to inflation later this week, with CPI and PPI data becoming especially important ahead of the Federal Reserve’s September 15-16 policy meeting. The NYSE also flagged inflation data as the major macroeconomic event for the coming week. 

Overseas markets remained active Monday. Asian technology shares were strong, with Japan’s Nikkei gaining about 2.1% and South Korea’s Kospi surging roughly 4.6%, helped by sharp gains in semiconductor stocks including Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix. European markets were mixed to lower, while U.S. stock-index futures pointed modestly downward during the holiday session. 

AI investment remains another major business theme heading into Tuesday. South Korea and the United States are discussing a potentially enormous Texas energy project designed partly to supply growing electricity demand from AI data centers. Korean media reported a possible investment of more than $20 billion in a 6.3-gigawatt gas-power project, although South Korea’s Industry Ministry cautioned that negotiations remain ongoing and no final agreement has been reached. 

For investors, the first thing to watch Tuesday morning will be oil. A sustained move toward or through $100 Brent could quickly pressure consumer, transportation, industrial and other energy-sensitive stocks while boosting producers.

The second is the 10-year Treasury yield. It finished last week near 4.78% after the strong employment report. Another jump toward 5% would put renewed pressure on technology, housing and other rate-sensitive sectors.

The third is the Federal Reserve. With UBS now forecasting two hikes and other banks also revising their outlooks, every inflation reading between now and the September 16 decision carries greater weight.

Corporate results will also return to focus this week, with Oracle, Adobe, Macy’s and Kroger among companies expected to report, while management presentations at a heavy calendar of investor conferences could provide fresh signals on consumer demand, AI spending and capital investment. 

There may be no opening bell Monday, but the market is hardly standing still.

The setup for Tuesday is increasingly clear: oil near $100, a stronger labor market, rising expectations for another Fed rate hike and investors waiting to see whether Wall Street can absorb all three at once.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved.

Washington is rapidly expanding production of its most important missile interceptors as wars in Europe and the Middle East expose how quickly even the world’s largest defense industrial base can burn through sophisticated munitions.

The United States is moving aggressively to increase production of Patriot PAC-3 and THAAD missile interceptors, using multiyear contracts and major factory expansions to rebuild inventories and prepare for future conflicts.

The Pentagon’s strategy is a major break from the past.

Instead of relying heavily on year-to-year procurement, the government is now giving manufacturers long-term purchase commitments designed to justify billions of dollars in new factories, tooling, workers and supplier capacity.

Lockheed Martin is at the center of the push.

The company has committed to increasing annual production capacity of PAC-3 Missile Segment Enhancement interceptors from roughly 600 to 2,000 per year.

PAC-3 MSE missiles are among the most advanced interceptors used by the Patriot air-defense system, designed to destroy ballistic missiles and other high-speed threats.

Lockheed delivered a record 620 PAC-3 MSE interceptors in 2025, but current demand from the U.S. military and allied countries is far greater.

Washington has already awarded Lockheed a multiyear PAC-3 contract valued at up to $58.62 billion.

The government is making an equally dramatic push on THAAD.

Production capacity for Terminal High Altitude Area Defense interceptors is planned to rise from 96 missiles annually to 400, more than quadrupling current capacity.

A separate seven-year THAAD procurement agreement is worth up to $35 billion.

THAAD is designed to intercept ballistic missiles at high altitude during the final stage of flight and forms an important layer of U.S. and allied missile defense.

The Pentagon also signed new seven-year agreements with Lockheed Martin and General Dynamics Ordnance and Tactical Systems in late August to accelerate production of key missile components used in both THAAD and PAC-3 systems.

The logic is straightforward.

Missile-defense systems only work if enough interceptors are available.

Modern conflicts have shown that large quantities can be consumed extremely quickly.

The United States has supplied significant air-defense munitions to Ukraine while simultaneously deploying and using missile-defense systems in the Middle East.

The continuing confrontation with Iran has intensified those concerns.

President Trump recently acknowledged that American missile inventories have been under pressure while emphasizing that domestic production is being expanded.

The Pentagon is trying to solve a problem that cannot be fixed overnight.

Highly sophisticated missile interceptors depend on specialized rocket motors, guidance electronics, explosives, seekers and other components produced by a relatively small network of defense suppliers.

Expanding final assembly therefore does little if those suppliers cannot also increase production.

That is why current contracts are extending deep into the supply chain.

Lockheed is spending billions to expand or modernize more than 20 facilities across Arkansas, Alabama, Florida, Massachusetts and Texas.

In Troy, Alabama, the company is building an 87,000-square-foot munitions production center that will support THAAD and potentially the Next Generation Interceptor program.

In Camden, Arkansas, the expansion of PAC-3 production is expected to increase employment from roughly 1,200 workers to about 1,850.

What It Means for You

The business story here is bigger than defense spending.

America is rebuilding an industrial capability that took decades to shrink.

For years, the Pentagon bought sophisticated missiles in relatively limited numbers because the expectation was that future wars would be short and precision weapons would not be consumed at extraordinary rates.

Ukraine and the Middle East have challenged that assumption.

A missile that takes months to manufacture can be fired in seconds.

That creates a completely different economic model for the defense industry.

Long-term Pentagon contracts allow manufacturers to invest in factories and suppliers without worrying that government demand will disappear after one budget cycle.

For defense contractors, that means billions of dollars in predictable revenue.

For manufacturers, machine shops, electronics suppliers and workers across the country, it means one of the largest expansions of the U.S. munitions industrial base in decades.

And for Washington, the calculation is increasingly simple:

The United States cannot deter large-scale wars unless it can manufacture weapons faster than it may eventually need to use them.

That is why production of some of America’s most advanced missile interceptors is now being tripled and quadrupled.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SHENZHEN, China — Huawei and Xiaomi unveiled new premium foldable smartphones Monday, sharpening competition with Apple just as the U.S. company prepares for one of the most important product weeks of its year.

Huawei introduced its latest Mate XT2, a twice-folding smartphone priced from roughly $2,980, while Xiaomi launched a new foldable device starting at about $1,540.

The launches matter because Chinese smartphone makers are no longer competing only on price.

They are increasingly trying to lead on design, hardware and advanced features — especially in premium devices that directly challenge the most profitable part of Apple’s business.

Huawei’s new phone expands on its unusual tri-fold design, which opens into a much larger tablet-like screen while still folding down into a handheld device.

Xiaomi, meanwhile, is pushing its own premium foldable lineup as it seeks to move further beyond the lower-cost segment where Chinese brands first built their global market share.

The timing is significant.

Apple is entering its annual fall product cycle while Chinese manufacturers are trying to capture more attention in the world’s largest smartphone market.

China has become one of Apple’s most difficult regions.

Local competitors have improved rapidly, especially in cameras, battery technology, artificial-intelligence features and foldable designs.

Huawei’s comeback has been particularly important.

The company was heavily constrained by U.S. export restrictions that cut its access to advanced Western semiconductor technology.

But Huawei has increasingly rebuilt its smartphone business around domestically developed chips and Chinese suppliers.

That has turned the company into something more than a consumer-electronics competitor.

It has become a symbol of China’s effort to reduce dependence on American technology.

Xiaomi is following a similar broader trend by increasing the amount of proprietary hardware and software inside its devices.

That puts pressure on Apple from two directions.

First, Chinese brands are offering features — such as advanced folding screens — that Apple currently does not sell.

Second, they are becoming less dependent on the same foreign technology ecosystem Apple and other Western companies use.

The commercial implications are significant.

Premium smartphones carry some of the highest profit margins in consumer electronics.

If Huawei, Xiaomi and other Chinese manufacturers continue taking share from Apple in that category, the impact could extend beyond phone sales into app revenue, services, accessories and the broader Apple ecosystem.

Foldable phones are still a relatively small part of the global smartphone market.

But they have become strategically important because they allow manufacturers to differentiate their products in an industry where traditional smartphones increasingly look and function alike.

Huawei’s nearly $3,000 starting price also sends a strong signal.

Chinese brands are no longer trying only to undercut Western competitors.

They increasingly believe consumers will pay luxury-level prices for Chinese technology.

That could be one of the biggest changes happening in the global smartphone market.

For years, Apple competed against Chinese companies primarily on the assumption that it owned the premium end.

Huawei and Xiaomi are increasingly challenging that assumption.

JBizNews Desk | Shenzhen, China

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump is taking aim at the Canadian dollar, declaring the long-standing difference between the two countries’ currencies unacceptable as Washington and Ottawa move deeper into an escalating trade confrontation.

President Donald Trump opened a new front in the U.S.-Canada economic dispute Sunday, criticizing the value of Canada’s currency relative to the U.S. dollar and signaling that exchange rates could become another issue in already-fractured trade negotiations.

“Canada’s Dollar imbalance with the U.S. is unacceptable,” Trump wrote Sunday, adding that the situation had existed for years but would no longer be tolerated.

Trump did not announce a specific currency action or explain what exchange rate he believes would be appropriate.

But the statement immediately raises the possibility that Washington could begin pressing Ottawa over the Canadian dollar as part of broader trade negotiations.

The Canadian dollar recently traded around C$1.38 for one U.S. dollar, meaning one Canadian dollar buys roughly 72 U.S. cents.

That difference itself is not unusual.

Currencies trade at different nominal values for many reasons, including interest rates, inflation expectations, economic growth, commodity prices and investor demand.

What matters economically is whether a government is deliberately keeping its currency artificially weak to make exports cheaper.

Trump’s remarks suggest the administration may increasingly view Canada’s exchange rate through the same lens it has used when criticizing trade imbalances with other countries.

The comments arrive at an especially sensitive moment.

U.S.-Canada trade negotiations recently broke down after Ottawa rejected American demands it considered unacceptable.

The United States has already imposed 50% tariffs on tens of billions of dollars of Canadian goods, while Canada is preparing to retaliate with its own tariffs beginning September 8.

Ottawa says its countermeasures will cover C$27.6 billion of U.S. imports, with tariffs ranging from 15% to 50%.

Products affected include steel, dairy goods, appliances, agricultural equipment, pulp and paper, plastics and electronics.

The currency dispute could make finding a compromise even harder.

Canada sends roughly two-thirds of its exports to the United States, making the U.S. market enormously important to Canadian manufacturers, energy companies and agricultural producers.

A weaker Canadian dollar can help exporters because their goods become cheaper for American buyers.

But it also makes U.S. products more expensive for Canadians and raises the cost of imported equipment and materials.

The latest Canadian trade numbers already show the pressure building.

Canada’s merchandise trade surplus fell sharply to C$769 million in July from C$4.2 billion in June, while exports to the United States dropped 6.6%.

The Canadian dollar has also been under pressure because of the escalating trade dispute.

Foreign-exchange strategists surveyed recently expect the currency to remain relatively weak in the near term, although many believe it could strengthen if tensions with Washington eventually ease.

What It Means for You

This could become much bigger than a disagreement over whether one dollar is worth more than another.

If the White House formally makes the Canadian dollar part of trade negotiations, Washington could begin demanding policies intended to strengthen Canada’s currency or compensate American companies for what it considers an exchange-rate disadvantage.

That could affect autos, steel, lumber, agriculture, energy and manufacturing — industries where U.S. and Canadian supply chains are deeply interconnected.

For American consumers, the risk is straightforward.

More tariffs or currency-related trade restrictions can increase the cost of Canadian products entering the United States.

For Canadian companies, a stronger currency could make exports less competitive just as they are already dealing with sharply higher U.S. tariffs.

And for investors, Trump’s statement introduces another variable into one of the world’s largest trading relationships.

The U.S.-Canada dispute began with tariffs.

It expanded into autos, banking and government procurement.

Now the Canadian dollar itself is on the table.

That means the economic fight between America and its largest northern trading partner may be entering a new — and potentially more complicated — phase.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Jaguar Land Rover has opened a major voluntary redundancy program as Britain’s largest automaker races to cut £1.7 billion in costs while tariffs, weaker sales and rising competition pressure its luxury vehicle business.

Jaguar Land Rover is preparing for one of its largest workforce reductions in years as the Tata Motors-owned automaker restructures its operations to withstand a more difficult global auto market.

The company has formally opened a voluntary redundancy program for salaried and management employees, confirming that workers and unions have been informed.

British reports say as many as 4,000 jobs could ultimately be affected, although JLR has not confirmed a specific number.

The restructuring is part of a broader plan to save approximately £1.7 billion over the next two years and lower the number of vehicles JLR needs to sell annually to break even to around 300,000 units.

That is a significant strategic shift for one of the world’s best-known luxury automakers.

JLR employs roughly 33,000 people in Britain and operates major facilities in Solihull, Wolverhampton and Halewood.

Its brands include Range Rover, Defender, Discovery and Jaguar.

The company has been hit by several problems at the same time.

Revenue for the quarter ended June 30 fell nearly 10% from a year earlier to approximately £6 billion.

Profit after tax dropped to £66 million, compared with £248 million in the same period a year earlier.

Free cash flow was negative by nearly £1 billion during the quarter.

The company has also faced manufacturing disruptions, including a fire at a supplier facility that temporarily affected production.

And JLR is still dealing with the financial consequences of last year’s major cyberattack, which shut down production across its British factories for weeks.

But one of the biggest pressures now comes from international trade.

North America is one of JLR’s most important markets, particularly for expensive Range Rover and Defender models.

Higher U.S. tariffs on imported vehicles have made those sales more costly at exactly the moment JLR says it wants to dramatically expand its American business.

At the same time, Chinese automakers are becoming increasingly aggressive competitors in both Europe and international markets.

Brands that barely registered with European consumers several years ago are now selling sophisticated electric and hybrid vehicles at significantly lower prices.

JLR therefore faces an uncomfortable equation:

It needs to continue spending heavily on new electric vehicles and technology while simultaneously cutting the cost of operating the existing company.

The automaker has committed to approximately £18 billion of investment over five years as it develops its next generation of vehicles.

That includes the long-awaited electric Range Rover and a completely redesigned electric Jaguar brand.

JLR is also exploring a partnership with Stellantis to develop additional Defender products specifically for the American market.

What It Means for You

This is another warning that the global auto industry is entering a major restructuring.

Car companies are being squeezed from several directions at once.

They are spending billions developing electric vehicles.

Chinese competitors are gaining market share.

Tariffs are making international manufacturing more expensive.

And consumers remain sensitive to high vehicle prices and financing costs.

Luxury manufacturers are not immune.

JLR’s strategy shows how companies are responding:

Cut the cost base now so they can afford to invest in the vehicles they believe will determine who survives later.

The important number is not simply the reported 4,000 potential job losses.

It is 300,000 vehicles.

JLR wants to redesign its business so it can break even selling roughly that many vehicles annually — giving the company considerably more protection if global sales weaken.

For workers, suppliers and communities tied to Britain’s auto industry, that efficiency push comes with a painful cost.

For the broader industry, it sends a clear message:

Even iconic brands such as Range Rover and Jaguar are being forced to become leaner as tariffs, technology and Chinese competition rewrite the economics of building cars.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Trump administration is moving to make federal tax-exempt status contingent on a stricter race-neutral standard across private schools, colleges, universities and other educational institutions.

The Treasury Department and Internal Revenue Service have proposed new regulations that would deny 501(c)(3) federal tax-exempt status to private educational institutions that discriminate on the basis of race, color, or national or ethnic origin.

The proposal, announced September 3, could affect as many as 18,000 private educational institutions nationwide, according to Treasury and the IRS.

The rule would apply broadly.

It would cover admissions, scholarships, loans, athletics, educational policies and every other school-administered or school-supported program.

That means schools could not use race as a factor to favor or disadvantage students in those areas while continuing to receive the financial benefits associated with federal tax-exempt status.

The proposal applies to private primary and secondary schools as well as colleges, universities, professional schools and trade schools.

The administration says the rule is intended to create one uniform nondiscrimination standard following recent Supreme Court decisions restricting the use of race in education.

The proposal would also remove older IRS guidance that allowed certain race-conscious preferences in admissions, facilities, programs, scholarships and financial assistance.

Treasury says those provisions are no longer compatible with the legal standard established by the courts.

The stakes for affected institutions are significant.

Tax-exempt status allows qualifying nonprofit schools to avoid federal income taxes and can also make donations to those institutions tax deductible for donors.

Losing that status could therefore affect both an institution’s operating costs and its fundraising.

But the proposed regulations do not prohibit schools from trying to help disadvantaged students.

Institutions could continue using race-neutral criteria including family income, geographic location, first-generation status, individual hardship, military-family status or academic achievement.

Religious schools would also remain permitted to select students based on genuine religious affiliation or membership where allowed under existing federal law.

The proposal is not yet final.

If adopted, the regulations would apply to taxable years beginning on or after May 31, 2027, giving schools time to review their policies and make changes before enforcement begins.

What It Means for You

This is much larger than another education-policy fight.

It puts one of the most valuable financial benefits available to nonprofit institutions directly on the line.

A school could continue operating with policies the federal government considers discriminatory.

But under the proposed rule, taxpayers would no longer be required to subsidize those policies through federal tax exemptions.

That changes the economic calculation.

For school boards, universities and nonprofit leaders, admissions and scholarship policies would no longer carry only legal or political risk.

They could carry a direct financial consequence.

And for donors, the issue matters as well because an institution’s tax status can determine whether contributions remain deductible.

The administration is effectively telling thousands of private educational institutions:

You may choose your policies.

But federal tax benefits will come with a race-neutral standard.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Helsinki joins Washington and Stockholm in ending direct support for the U.N. agency — extending a shift that gained force at the first post-Oct. 7 congressional hearing on UNRWA, where testimony from Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce founder Duvi Honig entered the permanent record.

A third Western government has decided it can help Palestinians without paying UNRWA.

Finland will stop financing the U.N. Relief and Works Agency for Palestine Refugees when its current agreement expires at the end of 2026, Foreign Trade and Development Minister Ville Tavio announced on Aug. 27, ending contributions of €5 million a year and declining to negotiate a replacement. Tavio said Finnish aid to Palestinian territories will not fall, only move to other channels such as the World Food Programme, with the U.N.‘s new Palestine reconstruction fund under consideration. Israel’s Foreign Ministry welcomed the move, calling the agency a hotbed of terrorism.

Washington moved first and hardest. The United States suspended funding in January 2024 after allegations that agency staff took part in the Oct. 7 attacks, Congress then barred further money, and President Trump directed federal agencies in February 2025 to make no contribution, grant or payment. Sweden ended core support that December while continuing Gaza aid through other bodies. Finland had suspended its own payments in January 2024, then restored them two months later after reviewing the agency’s risk controls. This time it is not renewing at all.

American investigators, meanwhile, have gone from allegations to names. The USAID Office of Inspector General, a law enforcement body separate from the shuttered aid agency, has referred 108 current or former UNRWA employees to the State Department for suspension or exclusion from U.S.-funded work, and roughly 1,500 staff remain under investigation for ties to terrorist organizations in Gaza. Three more were recently proposed for debarment, among them a former UNRWA teacher accused of receiving and holding civilian hostages beginning on Oct. 7.

The case against the agency is not only about individuals. Those referred include school principals, teachers, security personnel, counselors and medical staff — a deputy principal serving as a Hamas company commander, a teacher with sniper training, another who tracked explosive device assignments, and a principal assigned to a Hamas weapons manufacturing unit whose school sat above three anti-tank positions and a tunnel shaft. A 2023 review by UN Watch and Impact-SE identified 133 UNRWA educators promoting hate and violence, plus 82 staff across 30 schools producing hateful material for students. Underpinning it all is a structural fact laid out in congressional testimony: the United Nations does not designate Hamas or Hezbollah as terrorist organizations, so U.N. resources can and regularly do reach their members. A humanitarian body on paper had become a payroll, a classroom system and, in places, physical cover for a terror organization.

That argument was first pressed in a hearing room. On Nov. 8, 2023, one month after the attacks, Rep. Chris Smith convened a hearing on UNRWA’s schools, antisemitism and American funding. Smith entered testimony submitted by Duvi Honig, founder and CEO of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, into the permanent congressional record. Honig worked with Smith before the hearing on its direction and afterward on its takeaways. Smith went on to chair three more UNRWA hearings within twelve months and advanced the Stop Support for UNRWA Act, which cleared the Foreign Affairs Committee in February 2024.

“I’m proud and honored to have helped build this foundation from the beginning — working with Congressman Chris Smith before that historic hearing, helping shape its direction, testifying and putting our position into the permanent congressional record, and then working through the takeaways afterward as we pushed this from exposure toward action,” Honig said.

“The principle was clear from day one: taxpayer dollars intended to help innocent people should never be allowed to support terror, radicalization or institutions exploited under the disguise of humanitarian assistance. Protecting Jewish lives and protecting Palestinian lives both require making sure humanitarian funding reaches the people who need it.”

Honig credited Smith directly. “He is second to none on Capitol Hill in fighting antisemitism, hate and injustice, and he has repeatedly been willing to stand at the forefront when others would rather look away.”

For seven decades UNRWA rested on one assumption: that funding Palestinians and funding the agency were the same act. Three governments have now separated them. The United States alone sent the agency $344 million in 2022. It sends nothing today.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Tyson Foods has lowered its profit outlook for the second time in a month as America’s shrinking cattle supply drives up costs, squeezes meatpackers and keeps beef prices elevated for consumers.

Tyson Foods is warning that conditions in the U.S. beef business have become even tougher than it expected only weeks ago.

The company cut its fiscal 2026 adjusted operating-income forecast to between $1.85 billion and $2.05 billion, down from the $2.1 billion to $2.3 billion range it projected in August.

The problem is cattle.

America is dealing with one of its tightest cattle supplies in generations, following years of drought, herd reductions and disruptions to livestock imports from Mexico.

That shortage has pushed cattle prices sharply higher and left meatpackers fighting over a smaller pool of animals.

For Tyson, the math has become painful.

The company is paying more for cattle while having limited ability to fully pass those costs through to consumers, particularly as shoppers remain cautious about food prices and increasingly look for cheaper alternatives.

Tyson had already warned in August that its beef division could lose between $500 million and $650 million this fiscal year.

The company has since moved aggressively to shrink and restructure its beef network.

Tyson announced plans to end operations at its Joslin, Illinois beef facility and its Eagle Mountain, Utah case-ready facility.

It is also pursuing a sale of its beef facility in Pasco, Washington.

The company plans to concentrate more of its beef operations around larger facilities in Dakota City, Nebraska; Holcomb, Kansas; and Amarillo, Texas.

Tyson says those changes are necessary because the cattle shortage could persist.

Recent federal cattle data showed limited rebuilding of the U.S. herd, meaning the supply of animals available for slaughter may remain constrained even after prices rise enough to encourage ranchers to expand.

That rebuilding process takes time.

A rancher cannot simply produce more cattle next quarter.

Cows must be retained for breeding, calves must be born, and those animals then need months or years before they become part of the commercial beef supply.

That is why today’s cattle shortage can continue affecting supermarket prices long after the original drought or supply disruption ends.

The federal government is now trying to intervene.

President Trump recently expanded access to lower-tariff imported beef in an effort to reduce consumer prices, while the administration has also announced support for smaller meat processors and measures intended to help ranchers rebuild domestic production.

But those policies create their own tension.

More imported beef can help consumers in the short term.

It can also put additional pressure on American cattle producers at exactly the moment Washington wants them to invest in rebuilding the herd.

What It Means for You

This is one of those business stories that starts on a ranch and ends at the supermarket checkout.

When cattle supplies fall, ranchers can receive higher prices for animals.

But meatpackers such as Tyson must pay those higher prices before turning the cattle into steaks, roasts and ground beef.

If processors cannot raise retail prices enough to recover those costs, their margins collapse.

That is exactly what is happening now.

For consumers, the shortage means beef prices can remain elevated even while other parts of food inflation cool.

For restaurants, supermarkets and food distributors, it means continued pressure on one of their most important protein categories.

And for investors, Tyson’s latest warning shows that even one of America’s largest food companies cannot easily escape the economics of a 75-year-low cattle supply.

The beef shortage is no longer simply an agricultural problem.

It has become a consumer-price, corporate-profit and national food-supply problem — and Tyson is now paying the price.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TRENTON, N.J. — New Jersey received a significant credit upgrade after Kroll Bond Rating Agency raised the state’s general obligation bond rating to AA- from A+, citing stronger pension funding, reduced long-term liabilities and improved budget management.

The upgrade is the highest rating KBRA has given New Jersey since it began rating the state in 2015 and marks the first credit-rating increase during Gov. Mikie Sherrill’s administration.

KBRA said New Jersey has built an increasingly established record of making its full actuarially required pension payments while preserving substantial financial flexibility.

The fiscal 2027 budget provides for a full pension contribution for the sixth consecutive year and projects an undesignated year-end fund balance equal to about 10% of appropriations.

The rating agency also pointed to progress in reducing long-term liabilities and better management of reserves accumulated in the years following the pandemic.

For taxpayers, the upgrade has a direct financial significance.

Higher credit ratings generally allow governments to borrow at lower interest rates because bond investors view the debt as carrying less risk. For a state that finances major transportation, infrastructure and capital projects, even modest reductions in borrowing costs can translate into substantial long-term savings.

KBRA also upgraded several state-backed annual appropriation bonds to A+ from A, including debt connected to the New Jersey Transportation Trust Fund Authority, New Jersey Economic Development Authority and New Jersey Educational Facilities Authority.

The outlook on the rated obligations is stable.

The upgrade now puts KBRA’s rating for New Jersey one notch above the state’s current A+ ratings from S&P and Fitch and broadly in line with Moody’s Aa3 rating.

New Jersey’s fiscal position has improved considerably from the period when pension underfunding, large liabilities and repeated credit downgrades weighed heavily on the state.

The Sept. 2 KBRA action represents the state’s 10th consecutive credit-rating upgrade across the four major rating agencies since New Jersey was downgraded during the COVID-19 pandemic, according to the state Treasury Department.

Gov. Sherrill said the upgrade reflects steps taken in the fiscal 2027 budget, including reducing the state’s structural deficit by more than half, maintaining roughly a $6 billion surplus and making the full pension payment.

The stronger rating also carries a broader business message.

Credit ratings are closely watched by investors because they provide an independent assessment of a government’s financial strength and its ability to meet long-term obligations. A stronger state balance sheet can help support infrastructure investment while improving New Jersey’s overall financial credibility with businesses and capital markets.

KBRA nevertheless said challenges remain, including New Jersey’s still-high unfunded pension and other post-employment benefit liabilities and the need to transition carefully away from extraordinary reserves accumulated following the pandemic.

The upgrade therefore represents substantial progress rather than the end of New Jersey’s fiscal challenges.

For taxpayers and businesses, however, the direction is favorable: New Jersey is borrowing from a stronger financial position, carrying a better credit rating and potentially paying less to finance the investments needed to support future economic growth.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, redistribution, republication or use of this content, in whole or in part, without the express written permission of JBizNews is prohibited.

SoundHound AI has completed its acquisition of LivePerson, combining voice AI, digital messaging and enterprise customer-service technology into a larger platform serving some of the world’s biggest companies.

SoundHound AI has officially closed its acquisition of LivePerson, completing a deal designed to give the company a much larger position in the rapidly growing market for AI-powered customer service.

The transaction closed September 4.

The combination brings together SoundHound’s voice and agentic AI technology with LivePerson’s digital messaging platform, which has long been used by major enterprises to communicate with customers online.

The combined customer base includes 25 of the Fortune 100, according to SoundHound.

The company also says the acquisition expands its intellectual-property portfolio to more than 750 patents.

That gives SoundHound a broader platform across both voice and text.

Until now, much of SoundHound’s public profile has come from voice-based AI systems used in restaurants, automobiles and other customer-facing environments.

LivePerson adds another major channel.

Its technology powers large volumes of customer conversations through messaging platforms, allowing companies to handle service inquiries, sales interactions and support requests digitally.

SoundHound plans to integrate LivePerson’s technology into OASYS, its self-learning agentic AI platform.

The goal is to allow businesses to create AI agents that can interact with customers across multiple channels instead of requiring separate systems for phone calls, digital chat and messaging.

The financial opportunity is also significant.

When SoundHound announced the acquisition earlier this year, it said the combined existing customer base represented a potential $500 million revenue opportunity.

The company also projected 2027 revenue of at least $350 million to $400 million, including at least $100 million in potential contribution from LivePerson’s existing customers.

SoundHound originally agreed to acquire LivePerson for an equity value of approximately $43 million.

But the economics of the transaction were more complicated than the headline purchase price.

LivePerson was expected to bring approximately $74 million in cash at closing, while SoundHound planned to retire the company’s remaining discounted debt.

SoundHound said the transaction implied an enterprise value of approximately $250 million.

With the acquisition now complete, SoundHound also named John Collins chief financial officer of the combined company.

What It Means for You

The bigger story is how quickly AI is moving into ordinary customer service.

Companies are no longer experimenting only with chatbots that answer simple questions.

They are increasingly deploying AI agents designed to handle entire conversations, place orders, solve problems, manage appointments and move customers through transactions.

SoundHound wants to provide that technology whether the customer is speaking on the phone or typing a message.

That is why LivePerson matters.

It gives SoundHound access to an established enterprise messaging network and hundreds of major corporate customers that can potentially be offered SoundHound’s voice and agentic AI products.

The opportunity is straightforward:

Instead of selling one AI product to one department, SoundHound is trying to become the platform businesses use for customer conversations across every channel.

For companies spending heavily to reduce call-center costs and automate customer interactions, that market could become enormous.

And SoundHound just substantially increased the number of doors it can knock on.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited

NEWARK, N.J. — United Airlines is set to restore one of the most important U.S.–Israel air links Tuesday, September 8, with two daily nonstop flights from Newark Liberty International Airport to Tel Aviv, bringing substantial new capacity back to the market just ahead of the Jewish High Holiday travel season.

The restart remained on the published schedule Monday, September 7, with both United flights showing service beginning September 8.

United Flight 84 is scheduled to depart Newark at 3:25 p.m. and arrive at Tel Aviv’s Ben Gurion Airport at 8:55 a.m. the following morning. The flight is scheduled on a Boeing 787-10 Dreamliner.

United Flight 90 is scheduled to leave Newark at 10:50 p.m., arriving in Tel Aviv at 4:20 p.m. the following day.

That means United is not returning cautiously with a limited or occasional schedule. It is moving directly back to two flights a day from Newark, restoring a major portion of the airline capacity that travelers between the United States and Israel lost during the latest Middle East disruption.

The timing matters.

September is one of the most important travel periods of the year for the Orthodox Jewish community and the broader U.S.–Israel market, as thousands of travelers prepare to head to Israel for Rosh Hashanah, Yom Kippur and Sukkot.

United’s Newark hub is particularly important for that traffic because passengers do not have to originate in the New York area. Travelers from cities across the United States can connect through Newark and continue directly to Tel Aviv on the same airline.

For New Jersey, New York and the large Jewish communities surrounding Newark, the restoration is even more significant. Newark has historically been one of the principal gateways between the United States and Israel, and United has long been one of the largest U.S. carriers serving the route.

The airline’s return also represents another sign that American carriers are gradually rebuilding their Israel networks after months of instability.

Delta Air Lines resumed its own New York-JFK to Tel Aviv service on September 6, meaning two of the largest U.S. airlines are again competing for nonstop New York-area traffic to Israel.

The difference is capacity: United’s planned Newark schedule provides two daily flights, while Delta restarted with one daily JFK flight.

United’s return therefore adds hundreds of seats each day in each direction and gives travelers considerably more flexibility in departure times, connections and premium-cabin availability.

The afternoon Flight 84 departure is particularly useful for passengers connecting into Newark from other U.S. cities earlier in the day, while Flight 90 provides a late-evening option that allows travelers to complete much of a normal workday before heading to the airport.

The Boeing 787-10 scheduled for Flight 84 is among the largest aircraft in United’s Dreamliner fleet. Published configuration information shows approximately 318 seats, including business class, premium economy and economy cabins.

The return also carries broader importance for airfare competition.

When major U.S. carriers suspend Israel flights, the reduction in available seats can place significant pressure on fares, particularly during periods of strong demand. Restoring several hundred United seats every day gives travelers another major option and reduces reliance on Israeli carriers and connecting itineraries through Europe.

For businesses, the route is also more than a leisure or family-travel connection.

New York and New Jersey maintain deep commercial relationships with Israel in technology, finance, health care, real estate, venture capital and professional services. The ability to travel nonstop between the New York metropolitan area and Tel Aviv is therefore an important piece of business infrastructure.

United has repeatedly had to adjust its Israel operation since October 2023 as security conditions changed. Airlines have suspended, resumed and again suspended service as conflict spread across the region and airspace conditions shifted.

That history is why travelers have been watching this particular restart closely.

As of Monday, however, the September 8 restart remained intact in published schedules. UA84 is listed beginning September 8 at 3:25 p.m., while UA90 is likewise scheduled to begin September 8 with its 10:50 p.m. Newark departure.

There has been no newly announced postponement of those flights.

The next important test comes Tuesday afternoon, when UA84 is scheduled to push back from Newark and begin the roughly 10½-hour journey to Ben Gurion.

If both flights operate as planned, September 8 will mark the return of a major piece of the U.S.–Israel aviation network — and, for thousands of travelers preparing for the coming holiday season, a return of something that has been increasingly difficult to count on: two daily United departures from Newark directly to Israel.

JBizNews Desk | Newark, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Wall Street enters the new week with two inflation reports carrying unusual weight as the Federal Reserve prepares to decide interest rates just days later.

The next major test for markets is no longer earnings.

It is inflation.

The U.S. government will release the August Producer Price Index on Thursday, September 10, followed by the Consumer Price Index on Friday, September 11, both at 8:30 a.m. ET.

Those numbers will arrive only days before the Federal Reserve begins its next two-day policy meeting on September 15–16.

That timing makes this week especially important.

The Fed will have little distance between the inflation data and its rate decision, meaning any meaningful surprise in prices could quickly reshape expectations for monetary policy.

The latest official CPI data showed that consumer prices rose 0.1% in July and were up 3.4% from a year earlier. Core inflation, which excludes food and energy, rose 0.2% for the month and 2.5% over the year.

Now the question is whether August shows inflation continuing to cool — or beginning to reaccelerate.

That question has become more complicated because energy prices have moved sharply higher.

Oil prices have climbed as geopolitical tension intensifies, raising the risk that higher transportation and fuel costs eventually work their way back through the broader economy.

At the same time, the labor market remains an important part of the Fed’s calculation.

Friday’s August employment report gave policymakers another major piece of evidence on the strength of the economy before they vote.

The Fed’s September meeting is also one of the meetings accompanied by updated economic projections, making it an important opportunity for policymakers to show how their expectations for inflation, growth and interest rates have changed.

What It Means for You

This week could determine whether businesses and consumers get closer to interest-rate relief — or have to prepare for borrowing costs to remain higher for longer.

A softer inflation report would give the Fed more room to move toward lower rates.

A hotter report would do the opposite.

That matters directly for mortgages, business loans, credit cards, commercial real estate financing and corporate borrowing.

It also matters for stocks.

Markets have spent much of the year trying to determine when the Federal Reserve will become comfortable enough with inflation to ease monetary policy.

This week could provide the clearest answer yet.

The calendar is simple:

Thursday: wholesale inflation.Friday: consumer inflation.September 16: the Federal Reserve decision.

For Wall Street and Main Street alike, those three dates could set the direction for interest rates heading into the fall.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The artificial intelligence boom is moving beyond chips. Flex is spending $4.4 billion to buy a company that helps deliver the enormous amounts of electricity next-generation AI data centers need to operate.

Flex has agreed to acquire EPC Power for $4.4 billion, making a major bet that one of the next critical constraints on artificial intelligence will be the infrastructure required to power increasingly dense data centers.

The transaction, announced September 3, is expected to close in the fourth quarter of 2026, subject to regulatory approvals and customary closing conditions.

EPC Power specializes in sophisticated power-conversion systems used by data centers and electric grids.

That may sound technical, but the business problem it addresses is becoming enormous.

AI servers packed with increasingly powerful GPUs consume extraordinary amounts of electricity. As computing racks become more powerful, data centers must move far more energy through their facilities without losing efficiency, overheating equipment or destabilizing the power supply.

Flex is betting that companies capable of solving that problem will become increasingly valuable.

EPC Power is developing systems for the emerging 800-volt data-center architecture, which is designed to move electricity more efficiently into extremely high-density AI computing systems.

Its technology includes rectifiers, DC-to-DC power conversion and grid-forming equipment that can help manage power from the utility grid, backup generation and other energy sources.

The company already has more than 15 gigawatts of equipment deployed across 62 countries.

Flex says EPC Power is expected to generate approximately $800 million in revenue during 2026, with organic revenue growth of roughly 40% projected for 2027.

Its U.S. manufacturing capacity is expected to surpass 30 gigawatts annually in 2027.

That growth explains why Flex is willing to pay billions.

The company already manufactures equipment across the computing, power and cooling infrastructure surrounding data centers. Adding EPC Power allows Flex to control another critical piece of the AI infrastructure stack.

Flex also plans to separate its Cloud and Power Infrastructure business into an independent publicly traded company in the first quarter of 2027.

That would effectively create a standalone company built around one of the fastest-growing areas of the global economy: supplying the physical infrastructure behind artificial intelligence.

What It Means for You

For the past several years, the AI investment story has been dominated by chips.

Now the money is spreading.

Data centers need transformers.

They need substations.

They need cooling systems.

They need backup power.

They need transmission capacity.

And increasingly, they need advanced systems capable of converting and controlling huge amounts of electricity efficiently.

That is why a power-conversion company can suddenly command a $4.4 billion valuation.

The next phase of the AI boom may not be determined solely by who can manufacture the fastest processor.

It may be determined by who can deliver enough electricity to keep those processors running.

Flex is putting $4.4 billion behind that bet.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved.

One of the largest utility mergers in U.S. history has moved a major step closer to completion as shareholders of both NextEra Energy and Dominion Energy approved the $66.8 billion combination.

Shareholders of NextEra Energy and Dominion Energy voted Thursday, September 3, to approve their proposed $66.8 billion merger, clearing one of the biggest corporate hurdles standing between the two utilities and the creation of a massive new U.S. power company.

The deal was first announced in May and is structured as an all-stock transaction.

If regulators approve it, the combined company would become the world’s largest regulated electric utility business by market capitalization, according to NextEra, and would serve approximately 10 million customer accounts across Florida, Virginia, North Carolina and South Carolina.

The merger is arriving at a particularly important moment for the U.S. power industry.

Electricity demand is accelerating after years of relatively slow growth, driven heavily by the enormous power requirements of artificial intelligence data centers, advanced manufacturing and broader electrification.

Virginia sits directly at the center of that shift.

Dominion operates in a state that contains one of the largest concentrations of data centers in the world, making its electric grid increasingly important to the expansion of the AI industry.

NextEra, meanwhile, is already one of America’s largest developers and operators of power generation, transmission and renewable-energy infrastructure.

Combining the two would give the company an unusually large footprint across some of the fastest-growing electricity markets in the country.

The companies say greater scale should help them finance and build power plants, transmission systems and other infrastructure more efficiently as electricity demand rises.

They have also proposed $2.25 billion in shareholder-funded customer bill credits in Virginia, North Carolina and South Carolina and pledged that merger-related costs would not be passed along to customers.

But shareholder approval does not mean the deal is finished.

The merger still faces extensive federal and state regulatory reviews, including scrutiny over electricity rates, competition, employment and future investment.

Regulators will ultimately decide whether the benefits promised by the companies outweigh concerns about allowing two already-large utilities to become substantially larger.

What It Means for You

This deal is about much more than two electric companies becoming one.

It is another sign that electricity itself is becoming one of the most valuable commodities of the AI economy.

Technology companies can buy more chips and build more data centers, but none of that computing power works without enormous amounts of reliable electricity.

That is forcing utilities to spend billions on new generating capacity, transmission lines, substations and grid infrastructure.

It is also making utilities increasingly valuable strategic assets.

If the NextEra-Dominion merger receives final approval, the combined company would have enormous scale to finance those investments — and an unusually strong position in states experiencing some of America’s fastest-growing power demand.

For investors, businesses and consumers, the regulatory fight now becomes the story.

Shareholders have said yes.

Now federal and state regulators must decide whether creating a $66.8 billion power giant will help America meet its rapidly growing electricity needs without pushing costs higher for the customers who ultimately pay for the grid.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

School districts across the country continue to struggle to recruit and retain enough school bus drivers, forcing them to compete with other employers for a limited pool of qualified workers despite higher wages.

School bus driver employment remained 9.5% below 2019 levels in August 2025, even as inflation-adjusted hourly wages rose 4.2% over the previous year, according to an Economic Policy Institute analysis. The employment figures are based on 12-month rolling averages of federal survey data.

“The wages are simply too low,” Wething told FOX Business, identifying pay as the primary reason the workforce has not returned to pre-pandemic levels.

The job can also present scheduling challenges. School bus drivers often work split shifts, with an early-morning route followed by several hours off before an afternoon route, making the position less attractive than trucking, delivery, transit or other jobs offering higher pay or more predictable hours.

AI INFRASTRUCTURE INVESTMENT PROJECTED TO TOP $31T BY 2050

Wething also cautioned against assuming that people classified as outside the labor force are available to fill those positions. The category can include retirees, students, caregivers and people with disabilities.

The East Greenbush Central School District in New York experienced those staffing pressures firsthand during the 2025-2026 school year.

When Superintendent Kurtis Kotes took over in July 2025, the district was short nearly 14 bus runs. Mechanics, dispatchers and other employees with the required licenses had to help cover routes.

“We had to consolidate runs,” Kotes told FOX Business. “It meant students were late being picked up from home. Sometimes it meant they were late getting back home again, and it would impact instructional time.”

JOB GROWTH REBOUNDED IN AUGUST WITH SOLID GAINS

The district responded with a “bus rodeo” recruitment event that allowed prospective drivers to try operating a school bus with trainers, even if they did not yet have a commercial driver’s license. Kotes said the event resulted in approximately five to eight hires.

East Greenbush pays drivers approximately $28 an hour and offers health benefits, which Kotes said can be an important recruiting and retention tool as the district competes with an Amazon warehouse, other public-sector employers and seasonal work such as snowplowing.

“The issue becomes… health benefits behind that for people that are looking at this as a primary source of income,” he said.

The district also tries to provide drivers with opportunities for additional hours during the middle of the day, including field trips and custodial or cleaning assignments. Some drivers take other part-time jobs to supplement their income.

UBER TO CUT THOUSANDS OF JOBS IN SWEEPING RESTRUCTURING EFFORT

The district has also sought to give administrators a better understanding of the job. Kotes and the district’s interim human resources director obtained their own licenses to support the transportation department and better understand the work.

Kotes spent five weeks training before earning a Class B CDL with school bus and passenger endorsements. His training covered defensive driving, student management, safety procedures, emergency response and vehicle inspections before he completed a road test. He drove his first student route in December 2025.

LOWE’S LAUNCHES MAJOR EFFORT TO HELP CLOSE AMERICA’S SKILLED TRADES GAP

Kotes does not drive a daily route but helps cover sports and after-school runs when needed. He said the district is now in a better staffing position, though competition for workers remains.

Wething said the expiration of federal pandemic-relief funding has put additional pressure on school systems. The funding helped districts hire support staff, including bus drivers, but districts now must maintain transportation services with tighter budgets.

For families, a shortage of drivers can mean late pickups, longer rides, consolidated routes and other transportation disruptions. For districts, filling the gap may require more than higher hourly wages, with benefits, additional hours, training support and retention efforts all playing a role in competing for workers.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Kotes said compensation is only part of the equation, with workplace culture also playing a role in keeping drivers on staff.

“When people feel like they’re valued, they’re going to want to work here,” he said.

This post was originally published here

Beijing is injecting tens of billions of dollars into some of China’s biggest financial institutions, strengthening their balance sheets as the government pushes banks to keep lending and support economic growth.

China is moving roughly $54 billion into major state-owned banks and insurance companies, one of Beijing’s most significant recent efforts to reinforce the financial system and give lenders more room to support the economy.

The capital push announced Sunday centers on three state financial institutions receiving a combined 290 billion yuan, or about $43 billion, while another group of major state-controlled insurers will receive additional capital.

Agricultural Bank of China plans to raise up to 160 billion yuan, approximately $24 billion, through a private placement of shares.

Industrial and Commercial Bank of China, the country’s largest commercial lender by assets, plans to raise another 100 billion yuan, or roughly $15 billion.

The Export-Import Bank of China is set to receive a further 30 billion yuan.

The money is intended to strengthen what regulators call core Tier 1 capital — essentially the highest-quality financial cushion banks maintain to absorb losses and continue lending during periods of economic stress.

China is also putting billions of dollars into its insurance sector.

China Life Insurance is set to receive 35 billion yuan, while China Taiping Insurance will receive 7 billion yuan. Other state-backed insurers are also receiving additional capital through separate transactions.

The broader message from Beijing is clear: China wants its largest financial institutions strong enough to continue providing credit even as parts of the economy remain under pressure.

Loan demand has been uneven, property-sector problems continue to weigh on activity, and Chinese banks have faced pressure on profitability as interest rates remain low.

At the same time, Beijing is asking banks to finance strategic industries, infrastructure, manufacturing and other areas the government views as important to long-term economic growth.

That creates a balancing act.

Banks are expected to lend more aggressively while also protecting themselves against bad loans and maintaining sufficient capital.

The new government money gives them additional room to do both.

China has already been using special government bonds to reinforce its banking system. Earlier government disclosures showed that 500 billion yuan in special treasury bonds had previously been issued to help several major banks replenish core capital.

The latest round extends that strategy to additional financial institutions.

What It Means for You

This is not simply a bank bailout.

It is Beijing using government money to make sure its financial system has enough firepower to keep lending.

That matters globally because Chinese banks finance enormous portions of manufacturing, infrastructure, exports and industrial investment.

More bank capital can translate into more credit for factories, technology projects and Chinese companies competing in global markets.

It also shows that Beijing remains concerned enough about economic conditions to strengthen financial institutions before problems become larger.

For investors and businesses, the most important question is what happens next.

If the additional capital produces stronger lending and investment, it could support Chinese growth and global demand for commodities and industrial goods.

If banks remain reluctant to lend — or companies remain reluctant to borrow — then even tens of billions of dollars in new capital may have limited impact.

Either way, China has just made another major government-backed move to keep its financial system capable of supporting the world’s second-largest economy.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Bending Spoons has completed its acquisition of Airtable, adding one of the best-known workplace software platforms to a portfolio that already includes Evernote, Vimeo, WeTransfer and other global digital brands.

Bending Spoons completed its acquisition of Airtable on September 4, closing an all-cash transaction that valued the company at $1.285 billion on an enterprise-value basis.

Including Airtable’s net cash position, the deal implied an equity value of approximately $2.25 billion when it was announced in August.

The acquisition gives Bending Spoons control of a platform used by more than 500,000 organizations, including 80% of the Fortune 100.

Airtable sits somewhere between a spreadsheet, database and custom-app platform.

Companies use it to organize workflows, manage projects, coordinate product operations, automate processes and increasingly deploy artificial intelligence into internal business systems.

That AI angle is becoming more important.

Airtable has been positioning itself as an AI-native platform where companies can bring together data, business context and AI agents inside customized workflows.

Its annual recurring revenue had reached approximately $480 million as of June, growing more than 20% from a year earlier.

For Bending Spoons, that combination of a well-known brand, recurring subscription revenue and enterprise customers fits directly into its acquisition strategy.

The Milan-based technology company specializes in buying established digital businesses and trying to improve their products, growth and profitability over long periods.

Its portfolio already includes businesses such as AOL, Brightcove, Eventbrite, Evernote, Vimeo, WeTransfer, Remini and StreamYard.

Airtable now joins that group.

The closing also marks Bending Spoons’ first acquisition since listing on Nasdaq on July 1.

Bending Spoons said it plans to invest heavily in Airtable’s product, customer support and sales capabilities rather than treat the acquisition simply as a cost-cutting exercise.

The company will incorporate Airtable into its financial outlook when it next reports results.

Bending Spoons reported $704 million in second-quarter revenue, up 126% from a year earlier, while operating income reached $240 million.

That financial growth has given the company considerably more capacity to continue buying established technology businesses.

What It Means for You

The striking part of this transaction is not only the $1.285 billion purchase price.

It is what Bending Spoons is buying.

Airtable already sits inside the daily operations of hundreds of thousands of businesses.

If Bending Spoons can successfully expand AI tools across that customer base, Airtable could become far more than a workplace database.

It could become an operating layer where companies organize information, automate tasks and deploy AI agents across entire departments.

That is becoming one of the most valuable battlegrounds in enterprise technology.

The first stage of the AI boom centered on who could build the models and chips.

The next stage is increasingly about which software platforms businesses will actually use to put AI to work.

With Airtable now officially under its control, Bending Spoons has made a $1.285 billion bet that it can own a meaningful piece of that market.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Investors are still buying more than one in four single-family homes in the United States — but the biggest buyers are pulling back sharply.

Cotality found that investors accounted for about 27% of U.S. single-family home purchases in the second quarter, down from roughly 28% at the end of the first quarter.

In total, investors purchased about 273,000 homes, roughly 40,000 fewer than a year earlier.

That decline matters because it was not spread evenly across every type of investor.

The biggest pullback came from the largest institutional buyers.

The Mega-Investors Are Retreating

Cotality defines “mega investors” as companies or entities owning at least 1,000 homes.

Those buyers reduced their purchases significantly during the first half of 2026.

Mega investors averaged roughly 4,500 purchases per month, about 40% fewer than during the same period last year.

Large investors owning 100 to 999 properties also reduced purchases, while medium-sized investors cut back as well.

That means the decline is not simply seasonal.

The largest institutional buyers appear to be reconsidering how aggressively they want to expand.

Why They Are Pulling Back

The biggest reason may be Washington.

Federal restrictions on large institutional purchases of single-family homes have changed the calculation for major investors.

Cotality economist Thom Malone said the drop among mega-investors began almost immediately after legislation aimed at restricting institutional ownership was introduced.

The decline was especially sharp among firms that had built large portfolios of rental homes.

That suggests investors may have paused purchases while waiting to understand exactly how the new rules would affect them.

This Is Not Wall Street Leaving Housing

There is an important distinction.

Investors still represented 27% of single-family purchases during the quarter.

That is much higher than the levels seen through much of the 2010s, when investors generally represented less than 20% of purchases.

So institutional and smaller investors remain major participants in the housing market.

They are simply buying less aggressively than they were a year ago.

Why This Could Help Homebuyers

For first-time buyers, the pullback could create an opening.

Institutional buyers often compete for the same lower- and middle-priced homes that individual buyers want.

Large investors can also have advantages.

They may buy with cash.

They can move quickly.

They may not need traditional mortgage approval.

When those buyers step away, individual families face less competition.

That could be especially important in markets where supply remains tight.

A homebuyer who previously lost multiple properties to cash investors may suddenly find more opportunities.

But There Is Another Side

Institutional investors are also major providers of single-family rental housing.

That means fewer investor purchases can eventually mean fewer rental homes.

The same companies that buy existing homes also finance build-to-rent developments, where entire communities are constructed specifically for renters.

If restrictions make large-scale investment less attractive, some of that construction could slow.

That could reduce rental supply and potentially push rents higher.

So a policy designed to improve homeownership opportunities can have an unintended consequence:

More homes may become available for buyers, but fewer may be available for renters.

Why the 40,000 Drop Matters

A 40,000-home annual decline is meaningful.

But the composition matters even more.

Mega-investors accounted for roughly 10,000 of the decline despite representing a relatively small portion of total purchases.

That shows how sharply the biggest players changed behavior.

Cotality says the real test will come in the third quarter.

If institutional buying stays weak, it may indicate a permanent shift.

If purchases rebound, the second quarter may turn out to have been a temporary pause while investors waited for regulatory clarity.

What It Means for Businesses

For real estate brokers, homebuilders, lenders and property managers, the investor pullback changes who the customer may be.

Builders that relied heavily on institutional buyers could see fewer bulk purchases.

Mortgage lenders could see more opportunities with traditional owner-occupants.

Real estate agents may find fewer all-cash investors bidding against families.

Property-management firms tied to large rental portfolios could see slower expansion.

And for investors themselves, the business model is becoming more complicated.

High home prices.

Elevated mortgage rates.

Higher insurance and property-tax costs.

And now tighter regulation.

All of those pressures make it harder to justify aggressive expansion.

The Bigger Housing Shift

For years, the housing debate centered on whether Wall Street was buying too many homes and pricing families out.

Now the market may be entering a different phase.

Large investors are still significant.

But they are no longer expanding at the same pace.

That could give individual buyers more room.

It could also expose how dependent parts of the rental market have become on institutional capital.

For now, the clearest number is this:

Investor purchases fell by roughly 40,000 homes in one year — and the largest buyers were responsible for a disproportionate share of the retreat.

The next few months will show whether Wall Street is truly stepping back from American housing — or simply waiting for the rules to become clearer.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A German space company has successfully carried satellites into orbit from Norway, giving continental Europe a new privately developed launch capability and marking a major breakthrough for its commercial space industry.

Isar Aerospace successfully reached orbit Saturday with its Spectrum rocket, deploying satellites from the company’s dedicated launch complex at Andøya Space in northern Norway.

The mission, called “Onward and Upward,” lifted off at 10:12 p.m. Central European Summer Time on September 5 and successfully delivered its payloads into orbit.

It was only Spectrum’s second flight.

That makes the achievement particularly significant.

Isar Aerospace says it has become the first commercial space company from Europe to successfully deliver satellites into orbit, while Andøya Space described the flight as the first successful satellite launch from mainland Europe.

The rocket carried five CubeSats and one experimental payload, with the mission designed not only to deliver satellites but also to continue qualifying Spectrum’s systems under real operating conditions.

The successful flight comes after a much more difficult first mission.

Spectrum’s first test flight did not reach orbit, making Saturday’s success an important demonstration that the company was able to identify problems, improve the vehicle and move quickly toward a functioning commercial launch system.

For Europe, the business implications are substantial.

European governments, defense agencies and private satellite companies have faced a shortage of domestic launch capacity as demand for small-satellite launches has expanded.

For years, much of the global commercial launch market has been dominated by a relatively small number of companies, particularly SpaceX.

Isar Aerospace is trying to build a European alternative.

The company has already raised more than €500 million in private capital and employs more than 400 people from nearly 50 countries.

Its Spectrum rocket is designed specifically for small and medium-size satellites, allowing customers to purchase dedicated launches or share space with other payloads.

Isar is also building a commercial pipeline beyond Europe.

Earlier this month, the company signed an agreement with Astroscale Japan to launch a future satellite designed to remove space debris. That mission is targeted for 2027 or 2028.

Andøya Space is preparing for much larger launch volumes as well.

The Norwegian spaceport says it ultimately wants the capacity to support up to 30 satellite launches annually within the next several years.

What It Means for You

This is not simply another rocket launch.

It is about who controls access to space.

Satellites now support communications, navigation, defense, agriculture, weather forecasting, financial systems and an increasingly large part of the global digital economy.

Countries that cannot launch their own satellites remain dependent on someone else to get critical infrastructure into orbit.

Europe has been trying to reduce that dependence.

Saturday’s successful Spectrum mission shows that privately funded European companies may finally be able to help fill that gap.

For Isar Aerospace, reaching orbit transforms the company from a promising rocket developer into something far more valuable:

A company that has demonstrated it can actually put customers into space.

And in the rapidly expanding commercial space economy, that distinction can be worth billions.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Global energy markets enter the new week under renewed pressure after the oil alliance declined to add more barrels while fighting around the Strait of Hormuz continues to threaten one of the world’s most important shipping routes.

OPEC+ agreed Sunday to keep its oil-production policy unchanged for October, choosing not to increase supply further as the continuing U.S.-Iran conflict disrupts shipping through the Strait of Hormuz and pushes crude prices toward levels not seen in months.

The decision means the group will maintain October production at September levels after six consecutive months of increases.

The timing is especially important.

Brent crude finished Friday at $96.28 a barrel, gaining approximately 7.6% for the week, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate crude settled at $91.48, up nearly 10% for the week.

Oil markets were already dealing with restricted shipping through the Strait of Hormuz before another round of military escalation over the weekend.

U.S. forces struck three Iranian oil tankers after Iran launched missiles toward American naval vessels, adding another layer of uncertainty before global crude trading resumes.

For businesses, the danger extends far beyond the price of oil itself.

Higher crude prices feed directly into gasoline, diesel, jet fuel, trucking, shipping, agriculture and manufacturing costs. U.S. diesel prices have already climbed to record territory, putting additional pressure on companies that move physical goods.

That makes the OPEC+ decision significant.

Normally, higher prices could encourage major producers to put more barrels onto the market. But the current problem is increasingly about whether oil can physically move through the region rather than simply how much producers are willing to pump.

The Strait of Hormuz is the narrow maritime passage connecting the Persian Gulf with global markets and is one of the most important energy chokepoints in the world. Continued disruption there can affect oil and liquefied natural gas supplies regardless of official production quotas.

OPEC+ also faces its own limitations. Several members have struggled to reach their assigned production targets, meaning a higher quota would not necessarily translate into the same amount of additional oil reaching global buyers.

The seven OPEC+ countries participating in Sunday’s decision include Saudi Arabia, Russia, Iraq, Kuwait, Kazakhstan, Algeria and Oman.

The group had been gradually restoring production that was removed from the market through earlier voluntary cuts. September’s increase of approximately 188,000 barrels per day completed another stage of that process.

But for October, producers are stopping there.

The next OPEC+ meeting is scheduled for October 4, when members are expected to consider November production.

What It Means for You

The number to watch now is $100 oil.

If Brent crude breaks decisively above that level, the consequences could begin appearing throughout the economy — at gas stations, in airline fares, freight bills and ultimately consumer prices.

That creates an additional problem for the Federal Reserve.

The Fed is already confronting stronger-than-expected employment data and renewed concerns that inflation may remain stubborn. Another sustained energy-price increase could make lowering interest rates considerably more difficult — and could even strengthen the argument for keeping monetary policy tighter.

For businesses, the equation entering the new week is becoming increasingly clear:

The Middle East conflict is no longer simply a geopolitical story.

It is becoming an inflation, transportation, interest-rate and economic-growth story — and OPEC+ just decided it will not provide additional oil to soften the impact, at least for now.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

India’s National Stock Exchange has finally received regulatory clearance to move ahead with its long-awaited initial public offering, removing one of the biggest obstacles to what could become one of the country’s largest stock-market listings.

India’s market regulator, SEBI, cleared the IPO Friday after years of delays tied to legal and compliance disputes involving the exchange.

The timing is significant.

India’s Supreme Court also dismissed a major case tied to allegations that some high-frequency traders received unfair access to NSE’s systems, removing another major legal overhang as the exchange prepares to go public.

For investors, the simple story is this:

One of the most important stock exchanges in the world is finally preparing to become a publicly traded company itself.

Why NSE Matters

The National Stock Exchange is not a small regional marketplace.

It operates India’s benchmark Nifty 50 index and dominates the country’s equity-derivatives market.

By the number of derivative contracts traded, NSE is the most active derivatives exchange in the world.

That gives it a powerful position at the center of India’s rapidly expanding capital markets.

Every time investors trade stocks, futures or options through the exchange, NSE can generate revenue through transaction fees, technology services, data and other market infrastructure.

As India’s economy and investor base grow, that activity becomes increasingly valuable.

A Potential $55 Billion Company

NSE has been valued at roughly $55 billion in India’s unlisted share market.

At that valuation, it could rank among India’s ten most valuable publicly traded companies once listed.

That does not mean the IPO itself will raise $55 billion.

The offering is expected primarily to be an offer for sale, meaning existing shareholders will sell some of their stakes to public investors.

The exchange itself would not receive most of the proceeds.

But the listing would finally give investors a transparent public-market price for one of India’s most important financial institutions.

Why It Took So Long

NSE has been trying to go public for nearly a decade.

The major obstacle was regulatory controversy.

Authorities investigated whether certain high-frequency trading firms received faster or preferential access to the exchange’s trading infrastructure through systems involving co-location servers and specialized network connections.

In simple terms, regulators were examining whether some traders effectively got a technological head start over everybody else.

In markets where trades happen in fractions of a second, even tiny speed advantages can be worth enormous amounts of money.

Those allegations created years of legal battles and prevented NSE from moving forward with its listing.

The Legal Cloud Is Finally Lifting

The Supreme Court’s dismissal of the regulatory case removes a major hurdle.

NSE previously agreed in principle to pay roughly $155 million to settle outstanding issues connected to the dispute.

That allows regulators and the exchange to move toward closing a chapter that has hung over NSE since the middle of the last decade.

For investors, regulatory certainty matters almost as much as financial performance.

A company preparing for an IPO needs buyers to understand the risks they are purchasing.

A decade-old dispute involving the integrity of the exchange itself was a particularly serious problem.

Removing it makes NSE much easier to value.

India’s Capital Markets Are Becoming a Global Force

The IPO also reflects something bigger happening in India.

More Indian households are investing in stocks.

Domestic mutual funds are growing.

Foreign investors are increasingly active.

Companies are raising more money through Indian capital markets.

And India has become one of the world’s busiest IPO markets.

That creates a powerful business model for an exchange.

NSE does not have to guess which individual company will succeed.

It earns money from the infrastructure investors use to trade all of them.

The more active India’s markets become, the more valuable that infrastructure can become.

Why the IPO Could Draw Huge Interest

Stock exchanges can be unusually attractive businesses.

They often benefit from:

High margins.

Recurring trading activity.

Market-data revenue.

Technology fees.

Strong network effects.

And significant barriers to new competitors.

Once investors and brokers concentrate on one major exchange, it becomes difficult for a newcomer to recreate that liquidity.

NSE already has that scale.

That is why the IPO could attract substantial interest from domestic and international investors.

What It Means for Businesses

For Indian companies, a stronger and more transparent public exchange can deepen access to capital.

For global investors, the listing provides another way to invest directly in the growth of India’s financial markets rather than choosing individual banks, technology companies or manufacturers.

And for India itself, the IPO marks another step in the maturation of its capital-market system.

The irony is difficult to miss.

For years, millions of companies and investors have relied on NSE to buy and sell shares.

Now investors are preparing to buy shares in the exchange itself.

After nearly a decade of regulatory battles, one of the world’s busiest financial marketplaces is finally moving toward becoming a publicly traded company.

JBizNews Desk | Mumbai

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. Markets — Strong Jobs Report Revives Rate-Hike Fears

Wall Street finished the final trading day before the Labor Day weekend lower after the August employment report came in far stronger than expected, pushing investors back toward the possibility of another Federal Reserve rate increase this month.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 53,407.15, down 278.96 points, or 0.52%. The S&P 500 finished at 7,718.13, down 29.58 points, or 0.38%, while the Nasdaq Composite closed at 26,505.44, down 78.62 points, or 0.30%

The jobs report itself was the morning’s dominant economic event, but its market impact was the bigger story by the close. Expectations for a quarter-point Fed increase at the September meeting jumped to roughly 60% from about 49% Thursday.

Treasury yields moved higher with the 10-year yield around 4.78% and the two-year yield near 4.38%.

That matters directly to business owners and consumers because Treasury yields ultimately feed into mortgages, commercial real-estate financing, business loans, auto loans and corporate borrowing costs. 

Technology helped keep the broader decline contained. Memory-chip and semiconductor shares rallied sharply even as much of the rest of the market weakened.

Housing & Credit — FICO’s Mortgage Dominance Takes a Major Hit

One of Friday’s biggest market disruptions came from an industry most consumers rarely think about: the credit score used when they apply for a mortgage.

Federal Housing Finance Agency Director Bill Pulte directed Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac to allow every lender to use VantageScore, effective immediately, after an initial rollout involving 50 lenders.

For decades, FICO has effectively dominated mortgage credit scoring.

Pulte’s message was unusually direct: the monopoly is ending.

That sent Fair Isaac, the company behind FICO, sharply lower, with shares falling roughly 17% by the close after dropping as much as 20% earlier in the session. TransUnion fell about 9%, Equifax about 9% and Experian nearly 5%. 

The administration says increased competition could ultimately reduce costs for homebuyers.

But the significance goes further.

Credit scores influence whether borrowers qualify for mortgages, what interest rate they receive and how lenders assess risk. Introducing competing scoring systems could eventually change how millions of Americans are evaluated.

Pulte also raised the possibility of moving away from the traditional system requiring reports from all three major credit bureaus toward a “bi-merge” system using only two.

Why it mattered today: A regulatory change just challenged one of the most powerful tollbooths in American consumer finance. For mortgage lenders, credit bureaus and homebuyers, this could become a significant restructuring of the home-loan process.

Supply Chains — Chinese Rare-Earth Suppliers Are Refusing Some U.S. Orders

A supply-chain problem Washington thought it had partially solved is resurfacing.

Some Chinese rare-earth suppliers are declining to ship critical materials to American customers because they fear punishment from Beijing, according to people familiar with the trade.

The problem intensified after China sanctioned the Responsible Business Alliance, a U.S.-based supply-chain monitoring organization, in August.

Some Chinese exporters now worry that supplying companies using related Western due-diligence systems could put them in conflict with Chinese restrictions. 

The affected materials are not obscure commodities.

Rare earths and related critical minerals are used in semiconductors, aerospace equipment, medical devices, energy systems, electric motors and advanced manufacturing.

Prices for several strategically important materials remain near record highs.

U.S. imports of yttrium from China, for example, remain roughly half their 2024 level, and some American companies have reportedly waited more than six months for export licenses. 

Why it mattered today: Businesses spent years learning what happens when one critical component can stop an entire production line.

Rare-earth restrictions create exactly that risk.

Washington has invested billions trying to rebuild domestic semiconductor and advanced-manufacturing capacity, but many of those factories still depend on minerals largely processed in China.

That dependence will now be one of the major business issues hanging over President Xi Jinping’s September 24 visit to Washington.

AI & Banking — ByteDance Borrows Nearly $30 Billion to Fund Its AI Race

ByteDance has secured a staggering $29.6 billion loan from nearly 30 banks, one of the largest corporate loans raised anywhere in Asia this year.

The financing was originally expected to total about $20 billion.

Demand from lenders was so strong that ByteDance expanded it to nearly $30 billion.

Citigroup and JPMorgan are coordinating the three-year financing, with banks from China, the United States, Europe and Singapore participating. Chinese banks are providing more than 60% of the facility. 

Even more striking: the loan is unsecured.

ByteDance is not pledging factories, shares or other assets as collateral.

Banks are lending largely on the strength of the company itself.

The money is officially for general corporate purposes, but people familiar with the financing say much of it will support ByteDance’s artificial-intelligence expansion, including chips and overseas data-center capacity.

Why it mattered today: The AI race is becoming one of the most capital-intensive corporate competitions in history.

It is no longer enough to hire software engineers and build an app.

Companies competing at the frontier now need chips, power, data centers, networking equipment and enormous quantities of financing.

ByteDance borrowing nearly $30 billion shows that global banks are increasingly financing the AI buildout almost as aggressively as they once financed telecom networks, energy projects and major infrastructure.

Software — Adobe Changes CEOs as AI Threatens the Photoshop Empire

Adobe is entering a new era.

Anil Chakravarthy will replace Shantanu Narayen as CEO, while Narayen moves into the role of executive chairman after more than 18 years running the company.

Narayen helped transform Adobe from a company selling boxed software into one of the world’s most successful subscription-software businesses.

Now Chakravarthy inherits a very different challenge.

Artificial intelligence is making it easier for competitors such as Canva, Figma and dozens of newer tools to create images, video and designs that once required specialized Adobe software. 

Adobe shares have already fallen significantly over the past two years as investors question whether generative AI strengthens Adobe’s products or ultimately weakens the company’s competitive advantage.

The stock fell again Friday following the leadership announcement.

Why it mattered today: Adobe is a test case for an enormous part of corporate America.

AI does not only create new businesses.

It can attack highly profitable existing ones.

Companies that spent decades building software moats must now prove that artificial intelligence will make their products more valuable instead of making them easier to replace.

Energy & Wall Street — Citadel Considers Owning the Oil Wells It Trades Around

Citadel, one of the world’s largest hedge funds and commodity-trading operations, is considering going directly into ownership of U.S. shale oil production assets.

The firm recently held discussions about acquiring oil-producing properties and submitted a bid for WildFire Energy before Magnolia ultimately purchased the company for approximately $4.06 billion

Citadel already moved into physical natural-gas production last year.

Buying shale oil properties would deepen that shift from simply trading commodities to actually owning the assets producing them.

The timing is significant.

Middle East disruptions have increased the strategic value of U.S. oil because American shale production does not depend on moving barrels through the Strait of Hormuz.

Why it mattered today: Wall Street is increasingly treating physical energy infrastructure as both an investment and a hedge against geopolitical instability.

If large commodity traders begin owning more wells, pipelines, storage and generation assets, the line between financial markets and the physical energy business becomes increasingly blurred.

For U.S. producers, it could also introduce another deep-pocketed buyer competing for shale assets.

U.S.-China Business — Xi Plans an Unusually Large CEO Delegation for Washington

Chinese President Xi Jinping is preparing to bring a large group of corporate executives with him when he visits Washington on September 24.

That is unusual.

Xi rarely travels abroad with a large private-sector business delegation, particularly after years in which Beijing tightened control over many of China’s most powerful technology and property companies.

The planned delegation is being viewed as an effort to signal that China wants greater commercial investment and business cooperation with the United States. 

The last comparable U.S. trip came in 2015, when executives including Alibaba founder Jack Ma and Tencent founder Pony Ma accompanied Xi.

That visit produced, among other deals, a $38 billion agreement for 300 Boeing aircraft.

No comparable deal has been announced this time.

But agriculture, tariffs, non-tariff trade barriers and rare-earth access are all expected to be part of the broader negotiations.

Why it mattered today: The U.S.-China relationship remains deeply competitive, but business is moving back toward the negotiating table.

For manufacturers, farmers, technology companies and multinational businesses, even modest progress could affect tariffs, exports, mineral supplies and billions of dollars of investment.

Artificial Intelligence — Washington and Beijing Prepare First Dedicated AI-Safety Talks

The United States and China are also preparing for possible mid-September talks devoted specifically to artificial-intelligence safety, according to people briefed on the discussions.

The proposed agenda includes monitoring AI-directed cyberattacks and potentially encouraging U.S. and Chinese AI laboratories to share information when autonomous systems create serious security incidents. 

The discussions are still tentative. A Treasury spokesperson said no meeting is formally planned, and participants and the agenda remain in flux.

But the fact that the two governments are even discussing such a channel is significant.

Autonomous AI agents are increasingly capable of taking actions across computer networks without humans approving every step.

That creates risks extending far beyond chatbots: hacking, fraud, intellectual-property theft, infrastructure attacks and automated financial manipulation.

Why it mattered today: AI safety is moving from a technology-company issue into an international business and national-security issue.

Companies adopting autonomous AI will increasingly need to think about permissions, cybersecurity controls, insurance and accountability in much the same way they already manage employees and outside contractors.

Consumers & Transportation — Diesel Hits $5.85, the Highest Price Ever

Friday also delivered a record businesses will feel far beyond the gas station.

The average U.S. diesel price reached $5.85 a gallon — an all-time high.

Brent crude settled at $96.28 a barrel, while U.S. crude finished at $91.48. Both gained roughly 9% during the week.

Gasoline prices are also at their highest level ever for a Labor Day weekend. 

Diesel matters even more to the broader economy because it powers trucks, delivery fleets, construction equipment and much of the agricultural supply chain.

A higher diesel bill eventually gets embedded into the price of groceries, building materials, packages and manufactured goods.

That makes the fuel surge particularly important for the Fed.

Higher energy prices can restart inflation even when other prices are stabilizing.

Key Market Movers

Company

Friday Move

Why

Sandisk

about +10% to +11%

AI and memory-chip demand continued driving the semiconductor trade

Micron Technology

about +4% to +5%

Memory-chip demand and AI infrastructure enthusiasm

FICO

about -17%

Fannie and Freddie opened mortgage scoring to VantageScore

TransUnion

about -9%

Credit-scoring and bureau reform concerns

Equifax

about -9%

Same mortgage-credit overhaul

Lululemon

about -18%

Reduced annual sales and profit outlook

Adobe

down sharply

CEO transition and continued concern over AI competition

Semiconductors were one of Friday’s rare pockets of strength. Sandisk led the S&P 500 higher among individual names, while Micron and several other memory and chip-equipment companies advanced even as the broader indexes fell. 

What to Watch Saturday and the Labor Day Weekend

U.S. stock and bond markets are closed Saturday and will remain closed Monday, September 7, for Labor Day.

That does not mean markets are insulated from what happens over the weekend.

The biggest immediate risk remains energy.

Brent crude is already above $96 and the Strait of Hormuz remains effectively closed. Any additional military escalation could push oil, diesel and inflation expectations higher before U.S. futures reopen Sunday evening. 

The second issue is China.

Rare-earth shipments are again becoming a negotiating problem just weeks before Xi’s Washington visit, while the two countries are simultaneously working toward discussions involving trade, investment and artificial-intelligence safety.

For American manufacturers, any weekend signal that China may loosen or tighten mineral exports could matter more than another political headline.

The next major scheduled economic test arrives September 11 with the August Consumer Price Index.

After Friday’s unexpectedly strong employment report, that inflation number could effectively decide the Fed debate.

If inflation remains hot while employment is strong, the argument for a September rate increase becomes substantially stronger.

If inflation cools meaningfully, the Fed may still have room to wait.

Bottom Line

Friday gave businesses and investors a clearer picture of where the economy stands heading into the Labor Day weekend.

The labor market is stronger than expected, but that strength makes another rate hike more likely. Diesel is at a record. Oil is approaching $100. Mortgage credit scoring is being disrupted. Critical Chinese mineral supplies remain uncertain.

At the same time, banks are lending nearly $30 billion to finance another AI expansion, semiconductor stocks are surging and Wall Street money is moving directly into American energy production.

The economy is not short of capital.

The question heading into September is becoming where that capital can still earn a return when borrowing, transportation and operating costs are all moving higher at the same time.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — President Donald Trump warned Friday that the United States could soon strike Iran’s heavily fortified Pickaxe Mountain facility if Washington determines Tehran is continuing nuclear activity there, putting one of Iran’s most protected sites directly on notice.

“Iran will not have a nuclear weapon,” Trump told reporters in the Oval Office, adding that the United States “may hit Pickaxe very soon” if there is evidence of activity at the facility. 

The warning comes as the United States has resumed attacks against Iranian targets after a period of reduced military activity, marking a renewed escalation in the confrontation between Washington and Tehran.

Trump said the United States carried out what he described as a “very heavy attack” against Iran Thursday night and remains prepared to launch additional strikes whenever necessary. He also suggested Iran may have limited ability to withstand continued American military pressure. 

The President, however, stopped short of describing the confrontation as a full-scale war. Instead, he called it a limited “military conflict,” echoing comments from Vice President JD Vance that the renewed fighting should not necessarily be characterized as a war. 

The focus on Pickaxe Mountain is especially significant because of its reported role in Iran’s nuclear infrastructure. A strike on a heavily fortified nuclear-related facility would signal that Washington is prepared to continue targeting sites Tehran may have believed were protected from conventional attacks.

Trump’s message also reinforces the central U.S. position driving the confrontation: Iran will not be permitted to obtain a nuclear weapon, regardless of how deeply its nuclear infrastructure is buried or fortified.

For Tehran, the warning creates a stark calculation. Continuing activity at Pickaxe Mountain could bring another direct U.S. attack, while halting operations would demonstrate the growing effect of American military pressure.

For markets and businesses, renewed strikes on Iranian nuclear infrastructure would also raise the risk of further instability across the Middle East, including potential disruptions involving Gulf energy production, shipping routes and global oil prices.

Trump indicated that he does not expect the current escalation to continue for an extended period, saying Thursday that he did not believe Iran could withstand American attacks much longer. 

But Friday’s warning made clear that Washington is not declaring the operation finished.

If activity continues at Pickaxe Mountain, the next phase could come quickly.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

STAMFORD, Conn. — Revolut took a major step toward becoming a full-service American bank after receiving conditional approval from the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency for a national bank charter.

The British financial-technology company still needs approvals from the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation and the Federal Reserve before it can fully launch banking operations in the United States.

But the OCC decision moves Revolut significantly closer.

The company has approximately 80 million customers worldwide and has built much of its growth around mobile banking, foreign-exchange services, multicurrency accounts and international payments.

Revolut plans to base its U.S. bank in Stamford, Connecticut, where it expects to invest approximately $95 million in capital and employ roughly 160 people.

Its planned U.S. products include checking accounts, installment loans, credit cards, foreign-exchange services and eventually a stablecoin.

That matters because Revolut would no longer simply be a financial app relying on another bank’s infrastructure.

A banking charter would allow it to move much deeper into deposits, lending and payments.

It would also give Revolut more control over the economics of its U.S. business.

Fintech companies traditionally earn fees by sitting on top of traditional banks. Once they become banks themselves, they can potentially capture more of the revenue from deposits, lending and transaction activity.

For small and midsize businesses, the most important part may be Revolut’s international reach.

Companies increasingly operate across borders, paying vendors overseas, employing remote workers, buying inventory in foreign currencies and receiving payments from customers in different countries.

Traditional banking services can make those transactions expensive and slow.

Revolut has built much of its brand around making multicurrency banking simpler and cheaper.

If it connects a U.S. bank directly into its existing European and Latin American infrastructure, it could become a more serious competitor for businesses that regularly move money across borders.

The bigger story is what is happening to banking itself.

For years, fintech companies competed with banks by building better apps.

Now some of those companies are trying to become the bank.

That puts pressure on traditional institutions not only to improve digital products, but also to compete on fees, foreign-exchange pricing and ease of use.

The remaining regulatory approvals are still important, and conditional OCC approval does not guarantee a final launch.

But Revolut’s move shows that the line between fintech and traditional banking is disappearing quickly.

For consumers and businesses, that could mean more competition.

For established banks, it means another global rival is getting closer to entering their core business.

JBizNews Desk | Stamford

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump renewed pressure on the Federal Reserve Friday to lower interest rates, saying policymakers “must get smart” even as a stronger-than-expected August jobs report gave the central bank more reason to remain cautious.

The clash is becoming increasingly clear.

Trump wants cheaper borrowing costs.

The latest economic data are giving the Fed an argument for keeping rates high.

That tension is now one of the most important stories in U.S. markets.

Trump Wants Rates Lower

Trump has repeatedly argued that U.S. interest rates are too high and that lower rates would reduce borrowing costs for businesses, homebuyers and the federal government.

On Friday, he again pressed the Fed to move lower, saying the United States should have some of the lowest interest rates in the world.

He also tied the issue to trade, warning that countries benefiting from large trade surpluses with the United States could face consequences if interest rates remain too high.

The broader message from the White House is simple:

High rates are making American business less competitive.

But the Jobs Report Complicates That Argument

Friday’s employment report showed the U.S. economy added 162,000 jobs in August, much stronger than many economists had expected.

That matters because the Federal Reserve watches the labor market closely when deciding whether the economy can handle higher interest rates.

If hiring is strong and unemployment remains relatively low, the Fed has less reason to rush into rate cuts.

A strong labor market can also keep wage growth elevated.

And if wages rise too quickly, businesses may raise prices to cover higher labor costs.

That can keep inflation above the Fed’s 2% target.

Markets Immediately Saw the Conflict

Treasury yields moved higher after the jobs report as investors reduced expectations for near-term rate cuts.

That is the market’s way of saying:

The economy may still be too strong for the Fed to ease aggressively.

Higher Treasury yields can quickly affect the rest of the economy.

Mortgage rates can rise.

Corporate borrowing gets more expensive.

Auto loans become more costly.

Commercial real estate financing becomes harder.

That is exactly why Trump is pushing in the opposite direction.

Why the Fed May Resist Political Pressure

The Federal Reserve is designed to operate independently from the White House.

Its job is to manage inflation and employment, not to set rates based on political preferences.

Fed officials have repeatedly emphasized that policy decisions will depend on economic data.

That means the central bank is unlikely to cut rates simply because the president wants it to.

If inflation remains elevated and hiring remains strong, policymakers may decide that lower rates would risk reigniting price pressures.

Trump’s Business Argument

From Trump’s perspective, high rates create real economic costs.

Businesses financing equipment, buildings, inventory or expansion pay more.

Homebuilders face weaker demand.

Consumers pay more for mortgages, credit cards and vehicles.

The federal government also pays more interest on its debt.

Lower rates would ease all of those pressures.

That is why Trump has made monetary policy a much more public political issue than most presidents typically do.

The Fed’s Counterargument

The Fed’s concern is that cutting too soon can create a bigger inflation problem later.

If rates fall while the economy is still expanding quickly, households and businesses may borrow and spend more.

That additional demand can push prices higher.

The Fed learned during the post-pandemic inflation surge how difficult it can be to regain control once inflation becomes entrenched.

So policymakers are trying to avoid repeating that mistake.

What It Means for Businesses

For businesses, this fight matters because interest rates affect almost every major financial decision.

A company deciding whether to open another location may wait if financing is too expensive.

A manufacturer may delay buying new equipment.

A developer may postpone a project.

A consumer may decide not to buy a house.

That slows economic activity.

But if rates are cut too aggressively and inflation rises again, businesses face higher labor, transportation and material costs.

There is no painless option.

The September Fed Meeting Just Became More Important

The Federal Reserve meets again later this month.

Before that meeting, policymakers will receive additional inflation data.

Those numbers could determine which side of the debate gains the advantage.

If inflation cools sharply, Trump’s argument for lower rates becomes easier to make.

If inflation remains stubborn and the labor market stays strong, the Fed may decide that cutting rates would be premature.

That leaves markets caught between two powerful forces.

The White House wants cheaper money.

The Federal Reserve wants proof that inflation is under control.

And Friday’s jobs report gave the Fed more reason to wait.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Thousands of convenience stores could face a difficult choice this fall:

Stock significantly more staple foods — or stop accepting SNAP benefits.

A new U.S. Department of Agriculture rule requires most SNAP-authorized retailers to carry at least seven varieties of staple foods in each of four food categories beginning November 4.

That means a minimum of 28 different staple-food varieties must be continuously available.

The four categories are:

  • Protein
  • Grains
  • Fruits and vegetables
  • Dairy

Stores must also carry at least three stocking units of each qualifying variety, bringing the minimum requirement to 84 individual stocking units.

And at least one perishable variety must be available in three of the four categories.

The goal is straightforward.

USDA wants customers using the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program to have access to a wider selection of nutritious foods wherever SNAP is accepted.

But convenience-store operators say the rule could have an unintended consequence:

Some smaller stores may simply stop accepting SNAP altogether.

Why Convenience Stores Are Worried

Nearly 250 convenience-store operators and trade groups have asked Agriculture Secretary Brooke Rollins to delay enforcement for six months.

Their argument is not necessarily that stores oppose carrying healthier food.

It is that small stores operate very differently from supermarkets.

A neighborhood convenience store may have limited refrigeration.

It may have only a few aisles.

It may receive smaller deliveries and have less storage space.

Fresh products can also spoil quickly if customer demand is not high enough.

That creates a simple business problem.

A supermarket selling large volumes of milk, produce, meat and bread can move those products quickly.

A small convenience store may buy the same products and end up throwing some of them away.

That waste becomes another operating cost.

What Changes on November 4

Today, many SNAP retailers qualify by stocking at least three varieties in each of four staple-food categories.

The new standard raises that to seven varieties per category.

That means the breadth requirement increases from 12 varieties to 28.

The required number of stocking units also rises substantially.

USDA says the rule will ensure that participating stores offer meaningful food choices rather than qualifying for SNAP while carrying only a very limited grocery selection.

The department finalized the regulation in May.

It became legally effective in July.

Retailers have until November 4, 2026 to comply.

What Happens if a Store Does Not Comply?

This is the part that matters most.

USDA says a store that does not meet the new requirements can be withdrawn from SNAP participation.

That means it would no longer be allowed to accept SNAP benefits.

For some convenience stores, losing SNAP could mean losing a meaningful portion of their customer base.

That is especially important in lower-income neighborhoods and rural communities where a convenience store may also function as the nearest practical grocery outlet.

A customer might otherwise have to travel several miles to reach a full supermarket.

The Rule Does Not Change What SNAP Customers Can Buy

There is an important distinction.

This rule does not broadly change which products shoppers are permitted to purchase with SNAP.

It changes what a retailer must keep in stock in order to remain authorized to accept SNAP.

USDA has also changed how certain products are classified.

Items including butter, jerky, cheese dip, snack bars and fruit spreads will no longer count toward a store’s required staple-food inventory.

They can still generally be purchased with SNAP where otherwise eligible.

They simply cannot be used by the retailer to satisfy its stocking requirement.

Why USDA Is Doing It

The policy traces back to the 2014 Farm Bill, which directed USDA to raise SNAP retailer stocking standards.

Implementation was repeatedly delayed while USDA worked through how different foods should be classified.

The department’s new rule creates a clearer definition of what counts as a distinct variety.

USDA argues the result will provide SNAP households with better access to what it describes as whole, nutrient-dense foods.

For consumers, that could mean more choices.

For retailers, it means more inventory.

The Small-Business Tradeoff

This is where the policy becomes complicated.

A rule designed to improve food access could potentially reduce food access if smaller stores leave SNAP.

That is what the industry is warning about.

A store owner has to calculate whether the revenue generated by SNAP customers is large enough to justify buying more inventory, adding refrigeration, increasing deliveries and accepting additional spoilage.

For some stores, the answer will be yes.

For others, it may not be.

That decision becomes especially important for independently owned convenience stores, where margins are already tight.

What It Means for Businesses

For convenience-store owners, November 4 is now an important operational deadline.

They need to examine inventory category by category and determine whether they meet the new federal standard.

Stores that do not may need to:

Increase inventory.

Find new suppliers.

Add refrigerator or freezer capacity.

Reconfigure shelves.

Or decide whether staying in SNAP remains economically worthwhile.

For food distributors, the change could create new demand from thousands of smaller retailers that suddenly need additional dairy, produce, grain and protein products.

For consumers, the effect will depend heavily on where they live.

If stores comply, SNAP customers could gain access to a wider variety of food.

If significant numbers of smaller retailers leave the program, some communities could instead end up with fewer places where SNAP benefits can be used.

That is the tension Washington now has to manage:

Require better food choices without making the cost of participation so high that neighborhood stores decide not to participate at all.

With the November 4 deadline approaching, convenience-store operators are asking USDA for more time.

For thousands of small retailers, the question is no longer simply what they should stock.

It is whether accepting SNAP will still make business sense.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WhatsApp users in Israel and elsewhere are reporting sudden account suspensions that can leave them locked out without warning — cutting off access to customers, employees, vendors and years of important conversations.

For an individual user, that is frustrating.

For a business, it can become an immediate operational problem.

WhatsApp has become a major communications tool for small businesses around the world. Companies use it for customer service, sales, scheduling, orders, supplier communication and internal messaging.

That means losing an account can feel almost like losing access to email, a company phone system and part of a customer database at the same time.

What Is Happening

Users have reported receiving messages saying their accounts were banned for violating WhatsApp’s terms even when they say they were not given a clear explanation of what triggered the decision.

Some users have later regained access after requesting a review.

WhatsApp has previously acknowledged technical issues that caused certain accounts to be banned incorrectly.

That raises a bigger question for businesses:

How much of a company’s daily operation should depend on a communications platform controlled by someone else?

Why Businesses Are Especially Exposed

A small business may build much of its customer communication around one WhatsApp number.

Customers know that number.

Employees use it.

Orders come through it.

Photos, invoices, delivery information and customer conversations may all live there.

If the account is suddenly disabled, the business does not simply lose access to an app.

It can temporarily lose access to the people it depends on.

That is the real business risk.

The company may own the customer relationship, but Meta controls the platform connecting the two.

Automated Enforcement Can Make Mistakes

WhatsApp operates at enormous scale.

That means Meta relies heavily on automated systems to detect spam, fraud, abuse and other violations.

Those systems are necessary.

But automated enforcement is not perfect.

A business sending many similar messages can sometimes resemble spam.

An unusual increase in activity can look suspicious.

Accounts can also be reported by other users.

When automated systems combine those signals, legitimate accounts can sometimes be caught alongside actual scammers.

The bigger problem comes when users do not understand why they were banned or how quickly they can get their account restored.

Being Locked Out Can Cost Real Money

For businesses, even a temporary suspension can have financial consequences.

A retailer can miss orders.

A service business can miss appointments.

A contractor can lose contact with customers.

A salesperson can lose access to leads.

An employer can suddenly lose an internal communication channel.

And customers may have no idea the account was suspended.

They may simply assume the business stopped responding.

That can damage trust even after access is eventually restored.

The Risk Is Bigger for Small Businesses

Large companies usually have multiple systems.

They have email.

Customer-service software.

Phone systems.

Websites.

Databases.

Backup communications.

A small business may have none of that.

For many small operators, WhatsApp has become the system.

That makes the convenience enormous.

But it also creates a single point of failure.

If the account disappears, there may be no immediate backup.

Meta Wants More Businesses on WhatsApp

This creates an important issue for Meta itself.

WhatsApp is increasingly becoming a commercial platform.

Meta is expanding paid business messaging, customer-service tools and commerce features designed to make WhatsApp more important to companies.

That strategy depends on trust.

Businesses will be reluctant to rely even more heavily on WhatsApp if they believe their account can suddenly be disabled without a clear explanation.

For commercial users, reliability does not only mean the app stays online.

It also means legitimate businesses need confidence that their access will remain stable.

And if something goes wrong, there needs to be a fast and understandable appeals process.

What Businesses Should Do

The lesson is not that businesses should stop using WhatsApp.

For many companies, it remains one of the easiest and most effective ways to communicate with customers.

The lesson is not to let WhatsApp become the only place where critical business relationships exist.

Businesses should maintain independent customer contact records.

Important documents and order information should be stored elsewhere.

Customers should have another way to reach the company, whether through email, SMS, a website or another messaging service.

The goal is simple:

If WhatsApp locks the account tomorrow, the business should still be able to operate.

What It Means for Businesses

Digital platforms have given small businesses access to tools that once required expensive software and communications systems.

But they have also created a new kind of dependency.

A business can build thousands of customer relationships through a platform it does not control.

Everything works extremely well — until the account is suddenly locked.

For businesses increasingly dependent on WhatsApp, the latest complaints are a reminder of a basic digital-business rule:

Own the relationship with your customer, and never let one outside platform become the only door connecting you to them.

JBizNews Desk | Tel Aviv

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

South Korea is moving toward a possible military deployment to the Strait of Hormuz just weeks after President Donald Trump publicly tied reduced U.S.-South Korea military exercises to Seoul’s refusal to assist Washington in the war against Iran.

The timing is difficult to miss.

South Korean media, citing government and military sources, report that Seoul is preparing to seek parliamentary approval for a mission aimed at protecting freedom of navigation through the Strait of Hormuz.

Options under consideration reportedly include a maritime patrol aircraft, a logistics support vessel and a mine-clearing unit.

South Korea has also been discussing the possible mission with the United States, Britain and France.

The government has not made a final deployment decision, and the South Korean presidential office has pushed back against reports suggesting the mission is already approved.

But Seoul is clearly considering a contribution that looks very different from the position it held only weeks ago.

The Message From Washington

Last month, Trump announced that he was reducing the scale of joint U.S.-South Korea military exercises.

He cited his relationship with North Korean leader Kim Jong Un as one reason.

But Trump also specifically pointed to South Korea’s refusal to assist the United States in the conflict with Iran.

That made the decision more than a military scheduling issue.

It became a message about burden-sharing.

The United States has tens of thousands of troops stationed in South Korea and has spent decades providing a major security umbrella against North Korea.

Trump’s position was essentially that allies benefiting from American military protection should also be willing to assist the United States when critical global shipping routes and American interests are under threat.

Now Seoul is considering exactly the kind of maritime contribution Washington had been seeking.

Why Hormuz Matters to South Korea

There is also a powerful economic reason for Seoul to care.

South Korea is one of the world’s largest energy importers.

It depends heavily on oil and natural gas moving out of the Middle East.

The Strait of Hormuz is the gateway for a major share of those supplies.

If shipping through the strait becomes unreliable, South Korea does not simply have a foreign-policy problem.

It has an energy problem.

Higher oil and gas prices hit Korean manufacturers, airlines, shipping companies and consumers.

That gives Seoul a direct economic interest in keeping the waterway open.

This Is Not Yet a Deployment

That distinction is important.

South Korea’s presidential Blue House says discussions are still focused on practical ways to contribute to freedom of navigation.

It has rejected reports that a final decision to deploy forces has already been made.

The government is reportedly considering submitting a consent motion to parliament after a cabinet review.

So the next step is political.

Seoul has to decide whether it wants to formally commit military assets and then secure the necessary domestic approval.

Why the Mine-Clearing Option Matters

One of the most important options being discussed is a mine-clearing unit.

That is not symbolic.

Mines can close or severely restrict commercial shipping without requiring Iran to directly attack every vessel passing through the strait.

Clearing them requires specialized ships, equipment and trained personnel.

A South Korean contribution in that area could therefore have real operational value for maintaining commercial traffic.

The same is true of maritime patrol aircraft, which can monitor shipping lanes and identify potential threats.

What It Means for Businesses

For global businesses, this is ultimately about keeping one of the world’s most important energy corridors functioning.

Oil markets do not need the Strait of Hormuz to be completely closed before prices rise.

Even the threat of disruption can increase:

  • Oil prices
  • Marine insurance
  • Freight costs
  • Shipping delays
  • Energy prices

South Korea has more at stake than most countries because of its dependence on imported energy and its enormous manufacturing economy.

That makes participation in a Hormuz mission both a military decision and an economic one.

The Bigger Alliance Message

The broader lesson may be even more important.

Trump has repeatedly argued that American allies should contribute more directly when U.S. forces are carrying the burden of protecting shared economic and security interests.

South Korea initially stayed out of the Iran conflict.

Washington responded by reducing military cooperation.

Now Seoul is actively discussing sending assets toward the very region where the United States wanted help.

South Korean officials have not said the two decisions are directly connected.

But the sequence is clear.

Washington applied pressure. Seoul heard the message. And South Korea is now considering putting military assets into the Strait of Hormuz.

For America’s other allies, that sequence will be closely watched.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

DALLAS — Autonomous-trucking software company PlusAI is heading toward the public markets through a deal that values the business at approximately $800 million before new investment, giving investors another opportunity to bet on driverless freight.

PlusAI agreed to merge with Texas Ventures Acquisition III, a special-purpose acquisition company, in a transaction expected to provide roughly $300 million in capital.

That includes more than $60 million in committed financing and approximately $236 million currently held by the SPAC.

The company develops SuperDrive, a Level 4 autonomous-driving system designed for commercial trucks.

Level 4 automation means a truck can handle the complete driving task under defined operating conditions without requiring a human driver to remain continuously responsible.

PlusAI is targeting a commercial launch in 2027.

The company already operates autonomous freight routes in Texas with Ryder and International and is working with major truck manufacturers on factory-built autonomous vehicles.

The financial scale is still relatively small compared with the valuation.

PlusAI says its HyperFoundry software-development platform has generated about $25 million in revenue, while the broader company expects roughly $40 million to $50 million in contracted revenue this year.

That means investors are being asked to value the company primarily on what autonomous trucking could become rather than what it earns today.

The potential market is enormous.

Trucking companies face persistent driver shortages, rising insurance costs, fuel expenses and strict limits on how many hours a human driver can legally remain behind the wheel.

A truck capable of safely operating for much longer portions of the day could fundamentally change freight economics.

For large carriers, autonomous systems could increase the number of miles each truck covers and reduce dependence on long-haul drivers.

For warehouses, retailers and manufacturers, that could eventually mean faster deliveries and lower transportation costs.

The technology could also reshape labor.

Long-haul trucking employs hundreds of thousands of drivers, and widespread Level 4 deployment would change what those jobs look like.

Human drivers could increasingly handle local pickup, delivery and complicated urban routes while autonomous systems perform more predictable highway segments.

But commercial success is far from guaranteed.

Autonomous trucks still need to prove they can operate safely in difficult weather, construction zones, emergencies and unpredictable traffic conditions.

Insurance companies and regulators will also have to determine who carries liability when a vehicle is operating without a human driver.

The planned public listing shows that investors are again becoming willing to finance the next stage of autonomous transportation.

For years, driverless trucking lived mainly inside research programs and limited testing.

Now the industry is moving toward a much harder test:

Can autonomous trucks become a real business?

JBizNews Desk | Dallas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JBizNews U.S. Market Opening Recap — September 4, 2026 | 10:00 A.M. ET

Wall Street opened cautiously Friday after a much stronger-than-expected August employment report showed the U.S. economy added jobs at nearly three times the pace economists expected, immediately reviving the possibility that the Federal Reserve could raise interest rates later this month.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average opened at 53,584.89, down 101.2 points, or 0.19%. The S&P 500 opened at 7,750.19, up 2.5 points, or 0.03%, while the Nasdaq Composite opened at 26,587.90, up 3.8 points, or 0.01%. Early trading remained subdued, with the Dow modestly lower, the S&P 500 near flat and the Nasdaq slightly positive. 

The morning’s economic story is almost entirely about jobs. U.S. employers added 162,000 nonfarm payroll jobs in August, far above the roughly 56,000 economists surveyed by Reuters had expected. The unemployment rate held at 4.1%, while the labor-force participation rate rose to 61.6% from 61.4%. Average hourly earnings increased 0.3% for the month and 3.1% from a year earlier, suggesting the labor market strengthened without a major new acceleration in wage inflation. 

The report also substantially improved the picture for the previous two months. June payroll growth was revised to 31,000 from 20,000, while July was revised from a previously reported 23,000-job decline to a 21,000 increase. Together, June and July employment was revised upward by 55,000 jobs

The composition was revealing. Restaurants and bars added about 59,000 jobs, local government education added 42,000, manufacturing gained 16,000, and health care continued growing. But the information sector lost 23,000 jobs, including declines in computing infrastructure, data processing, web hosting, publishing and broadcasting — a notable divergence as companies increasingly invest in automation and artificial intelligence. 

The immediate market consequence is higher interest-rate risk. Fed-funds futures moved to roughly a 59% probability of a rate increase at the Federal Reserve’s September 15-16 meeting, up from about 55% before the jobs report. The two-year Treasury yield climbed about five basis points to 4.38%, while the 10-year yield moved near 4.78%

That creates an unusual “good news is bad news” problem for stocks. The jobs report reduces fears that the economy is slipping into recession, but it also gives the Fed more room to concentrate on inflation — particularly with energy prices still elevated.

Oil eased modestly Friday morning but remains sharply higher for the week. U.S. crude traded around $90.50 a barrel and Brent near $94.85, with both benchmarks up roughly 8% to 9% this week amid continued disruption tied to the Iran conflict and the Strait of Hormuz. U.S. diesel prices have reached a record $5.85 a gallon, an especially important inflation risk because diesel feeds directly into trucking, shipping, agriculture and the cost of moving consumer goods. 

Among individual stocks, Lululemon plunged about 20% after cutting its full-year forecast for the second time. Second-quarter revenue in the Americas fell 8% from a year earlier as the company struggles with weaker demand, merchandising problems and heavier promotions. Incoming CEO Heidi O’Neill takes over September 8 with the shares already down more than 40% this year. 

On the other side, Samsara jumped roughly 13% to 14% after reporting quarterly revenue of $508.4 million, up 30%, and raising its full-year outlook. Annual recurring revenue reached about $2.13 billion, also up 30%, providing another sign that corporate spending on connected operations, automation and AI-linked software remains strong even as parts of the broader technology labor market weaken. 

Guidewire Software fell roughly 15%, while cybersecurity company Zscaler slipped despite better-than-expected results, showing how demanding valuations remain across software after the sector’s recent rally. Adobe is also in focus after naming longtime executive Anil Chakravarthy as its next CEO, succeeding Shantanu Narayen, as the company confronts growing competition from AI-powered creative tools. 

For the rest of Friday, the most important number may not be a stock index at all — it is the 10-year Treasury yield. If yields continue climbing toward 4.8% or beyond, pressure could build on technology, housing, utilities and other rate-sensitive sectors. If yields stabilize, investors may increasingly focus on the positive side of the employment report: the economy remains stronger than feared.

Oil remains the second major variable. Another escalation involving Iran or further disruption through the Strait of Hormuz could quickly erase Friday’s modest decline in crude and reinforce the Fed’s inflation concerns.

The third test is market leadership. Investors will be watching whether technology can remain resilient despite higher yields, whether consumer stocks follow Lululemon lower, and whether the strong jobs report ultimately becomes a reason to buy economically sensitive stocks or a reason to sell because of higher interest rates.

The market’s message at the opening is unusually clear: the U.S. economy looks stronger this morning, but that strength may come with a price — a Federal Reserve that has more room to raise rates if inflation refuses to cool.

Next week’s inflation reports now become even more important. With employment holding up and the Fed meeting on September 15-16, a hot CPI reading could dramatically strengthen the case for another rate increase.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Israel Aerospace Industries has completed the maiden flight of its first converted Airbus A330-300 freighter, marking a major milestone in the company’s push to expand deeper into the global air-cargo market.

The aircraft began life as a passenger jet.

IAI has now converted it into a dedicated freighter capable of carrying up to 61 tons of cargo and accommodating as many as 30 cargo containers.

That turns an older passenger aircraft into a new commercial asset instead of sending it toward retirement.

Why This Matters

Passenger-to-freighter conversions have become a major business for airlines and aircraft lessors.

A new cargo aircraft can cost tens of millions of dollars.

Converting an existing passenger jet can be significantly cheaper.

The economics are straightforward.

An airline or leasing company takes an aircraft that may no longer be attractive for passenger service, removes the cabin interior, reinforces the floor, modifies the structure, installs a large cargo door and converts the aircraft for freight operations.

That can add many more years of useful service.

For aircraft owners, it can dramatically increase the value of an aging jet.

IAI Is Already a Major Player

Israel Aerospace Industries has decades of experience converting passenger aircraft into freighters.

Its work has historically centered heavily on Boeing aircraft, including widebody platforms used by cargo operators around the world.

The A330 program changes that.

IAI is now positioning itself as one of the relatively few aerospace companies capable of converting both Airbus and Boeing widebody aircraft.

That gives it access to a much larger pool of aircraft.

Thousands of Airbus A330s have been delivered worldwide.

As passenger versions age, many will eventually become candidates for conversion.

The A330 Is Well Suited for Cargo

The Airbus A330 is already widely used by passenger airlines.

It has strong range, a large fuselage and relatively efficient operating economics.

The converted A330-300 is aimed primarily at regional and medium-haul freight operations.

Its capacity of up to 61 tons gives operators a middle ground between smaller narrowbody freighters and much larger long-haul cargo aircraft.

That can make it attractive for routes where airlines need significant capacity but do not need the size of a Boeing 747 freighter.

The Maiden Flight Is Only One Step

The successful flight does not mean the aircraft is ready for commercial service tomorrow.

The program still has to complete flight testing and regulatory certification.

That process is designed to prove that the structural modifications, cargo systems and aircraft performance meet aviation-safety standards.

Once certification is completed, IAI can begin delivering converted aircraft to customers.

That is when the program moves from engineering project to revenue-generating business.

Why Air Cargo Still Matters

The air-freight market experienced extraordinary demand during the pandemic, when passenger flights collapsed and companies struggled to move goods.

Demand has since normalized.

But long-term structural drivers remain.

E-commerce continues to grow.

Pharmaceuticals rely heavily on air cargo.

Semiconductors, electronics, automotive parts and high-value industrial components often need rapid transportation.

Supply-chain disruptions also remind companies that speed can sometimes be worth paying for.

That keeps freighter aircraft strategically important even when the broader shipping market slows.

There Is Also a Huge Aircraft-Supply Opportunity

Many older passenger jets are reaching the point where airlines have to decide what to do with them.

They can sell them.

Store them.

Scrap them.

Or convert them.

For aircraft leasing companies, conversion can be particularly attractive.

A plane that has become less valuable in passenger service can potentially earn revenue for many additional years carrying freight.

That creates business for conversion specialists such as IAI.

What It Means for Israel

This is also an important aerospace-export story.

IAI is one of Israel’s largest industrial and defense companies.

Commercial aircraft conversion gives it a revenue stream outside traditional military systems.

The company sells engineering expertise to global airlines, lessors and cargo operators.

That means the value created in Israel is exported around the world.

It also strengthens Israel’s position in a highly specialized corner of the global aerospace industry where only a limited number of companies have the technical capability and regulatory experience to compete.

What It Means for Businesses

For cargo airlines and aircraft owners, the A330 conversion offers another option for adding capacity without purchasing a brand-new freighter.

For IAI, it expands the addressable market dramatically.

For the aerospace industry, it reinforces a broader trend:

Older passenger aircraft are increasingly being viewed not as obsolete assets, but as raw material for the next generation of cargo fleets.

The first flight is therefore about more than one aircraft.

It is proof that IAI’s Airbus conversion program has moved from the drawing board into the air.

If certification proceeds as planned, that could open a significant new commercial market for the Israeli aerospace company.

JBizNews Desk | Tel Aviv

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Brussels Airlines is facing a growing labor dispute over flights to Tel Aviv, with a Belgian union threatening strike action unless crew members are allowed to refuse assignments to Israel on safety or conscientious grounds.

The dispute centers on a question that goes far beyond one airline:

Can airline employees decline to work a specific international route because they object to the destination or believe it is unsafe?

Brussels Airlines resumed service to Tel Aviv on August 3 after a five-month suspension and is currently operating three flights a week.

The union representing flight crews says employees who object to flying to Israel should be allowed to refuse those assignments without losing pay or facing disciplinary action.

The airline disagrees.

Brussels Airlines says safety is its top priority and that route decisions are based on security assessments, operational conditions and passenger demand.

It also says employees are expected to carry out assigned duties under the terms of their employment.

Why This Matters

This is not simply a labor dispute.

It is a business-risk issue for airlines operating routes into politically sensitive or conflict-affected regions.

Airlines already have to manage:

  • Security assessments
  • Insurance costs
  • Crew availability
  • Passenger demand
  • Airspace restrictions
  • Government travel guidance

If employees also gain broad discretion to refuse specific destinations for political or ethical reasons, staffing could become much more difficult.

That could force airlines to cancel flights even when regulators and company security teams consider the route safe to operate.

The Volunteer Question

The union says Brussels Airlines previously relied more heavily on volunteers for Israel flights.

It argues that the company has moved away from that system because it could not find enough employees willing to operate the route.

Brussels Airlines disputes that characterization.

That disagreement is central to the dispute.

If enough crew members refuse assignments, the airline may not have enough staff to maintain its schedule.

And once staffing becomes unreliable, the financial consequences can grow quickly.

Cancelled flights mean refunds.

Aircraft may sit idle.

Passengers need to be rebooked.

Hotels and compensation costs can rise.

And travelers may begin booking with competitors instead.

A Broader Precedent for European Airlines

The larger concern is precedent.

Airlines operate routes to countries facing political controversy, war, sanctions, protests and security concerns all over the world.

If workers can decline assignments based on personal political or ethical objections, airlines could face similar disputes on many routes.

That would create a difficult line for management.

Safety concerns can be assessed through intelligence, government guidance and aviation-security professionals.

Political objections are much harder to standardize.

One employee may object to one country.

Another may object to another.

An airline cannot operate a global route network if every destination effectively becomes optional.

What It Means for Travelers

For passengers traveling between Belgium and Israel, the immediate risk is disruption.

If the union follows through with strike action, Brussels Airlines could be forced to cancel or reduce flights.

That would tighten capacity on a route that has already experienced repeated suspensions and resumptions because of regional security conditions.

Less capacity generally means higher fares and fewer backup options when flights are disrupted.

For business travelers, that unpredictability can be especially costly.

What It Means for Airlines

The dispute highlights how geopolitical conflict increasingly reaches directly into airline operations.

A route can be technically open.

Airports can be functioning.

Demand can exist.

But if crews do not want to fly it, the airline still has a problem.

That can affect staffing models, employment contracts and labor negotiations far beyond Brussels Airlines.

The commercial question is straightforward:

Who ultimately decides whether a route should be flown — airline management and safety professionals, or individual employees assigned to operate it?

Brussels Airlines is now being forced to answer that question in real time.

And if the dispute escalates into a strike, other European carriers will be watching closely.

JBizNews Desk | Brussels

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

One of the world’s largest pools of investment capital is considering a major reduction in its exposure to U.S. government debt.

The manager of Norway’s roughly $2.3 trillion sovereign wealth fund is proposing changes to its bond benchmark that could sharply reduce the fund’s holdings of U.S. Treasuries.

The proposal would lower the share of government bonds in the fund’s fixed-income benchmark from 70% to 50% and shift more money toward other types of bonds.

Based on the fund’s current holdings and Reuters calculations, that could eventually mean roughly $80 billion less in U.S. Treasury exposure.

Nothing has been sold yet.

This is a proposal, not an executed trade.

But because Norway’s fund is so large, even a strategic change in how it allocates bonds can matter to global markets.

Why This Matters

U.S. Treasuries are the foundation of the global financial system.

Banks hold them.

Central banks hold them.

Insurance companies hold them.

Pension funds and sovereign wealth funds hold them.

They are used as collateral throughout financial markets and are generally treated as one of the safest and most liquid assets in the world.

So when a fund as large as Norway’s begins discussing a meaningful reduction in government-bond exposure, investors pay attention.

The issue is not that Norway suddenly believes the United States will not repay its debt.

The concern is more about portfolio construction.

Government bonds have become less attractive relative to other fixed-income investments because yields, inflation risk, fiscal deficits and debt issuance have all changed.

The Fund Is Looking for Better Balance

Norway’s sovereign wealth fund owns stocks, bonds, real estate and infrastructure around the world.

Its job is to invest the country’s oil wealth for future generations.

That means it is constantly trying to balance safety, returns and diversification.

Under the current structure, government debt represents a very large share of the fund’s bond portfolio.

The proposed change would reduce that concentration.

Instead, the fund could allocate more money toward corporate bonds, securitized debt and other fixed-income assets.

That could provide higher returns, though usually with somewhat more risk.

Why Treasuries Are Under More Scrutiny

The United States is borrowing enormous amounts of money.

That means the Treasury Department has to issue a huge supply of new bonds to finance federal spending.

At the same time, investors are demanding higher yields to hold longer-term debt.

That has pushed Treasury yields significantly higher than they were several years ago.

Higher yields can make Treasuries more attractive because investors earn more interest.

But they also mean bond prices can be more volatile.

If inflation stays high or markets expect interest rates to rise further, existing bonds can lose value.

For a massive long-term investor, that creates a reason to ask whether too much capital is concentrated in sovereign debt.

Why an $80 Billion Shift Matters

The U.S. Treasury market is enormous, so an $80 billion reduction would not by itself destabilize it.

But the symbolism matters.

Norway is not a hedge fund making a short-term trade.

It is one of the largest and most conservative institutional investors in the world.

If it concludes that government bonds should occupy a smaller share of its portfolio, other pension funds and sovereign investors may ask similar questions.

And if several large global investors reduce Treasury demand at the same time, the U.S. government may have to offer higher yields to attract buyers.

Higher Treasury yields eventually affect almost everything else.

Mortgage rates.

Corporate borrowing.

Auto loans.

Commercial real estate.

Stock valuations.

This Is About More Than America

The proposal does not target U.S. Treasuries specifically.

It would reduce government-bond exposure more broadly.

But because the United States represents such a large portion of global sovereign debt markets, Treasuries would naturally be heavily affected.

Norway’s fund currently holds roughly $215 billion in U.S. government debt, making the United States one of its most important bond exposures.

That means any benchmark change could move tens of billions of dollars.

What It Means for Businesses

For American businesses, the important number to watch is not Norway’s portfolio by itself.

It is Treasury yields.

If foreign investors become less willing to hold U.S. government debt, borrowing costs can rise.

Corporate loan rates are often priced relative to Treasury yields.

So are mortgages and many other forms of credit.

That means what looks like a technical portfolio decision in Oslo can eventually affect the cost of financing a warehouse, buying a home or issuing corporate debt in the United States.

Again, Norway has not announced an $80 billion Treasury sale.

The fund manager is proposing a strategic change that could lead to a substantial reduction over time.

But the proposal arrives at an important moment.

The United States is issuing enormous amounts of debt.

Long-term yields are already elevated.

And one of the world’s biggest investors is asking whether government bonds should continue occupying such a large share of its portfolio.

That is a question Wall Street — and Washington — will be watching closely.

JBizNews Desk | Oslo

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Securities and Exchange Commission is moving to eliminate a 16-year-old rule that can punish investment advisers when employees make political contributions to state or local officials.

The SEC proposed Thursday to repeal its so-called “pay-to-play” rule, which can prevent an investment adviser from receiving compensation from a government client for two years after certain political contributions are made.

The rule was originally designed to prevent investment firms from effectively buying access to lucrative government business.

That can include managing money for:

  • State pension funds
  • Municipal retirement systems
  • Public investment pools
  • Other state and local government accounts

The SEC now says the rule has become too broad and too difficult to administer.

What the Rule Does Today

The rule does not simply prohibit bribery.

It goes much further.

If certain employees of an investment firm make political contributions to officials who can influence the selection of investment advisers, the firm can be barred from receiving advisory fees from that government client for two years.

That can happen even when the contribution itself is relatively small.

It can also affect a company when an employee made the contribution before joining the firm.

That is one reason large financial companies often maintain extremely strict internal political-contribution policies.

Some effectively prohibit certain employees from making state or local political donations at all.

Why the SEC Wants It Gone

SEC Chairman Paul Atkins says more than 15 years of experience have shown that the rule produces consequences that go beyond preventing corruption.

According to the SEC, firms have complained that the rule is operationally difficult and can function almost like a strict-liability system.

A relatively minor mistake can potentially create major consequences.

Atkins also argues that the rule has discouraged legitimate political participation because employees know their personal donations could create problems for their employer.

The SEC’s position is that political contributions should generally be governed by state laws, local ordinances and federal election rules, rather than a specialized SEC restriction.

What Would Actually Change

The proposal would repeal Investment Advisers Act Rule 206(4)-5.

It would also remove related recordkeeping requirements tied specifically to political contributions.

But this does not mean investment managers would suddenly be free to bribe politicians for public pension business.

Fraud laws would remain.

Investment advisers would still owe fiduciary duties to clients.

SEC compliance and ethics requirements would remain.

State and federal anti-corruption laws would also continue to apply.

The change is narrower:

The SEC would no longer automatically impose this specific two-year compensation ban because of covered political contributions.

Why Wall Street Cares

Government money is enormous.

Public pension funds collectively manage trillions of dollars.

Winning one large state or municipal investment mandate can generate significant fees for an asset manager.

That is why firms have spent years building complicated compliance systems around political giving.

Employees may have to pre-clear donations.

Companies maintain contribution databases.

New hires may undergo political-contribution reviews.

A repeal could significantly reduce that compliance burden.

For large private-equity firms, hedge funds, asset managers and investment advisers seeking government business, that could be meaningful.

Why Critics May Be Nervous

The original rule existed for a reason.

Government officials often play a role in deciding who manages public money.

That creates an obvious potential conflict.

An investment manager could make political contributions to an official and later win a contract managing pension assets.

Even if both decisions were technically legal, the appearance of influence can damage confidence in how public money is allocated.

Supporters of the existing rule argue that strong restrictions help prevent exactly that kind of relationship.

The SEC now believes existing fraud, fiduciary and ethics rules are enough.

That debate will likely become the central issue during the public-comment period.

This Is Not Final Yet

The rule has not been repealed yet.

The SEC has issued a proposal.

The public will have 60 days after publication in the Federal Register to submit comments.

After reviewing those comments, the Commission could approve the repeal, modify it or decide not to proceed.

So investment firms cannot simply abandon their existing compliance procedures today.

The current rule remains in effect unless and until the SEC formally rescinds it.

What It Means for Businesses

For investment firms that manage — or want to manage — government money, this could remove one of the most cumbersome political-compliance requirements in the industry.

It could also give employees more freedom to participate personally in state and local politics without worrying that a small contribution could cost their company a major government contract.

But it also moves more responsibility onto firms and government officials themselves.

Without the automatic two-year penalty, regulators would rely more heavily on traditional anti-fraud and anti-corruption enforcement to police genuine pay-to-play arrangements.

The SEC’s message is essentially this:

Punish actual corruption, but stop treating every political contribution as a potential securities-law violation.

If the proposal becomes final, it would mark a significant change in how Wall Street firms navigate the intersection of politics and public money.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

VANCOUVER — Lululemon delivered a sharp warning after Thursday’s market close, cutting its annual sales and profit forecasts as competition from newer athletic brands continues to pressure one of the most successful premium apparel companies of the past decade.

The company now expects fiscal 2026 revenue to decline 5% to 7%.

Previously, Lululemon had expected sales to be roughly flat or fall by no more than 1%.

Its projected earnings were also cut substantially, with the company now expecting $9.48 to $9.73 per share, down from its previous forecast of $10.95 to $11.15.

Shares fell approximately 15% in after-hours trading following the announcement.

The decline adds to what has already been a brutal stretch for investors.

Lululemon shares have lost nearly 69% of their value since the beginning of 2025, a dramatic reversal for a company once considered one of the strongest growth brands in global retail.

The problem is increasingly bigger than one disappointing quarter.

Lululemon is facing stronger competition from brands including Alo Yoga and Vuori, which have been gaining customers in North America and challenging Lululemon’s long-standing dominance in premium athletic apparel.

That matters because premium retail depends heavily on perception.

Consumers are willing to pay significantly more for leggings, workout clothing and casual apparel when they believe one brand is meaningfully more desirable than its competitors.

Once multiple brands begin offering similar products with comparable status, design and quality, that pricing power becomes harder to defend.

The consumer is also becoming more selective.

Households continue spending, but higher food, housing, borrowing and energy costs are forcing more shoppers to think carefully about discretionary purchases.

A customer who once bought several $100-plus items without much hesitation may now compare prices, wait for promotions or try a competing brand.

That puts pressure on both sales and margins.

Lululemon’s leadership situation adds another layer of uncertainty.

Incoming CEO Heidi O’Neill, a former Nike executive, is preparing to take control following a bruising proxy fight involving company founder Chip Wilson.

She inherits a brand that remains globally recognized and highly profitable but now needs to prove it can regain momentum.

The challenge is not simply cutting costs.

Lululemon needs to convince consumers that its products remain distinctive enough to command premium prices while also expanding into new categories and international markets without weakening the brand.

For retailers across the economy, the lesson is important.

A strong brand is not permanent protection.

Competitors can copy product categories, recruit talent, build social-media followings and create new customer loyalties surprisingly quickly.

Once that happens, the incumbent has to earn the premium all over again.

Friday’s regular trading session will provide the first full market reaction to Lululemon’s reduced outlook.

But Thursday night already delivered the larger message.

The premium consumer is still spending.

Lululemon is simply no longer guaranteed to receive that money.

JBizNews Desk | Vancouver

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — America’s trade deficit widened sharply in July, but the reason matters: U.S. businesses were importing billions of dollars more in computers, semiconductors and other capital equipment as corporate investment — particularly around artificial intelligence and technology infrastructure — continued to accelerate.

The U.S. trade deficit increased 24.4% in July to $88.6 billion, up from a revised $71.2 billion in June.

Exports fell 2.1% to $310.7 billion, while imports rose 2.8% to $399.3 billion.

At first glance, the widening deficit looks like another sign that America is buying significantly more goods from overseas than it is selling abroad.

But underneath the headline was a particularly important development for businesses.

Imports of capital goods surged by $14.4 billion in a single month.

Computer imports increased $6.9 billion. Imports of computer accessories jumped another $6.6 billion, while semiconductor imports increased approximately $1.2 billion.

That means much of the increase was not simply American consumers buying additional clothing, televisions or household products.

Businesses were buying equipment.

That distinction matters.

When a company imports a computer server, semiconductor or other piece of capital equipment, it is generally purchasing something intended to produce future revenue.

The July numbers fit directly into the enormous investment boom surrounding artificial intelligence, cloud computing, data centers and semiconductor manufacturing.

Technology companies and corporations across the economy are purchasing increasingly sophisticated computing equipment as they build AI infrastructure and modernize existing operations.

The result can make the trade deficit look worse today while potentially increasing productive capacity tomorrow.

There was still weakness elsewhere in the report.

U.S. exports declined by $6.6 billion, with exports of industrial supplies and materials falling approximately $8.7 billion.

A larger trade deficit can also weigh on gross domestic product because imports subtract from GDP calculations when they grow faster than exports.

But the longer-term trade picture remains considerably different from the monthly headline.

Through July, the U.S. goods and services deficit was approximately $188.4 billion, or 29.6%, smaller than during the same period last year.

Exports during the first seven months of the year increased roughly 12%, while imports rose only about 1.9%.

For business owners and investors, July’s report therefore sends two messages at once.

America is again importing substantially more than it exports.

But businesses are also pouring money into the equipment they believe they will need for the next stage of economic growth.

The question now is whether those billions of dollars being spent on computers, chips and infrastructure generate enough productivity and revenue to justify the investment.

That will ultimately matter much more than one month’s trade deficit.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. Markets — Wall Street Surges as Rate-Hike Fears Ease

Stocks staged their strongest rally of the week Thursday as investors pulled back from expectations that the Federal Reserve will raise interest rates at its September meeting.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average jumped 645.71 points, or 1.22%, to close at 53,707.66.

The S&P 500 gained 88.54 points, or 1.15%, to 7,755.14, while the Nasdaq Composite surged 410.31 points, or 1.57%, to 26,628.14

The immediate catalyst was Federal Reserve Governor Christopher Waller signaling that he could support leaving rates unchanged if upcoming inflation readings show price pressures easing. Markets cut the probability of a September rate increase to roughly 50% from 63% a day earlier. That development was already part of JBizNews coverage Thursday, but its impact dominated the closing numbers. 

Bond yields retreated with the 10-year Treasury around 4.75%, providing some relief to rate-sensitive stocks. Oil remained expensive, however: Brent crude settled at $95.52 a barrel, while U.S. crude finished at $91.30

For businesses, Thursday’s rally should not be confused with a sudden disappearance of inflation risk. Financing costs eased slightly, but energy remains expensive and new economic data showed businesses paying some of the fastest-rising service-sector input costs in years.

Economy & Main Street — Services Boom While Businesses Face a New Cost Squeeze

America’s enormous services economy accelerated unexpectedly in August.

The Institute for Supply Management’s services index climbed to 55.4 from 54.1 in July, comfortably above the 50 level separating expansion from contraction.

More importantly, new orders surged to 60.9, their highest level since February 2023.

That is a significant sign that consumer spending and business demand remain stronger than many feared.

But there was a problem buried inside the numbers.

The index measuring what services companies are paying for supplies and other inputs jumped to 72.6, its highest level since August 2022

That combination — strong demand and rising costs — is precisely what makes the Federal Reserve’s next decision difficult.

Businesses are still receiving orders, but inflationary pressures are not disappearing.

For restaurant owners, contractors, professional-service companies, transportation operators and countless other Main Street businesses, this can mean another period in which expenses increase faster than customers are willing to accept price increases.

Jobs — Employers Still Aren’t Firing, but They Aren’t Hiring Much Either

Only 206,000 Americans filed new unemployment claims last week, an increase of just 2,000 and still near the low end of this year’s range.

Continuing unemployment claims rose to 1.779 million.

The numbers reinforce what economists increasingly describe as a slow-hire, slow-fire labor market.

Companies are reluctant to conduct large layoffs, but they are also becoming much more cautious about adding workers.

Planned job cuts announced by U.S. companies increased 58% in August to 52,881, although that was still the lowest August total since 2022. 

There was one encouraging development for employers.

Revised government figures showed nonfarm worker productivity rose at a 1.4% annualized rate during the second quarter, while unit labor costs increased only 1.2%.

Manufacturing productivity rose an even stronger 2.4%, while manufacturing unit labor costs actually declined 0.3%. 

That matters because greater productivity allows companies to produce more without increasing labor expenses at the same rate.

If artificial intelligence and automation eventually deliver the productivity improvements businesses are investing billions of dollars to achieve, that could become one of the most important forces helping control inflation over the next several years.

Trade — U.S. Deficit Jumps 24% as Companies Import Record Capital Equipment

The U.S. trade deficit widened 24.4% in July to $88.6 billion.

Imports climbed to $399.3 billion, including a record $140.3 billion of capital-goods imports as companies brought in computers, semiconductor equipment and other machinery tied partly to the enormous AI infrastructure buildout.

Exports, meanwhile, declined to $310.7 billion. 

This is an important economic story because the investment boom is clearly real — American businesses are buying enormous amounts of equipment.

But much of that equipment is still coming from overseas.

Despite aggressive tariffs designed to reduce America’s dependence on imports, the United States recorded record goods deficits with several major trading partners during July.

The widening deficit could also subtract substantially from third-quarter economic growth after trade already reduced second-quarter GDP growth by more than a percentage point.

For businesses, the message is mixed: capital spending remains strong, particularly around AI, but the reshoring of the supply chain remains far from complete.

Technology & Cloud — Microsoft Finally Reveals How Big Azure Really Is

For years Microsoft told investors how quickly Azure was growing without revealing precisely how much revenue the cloud business produced.

That has now changed.

Microsoft disclosed that Azure generated $29.4 billion in its latest quarter and $101.9 billion during its fiscal year ended June 30.

That puts Azure behind Amazon Web Services, which recently generated $42.2 billion in quarterly cloud revenue, but ahead of Google Cloud’s $24.8 billion. 

Microsoft is also reorganizing how it reports its entire business.

Instead of three traditional operating divisions, it will increasingly divide the company between “Agents and Infra” — encompassing cloud computing, AI and business software — and “Devices and Consumer,” which includes Windows, Xbox and advertising.

That accounting change says something important about where Microsoft believes its future lies.

The company no longer wants investors thinking primarily about Windows, Office and Xbox as separate franchises. It increasingly wants Wall Street measuring Microsoft as an AI and cloud infrastructure company.

Why it mattered today: Investors finally have a direct dollar figure against which they can judge whether Microsoft’s enormous spending on data centers, chips and AI infrastructure is translating into actual Azure revenue.

And at more than $100 billion annually, Azure is already one of the largest standalone technology businesses in the world.

Banking & Fintech — Revolut Moves Closer to Becoming a Full U.S. Bank

British financial-technology giant Revolut received conditional approval for a U.S. national bank charter, moving it much closer to competing directly with traditional American banks.

Revolut has approximately 80 million customers worldwide and plans to establish its U.S. bank in Stamford, Connecticut.

The company expects to inject about $95 million in capital and aims to launch the bank during the first half of 2027, pending additional approvals from the FDIC and Federal Reserve.

Its planned products include checking accounts, installment loans, credit cards, foreign exchange services and eventually a stablecoin. 

This is bigger than another banking license.

Fintech companies spent years building apps that sat on top of the traditional banking system. Revolut is now moving directly into the banking business itself.

That means traditional banks — particularly institutions competing for younger customers, international businesses and digital-first consumers — could face another enormous competitor.

It also brings stablecoins one step closer to mainstream financial services.

Trade & Equipment — New Drone Tariffs Take Effect Today

A major new U.S. tariff regime on imported commercial drones took effect Thursday.

Beginning at 12:01 a.m. September 3, the United States imposed a 100% tariff on certain larger drones, drones equipped with thermal-imaging technology, docking stations and designated critical components.

Certain smaller imported drones are subject to a 25% tariff.

Products meeting specific origin requirements from the European Union, Japan, South Korea, Taiwan, Switzerland and Liechtenstein can face rates no higher than 15%, while qualifying British products can receive a 10% rate. 

The administration argues that America has become dangerously dependent on foreign drone manufacturers and components and wants the tariffs to accelerate domestic production.

But the business impact goes far beyond defense contractors.

Drones are now routinely used by construction companies, roofers, utilities, agriculture businesses, telecommunications companies, surveyors, real-estate operators, infrastructure companies and emergency services.

For companies buying specialized imported equipment, particularly larger or thermal-imaging drones, acquisition costs could change dramatically beginning today.

Domestic drone manufacturers stand to benefit from protection against foreign competitors, but even American manufacturers rely heavily on imported motors, batteries, electronic controls and other components.

So the transition may create higher costs before a larger domestic supply chain develops.

Main Street Retail — Convenience Stores Warn New SNAP Rule Could Force Thousands Out

A federal food-assistance rule scheduled to take effect November 4 is creating a significant issue for convenience-store operators.

Nearly 250 stores and several major trade associations are asking the Agriculture Department to delay enforcement, warning that thousands of stores could otherwise stop accepting SNAP food benefits.

Under the new requirements, participating retailers must carry at least seven varieties in each of four staple categories: dairy, fruits or vegetables, grains and protein.

Stores that fail to comply can lose their authorization to accept SNAP. 

More than 117,000 U.S. convenience stores currently participate in SNAP, representing nearly half of all SNAP-authorized retailers.

Operators say they need additional time to locate products, negotiate with distributors, adjust shelf space and determine how to handle fresh foods that can spoil much faster than traditional convenience-store inventory.

Major chains including outlets of 7-Eleven, Wawa, Sheetz and RaceTrac joined smaller operators in seeking a six-month delay after the government issues additional guidance. 

Why it mattered today: This is a textbook example of a regulation that can sound relatively simple in Washington but become expensive at store level.

For small operators, carrying more perishable inventory means refrigeration, shelf space, additional deliveries and spoilage.

For consumers, particularly people working overnight shifts or living in communities without nearby supermarkets, losing SNAP access at convenience stores could substantially reduce where they can buy food.

Transportation — Autonomous Trucking Heads Back to Wall Street

Autonomous-trucking software developer PlusAI agreed to go public through a SPAC transaction valuing the company at approximately $800 million before new investment.

The transaction could provide PlusAI with about $300 million in additional capital.

Its SuperDrive system is designed to operate commercial trucks at Level 4 autonomy, meaning vehicles can drive without human intervention under defined operating conditions.

The company is targeting commercial deployment beginning in 2027 and is already operating autonomous freight routes in Texas with transportation partners. 

PlusAI says its development platform has generated $25 million in revenue and it is targeting between $40 million and $50 million of contracted revenue during 2026.

Why it mattered today: Autonomous trucking is moving from years of demonstrations toward an actual commercial-business model.

Trucking is one of the largest expenses in the American supply chain. If autonomous trucks can operate longer hours while reducing labor requirements, the technology could eventually lower freight costs for retailers, manufacturers and distributors.

But investors are again being asked to put substantial valuations on companies whose commercial autonomous operations remain very small.

That makes PlusAI another test of whether public markets are ready to finance the next stage of autonomous transportation.

Global Autos — Volkswagen Says Up to 50,000 Jobs Could Go

Volkswagen’s supervisory board approved a sweeping restructuring plan Thursday that could ultimately eliminate around 50,000 jobs across the company, including management positions.

The automaker said existing cost-cutting programs are no longer enough and that a broader adjustment to its global workforce is necessary.

It did not specify exactly where or when all the cuts would occur. 

Volkswagen pointed to changing demand, technological disruption and growing global competition.

The significance extends beyond one automaker.

Traditional manufacturers are being forced to finance electric vehicles, battery platforms and increasingly expensive vehicle software while simultaneously defending market share against Chinese manufacturers and newer competitors.

A restructuring involving roughly 50,000 positions at one of the largest automakers in the world shows just how disruptive that transition has become.

Suppliers, factories and entire manufacturing regions that depend on Volkswagen could ultimately feel the effects.

After the Bell — Lululemon Cuts Its Outlook Again

Lululemon delivered another warning about the premium consumer immediately after Thursday’s closing bell.

The athletic-apparel company now expects full-year revenue to fall between 5% and 7%, substantially worse than its previous forecast for sales ranging from flat to down 1%.

It also reduced its expected earnings to $9.48 to $9.73 per share, down from its previous range of $10.95 to $11.15. 

Incoming CEO Heidi O’Neill is inheriting a company facing both softer consumer demand and increasingly aggressive competition from younger athletic and lifestyle brands.

Why it mattered today: Lululemon built one of retail’s strongest premium brands by convincing consumers to pay substantially more for apparel.

If even those customers are becoming more selective, it is another indication that discretionary spending is becoming harder to capture.

It also shows that the consumer slowdown is not limited to lower-income households or discount retail.

Key Market Movers

Company

Thursday Move

What Happened

Snowflake

+20.2%

Strong revenue outlook reignited enthusiasm for enterprise AI and cloud software

Robinhood

+16.1%

Crypto-related stocks rallied alongside bitcoin

Strategy

+15.0%

Bitcoin rebound lifted crypto-linked shares

Coinbase

+10.3%

Cryptocurrency markets rebounded

Nvidia

+2.6%

Investors reacted to its Hugging Face acquisition

Broadcom

-3.7%

Revenue guidance failed to meet extremely high AI expectations

The contrast between Snowflake and Broadcom was important.

Investors remain willing to reward companies benefiting from AI spending very aggressively — but expectations have become so high that even strong growth can produce a selloff when forecasts fall slightly short. 

What to Watch Friday, September 4

The most important economic report of the week arrives Friday at 8:30 a.m. ET, when the Labor Department releases the official August employment report. The Bureau of Labor Statistics confirms the September 4 release time. 

Economists surveyed by Reuters expect the economy to have added approximately 56,000 jobs in August, following a 23,000 decline in July, with unemployment remaining around 4.1%

That report could reverse Thursday’s entire interest-rate move.

A substantially stronger jobs number would give the Fed more room to concentrate on inflation and could quickly revive expectations for a September rate increase.

A weak report — particularly another negative payroll number — would raise a very different concern: that the labor market is deteriorating faster than investors realized.

Friday is also the final U.S. trading session before the Labor Day weekend, with U.S. equity markets closed Monday, September 7.

That makes Friday afternoon positioning especially important.

Investors will be heading into a three-day weekend with Brent crude still above $95 and the Middle East conflict capable of producing a major oil-price move while U.S. markets are closed.

Bottom Line

Thursday produced exactly the kind of contradiction businesses and investors are confronting heading into the fall.

Wall Street rallied because investors became less afraid of another immediate rate increase. But the economic data simultaneously showed strong service-sector demand, the highest service input-cost pressures in years and continued expensive energy.

At the corporate level, money is still pouring into cloud computing, AI infrastructure and autonomous transportation, while consumer businesses and global manufacturers are being forced to restructure, cut forecasts and rethink costs.

For business owners, the economy is not signaling recession.

It is signaling something potentially more complicated: demand remains alive, but labor, energy, financing, regulation and imported equipment remain expensive.

Friday’s jobs report will tell investors whether Thursday’s relief rally has a foundation — or whether another major repricing of interest rates begins before the long weekend.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — America’s largest automakers are pressing Congress to move quickly on legislation that would effectively lock Chinese-made connected vehicles and key Chinese automotive technology out of the U.S. market.

The Alliance for Automotive Innovation, which represents companies including General Motors, Ford, Toyota, Volkswagen, Hyundai, Honda and Stellantis, urged lawmakers Thursday to turn existing restrictions into permanent law before Congress adjourns.

The issue goes far beyond tariffs.

Modern vehicles are increasingly computers on wheels.

They collect information through cameras, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, cellular connections, navigation systems and other sensors. Automakers and national-security officials have raised concerns that Chinese-controlled vehicle software or hardware could potentially create access to sensitive data or critical systems.

Existing federal rules already make it extremely difficult for Chinese automakers to sell connected vehicles in the United States.

The new push would strengthen those restrictions and make them much harder for a future administration to reverse.

That could effectively create a long-term barrier preventing major Chinese manufacturers such as BYD and SAIC Motor from entering the American passenger-vehicle market.

For U.S. automakers, however, the issue is not only security.

It is also competition.

Chinese manufacturers have become some of the fastest-growing and most aggressive automakers in the world, particularly in electric and software-heavy vehicles.

BYD has grown into one of the world’s largest electric-vehicle manufacturers by combining low production costs, battery technology and aggressive pricing.

Ford CEO Jim Farley has repeatedly warned about the strength of China’s auto industry and the challenge it presents to established Western manufacturers.

Chinese automakers are already expanding rapidly in Europe, Latin America, Asia and other markets.

The United States remains one of the few major automotive markets where their presence is extremely limited.

That makes the congressional fight important.

If Chinese manufacturers were eventually allowed broad access to the U.S. market, they could introduce lower-priced vehicles that place significant pressure on American, Japanese, Korean and European manufacturers already operating here.

The industry is therefore asking Washington to close the door before that competition develops.

One Senate proposal would codify federal rules restricting Chinese-connected vehicle software and hardware while preventing the Commerce Department from granting Chinese manufacturers exemptions that could allow them to sell or manufacture vehicles in the United States.

The restrictions are already having consequences.

Polestar, the electric-vehicle manufacturer controlled by China’s Geely, has said it plans to stop selling new vehicles in the United States beginning with the 2027 model year because of the regulatory environment.

The legislation remains complicated because global automakers themselves have extensive ties to China.

Some Western manufacturers operate joint ventures with Chinese companies, source components there or have Chinese investors.

That means lawmakers must decide how broadly to define a Chinese connection without unintentionally restricting vehicles made by established Western brands.

But the larger direction of U.S. policy is increasingly clear.

Washington is treating automobiles not simply as imported consumer products but as connected technology platforms with national-security implications.

And the auto industry itself is largely supporting that approach.

For American automakers, a permanent restriction would accomplish something equally important commercially:

It would prevent some of their fastest-growing global competitors from entering the world’s most profitable major vehicle market.

The debate over Chinese cars is therefore becoming a combination of national security, technology policy and industrial protection.

And if Congress acts, the competitive structure of the American auto industry could effectively be locked in before China’s biggest automakers ever get a serious chance to enter it.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal Reserve Governor Christopher Waller said Thursday he could support leaving interest rates unchanged at the Fed’s September meeting if upcoming inflation data confirm that price pressures are finally moving lower.

That is an important shift.

Markets had moved sharply toward expecting another rate increase after higher oil prices and renewed inflation concerns rattled bonds and pushed Treasury yields higher.

Waller is now saying a September hike is not automatic.

His decision will depend heavily on the inflation data arriving before the Federal Open Market Committee meets on September 15 and 16.

What Waller Is Seeing

Waller acknowledged that inflation remains meaningfully above the Federal Reserve’s 2% target.

But he also said recent data are showing something policymakers have been waiting for:

Signs that inflation may finally be cooling again.

That distinction matters.

The Fed does not need inflation to already be at 2% before it stops raising rates.

It needs confidence that inflation is moving convincingly toward 2%.

If August inflation data continue that trend, Waller said maintaining the current federal-funds target range of 3.50% to 3.75% could be appropriate.

If inflation comes in hotter than expected, however, he remains prepared to support another rate increase.

Why Waller Matters

Waller is only one member of the Federal Reserve’s policy-setting committee.

But his comments matter because they show that policymakers are not united behind another hike.

Fed Chairman Kevin Warsh has taken a tougher tone on inflation, warning that the central bank must respond if price pressures remain too high.

Waller is emphasizing patience.

That debate will become increasingly important over the next two weeks.

The Fed is trying to determine whether the recent inflation pressure is becoming embedded throughout the economy or remains largely connected to temporary shocks such as energy prices and tariffs.

Oil Complicates Everything

The biggest new problem is energy.

Oil prices have jumped as conflict involving Iran has disrupted normal shipping through the Gulf.

Higher energy prices can quickly reach businesses and consumers through gasoline, diesel, aviation fuel, transportation and electricity costs.

The Fed cannot produce more oil.

Raising interest rates does not reopen a shipping lane.

But policymakers worry that if higher energy costs remain in place long enough, businesses will begin passing those expenses into broader prices.

That is when an energy shock can become general inflation.

Waller appears willing to wait for evidence that this is actually happening before voting for another rate increase.

The Labor Market Gives the Fed Room to Wait

The employment picture is also giving policymakers conflicting signals.

Layoffs remain relatively low.

Weekly unemployment claims released Thursday were just 206,000, suggesting companies are not broadly cutting workers.

But hiring has slowed substantially.

That creates what economists increasingly describe as a no-hire, no-fire economy.

Businesses are holding onto the workers they already have but are becoming more cautious about adding new ones.

For the Fed, that matters.

If policymakers raise rates too aggressively while hiring is already cooling, they risk weakening the labor market unnecessarily.

Why Friday’s Jobs Report Matters

The next major test arrives Friday with the August employment report.

Investors will be watching:

  • How many jobs the economy created
  • Whether unemployment increased
  • How quickly wages are rising
  • Whether previous months are revised

A surprisingly strong labor report combined with stubborn inflation could strengthen the case for another hike.

A weaker employment report combined with cooler inflation would make a pause much easier to justify.

Rates Are Already Restrictive

Waller also noted that interest rates are already restraining the economy.

The federal-funds rate currently stands at 3.50% to 3.75%.

That means the question facing policymakers is no longer whether monetary policy should be tight.

It already is.

The question is whether it needs to become even tighter.

Every additional quarter-point increase makes mortgages, business loans, credit cards and other financing more expensive.

That can slow investment and consumer spending.

What It Means for Businesses

For business owners, Waller’s comments reduce — but do not eliminate — the risk of another immediate jump in borrowing costs.

Companies financing equipment, inventory, real estate or expansion have been watching Treasury yields and bank lending rates move higher as markets anticipated another Fed increase.

If the central bank pauses in September, some of that pressure could stabilize.

If inflation comes in hot and the Fed hikes again, borrowing conditions would tighten further.

That makes the next inflation reports unusually important.

The Fed is no longer simply fighting inflation.

It is trying to decide whether the inflation problem is serious enough to justify putting additional pressure on an economy where hiring is already slowing.

Waller’s message Thursday was essentially:

Do not raise rates simply because markets expect it. Wait for the data to prove another increase is necessary.

For businesses and investors, that makes September’s Fed decision much less settled than it appeared only days ago.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Nvidia is making one of the biggest acquisitions in its history, agreeing Thursday to buy Hugging Face for $12.93 billion in a deal that gives the world’s dominant AI-chip company control of one of the most important software platforms in artificial intelligence.

The price alone makes the deal significant.

But strategically, it is even bigger.

Hugging Face has become one of the central gathering places for the open-source AI community, where developers, researchers and companies share models, datasets and tools used to build artificial intelligence systems.

Nvidia already dominates the hardware side of AI.

Now it is buying much deeper into the software and developer ecosystem.

What Nvidia Is Actually Buying

Hugging Face is not a chip company.

It is a platform.

Developers use it to discover, test, distribute and collaborate on AI models.

That makes it similar, in some ways, to what GitHub became for software development.

Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang said the acquisition will allow the companies to scale Hugging Face’s platform, improve infrastructure and expand access to AI tools around the world.

Importantly, Nvidia said Hugging Face will remain open and developers will not be required to use Nvidia chips.

That commitment matters because Hugging Face’s value comes partly from being a neutral platform used across the AI industry.

If developers believed the platform would suddenly become Nvidia-only, much of that value could disappear.

Why Nvidia Wants It

Nvidia’s biggest strength has been its hardware.

Its GPUs power many of the world’s most advanced AI systems.

But the AI industry is changing.

Microsoft, Amazon, Google, Meta and other large technology companies are increasingly designing their own chips.

That means Nvidia cannot assume that every large customer will remain completely dependent on its hardware forever.

Buying Hugging Face gives Nvidia something different:

direct access to the developers building the next generation of AI applications.

Instead of only selling the machines that run AI, Nvidia now gets a much larger role in the software ecosystem where those AI systems are created.

That makes the company harder to bypass.

The Developer Network Is the Real Prize

Hugging Face has built a massive community around open AI models.

That community is valuable because the companies that control developer ecosystems often gain enormous influence over how technology evolves.

Microsoft understood that when it bought GitHub.

Google understood it with Android.

Amazon understood it with AWS.

Now Nvidia is making a similar bet.

If developers build, test and distribute AI through a platform Nvidia owns, Nvidia gains insight into what kinds of models are growing fastest, what infrastructure developers need and where future demand may be heading.

That information is enormously valuable.

Why This Is Bigger Than a Normal Acquisition

Nvidia has already become one of the most valuable companies in the world because AI companies need its chips.

But chips are only one layer of the AI economy.

There are models.

There are developer tools.

There is cloud infrastructure.

There is data.

There are applications.

Owning Hugging Face gives Nvidia a much stronger position in several of those layers at once.

It also gives the company a hedge.

If customers eventually reduce their dependence on Nvidia GPUs, Nvidia could still remain deeply embedded in how AI is built and distributed.

Could Regulators Push Back?

A nearly $13 billion acquisition by the dominant AI-chip company is likely to attract attention from competition regulators.

Nvidia already holds enormous power in AI infrastructure.

Adding one of the world’s most important AI-development platforms could raise questions about whether the company has too much influence over both the hardware and software sides of the industry.

That does not mean regulators will block the deal.

But they are likely to examine whether Nvidia could favor its own hardware, restrict competitors or use Hugging Face’s position to strengthen its dominance elsewhere.

Nvidia’s early promise that Hugging Face will remain open appears designed partly to address exactly that concern.

What It Means for Businesses

For companies using AI, the deal shows how quickly the industry is consolidating.

The biggest technology companies are no longer competing only for chips or cloud customers.

They are competing to own the entire stack.

That includes:

  • The chips
  • The servers
  • The cloud
  • The models
  • The developer tools
  • The applications

For startups, that can bring advantages.

A larger Nvidia-backed Hugging Face could mean better infrastructure, more reliable services and more investment in open AI tools.

But it also means yet another important part of the AI ecosystem will belong to one of the industry’s largest companies.

Nvidia spent the first phase of the AI boom selling the picks and shovels.

With this deal, it is buying part of the marketplace where everyone using those tools comes together.

And at $12.93 billion, Nvidia is showing how valuable that marketplace has become.

JBizNews Desk | Silicon Valley

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Gulf of Aden is only about a hundred miles wide at its narrowest point.

Yemen sits on one side.

Somalia sits on the other.

And the armed groups controlling territory along both shores are increasingly cooperating in ways that could make one of the world’s most important shipping corridors even more dangerous.

American and United Nations assessments describe a relationship between Yemen’s Houthis and Somalia’s al-Shabaab that has moved beyond shared hostility toward the West and into something more practical:

weapons, training, money and smuggling.

The Houthis have missiles, drones and battlefield experience.

Al-Shabaab has cash, manpower and deep smuggling networks across East Africa.

Each side has something the other wants.

And for global shipping, that is the part that matters.

What Has Changed

The Houthis have spent years attacking commercial and military vessels in and around the Red Sea using drones, missiles and other weapons.

Al-Shabaab, meanwhile, has mainly focused its operations inside Somalia and East Africa.

But U.N. reporting and U.S. assessments indicate that members of al-Shabaab have traveled to Yemen for training in drone operations and explosives.

The Houthis have also reportedly supplied armed drones, while al-Shabaab has sought more advanced weapons, including guided missiles.

That would represent a major escalation.

Until now, al-Shabaab has used drones mostly for surveillance and battlefield intelligence.

A group capable of accurately striking a moving commercial vessel at sea would be dealing with a completely different level of firepower.

Why the Geography Matters

The Gulf of Aden feeds directly into the Bab el-Mandeb Strait, one of the world’s most important maritime chokepoints.

Ships traveling between Asia and Europe use the route to reach the Red Sea and then the Suez Canal.

That means everything from electronics and clothing to machinery, food and energy passes through the area.

Until now, much of the military threat to commercial shipping has come from the Yemeni side.

If armed groups on both shores gain the ability to threaten vessels, there is effectively no safe coastline to favor.

That creates a much more complicated security problem for shipping companies.

Somali Piracy Is Also Returning

The danger is not limited to missiles and drones.

Piracy off Somalia has also begun rising again.

Several vessels have been seized this year, and criminal groups have again demanded multimillion-dollar ransoms from shipowners.

At its peak in 2011, Somali piracy cost shipping companies and governments roughly $7 billion a year through ransom payments, security costs, rerouting and higher insurance premiums.

The difference today is that piracy is returning at the same time that warships in the region are also dealing with missile and drone threats.

That divides naval resources.

A destroyer watching for incoming missiles cannot simultaneously patrol every stretch of coastline for small pirate boats.

What It Means for Shipping Companies

The immediate commercial response is familiar.

When the Red Sea becomes too dangerous, shipping companies send vessels around the Cape of Good Hope instead.

That route is much longer.

It can add roughly ten days to a voyage between Asia and Europe.

It also means more fuel, more crew time and higher insurance costs.

Every extra day at sea costs money.

Those costs eventually work their way into freight rates and, later, into the prices paid by businesses and consumers.

Two Chokepoints Are Under Pressure at Once

The timing is especially important because the Red Sea is not the only major maritime route under pressure.

The Strait of Hormuz is also under strain because of the broader conflict involving Iran and the Gulf.

That means two of the world’s most important shipping chokepoints are facing elevated risk at the same time.

Hormuz affects oil and gas shipments.

Bab el-Mandeb affects traffic moving between Asia, Europe and the Mediterranean.

Pressure on both creates a much bigger problem for global trade.

Why This Partnership Matters

The Houthi-al-Shabaab relationship is dangerous not because the groups suddenly became ideological allies.

They are not.

The Houthis are Shiite and backed by Iran.

Al-Shabaab is Sunni and affiliated with al-Qaeda.

Their cooperation appears to be transactional.

That can actually make it more durable.

They do not need to agree on religion, politics or long-term goals.

They only need to agree that weapons, money and training are useful.

What It Means for Businesses

For importers, retailers and manufacturers in the United States and Europe, the key risk is higher transportation costs.

Longer shipping routes mean higher fuel bills.

Higher risk means more expensive insurance.

Delays mean inventories arrive later.

And companies that rely on just-in-time supply chains have less room for error.

The Red Sea was already one of the most fragile parts of global trade.

If the threat expands from one coastline to both, the economics become much harder.

The question is no longer only whether a ship can safely get past Yemen.

It is whether the entire corridor between Yemen and Somalia can remain reliably open.

That is a much bigger problem.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. Markets — Wall Street Rebounds, but Oil and Rates Still Hang Over the Rally

Wall Street snapped a three-day losing streak Wednesday as investors moved back into technology, semiconductors and other beaten-down sectors, even as the Iran conflict kept oil near six-week highs and borrowing costs remained elevated.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 53,061.89, up 295.01 points, or 0.56%. The S&P 500 gained 35.16 points, or 0.46%, to 7,666.63, while the Nasdaq Composite rose 118.05 points, or 0.45%, to 26,217.83. Small-cap stocks performed even better, with the Russell 2000 up about 1.1%. 

Brent crude settled 1% higher at $95.63 a barrel, while U.S. crude finished at $91.01. The 10-year Treasury yield eased slightly to about 4.78%, but remains high enough to keep pressure on mortgages, commercial borrowing and corporate financing. 

Dell was particularly important. Its surge showed that investors still believe the enormous buildout of AI computing infrastructure has considerable room to run, despite growing questions about how much capital is being poured into the sector. 

Economy & Interest Rates — Fed Finds Growth, Inflation and a More Cautious Consumer

The Federal Reserve’s latest Beige Book offered a remarkably mixed picture of the American economy.

Economic activity increased modestly across the country, employment rose slightly and prices continued increasing at a moderate pace. Seven of the Fed’s 12 regional districts reported slight-to-modest employment gains, while five reported little change.

The most important detail for businesses may have been what companies said about their customers.

Businesses in several regions reported that consumers have become increasingly sensitive to prices, limiting companies’ ability to pass higher costs along. Businesses also expressed uncertainty about energy prices, government policy and international conflict. 

That creates a difficult situation for the Fed.

Inflation remains above its 2% target, and several policymakers believe another rate increase may be necessary. But hiring is cooling and consumers are increasingly resisting price increases.

Why it mattered today: Businesses may continue facing higher wages, energy and financing expenses without having the pricing power they previously had to pass those costs on to customers.

That margin squeeze — rather than a dramatic recession — could become one of the more important business risks heading into the fall.

Electricity & Infrastructure — Federal Government Warns of Blackout Risk Across Major U.S. Grids

An extreme heat wave pushed some of America’s largest electricity systems close enough to their limits Wednesday that the Department of Energy authorized emergency measures to help prevent blackouts.

The PJM Interconnection, which supplies electricity to roughly 67 million people from Washington through parts of the Midwest, was authorized to call on backup generation before reaching a Level 3 emergency — one of the final stages before rotating blackouts can become necessary.

The Midcontinent Independent System Operator, covering portions of 15 states, expected peak demand around 121 gigawatts, approaching its all-time record of 127.1 gigawatts. Some utilities asked customers to raise thermostats and reduce unnecessary electricity use. 

Why it mattered today: Electricity reliability is becoming an economic issue, not simply a utility issue.

Manufacturing plants, warehouses, restaurants, retailers, hospitals and data centers all depend on uninterrupted power. At the same time, AI data centers are adding enormous new electricity demand to grids already dealing with summer peaks and aging infrastructure.

The U.S. now faces the challenge of simultaneously electrifying more of the economy, building enormous AI computing facilities and keeping enough reserve power available during extreme weather.

That will require billions of dollars in generation, transmission, transformers, natural gas infrastructure and grid modernization.

Small Business & Private Equity — A Garage-Door Company Is Worth About $2 Billion

KKR agreed to acquire A1 Garage Door Service for roughly $2 billion, according to people familiar with the transaction.

That number is noteworthy because A1 is not a software company, semiconductor manufacturer or financial institution.

It repairs and replaces residential garage doors.

Founded in Phoenix in 2007, A1 has expanded into roughly 20 states. The transaction is part of a much larger private-equity push into plumbing, HVAC, electrical work, pest control, foundation repair, roofing and other fragmented home-service businesses. 

KKR already owns or invests in major home-service platforms including Neighborly and Groundworks, while competing private-equity firms are pursuing similar strategies.

Why it mattered today: Private equity increasingly sees ordinary local service businesses as attractive financial assets because they generate recurring demand, relatively predictable cash flow and opportunities to combine hundreds of smaller operators into regional or national platforms.

For independent business owners, that means the local plumber, HVAC contractor, roofer or garage-door company is increasingly competing against businesses backed by billions of dollars of institutional capital.

It also means owners of well-run service companies may find their businesses worth substantially more than they expected as acquisition competition intensifies.

U.S. Manufacturing — Taiwan Companies Prepare Another $20 Billion American Investment Wave

Taiwanese companies are planning approximately $20 billion in additional U.S. investments, driven largely by extraordinary demand for artificial intelligence and semiconductor products.

The new projects would come on top of Taiwan Semiconductor Manufacturing Co.’s enormous U.S. expansion. TSMC in July announced another $100 billion investment in Arizona, bringing its planned U.S. investment to roughly $265 billion.

Taiwan’s economy minister said AI and semiconductor orders remain “extremely lively,” encouraging more Taiwanese suppliers to establish operations in the United States. 

Why it mattered today: Semiconductor manufacturing does not exist by itself.

Every major fabrication plant brings suppliers of chemicals, construction, precision machinery, packaging, electrical systems, logistics, clean-room equipment and industrial services.

So another $20 billion of Taiwanese investment could produce business opportunities far beyond the semiconductor companies themselves.

It also strengthens Washington’s attempt to move strategically important electronics manufacturing closer to American customers rather than leaving so much global chip production concentrated in Asia.

Consumers — Jack Daniel’s Owner Says People Are Drinking Less and Spending More Carefully

Brown-Forman, owner of Jack Daniel’s, warned that alcohol demand is likely to remain under pressure across developed markets this year.

First-quarter sales declined 1% to $911 million, slightly below expectations.

The company pointed to several trends: budget-conscious American consumers are making fewer discretionary purchases, greater use of GLP-1 weight-loss medications may be changing drinking habits, and consumers are paying more attention to calories.

Traditional whiskey sales were flat and tequila sales fell 12%, while ready-to-drink products jumped 20%

Canada is creating another problem. Brown-Forman expects American-made spirits to remain off shelves in many Canadian provinces for much of the fiscal year amid continuing trade tensions.

Why it mattered today: Alcohol historically has been considered a relatively resilient consumer category.

Weakness there adds to evidence that households are becoming increasingly selective about discretionary spending.

It also shows how consumer behavior is being changed simultaneously by inflation, health trends and trade policy — three forces that are affecting many consumer brands far beyond liquor.

Technology After the Bell — Snowflake and HPE Show Corporate AI Spending Is Still Accelerating

Two important earnings reports arriving immediately after Wednesday’s closing bell offered further evidence that companies are continuing to spend heavily on artificial intelligence.

Snowflake raised its full-year product-revenue forecast to $6.07 billion from $5.84 billion. Second-quarter product revenue jumped 37% to $1.49 billion, while total revenue reached $1.55 billion, ahead of Wall Street expectations. Snowflake shares surged more than 20% in extended trading following the report. 

The significance is that Snowflake sits on the software and data side of AI. Businesses need enormous quantities of organized corporate data before AI applications can actually perform useful work.

Hewlett Packard Enterprise provided the hardware side of the same story.

HPE revenue jumped 33.6% to $12.21 billion, beating expectations, while adjusted earnings reached $1.11 per share. The company raised its fiscal 2026 revenue-growth forecast to 34% to 37%, up from 29% to 33%.

Its CFO said demand for servers and networking equipment is far outstripping supply, with memory chips currently the biggest bottleneck. 

The two reports together matter more than either one individually.

AI spending is no longer showing up only at Nvidia. It is moving through servers, networking, cloud databases, storage, cooling, electricity and enterprise software.

That makes the AI investment cycle increasingly broad — and increasingly important to the entire technology supply chain.

What to Watch Thursday, September 3

Thursday brings a dense economic calendar just one day before the government’s critical August employment report.

At 8:30 a.m. ET, investors will receive weekly jobless claims, the July U.S. trade balance and revised second-quarter productivity and unit-labor-cost figures. The labor-cost number will be particularly important because the Fed wants to know whether wages are rising faster than worker productivity — something that can keep inflation elevated.

At 9:45 a.m. ET, the final S&P Global services reading arrives, followed at 10:00 a.m. ET by the ISM Services Index. Investors will pay especially close attention to the employment and prices-paid components because services make up the overwhelming majority of the U.S. economy. 

There is also a major technology catalyst still coming.

Broadcom is scheduled to report after Wednesday’s close, with its earnings call at 5 p.m. ET. Its first full-session market reaction will come Thursday.

Broadcom has become one of the most important companies in custom AI chips and networking equipment. After Nvidia, Dell, Snowflake and HPE all demonstrated extraordinary AI-related demand, investors will be looking for confirmation that hyperscale customers are continuing to commit enormous amounts of money to AI infrastructure. 

And hanging over everything is Friday, September 4, when the government releases the August jobs report.

With oil near $96, inflation still elevated and the Fed considering another rate increase, a surprisingly strong or weak employment number could rapidly change expectations for the Fed’s September 15–16 meeting.

Bottom Line

Wednesday’s rebound showed that investors are still willing to buy growth and technology aggressively whenever markets pull back.

But underneath the rally, the economy is sending a more complicated message.

Consumers are becoming more price-sensitive. Employers are hiring cautiously. Power grids are being stretched. Oil remains expensive. Borrowing costs remain high.

At the same time, billions of dollars continue moving toward AI servers, cloud computing, semiconductor factories, electricity infrastructure and even the consolidation of ordinary Main Street service businesses.

For business owners and investors, that may be the defining divide heading into the fall: capital remains abundant for sectors investors believe will dominate the future, while ordinary businesses and consumers are becoming increasingly careful with every dollar they spend.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TOKYO — Nissan and Honda are joining forces on one of the most expensive and increasingly important parts of building a modern automobile: the software and electronics that control the vehicle.

The Japanese automakers said Monday they will jointly develop standardized electronic control units and software for next-generation vehicles, targeting a rollout beginning in fiscal 2029.

The companies plan to align the core architecture behind their vehicles, including electronic control units, operating systems, middleware and vehicle-control software. Mitsubishi Motors, Nissan’s alliance partner, is also considering joining the effort.

The agreement is significant because software is quickly becoming one of the largest development costs in the auto industry.

Modern vehicles increasingly rely on centralized computers and software to control driver-assistance systems, infotainment, batteries, connectivity, automated driving and over-the-air updates. Developing those systems separately across multiple brands can require billions of dollars in engineering and years of work.

Nissan and Honda are effectively deciding that some of that expense no longer makes sense to carry alone.

By sharing common software architecture and electronic controls, the companies can spread development costs across more vehicles while still designing their own models, brands and customer experiences around the underlying technology.

That could make both companies more competitive at a time when Chinese automakers are rapidly expanding with vehicles that combine lower prices with advanced digital features.

Companies such as BYD have placed enormous pressure on Japanese, European and American automakers by moving quickly in electric vehicles, plug-in hybrids, in-car technology and software.

For Honda and Nissan, sharing technology offers a way to narrow that gap without completing the full corporate merger the two companies previously considered and abandoned.

The software partnership is part of a broader strategic relationship that began in 2024. Even after merger discussions ended, the automakers continued exploring areas where cooperation could lower costs and increase scale.

The trend extends well beyond Japan.

Global automakers increasingly recognize that building every piece of software independently is becoming too expensive. Volkswagen and other European manufacturers have pursued technology partnerships, while automakers around the world are working with chipmakers, cloud companies and artificial-intelligence developers.

The automobile itself is also changing.

For generations, consumers differentiated vehicles largely by engines, transmissions, handling and styling. Increasingly, the experience is determined by software: how quickly the screen responds, whether features can be updated remotely, how driver-assistance systems behave and how effectively the vehicle connects to phones, applications and other devices.

That shift changes the supply chain as well.

Traditional auto suppliers historically sold mechanical components that could remain largely unchanged for years. Software-defined vehicles require continuous updates, sophisticated semiconductors, cybersecurity protection and computing platforms that may evolve throughout the life of the automobile.

For Nissan and Honda, cooperation could therefore produce savings far beyond software engineers.

Standardized electronics could eventually reduce the number of unique components the companies need to purchase, simplify supplier relationships and allow new technology to be deployed across multiple models more quickly.

There is also urgency.

Both automakers face major strategic decisions involving electrification, hybrids, tariffs and manufacturing capacity. Honda has already reconsidered portions of its electric-vehicle strategy while emphasizing hybrids, and Nissan has been pursuing a broader restructuring aimed at lowering costs.

Sharing software gives them one area where they can gain scale without surrendering their independence.

For consumers, the impact will not be visible immediately. The first vehicles using the jointly developed technology are not expected until fiscal 2029.

But the decision reflects a much larger transformation already underway across the automobile industry.

The most expensive battle in the next generation of cars may no longer be fought entirely under the hood.

Increasingly, it will be fought inside the computer.

JBizNews Desk | Tokyo

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Yields on U.S. Treasurys hovered near multi-year highs on Wednesday, as the global bond market experienced a selloff amid concerns over energy prices keeping inflation elevated as well as government debt burdens.

The yield on the benchmark 10-year Treasury note was around 4.8% in the early afternoon on Wednesday, slightly lower than the intraday high of 4.818% – which was the highest level since November 2023.

Sovereign debt yields were elevated in other notable developed countries, with Japan’s 10-year yield above 3% for the first time in 30 years, German 10-year Bund yields at their highest level since 2011, and Britain’s equivalent yield at its highest since 2008. Bond yields rise as prices fall, and vice versa.

Bond yields have been under pressure since the Iran war began earlier this year due to the disruption of oil supplies causing gas prices to rise, putting inflationary pressure on consumers. Concerns about government debt have also contributed to the rise in yields.

WARSH SAYS FED’S MAIN FOCUS SHOULD BE ON PRICES WITH CENTRAL BANK’S RATE POLICY IN FOCUS

Angelo Kourkafas, senior global strategist for investment strategy at Edward Jones, said in a statement that, “Rising government bond yields have been the primary challenge for markets amid solid economic growth and strong corporate earnings, as higher rates continue to put pressure on equity valuations.”

“We believe several factors have contributed to the rise in yields, including uncertainty surrounding the Fed’s policy path and increased bond issuance from both public and private borrowers,” Kourkafas added. “More recently, however, investor concerns have shifted toward the potential inflationary impact of higher energy prices.”

Government bond yields are also facing pressure from increased issuance of corporate debt, as tech giants and firms in other sectors use debt to help finance the buildout of artificial intelligence (AI) infrastructure, such as data centers.

Naka Matsuzama, chief macro strategist at Nomura Securities, said the AI hyperscalers’ willingness to pay reasonably high rates was pulling up yields broadly, with the focus now on whether economic growth can rise along with them to help economies cope with higher borrowing costs.

WHAT WARSH’S JACKSON HOLE SPEECH SIGNALS ABOUT WHERE INTEREST RATES ARE HEADED

State Street’s head of macro strategy, Michael Metcalfe, said that rising energy prices are causing traders to bet on interest rate hikes by the Federal Reserve to tamp down inflation.

Metcalfe added that the “narrative is also getting wrapped up with longer-term concerns about the fiscal path,” and said that the bond market selloff was “orderly.”

The Fed is set to hold its next monetary policy meeting in two weeks on Sept. 15-16, with markets seeing a 64.2% probability that policymakers will hike the benchmark federal funds rate by 25 basis points from the current target range of 3.5% to 3.75%, according to the CME FedWatch tool.

Those odds shifted dramatically over the last week, when the tool showed a 63.4% chance of rates remaining at their current level following the Fed’s meeting this month.

FED’S FAVORED INFLATION GAUGE ROSE MORE THAN EXPECTED IN JULY

Fed Chair Kevin Warsh’s keynote address at the annual Jackson Hole Symposium emphasized that the central bank is aware that inflation remains above its 2% target, with the most recent reading of the Fed’s preferred measure – the PCE index – showing prices 3.7% higher than a year ago.

Warsh said that policymakers’ focus should be on the price stability side of the Fed’s dual mandate given “concerning” inflation data and jobs data reflective of a labor market that is “broadly consistent with full employment.”

Policymakers will get fresh data on both the labor market and inflation ahead of the meeting later this month, with the August jobs report due out this Friday and last month’s CPI inflation report set to be released next Friday.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

Uber is cutting roughly 10% of its workforce, or about 3,300 jobs, in an effort to streamline operations, the company announced on Wednesday.

The ride-hailing giant’s CEO, Dara Khosrowshahi, said in a memo to employees that the company is removing management layers, simplifying teams and refining where its teams are based.

“The changes we’re making today are designed to do two things: make Uber simpler and faster, and create more capacity to invest in our future,” Khosrowshahi said

“A leaner organization will mean clearer ownership, faster decisions, and more time spent building rather than coordinating,” he said. “It will also generate savings that we intend to reinvest in growth, innovation, and the capabilities that will matter most over the coming years.”

HERTZ, UBER TEAM UP TO BUILD ROBOTAXI FLEETS IN MAJOR MOBILITY PUSH

Khosrowshahi said Uber’s revenue has nearly tripled in the last roughly five years, but said the company’s expansion has also brought “more complexity.”

“That growth has also brought complexity: more layers, more coordination, more fragmented ownership, and in some cases structures that made sense when businesses were smaller but no longer serve us well at our current scale,” he said.

As part of the restructuring, Uber said it has reduced the number of employees sitting seven or more layers below the CEO by 20% and has cut the number of “micro-teams” – those with only one to two direct reports – by nearly 50%.

UBER, RIVIAN INK $1.25B DEAL TO PUT THOUSANDS OF ROBOTAXIS ON US STREETS

“The outcome is a simpler org chart geared toward building versus managing,” Khosrowshahi said.

The company is also combining some teams where “fragmentation was creating duplication and slowing decisions,” according to Khosrowshahi.

Uber also said it will concentrate teams in a smaller number of key hubs, including New York and San Francisco. The company is asking the majority of its remote workers to relocate to an office and said that going forward, only about 1% of employees will be remote.

LAX APPROVES RIDESHARE FEE HIKE THAT COULD PUSH UBER AND LYFT FARES SHARPLY HIGHER

Uber will continue requiring employees to work from an office three days per week, according to Khosrowshahi.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“I realize this is a lot of change, but we decided it was better to make one big shift rather than multiple small ones,” Khosrowshahi said. “We also know organizational changes can be hugely distracting, and our job is to create an environment that allows you to focus and do your best work. With these decisions now made, our focus is on the future.”

This post was originally published here

A £160 parking ticket means very little to someone who has spent tens of thousands of dollars flying a Lamborghini, Ferrari or Rolls-Royce into London for the summer.

That is the basic arithmetic behind an annual standoff playing out across some of London’s wealthiest neighborhoods.

Every summer, wealthy visitors from Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Kuwait and the United Arab Emirates arrive in Knightsbridge, Mayfair and Belgravia — and many bring their cars with them.

The vehicles can be transported by air at enormous cost, sometimes running into tens of thousands of dollars each way.

Against that expense, an ordinary parking ticket barely registers.

And that is exactly the problem London authorities are trying to solve.

Luxury cars are routinely found sitting on sidewalks, in restricted areas and outside high-end hotels and boutiques, while residents complain about blocked pedestrian routes, engine revving and late-night noise.

For many owners, simply issuing another ticket is not much of a deterrent.

The enforcement problem becomes even harder when the car is registered outside Europe.

Authorities can issue a penalty notice, but collecting the money later from the owner of a Saudi-, Qatari- or Emirati-registered vehicle can be difficult because Britain does not have the same access to foreign vehicle-registration information that it has within Europe.

The numbers show how large that gap can become.

Between 2018 and 2022, only about 1% of more than 13,000 parking tickets issued to UAE-registered vehicles were paid, according to data reported by The Wall Street Journal.

In 2025 alone, vehicles registered in Qatar received roughly 2,570 parking citations in Westminster, more than vehicles registered in any other foreign country.

So Westminster has started changing tactics.

If the Fine Does Not Hurt, Move the Car

One of the clearest examples came in Grosvenor Square.

After repeated complaints about luxury vehicles blocking the pavement outside the Chancery Rosewood hotel, Westminster moved a Saudi-registered Rolls-Royce worth roughly £250,000.

The council had acknowledged that issuing £160 penalty notices was not doing enough to deter wealthy drivers.

Instead of merely leaving another ticket under the windshield wiper, enforcement officers physically relocated the vehicle.

Other owners began moving their cars once the enforcement truck appeared.

That demonstrated something important.

A wealthy owner may not care much about losing £160.

But he may care about walking outside a five-star hotel and discovering that his Rolls-Royce is no longer where he left it.

Inconvenience can succeed where a fine does not.

London Is Going Further

The crackdown now extends well beyond parking.

Westminster and neighboring Kensington and Chelsea have spent years dealing with complaints about exotic cars racing, revving engines, performing stunts and gathering late at night.

In July 2026, the High Court granted authorities a sweeping injunction covering areas including Knightsbridge, Belgravia, St James’s, Hyde Park and the West End.

The order prohibits dangerous driving, racing, driving in convoys, performing stunts, excessive engine revving, unnecessary horn use and other disruptive behavior linked to organized car gatherings.

The order also carries a power of arrest.

Drivers who breach it can potentially face much more serious consequences than an ordinary parking ticket.

Authorities have also warned that major violations could ultimately result in large fines or the seizure of assets.

That changes the calculation considerably.

Seizing a Lamborghini Gets Attention

Police have already shown how effective taking the vehicle itself can be.

In a major operation supported by the Motor Insurers’ Bureau, Metropolitan Police seized 72 vehicles valued at almost £7 million while targeting dangerous and uninsured driving around Hyde Park, Kensington and Chelsea.

High-end supercars made up a significant portion of the vehicles.

Among them were two nearly identical purple Lamborghinis that had been flown into Britain for their owner’s summer visit.

According to the Motor Insurers’ Bureau, one driver had been in Britain for only about two hours and driving for roughly 15 minutes before the Lamborghini was seized for lacking valid insurance.

That kind of enforcement matters because it removes the financial imbalance.

A £160 ticket can become part of the vacation budget.

Having a multimillion-dollar collection of cars impounded cannot.

Why London Cannot Simply Declare War on the Supercars

There is another side to the story.

These visitors are also extremely valuable customers.

London’s luxury hotels, restaurants, jewelers, fashion boutiques and department stores depend heavily on wealthy international travelers.

Mayfair and Knightsbridge are built around precisely this type of spending.

The same visitor whose Lamborghini annoys residents may also be spending thousands of pounds on hotel rooms, restaurants and shopping.

That leaves London with a delicate economic problem.

The city wants the tourist.

It wants the spending.

It wants the hotel bookings, restaurant bills and luxury retail purchases.

What it does not want is the pavement outside the hotel becoming a private parking bay — or residential streets becoming an overnight racetrack.

That is why authorities increasingly appear to be moving away from simply writing tickets and toward enforcement that actually affects the vehicle.

For the wealthiest visitors, the lesson is becoming increasingly clear:

If money makes the fine meaningless, London may have to make the car itself the leverage.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — Aon has agreed to acquire USI Insurance Services in a $17 billion transaction, one of the largest insurance-brokerage deals in years and another major sign that the business of managing corporate risk is becoming increasingly valuable.

USI is one of the largest privately held insurance brokerages in the United States, with about $3 billion in annual revenue, more than 10,500 employees and nearly 200 offices across the country.

The company focuses heavily on the middle market — businesses large enough to face complicated insurance and employee-benefit needs, but often not large enough to maintain massive internal risk-management departments.

That is exactly the market Aon wants more of.

Aon is already one of the world’s biggest insurance and risk-advisory companies. It helps businesses buy coverage, structure employee benefits, analyze financial exposure and prepare for risks ranging from cyberattacks and lawsuits to natural disasters and rising healthcare costs.

Buying USI gives Aon a much larger direct relationship with thousands of American businesses.

The deal also reflects a broader change taking place across corporate America.

Insurance has become much more complicated.

Companies are facing larger cyber risks. Property coverage has become more expensive in areas exposed to hurricanes, wildfires and flooding. Healthcare costs continue to rise. Lawsuits and regulatory risks have become more difficult to predict.

As those risks increase, businesses are relying more heavily on brokers and consultants to help determine what coverage they need, what risks they should retain themselves and how much protection they can afford.

That makes the broker sitting between a company and the insurance market increasingly important.

Aon is paying heavily to own more of those relationships.

The transaction also follows Aon’s approximately $13 billion acquisition of NFP in 2024, another major expansion into middle-market insurance and employee benefits.

Taken together, the two deals show that Aon is not simply growing through small acquisitions.

It is spending tens of billions of dollars to become much larger in the segment serving midsized American businesses.

For KKR, the private-equity firm that invested in USI in 2017, the sale represents a major return.

USI expanded significantly during KKR’s ownership, and the investment firm is expected to generate roughly a sixfold return on its original investment.

That helps explain why insurance brokerages have become attractive private-equity assets.

Brokerages generally do not assume the enormous financial risk carried by insurance companies themselves. Instead, they earn commissions and fees by helping clients purchase and manage coverage.

When insurance prices rise or companies need more sophisticated advice, brokerage revenue can grow without the broker having to pay the underlying insurance claims.

That business model has made large brokerage platforms increasingly valuable.

The acquisition will also give Aon more scale when negotiating with insurers.

A broker representing a much larger pool of corporate clients can potentially bring more business to insurance carriers, giving it greater leverage when negotiating pricing, coverage terms and specialized policies.

USI CEO Mike Sicard is expected to lead Aon’s expanded middle-market operation after the transaction is completed.

For business owners, the deal may sound like another Wall Street acquisition, but it points to something much broader.

The cost and complexity of protecting a company are rising.

Cybersecurity, employee healthcare, property damage, lawsuits and other risks increasingly affect businesses of virtually every size.

And as those risks become harder to manage, the companies advising businesses on how to protect themselves are becoming bigger businesses themselves.

Aon is now putting $17 billion behind that bet.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.
:::

BENTONVILLE, Ark. — Billions of dollars in tariff refunds are beginning to work their way back toward American consumers, with major retailers using the money to cut prices, expand promotions and hold down costs on everyday merchandise.

Walmart has received substantially all of the roughly $2.9 billion in tariff refunds it expected, according to current reporting, and the company says it had more than 11,000 items on rollback during its latest quarter.

Other retailers, including e.l.f. Beauty, Tractor Supply and SharkNinja, are also using tariff-related refunds to reduce prices or limit increases.

That matters because tariff refunds can be handled in several ways.

Companies can keep the money, use it to repair margins, reinvest it in operations or pass at least part of the savings back to customers.

The current shift suggests more retailers are choosing to compete on price.

For Walmart, the strategy is particularly important because of its scale.

The company sells groceries, household goods, clothing, electronics and other everyday products to millions of Americans each week. Even relatively small price reductions across thousands of items can add up quickly for consumers.

It also puts pressure on competitors.

When the country’s largest retailer cuts prices or expands rollbacks, rivals often have to respond with their own promotions to avoid losing traffic.

The broader backdrop is still complicated.

Retailers continue dealing with high labor costs, transportation expenses and inflation across parts of the supply chain. Tariff refunds do not erase those pressures.

But they can create breathing room.

For shoppers, the important distinction is that these refunds are no longer just showing up as accounting gains inside corporate earnings reports.

They are starting to appear on shelves.

If that trend continues, tariff refunds could become one of the more meaningful sources of price relief consumers see heading into the fall.

JBizNews Desk | Bentonville, Arkansas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

HOUSTON — SLB, one of the world’s largest oilfield-services companies, is making a major move outside traditional drilling with a $4.1 billion acquisition of German cooling specialist Kelvion, betting that the enormous expansion of artificial intelligence will create a new industrial market around keeping data centers from overheating.

The deal is a striking example of how the AI boom is beginning to reshape industries far beyond semiconductors and software.

SLB built its global business helping oil and gas companies drill wells, manage reservoirs and operate energy infrastructure.

Now it wants to help operate the physical infrastructure behind artificial intelligence.

Under the agreement announced Monday, SLB will pay about $3.4 billion in cash and assume approximately $700 million of Kelvion debt.

Kelvion makes heat exchangers and thermal-management systems used across data centers, energy facilities and industrial operations.

But data centers have become its largest and fastest-growing business.

Kelvion expects to generate roughly $2.3 billion to $2.4 billion in total revenue in 2026, with approximately $1.2 billion to $1.3 billion coming from data centers alone.

That is where SLB sees the opportunity.

Modern AI systems require enormous clusters of high-powered chips running continuously inside data centers.

Those chips generate tremendous amounts of heat.

If that heat cannot be removed efficiently, the computers cannot operate properly.

As AI processors become more powerful and are packed more densely into server racks, traditional air conditioning is increasingly insufficient. Data-center operators are turning toward sophisticated liquid-cooling and heat-transfer systems capable of removing much larger amounts of heat.

In simple terms, the more powerful the AI becomes, the harder it becomes to keep the machines cool.

And that is creating an entirely new infrastructure business.

SLB CEO Olivier Le Peuch described AI as driving one of the largest infrastructure investment cycles in history.

The company believes Kelvion will allow it to provide more of the systems required to build and operate those facilities rather than simply participating in the energy side of the business.

That distinction is important.

AI data centers need enormous amounts of electricity, cooling equipment, pumps, piping, heat exchangers, water systems and other industrial infrastructure.

Many of those requirements look much more like the large engineering projects SLB has spent decades working on in the energy industry than they do traditional Silicon Valley technology projects.

SLB therefore sees an opportunity to transfer its engineering expertise into a rapidly expanding market.

Together, SLB and Kelvion are expected to generate more than $2 billion in data-center revenue this year.

By 2028, SLB is targeting between $4.5 billion and $5 billion in annual revenue from its combined data-center solutions business.

That would turn AI infrastructure into a significant new business line for a company historically associated almost entirely with oil and gas.

The acquisition also shows how the economics surrounding artificial intelligence are spreading.

Nvidia and other semiconductor companies may supply the processors, but those processors cannot operate without buildings, electricity and cooling.

That means some of the biggest beneficiaries of the AI boom may ultimately be industrial companies that never designed a computer chip.

Utilities are building new generation capacity.

Construction companies are erecting enormous data centers.

Electrical-equipment companies are supplying transformers and switchgear.

And cooling companies are becoming increasingly valuable because every high-powered AI processor ultimately produces heat that must be removed.

Kelvion sits directly inside that problem.

SLB expects the acquisition to increase both earnings per share and free cash flow per share during the first 12 months after closing and estimates roughly $120 million in annual synergies within three years.

The transaction is expected to close during the first half of 2027, subject to regulatory approvals.

For SLB, the acquisition represents something bigger than diversification.

It is a bet on where industrial spending is moving.

For more than a century, companies like SLB built their businesses around the enormous infrastructure required to extract and move energy.

The next infrastructure boom may increasingly involve the enormous amounts of energy—and cooling—required to run artificial intelligence.

JBizNews Desk | Houston

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JBizNews U.S. Market Opening Recap — September 2, 2026 | 10:00 A.M. ET

Wall Street opened mixed Wednesday as investors tried to balance softer U.S. hiring data and another burst of AI optimism against renewed U.S.-Iran fighting, oil near $90 a barrel and Treasury yields hovering near their highest levels in almost three years.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average opened at 52,829.58, up 62.7 points, or 0.12%. The S&P 500 opened at 7,634.58, up 3.1 points, or 0.04%, while the Nasdaq Composite opened at 26,094.00, down 5.8 points, or 0.02%. By shortly before 10 a.m., buying had strengthened somewhat: the Dow was ahead roughly 189 points, or 0.4%, the S&P 500 was up about 0.1%, and the Nasdaq remained down roughly 0.1%

The morning’s biggest economic report was a clear sign that hiring is losing momentum. ADP said private employers added just 38,000 jobs in August, below the 48,000 economists expected and down from an upwardly revised 46,000 in July. Education and health services added 45,000 jobs, construction added 12,000 and leisure and hospitality added 16,000, but manufacturing lost 17,000 jobs and professional and business services lost 16,000. The report increases the stakes for Friday’s official August employment report, where economists currently expect nonfarm payrolls to rebound by about 56,000 and unemployment to remain near 4.1%. 

The softer employment number would normally push investors toward expectations for easier Federal Reserve policy. This morning, however, that effect is being offset by the inflation threat coming from energy and bonds.

The 10-year Treasury yield was around 4.8%, after touching roughly 4.82%, its highest level since late 2023. A further move toward 5% would become increasingly important for stocks because higher bond yields make equities less attractive, increase corporate financing costs and put particular pressure on highly valued growth and AI shares. 

Oil remains the other major market risk. Brent crude had surged as high as $97.04 a barrel overnight and U.S. crude reached $92.29 after the United States and Iran exchanged their most significant military attacks in weeks. Prices later eased, with Brent around $94.22 and West Texas Intermediate near $89.51, after U.S. Energy Secretary Chris Wright said more than 17 million barrels of oil had moved through the Strait of Hormuz Monday. The Strait remains the central risk: any serious disruption could quickly push crude back toward or above $100 and intensify inflation pressure. 

Corporate earnings are providing an important counterweight.

Dell Technologies jumped nearly 11% after dramatically raising its annual outlook on surging demand for AI servers. Dell reported record quarterly revenue of $47 billion, above Wall Street expectations, with a record $60 billion of AI-related orders and a $95 billion backlog. The company raised its annual revenue forecast to $192 billion from $167 billion and lifted its adjusted earnings target to $25.50 a share from $17.90. Super Micro Computer and Hewlett Packard Enterprise also moved higher on the read-through for AI infrastructure spending. 

GitLab surged more than 20% after beating earnings and revenue expectations and raising its full-year outlook, reinforcing the idea that AI-driven software development is creating winners beyond the semiconductor sector. 

The other side of that trade is MongoDB, which fell roughly 13% despite reporting better-than-expected earnings and 30% revenue growth. Investors focused instead on Atlas cloud growth holding near 29%, showing how demanding Wall Street has become toward richly valued AI and cloud companies. Credo Technology also dropped about 11%, while Palo Alto Networks slipped following earnings. 

Another major corporate development came from Uber, which said it will eliminate about 3,300 jobs — roughly 10% of its workforce — in its largest round of cuts since the pandemic. Uber said the restructuring will flatten management and speed decision-making as robotaxi competition grows. The company plans to invest more than $10 billion in autonomous-vehicle technology and partnerships in coming years. Uber shares were up more than 2% before the opening bell. 

One additional economic release is arriving right at the 10 a.m. cutoff: the Commerce Department’s July factory-orders report. Consensus expectations call for roughly a 0.6% to 0.7% increase after June’s 0.3% decline. The Census Bureau had not yet populated the new July figure on its official release page at the exact cutoff for this recap, so JBizNews is not inserting an unverified number. 

For the rest of Wednesday, investors have several major items to watch.

At 10:30 a.m. ET, the Energy Information Administration releases weekly U.S. crude inventories, which could move oil sharply given current Middle East tensions. At 2 p.m. ET, the Federal Reserve releases its Beige Book, giving investors a fresh look at business conditions, hiring and inflation across the country. 

Technology investors will also be watching Broadcom’s earnings, while the broader market will remain focused on whether the 10-year Treasury yield moves closer to 5%.

The bigger test arrives Friday with the August jobs report.

For now, Wall Street is caught between two opposing messages: the labor market is cooling, which normally argues against tighter monetary policy, while oil and bond yields are rising, which argues that inflation may remain too strong for the Federal Reserve to relax.

That tension — jobs versus inflation — is likely to determine whether Wednesday’s early Dow rebound holds.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited

WASHINGTON — The cost of borrowing is moving higher again.

U.S. Treasury yields jumped Tuesday morning as investors increasingly bet that the Federal Reserve may have to raise interest rates again to contain inflation, pushing the benchmark 10-year Treasury yield to about 4.79% — its highest level since January 2025.

The move matters far beyond Wall Street.

The 10-year Treasury is a major benchmark for mortgage rates and other long-term borrowing costs, while Federal Reserve policy feeds directly into credit cards, home-equity lines, auto loans and business financing.

Markets are now pricing in roughly a 65% to 68% chance of a quarter-point Fed rate increase in September, a dramatic shift from the rate-cut expectations that dominated much of the earlier discussion around monetary policy.

The change follows Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh’s speech at Jackson Hole on Friday.

Warsh made clear that the Fed remains uncomfortable with inflation.

The central bank’s preferred inflation measure, the PCE price index, is running at 3.7% over the past 12 months, while the six-month rate has accelerated to 4.1%.

Both are far above the Fed’s 2% target.

Warsh said the Fed’s “predominant focus right now should be on prices” and warned that if underlying inflation is not clearly moving back toward 2%, policymakers still have work to do.

Markets heard that as a warning that another rate increase remains firmly on the table.

Oil is adding to the pressure.

Renewed tensions involving the United States and Iran have pushed Brent crude back above $90 a barrel, raising fears that higher energy costs could feed another round of inflation through gasoline, transportation, shipping and consumer goods.

At the same time, investors are increasingly concerned about the enormous amount of government debt being issued.

The United States recently crossed $40 trillion in federal debt, and large Treasury borrowing needs mean more bonds must continually be sold to investors.

When investors demand higher yields to hold that debt, borrowing costs across the economy tend to rise with them.

For homebuyers, that creates an uncomfortable combination.

Mortgage rates have already remained stubbornly high, and a sustained rise in the 10-year Treasury could push them higher rather than delivering the relief many buyers have been waiting for.

For households carrying credit-card balances, the impact of another Fed rate hike could be even more immediate.

Most credit cards carry variable rates tied closely to the prime rate. When the Fed raises its benchmark rate, those borrowing costs generally rise quickly.

Auto loans, small-business credit and home-equity lines can also become more expensive.

There is one group that can benefit: savers.

Higher rates can keep yields on money-market funds, certificates of deposit and high-yield savings accounts elevated.

But for borrowers, the message from markets Tuesday morning is becoming increasingly clear.

The era of expensive money may not be ending yet.

If inflation remains stubborn and oil continues rising, the next move from the Federal Reserve may not be the rate cut consumers have been waiting for.

It could be another increase.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Energy did nearly all of it. Prices across the twenty-one countries using the euro rose 3.3% in the year to August, up from 2.9% in July, and the fastest pace since the autumn of 2023 — but strip out fuel and power and the picture is calmer, not hotter.

Eurostat’s flash estimate, published Tuesday, shows energy costs up 14.3% from a year earlier, a sharp acceleration from 10.3% in July. Everything else moved the other way or barely moved at all. Core inflation, which leaves out energy, food, alcohol and tobacco, actually slipped to 2.4% from 2.5%. Services inflation eased to 3.0% from 3.3%. Food, alcohol and tobacco held at 1.2%. Goods ticked up to 1.2% from 0.9%.

In plain terms: a European household’s grocery bill and restaurant tab are rising at roughly the same rate they were a month ago. The electricity bill and the fuel tank are what changed, and they changed enough to drag the whole index more than a third of a percentage point higher in a single month.

The source of that energy squeeze is the war in the Middle East and the disruption to oil and gas moving out of the Gulf, which has kept European energy prices well above their pre-conflict levels since spring.

That puts the European Central Bank in an uncomfortable position when its Governing Council meets in Frankfurt on Sept. 10. The bank raised rates by a quarter point in June, citing the war’s inflationary pressure, then held steady in July while it waited for data. Christine Lagarde said afterward that some council members had asked whether to move immediately. Markets are now positioned for an increase next week, which would take the deposit rate to 2.50%.

The argument against moving is straightforward: a central bank cannot manufacture oil, and raising the cost of borrowing does nothing to lower the price of imported gas. The argument for moving is that an energy shock that lasts long enough stops being a one-off and starts working its way into wages, transport costs and shelf prices across the economy — the second-round effects the ECB has said it is watching closely. Its own staff projections put headline inflation averaging 3.0% this year before falling back toward 2.0% by 2028.

September is also a projections meeting, meaning the council will publish fresh forecasts alongside whatever it decides. For American businesses selling into Europe, a hike would likely firm the euro against the dollar and make U.S. goods more expensive on European shelves, while European borrowers face costlier credit into the fourth quarter.

JBizNews Desk | Frankfurt

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Russia, the world’s largest wheat exporter, is being forced to redraw one of the most important agricultural shipping networks in the world.

After repeated Ukrainian attacks disrupted shipping through the Black Sea and Sea of Azov, Russian grain exporters are increasingly turning north — toward ports on the Baltic Sea.

That sounds like a transportation story.

It is much bigger than that.

Russia exported about 46.3 million metric tons of grain through Black Sea and Azov ports during the 2025–2026 season, representing roughly 90% of its seaborne grain exports.

Those southern ports are valuable because they provide relatively short and inexpensive access to major buyers across the Middle East, Africa and Asia.

When that route becomes unreliable, the grain does not simply disappear.

It has to travel somewhere else.

And moving millions of tons of wheat hundreds or thousands of additional miles by rail before it reaches a ship can dramatically change the economics.

By mid-August, Russian exporters had already submitted requests to move roughly 5 million metric tons of grain toward Russian Baltic ports, an extraordinary increase for a route that handled only around 1 million tons previously.

Russia is also looking at ports in neighboring Baltic states, including Latvia, as exporters search for additional capacity.

The problem is that the alternative system is much smaller.

Russian Baltic grain ports can handle only about 7 million tons annually.

Even if additional capacity in Baltic state ports is used, analysts estimate that alternative ports and land routes may replace only about half of the volume that could be disrupted in the Black Sea.

That creates a bottleneck.

Why the Black Sea Matters So Much

Russia and Ukraine are both agricultural giants.

Together, they supply enormous quantities of wheat, corn, sunflower oil and other agricultural products to the global market.

Many countries in the Middle East and Africa rely heavily on Black Sea grain because it is relatively close and inexpensive to ship.

That means problems in the Black Sea can quickly become problems far beyond Russia and Ukraine.

If exporters have to use longer rail routes and more expensive ports, transportation costs rise.

Those higher costs can eventually affect the price buyers pay for grain.

And because wheat is used in bread, flour, animal feed and countless food products, changes in grain prices can eventually reach consumers.

What Changed

The shift toward the Baltic accelerated after attacks increasingly affected commercial shipping around Russia’s southern ports.

Ukraine has targeted Russian vessels and logistics infrastructure as part of its broader campaign against Russia’s war economy.

The Sea of Azov has been especially important.

It historically handles about a quarter of Russian grain exports.

The result is that companies now have to consider whether putting a cargo through those waters is worth the risk.

Shipping companies also consider insurance rates, crew safety and the possibility of delays.

Even if a port remains technically open, shipping can become economically unattractive when the risk becomes too high.

Russia Is Trying to Build an Alternative

Moscow is already trying to help exporters reroute shipments.

The Russian government has been preparing subsidies worth roughly 10 billion rubles, or about $120 million, to support rail transportation of agricultural products toward alternative export ports.

That includes Baltic ports and ports in Russia’s Far East.

The idea is simple.

If getting grain to the port becomes more expensive, the government can absorb part of the cost so Russian wheat remains competitive internationally.

But subsidies cannot create unlimited port capacity.

Grain terminals need storage facilities, rail connections, loading equipment and ships.

Those systems take time and money to expand.

That is why the shift north is important.

Russia can reroute some grain.

It cannot instantly recreate the massive export infrastructure it already has around the Black Sea.

The Pressure Is Not Only on Russia

Ukraine is dealing with its own transportation crisis.

Its traditional Black Sea export routes have also been severely disrupted.

Dozens of vessels are now waiting to reach Ukrainian ports through the Danube River, creating another major grain bottleneck.

That means the world’s grain market is seeing transportation problems on both sides of the war at the same time.

Turkey is now trying to develop a new arrangement that could restore safer grain shipping through the Black Sea.

The original U.N.- and Turkey-brokered Black Sea Grain Initiative allowed tens of millions of tons of Ukrainian agricultural products to reach global markets before Russia withdrew from the agreement in 2023.

Whether a new arrangement can be created remains uncertain.

What It Means for Businesses

For farmers and food companies thousands of miles away, the important issue is not necessarily how much wheat Russia grows.

It is whether Russia can economically get that wheat to customers.

A country can produce a huge crop, but if ports are blocked, ships are attacked or rail transportation becomes too expensive, global supply still tightens.

That can affect flour companies, bakeries, livestock producers, food manufacturers and eventually grocery prices.

It can also create opportunities for competing grain exporters in the United States, Canada, Argentina and elsewhere if buyers begin searching for more reliable suppliers.

The bigger lesson is that food markets depend on logistics almost as much as agriculture.

Russia still has the grain.

The question now is how much it will cost to move it — and whether the rest of the world ultimately pays part of that price.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

General Motors workers in Canada have approved a new labor agreement that locks in more than C$1 billion in investment and brings production of a next-generation heavy-duty GMC Sierra pickup to Ontario — even as the North American auto industry faces a potentially much bigger U.S.-Canada trade fight.

More than 4,600 Unifor members at GM facilities across Ontario voted on the new agreements, with workers covered by the main GM contract approving it by 80.5% and workers at the CAMI assembly plant in Ingersoll backing their agreement by 96.5%.

The centerpiece is Oshawa.

GM committed C$144 million to bring production of the next-generation heavy-duty GMC Sierra to its Oshawa Assembly plant.

That matters because pickup trucks are among the most important and profitable vehicles in the North American auto industry.

Keeping more truck production in Canada gives Oshawa a stronger future at a time when tariffs are making every cross-border manufacturing decision more complicated.

GM also committed C$215 million to build a next-generation transmission at its St. Catharines plant beginning around late 2029.

Those investments come on top of earlier commitments, including C$691 million for sixth-generation V8 engine production and another C$63 million for stamping and parts-distribution upgrades.

Together, GM’s Canadian commitments now exceed C$1 billion.

Why This Deal Matters Now

Normally, an auto labor contract would mainly be a story about wages, benefits and jobs.

This one is also about trade.

The United States currently imposes a 25% tariff on Canadian vehicles, and that rate is scheduled to rise to 50% on January 1, 2027 unless Washington and Ottawa reach a new agreement.

That is a huge number for an industry built around vehicles and parts crossing the U.S.-Canada border repeatedly before a finished car or truck reaches a dealership.

A transmission can be made in one country.

An engine can be made in another plant.

Other components can cross the border several times before final assembly.

When tariffs rise sharply, that entire system gets more expensive.

For GM, the decision to continue investing in Canada means the company is betting that its Canadian factories will remain strategically valuable even if the trade environment becomes more difficult.

It is also a sign that automakers cannot simply move billions of dollars of factories, suppliers and trained workers overnight.

Workers Get Higher Pay — But Job Security Is the Bigger Story

The agreement includes 3% annual wage increases for three years, along with cost-of-living adjustments and bonuses.

Full-rate production workers are expected to reach C$50.20 an hour, while skilled-trades workers will reach C$62.71 an hour during the life of the agreement.

Eligible workers also receive a C$10,000 productivity and quality bonus and a C$2,000 December bonus.

But for many workers, the most important part may be protecting production.

The agreement includes plans designed to reduce layoffs at Oshawa and gives GM’s idled CAMI assembly plant in Ingersoll additional protection against an immediate closure or sale.

That plant has been especially vulnerable, with many workers already on indefinite layoff.

The Bigger North American Auto Problem

Canada and the United States do not really operate as two completely separate auto industries.

They operate as one deeply connected manufacturing system.

That is what makes a potential 50% tariff so significant.

Canadian-made vehicles represented about 6% of U.S. auto sales in 2025, while some major automakers depend much more heavily on Canadian production.

GM itself builds a meaningful portion of its Chevrolet Silverado pickups in Canada.

If tariffs rise to 50%, automakers face several choices.

They can absorb some of the cost.

They can raise prices.

They can shift production.

Or they can pressure Washington and Ottawa to reach a deal.

None of those options is simple.

Building a new auto plant can take years and billions of dollars.

That is why GM’s new Canadian investment is important.

The company is not abandoning Canada while waiting to see what happens with tariffs.

It is putting new production there.

What It Means for Businesses

For suppliers, manufacturers and communities across Ontario, the agreement provides something extremely valuable right now: visibility.

New truck, engine and transmission programs mean orders for parts suppliers, trucking companies, industrial contractors, maintenance firms and hundreds of other businesses tied to auto production.

For consumers, however, the tariff fight remains the larger risk.

If a 50% tariff ultimately applies to Canadian vehicles and parts entering the United States, manufacturers could face substantially higher costs.

Some of those costs could eventually reach car buyers.

And because the U.S. and Canadian auto industries are so intertwined, the consequences would not stop at the border.

The GM agreement therefore sends two messages at the same time.

Canada is still winning major automotive investment.

But the economics of building cars across North America are becoming much harder to predict.

GM is committing more than C$1 billion to Canadian production.

Now the industry has to find out what the trade rules surrounding those factories will actually look like.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Europe is putting nearly half a billion dollars into a new artificial intelligence supercomputer as governments race to secure the computing power that increasingly determines who can compete in AI.

The European High Performance Computing Joint Undertaking announced that it signed a €387.8 million contract with Bull for a new system called LUMI-AI, which will be installed at CSC’s data center in Kajaani, Finland.

At current exchange rates, the investment is roughly $450 million.

The important part is not simply that Europe is buying another supercomputer.

It is what Europe is trying to build around it.

LUMI-AI is being designed specifically for artificial intelligence workloads that require enormous amounts of computing power, including the training and deployment of advanced AI models, large-scale simulations and work involving massive or confidential datasets.

The system is expected to provide about 10 times the AI computing capacity of the existing LUMI supercomputer.

That is a major jump.

The machine will use next-generation AMD Instinct MI430X graphics processors together with AMD’s sixth-generation EPYC processors. It will be installed in Finland and is expected to become available to users in 2027.

Half of the €387.8 million cost will be funded by the European Union through the Digital Europe Programme. The other half will be paid by the LUMI AI Factory consortium, led by Finland and including the Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Norway and Poland.

The broader goal is to give European companies, startups, researchers and government institutions access to powerful AI infrastructure without depending entirely on private American technology giants or foreign computing systems.

That matters because AI is becoming increasingly dependent on access to enormous quantities of specialized computing power.

Companies may have strong engineers, valuable data and promising AI ideas, but without access to powerful chips and supercomputers, they may not be able to train or operate the most advanced systems.

In simple terms, computing power is becoming the factory floor of the AI economy.

Countries that control more of that capacity can potentially develop better AI systems, attract more technology companies and keep more of the economic value created by artificial intelligence inside their own borders.

The United States currently has a major advantage because companies such as Microsoft, Amazon, Google, Meta and Oracle are spending tens of billions of dollars building enormous AI data centers.

China is also pouring resources into domestic chips, computing clusters and artificial intelligence infrastructure.

Europe does not have private technology companies spending at quite the same scale.

That is why governments are stepping in.

The European Union has been building what it calls AI Factories — computing centers that combine supercomputers, data, technical expertise and services that startups and researchers can use to develop artificial intelligence.

The existing LUMI AI Factory has already been providing computing resources to European small and midsized businesses and startups in areas including manufacturing, health care, life sciences and communications technology.

The new LUMI-AI system is intended to dramatically expand that capacity.

There is another reason Europe sees this as strategic.

Artificial intelligence is increasingly tied to national competitiveness.

AI is expected to affect manufacturing, drug development, defense, banking, logistics, telecommunications, energy and almost every major industry.

Europe does not want European companies to reach a point where they have innovative technology but must depend on American or Chinese infrastructure to build it.

That is why the supercomputer investment is bigger than one machine in Finland.

It is part of an attempt to build an independent European AI ecosystem.

What It Means for Businesses

For smaller companies, AI competition is increasingly becoming a question of access.

A startup may not have billions of dollars to build its own data center or purchase thousands of advanced processors.

Shared government-backed supercomputers can give those businesses access to computing power that previously was available mainly to the largest technology companies.

That could help European manufacturers, biotech companies, software developers and other businesses experiment with advanced AI without making enormous infrastructure investments themselves.

It also demonstrates how quickly artificial intelligence is moving from being primarily a software race into an infrastructure race.

Chips matter.

Electricity matters.

Data centers matter.

Cooling systems matter.

And increasingly, governments are deciding that access to AI computing capacity is too strategically important to leave entirely to the private market.

Europe is now putting nearly €388 million behind that calculation.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

U.S. Markets — Oil, Bond Yields and Rate Fears Hit Wall Street

September opened with a broad selloff as another surge in oil prices and a global bond-market retreat pushed borrowing costs higher and revived fears that the Federal Reserve may raise interest rates this month.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 52,772.49, down 413.41 points, or 0.78%. The S&P 500 fell 54.19 points, or 0.71%, to 7,631.95, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 271.11 points, or 1.01%, to 26,099.77. Energy was the strongest S&P 500 sector, transportation stocks were among the weakest, and every company in the Philadelphia Semiconductor Index finished lower. 

Brent crude jumped 4.6% to settle at $94.65 a barrel, while the 10-year Treasury yield climbed to roughly 4.80% and the two-year yield reached 4.39%. Futures markets put the probability of a quarter-point Federal Reserve rate increase in September at roughly two-thirds. 

For business owners, today’s combination is particularly uncomfortable: more expensive energy raises transportation and production costs while higher Treasury yields push up mortgages, commercial loans and corporate financing at the same time.

Economy & Main Street — Factories Are Growing, but Businesses Are Feeling the Cost Squeeze

U.S. manufacturing remained in expansion territory during August, but momentum slowed and manufacturers reported intense pressure from higher input costs.

The Institute for Supply Management’s manufacturing index fell to 54.6 from 55.6 in July. Anything above 50 signals expansion, so American factories are still growing. But new orders weakened, supplier deliveries slowed and 58% of comments submitted by manufacturers were negative.

Steel and aluminum prices, tariffs, longer lead times, energy costs and shortages tied to the AI infrastructure boom were among the concerns reported by businesses. 

The labor market told a similar story of an economy that is not collapsing but is becoming less dynamic.

Job openings rose by 89,000 to 7.271 million in July, but the previous month was revised sharply lower. Hiring dropped by 278,000 to 5.054 million, while layoffs also declined.

That leaves the country in something close to a no-hire, no-fire economy: companies are reluctant to add workers, but most are not cutting aggressively either. 

Why it mattered today: This is a difficult combination for the Fed. Manufacturing continues expanding and layoffs remain low enough to tolerate tighter monetary policy, while businesses are simultaneously warning that their costs are rising. That strengthens the argument for another rate increase even as hiring slows.

Housing & Construction — U.S. Building Spending Falls to Nearly Three-Year Low

The housing slowdown deepened in July.

Total U.S. construction spending unexpectedly fell 0.5% to an annualized $2.158 trillion, the lowest level since October 2023 and 3.8% below a year earlier.

Residential construction fell 1.3%, with single-family home construction plunging 3.2% in one month and 6.5% from a year earlier.

The average 30-year mortgage rate remains around 6.66%, making new homes increasingly difficult for buyers to afford and more difficult for developers to finance. 

There was another important warning inside the report: factory construction is down 21.7% from a year ago.

The enormous wave of semiconductor and manufacturing projects launched after the CHIPS Act is losing momentum even as spending on power infrastructure continues rising.

Why it mattered today: Housing touches an enormous section of the economy — contractors, lumber, appliances, furniture, mortgage lenders, real estate agents and local retailers. Higher rates are now visibly reducing activity, and another Fed increase would make the financing problem more severe.

Banking & Payments — Goldman, Bank of America and Citi Move Into Stablecoins Together

Twenty-one major financial institutions, including Goldman Sachs, Bank of America, Citi and Deutsche Bank, announced plans to create a company this year that will issue a U.S. dollar-backed stablecoin during the first half of 2027.

The group also wants eventually to issue tokens tied to other major currencies, with the euro its first priority. 

The significance is not cryptocurrency speculation.

Stablecoins are increasingly being viewed as a potentially cheaper and faster infrastructure for moving money between businesses, banks and countries. Until now, that market has been dominated by crypto-native companies such as Tether, which has more than $180 billion of its dollar-pegged token outstanding.

Now some of the world’s largest traditional banks want their own version.

Why it mattered today: If bank-backed digital dollars gain adoption, stablecoins could move from crypto trading into mainstream payments, international transfers, treasury management and eventually everyday business transactions. The banks are essentially preparing for a world in which money itself travels more like digital information.

Consumer Brands — Nestlé Sells Nature’s Bounty and Other Vitamin Brands for $1 Billion

Nestlé agreed to sell a portfolio of mainstream vitamin and supplement brands to private-equity firm Yellow Wood Partners for $1 billion.

The sale includes Nature’s Bounty, Osteo Bi-Flex, Ester-C, Nuun, Puritan’s Pride, Sisu and Gard, along with Nestlé’s U.S. private-label supplements business.

Those operations generated approximately $1.2 billion in sales last year. Nestlé had acquired several of the brands as part of a much larger $5.75 billion acquisition in 2021. It will retain premium supplement brand Solgar. 

Why it mattered today: The deal reflects a broader change across major consumer companies. Rather than owning dozens of middle-market brands, companies such as Nestlé and Unilever are increasingly concentrating resources behind products where they believe they have stronger pricing power and higher margins.

For private equity, those discarded household names can become attractive opportunities precisely because they already have distribution, customers and recognizable brands.

Technology & Media — Google May Have to Let Publishers Say No to AI Without Losing Search Traffic

European regulators are questioning publishers about Google’s proposed system that would allow websites to opt out of having their material used in Google’s AI search products without being punished in traditional Google search rankings.

Publishers have argued that Google’s AI-generated summaries can answer users’ questions directly, reducing the number of people who click through to the websites that actually produced the information.

Google says it plans to make its opt-out mechanism available globally. 

Why it mattered today: This gets directly to the economic fight underneath AI search.

Publishers, retailers, review sites and countless other businesses spent two decades building their businesses around Google sending them visitors. AI search risks changing that bargain by using information from those websites while sending fewer customers back.

If regulators successfully force a meaningful opt-out, businesses may gain considerably more bargaining power over how their content is used by AI platforms.

Agriculture & Food — USDA Turns to Satellites and AI After Farmers Lose Faith in Crop Numbers

The Agriculture Department announced a pilot program using satellite imagery, geospatial technology, crop modeling, artificial intelligence and machine learning to improve its estimates of how much American farmers are planting and producing.

The changes follow growing criticism from farmers and commodity traders that USDA crop estimates have become less reliable.

That criticism matters because government acreage and yield estimates can move corn, soybean and wheat prices almost instantly. Earlier this year, grain prices fell more than 5% following one major USDA revision. 

The agency also wants to reduce the number of repetitive surveys farmers must complete while providing greater transparency about how its estimates are calculated.

Why it mattered today: Government crop statistics help determine commodity prices, farm income, food costs, insurance payouts and federal agricultural programs. More accurate estimates would not simply help farmers — they could improve pricing throughout the food supply chain.

Healthcare — Novartis Scores a Potential Blockbuster Multiple-Sclerosis Win

Novartis reported positive late-stage results for its oral multiple-sclerosis drug remibrutinib, which outperformed an older treatment in reducing relapses and also showed meaningful improvement in slowing disability progression.

The company plans to seek regulatory approvals globally.

Novartis shares rose about 4%, and analysts estimate the drug could eventually generate as much as $9 billion in annual sales across multiple diseases if its broader development program succeeds. 

Why it mattered today: Pharmaceutical companies constantly need new products to replace billions of dollars in sales lost when older blockbuster medicines face generic competition. Successful late-stage drugs can therefore change an entire company’s long-term earnings outlook.

For patients, an effective oral treatment could also provide an alternative to more complicated therapies used to control multiple sclerosis.

Corporate Deals — GoPro Surges After $285 Million Rescue Deal

Action-camera pioneer GoPro jumped more than 50% after optical-equipment company Starman Optical agreed to take a 90% stake in the business through a $285 million cash transaction.

The deal will also repay approximately $92 million of GoPro debt.

GoPro was once valued at roughly $4 billion, but its market value collapsed as smartphone cameras improved and Chinese competitors gained ground.

Starman makes optical transceivers used in AI data centers and sees opportunities to combine its technology with GoPro’s portfolio of more than 2,500 U.S. imaging and optics patents

Why it mattered today: It is an unusual example of the AI infrastructure boom reaching into a struggling consumer-electronics company. Starman is effectively buying GoPro’s brand, engineering capability and intellectual property while giving GoPro a financial lifeline.

Key Market Movers

Company / Sector

Move

Why

GoPro

More than +50%

$285 million Starman Optical transaction

AMD

Down about 3% in late trading

Higher yields pressured AI and semiconductor stocks

Microsoft

Down roughly 1%

Technology sold off as borrowing costs rose

Energy stocks

Among the day’s few winners

Brent crude surged to $94.65

Semiconductors

Broad decline

Every Philadelphia Semiconductor Index component finished lower

Transportation

Among the weakest groups

Higher fuel costs and economic concerns pressured the sector

Technology’s weakness is especially important because much of the AI buildout depends on extraordinarily large capital expenditures. The higher long-term interest rates move, the more expensive financing those investments becomes. 

What to Watch Wednesday, September 2

The first major number arrives at 8:15 a.m. ET with the ADP private-employment report for August. After Tuesday’s weak hiring numbers, investors will be looking for confirmation that companies are becoming more cautious about adding employees.

At 10:00 a.m. ET, July factory-orders data will offer another look at business investment and manufacturing demand.

Then at 2:00 p.m. ET, the Federal Reserve releases its Beige Book, the nationwide survey of economic conditions gathered from businesses around the country. With markets increasingly expecting a September rate increase, comments about prices, hiring, wages and consumer demand will receive unusual attention. 

After the closing bell comes one of the week’s biggest corporate tests: Broadcom reports quarterly earnings Wednesday evening.

Broadcom sits at the center of AI networking and custom semiconductor demand. Investors will be watching not simply whether it beats quarterly expectations, but what CEO Hock Tan says about future orders from hyperscale data-center customers.

After Nvidia’s enormous forecast last week, Broadcom will provide a second major reading on whether the AI spending boom is continuing across the broader semiconductor supply chain. 

Bottom Line

Tuesday delivered a fairly clear message.

The American economy is still growing, but the cost of keeping it growing is becoming more expensive.

Factories remain in expansion, employers are not conducting mass layoffs and enormous amounts of money continue moving into technology and infrastructure. But hiring is weakening, construction is slowing, oil is approaching $95 and borrowing costs are climbing again.

For businesses, the biggest risk is increasingly the combination rather than any single problem: higher energy costs, higher financing costs and still-elevated input prices arriving at the same time consumers and employers are becoming more cautious.

And for investors, Wednesday brings another test of the divide dominating markets — a slowing traditional economy on one side and an AI investment boom still consuming extraordinary amounts of capital on the other.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

HOUSTON — SLB, one of the world’s largest oilfield-services companies, is making a major move outside traditional drilling with a $4.1 billion acquisition of German cooling specialist Kelvion, betting that the enormous expansion of artificial intelligence will create a new industrial market around keeping data centers from overheating.

The deal is a striking example of how the AI boom is beginning to reshape industries far beyond semiconductors and software.

SLB built its global business helping oil and gas companies drill wells, manage reservoirs and operate energy infrastructure.

Now it wants to help operate the physical infrastructure behind artificial intelligence.

Under the agreement announced Monday, SLB will pay about $3.4 billion in cash and assume approximately $700 million of Kelvion debt.

Kelvion makes heat exchangers and thermal-management systems used across data centers, energy facilities and industrial operations.

But data centers have become its largest and fastest-growing business.

Kelvion expects to generate roughly $2.3 billion to $2.4 billion in total revenue in 2026, with approximately $1.2 billion to $1.3 billion coming from data centers alone.

That is where SLB sees the opportunity.

Modern AI systems require enormous clusters of high-powered chips running continuously inside data centers.

Those chips generate tremendous amounts of heat.

If that heat cannot be removed efficiently, the computers cannot operate properly.

As AI processors become more powerful and are packed more densely into server racks, traditional air conditioning is increasingly insufficient. Data-center operators are turning toward sophisticated liquid-cooling and heat-transfer systems capable of removing much larger amounts of heat.

In simple terms, the more powerful the AI becomes, the harder it becomes to keep the machines cool.

And that is creating an entirely new infrastructure business.

SLB CEO Olivier Le Peuch described AI as driving one of the largest infrastructure investment cycles in history.

The company believes Kelvion will allow it to provide more of the systems required to build and operate those facilities rather than simply participating in the energy side of the business.

That distinction is important.

AI data centers need enormous amounts of electricity, cooling equipment, pumps, piping, heat exchangers, water systems and other industrial infrastructure.

Many of those requirements look much more like the large engineering projects SLB has spent decades working on in the energy industry than they do traditional Silicon Valley technology projects.

SLB therefore sees an opportunity to transfer its engineering expertise into a rapidly expanding market.

Together, SLB and Kelvion are expected to generate more than $2 billion in data-center revenue this year.

By 2028, SLB is targeting between $4.5 billion and $5 billion in annual revenue from its combined data-center solutions business.

That would turn AI infrastructure into a significant new business line for a company historically associated almost entirely with oil and gas.

The acquisition also shows how the economics surrounding artificial intelligence are spreading.

Nvidia and other semiconductor companies may supply the processors, but those processors cannot operate without buildings, electricity and cooling.

That means some of the biggest beneficiaries of the AI boom may ultimately be industrial companies that never designed a computer chip.

Utilities are building new generation capacity.

Construction companies are erecting enormous data centers.

Electrical-equipment companies are supplying transformers and switchgear.

And cooling companies are becoming increasingly valuable because every high-powered AI processor ultimately produces heat that must be removed.

Kelvion sits directly inside that problem.

SLB expects the acquisition to increase both earnings per share and free cash flow per share during the first 12 months after closing and estimates roughly $120 million in annual synergies within three years.

The transaction is expected to close during the first half of 2027, subject to regulatory approvals.

For SLB, the acquisition represents something bigger than diversification.

It is a bet on where industrial spending is moving.

For more than a century, companies like SLB built their businesses around the enormous infrastructure required to extract and move energy.

The next infrastructure boom may increasingly involve the enormous amounts of energy—and cooling—required to run artificial intelligence.

JBizNews Desk | Houston

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Artificial intelligence is no longer just changing how companies work. Global financial regulators are now warning that it could also change how fast — and how dangerously — cyberattacks can hit banks, markets and other critical financial infrastructure.

The Financial Stability Board, the international body that monitors risks to the global financial system, warned G20 finance ministers and central bank governors this week that the rapid development of powerful artificial intelligence models is creating a new level of cybersecurity risk.

FSB Chair Andrew Bailey said the most immediate concern from frontier AI is its potential effect on cyber risk.

In simple terms, AI could allow hackers to do in minutes what previously took teams of people hours, days or even weeks.

AI systems can potentially search for weaknesses in computer networks, generate malicious code, automate phishing campaigns, adapt attacks while they are underway and dramatically increase the number of targets criminals can attack at the same time.

That changes the economics of cybercrime.

A hacker who once had the resources to attack a handful of companies could potentially use AI to attack hundreds or thousands. And because banks, exchanges, insurers, payment processors and investment firms are deeply connected, a successful attack against one important institution could quickly become a problem for many others.

That is why regulators are looking beyond the danger to one individual bank.

The bigger concern is systemic risk — the possibility that an AI-powered attack could disrupt payments, trading systems, customer accounts or financial infrastructure badly enough to damage confidence throughout the financial system.

If customers cannot access their bank accounts, businesses cannot process payments or markets cannot operate normally, the damage can spread far beyond the company that was originally attacked.

The FSB also warned that financial firms increasingly depend on a relatively small group of major technology companies for cloud computing, artificial intelligence and other critical infrastructure.

That concentration creates another vulnerability.

If many banks are relying on the same technology provider and that provider suffers a major failure or cyberattack, several financial institutions could experience problems at the same time.

The warning does not mean regulators believe an AI-triggered financial crisis is underway.

It means they believe the capabilities are developing quickly enough that governments, regulators and financial companies need to strengthen defenses before a major event happens.

Bailey said authorities should focus on resilience and on ensuring advanced AI models are released and deployed safely and responsibly across countries.

The warning comes as financial regulators are already watching several other vulnerabilities, including high asset valuations, stress in sovereign debt markets and risks in private credit.

But AI introduces something different.

Traditional financial crises usually begin with money — bad loans, too much debt, collapsing asset prices or a shortage of liquidity.

An AI-driven cyber crisis could begin with technology.

A sophisticated attack could potentially disable systems first and create the financial panic afterward.

What It Means for Businesses

This is not only a banking story.

Almost every company now depends on banks, electronic payments, payroll platforms, cloud services and digital financial systems.

If AI makes cyberattacks cheaper, faster and more sophisticated, businesses may face higher cybersecurity costs, stricter insurance requirements and tougher demands from banks, regulators and customers to prove their systems are protected.

Cyber insurance could also become more expensive as insurers attempt to understand a type of risk for which there is still relatively little historical loss data.

For business owners, the message is increasingly simple: AI security is becoming financial security.

Companies spent the past several years asking how artificial intelligence could increase productivity.

The next question may be just as important:

How do you stop artificial intelligence from being used against you?

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SACRAMENTO, Calif. — California lawmakers have approved legislation recognizing Jewish identity as an ethnicity strictly for state demographic data collection. The measure does not grant Jews minority status for California benefit programs or make Jewish individuals or businesses eligible for minority grants, contracts, procurement preferences or other state benefits.

Senate Bill 1387 has been sent to Gov. Gavin Newsom and is not yet law. If signed, its principal provisions would take effect in 2029.

The bill recognizes that Jewish identity can include shared ancestry, ethnicity, culture and history—not religion alone. It would require California agencies already collecting information about ancestry or ethnic origin to include a separate category for Jewish identity.

Participation would be voluntary, and public reporting would use aggregated data protected from identifying individual respondents. The information could help California measure employment, education, health and other outcomes affecting Jewish residents, identify disparities and guide future policy or funding decisions.

The bill recognizes Jewish identity as an ethnicity strictly for state demographic data purposes. It allows California to count Jewish residents, study their circumstances and identify potential disparities, but it does not include Jews or Jewish-owned businesses among the groups eligible for California’s existing minority-benefit programs. It provides no automatic access to minority grants, contracts, procurement preferences or other state benefits.

Selecting “Jewish” on a state form would not certify a company, make it eligible for a grant or provide access to a government contract. Any such benefit would require separate legislation or changes to the eligibility rules governing individual programs.

That is different from the historic federal minority-business framework established through the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce.

In January 2025, Chamber founder and CEO Duvi Honig signed a first-of-its-kind Memorandum of Understanding at the U.S. Department of Commerce with Deputy Secretary of Commerce Don Graves and Eric Morrissette, who was performing the duties of under secretary of commerce for minority business development.

The agreement with the Minority Business Development Agency established a national framework for expanding access to capital, contracts, global markets and business-development resources for minority business enterprises within the Jewish community.

The initiative was intended to represent and benefit Jewish entrepreneurs and businesses across all 50 states—not only companies seeking certification or holding a particular Chamber membership.

Department of Commerce officials also directed the Chamber to establish an independent certification process based on federal guidance. The Chamber developed a due-diligence system for reviewing ownership, identity and business legitimacy and offers businesses at certain membership levels the option of applying for certification.

The certification provides qualified minority-owned businesses with vetted documentation that can be presented across corporate procurement systems and to federal, state and local entities—including counties, cities and townships—that recognize or operate under applicable federal minority-business guidelines.

Acceptance remains subject to the standards of each corporation, government agency or contracting program. Certification does not guarantee a contract or grant, but it gives qualified businesses a documented pathway for pursuing opportunities across government and the private sector.

The Chamber expanded that effort on June 3, 2026, by signing a separate MOU on Capitol Hill with the National Minority Supplier Development Council, one of the country’s largest and most established corporate supplier-development organizations.

NMSDC is led by President and CEO Donald Cravins Jr., a former under secretary of commerce for minority business development. The partnership was designed to connect the Chamber’s business network and certification work with NMSDC’s nationwide relationships across Corporate America.

The two developments should therefore not be confused.

California’s bill would add Jewish identity to state demographic data. The Chamber’s federal initiative created a national framework for recognition, certification and economic development, later expanded into Corporate America through NMSDC.

One is intended to count and study a population. The other provides qualifying businesses with a vetted pathway to pursue economic opportunities.

California’s legislation provides meaningful recognition of Jewish identity as an ethnicity and could influence future policy by revealing previously undocumented disparities. For now, however, its direct effect is demographic: it does not itself provide minority-business certification or automatic eligibility for state contracts, grants or procurement preferences.

JBizNews Desk | Sacramento and Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — A proposed U.S. tariff of up to 50% on Canadian-built vehicles and auto parts could hit Toyota and Honda especially hard, because both companies rely heavily on Canadian factories to supply American dealerships.

Toyota and Honda together produce more than three-quarters of all vehicles manufactured in Canada, and a significant share of that output is sold in the United States.

Last year, Canadian-built vehicles accounted for roughly 25% of Honda’s U.S. sales and about 17% of Toyota’s, according to industry data cited in current reporting.

That makes the tariff threat more than a trade-policy story.

It is a potential consumer-price story.

If the tariff takes effect at the proposed 50% rate on January 1, 2027, automakers would face a difficult choice: absorb a major portion of the added cost, raise sticker prices, shift production, reduce Canadian output, or some combination of all four.

None of those options is painless.

Absorbing the tariff would squeeze margins. Raising prices would hit consumers directly. Moving production would take time and require major investment. Cutting Canadian production could reduce vehicle availability and disrupt dealership inventories.

For Honda, the exposure is especially large.

The company builds popular models in Canada, including vehicles that are important to its North American lineup. Toyota also relies on Canadian plants for high-volume production.

A 50% tariff does not mean a $40,000 vehicle automatically becomes a $60,000 vehicle. Automakers can spread costs across models, suppliers and markets, and trade rules can depend on where individual components originate.

But even a fraction of the tariff being passed through would materially affect affordability.

That matters in a market where new-vehicle prices are already elevated and financing costs remain high.

Consumers are not just paying more for the car itself. Monthly payments have also been pressured by higher interest rates, insurance premiums and repair costs.

A new tariff on top of those expenses could make an already difficult affordability problem worse.

The impact could also extend beyond new cars.

If fewer new Toyota and Honda vehicles reach U.S. dealerships, used-car prices for those brands could rise as buyers compete for a smaller pool of available vehicles.

Parts and repairs could also become more expensive if tariffs extend broadly to Canadian-made components.

The policy is not final.

The White House has threatened the higher tariff if trade negotiations with Canada do not produce an agreement, leaving several months for talks before the January deadline.

That means automakers are now planning around uncertainty.

They may need to decide whether to accelerate shipments before the deadline, adjust production schedules, stockpile parts or reconsider which models are built on each side of the border.

For Toyota and Honda, the problem is that Canada is not a small side operation.

It is deeply integrated into their North American manufacturing system.

That is why the tariff risk matters so much.

A 50% levy on Canadian vehicles would not stay contained at the border.

It could show up in dealership prices, monthly payments, parts availability, repair costs and the used-car market — making it one of the more consequential trade issues for American car buyers heading into 2027.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

CAIRO — The United States is moving to cut the United Arab Emirates branches of Banque Misr off from U.S. dollar transactions over alleged dealings involving Iran, extending Washington’s sanctions campaign deeper into the international banking system.

Banque Misr is Egypt’s second-largest bank and one of the country’s most important financial institutions.

The restrictions are aimed specifically at its UAE branches rather than the entire bank, but the consequences could still be significant because access to the U.S. dollar remains essential to large portions of international trade and finance.

The UAE and Egyptian central banks said they are coordinating over the matter and that Banque Misr will take the steps necessary to maintain normal operations.

The U.S. restrictions are expected to take effect after a public-comment period.

For businesses operating internationally, the development is important because it demonstrates how powerful U.S. financial sanctions can be even outside American borders.

A company in Dubai may be buying equipment from Europe, receiving goods from Asia or selling products somewhere in the Middle East, but if the transaction is settled in dollars, it can still pass through the U.S.-linked financial system.

That gives Washington enormous leverage.

A bank that loses access to dollar clearing can find it significantly harder to conduct international transactions, finance trade or serve corporate customers whose businesses depend on dollar payments.

The action against Banque Misr also demonstrates the growing risk surrounding secondary sanctions.

Companies do not necessarily have to be directly dealing with a sanctioned Iranian entity to face problems. Exposure can emerge through banks, customers, shipping companies, suppliers or other intermediaries involved somewhere in a transaction.

That makes sanctions compliance increasingly important for companies with operations across the Middle East.

Banks and businesses must understand not only who their direct customer is, but also where payments originate, where they ultimately go and which institutions touch the transaction along the way.

The U.S. has been intensifying financial pressure on Iran by targeting the institutions and networks that allow Iranian businesses and government-linked entities to move money internationally.

Restricting access to dollars can be one of Washington’s most powerful tools because the U.S. currency continues to dominate global trade and financial settlements.

For Egypt, the situation is particularly sensitive.

Banque Misr plays a major role in the country’s banking system and serves companies and individuals throughout Egypt and internationally. Egyptian authorities will therefore want to prevent restrictions on the UAE branches from disrupting the broader institution or undermining confidence.

For the UAE, the action is another reminder of the balancing act facing one of the world’s fastest-growing financial centers.

Dubai and Abu Dhabi have become major hubs connecting businesses across Asia, Europe, Africa and the Middle East. That international reach also makes compliance with U.S. sanctions increasingly important for banks operating there.

The immediate restriction may involve only a handful of Banque Misr branches.

The larger message reaches much further.

In today’s global financial system, access to the dollar is effectively access to the commercial bloodstream of international business.

And Washington is showing again that it is willing to use that access as leverage.

JBizNews Desk | Cairo

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JBizNews U.S. Market Opening Recap — September 1, 2026 | 10:00 A.M. ET

Wall Street opened September under pressure Tuesday as surging oil prices, another jump in Treasury yields and renewed inflation fears hit technology shares and revived concerns that the Federal Reserve may have to raise interest rates again.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average opened at 53,083.58, down 102.3 points, or 0.19%. The S&P 500 opened at 7,635.47, down 50.7 points, or 0.66%, while the Nasdaq Composite opened at 26,031.67, down 339.2 points, or 1.29%. Selling accelerated after the bell: by 9:54 a.m. ET, the Dow was down about 302 points, the S&P 500 was off 0.7% and the Nasdaq was down 1.1%. 

The biggest pressure is coming from the combination of oil and interest rates. Brent crude climbed roughly 2.5% to around $92.74 a barrel as the U.S.-Iran conflict continued to disrupt the Strait of Hormuz, one of the world’s most important oil-shipping routes. Higher energy costs are feeding directly into fears that inflation could stay elevated longer than expected. 

Bond markets are reinforcing that concern. The 10-year Treasury yield rose to about 4.78% from 4.75% Monday, while the two-year yield climbed to roughly 4.37% from 4.34%. Higher yields raise borrowing costs throughout the economy and particularly pressure expensive technology stocks whose valuations depend heavily on future earnings. 

Technology was among the morning’s weakest areas. Nvidia fell about 1.7% and Micron Technology dropped roughly 2.1% in early trading. Nvidia and Caterpillar were also among the largest individual drags on the Dow. Energy shares were comparatively stronger as crude prices climbed. 

The morning also brought a significant new development in the AI infrastructure boom. SoftBank-backed SB Energy filed for a U.S. initial public offering, revealing first-half revenue of $138.7 million, up 66.4% from a year earlier, alongside a $3.21 billion net loss. Nvidia has committed $1.5 billion to a private placement tied to the IPO, while OpenAI holds warrants valued at roughly $5.5 billion. SB Energy disclosed a backlog of approximately $439 billion, highlighting both the enormous capital flowing toward AI data centers and the increasingly aggressive financial commitments behind that expansion. 

The morning economic calendar is unusually concentrated. S&P Global’s final August U.S. Manufacturing PMI was scheduled for 9:45 a.m. ET, followed at 10 a.m. by the August ISM Manufacturing Index, July JOLTS job openings and July construction spending. Those releases are particularly important because investors are now judging whether economic strength and persistent inflation give the Fed room to tighten policy again. At the 10 a.m. cutoff for this recap, the official BLS, Census and ISM pages available for verification had not yet populated the new figures, so JBizNews is not publishing unconfirmed calendar numbers as actual results. 

The stakes are higher after Fed Chair Kevin Warsh’s hawkish Jackson Hole remarks last Friday. A strong manufacturing report or resilient labor-demand reading could push Treasury yields even higher by strengthening the case for another rate increase. A meaningful slowdown would give investors some relief by reducing that pressure.

For the rest of Tuesday, oil and Treasury yields remain the two numbers to watch first. If Brent stays above $90 and the 10-year Treasury holds near 4.8%, technology, housing, consumer and other rate-sensitive sectors could remain under pressure. Any escalation involving Iran or shipping through the Strait of Hormuz could quickly push energy prices higher again.

Investors will also watch whether the early technology selloff broadens beyond Nvidia and Micron, whether energy stocks continue to outperform, and how markets digest the morning’s manufacturing and labor data once fully absorbed.

Corporate earnings return to center stage after the closing bell, with Dell Technologies, Palo Alto Networks and MongoDB among the companies scheduled to report. Those results will provide another test of spending on AI infrastructure, enterprise technology and cybersecurity. 

The larger test comes Friday, September 4, with the August employment report. Between now and then, every economic release will be measured against one question that has suddenly returned to the center of the market: Is the economy strong enough — and inflation stubborn enough — for the Federal Reserve to raise rates again?

For now, Wall Street’s answer is showing up clearly in the opening trade: oil up, yields up, technology down and investors taking risk off the table.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Bank of Israel cut its benchmark interest rate by another quarter percentage point Tuesday, bringing it down to 3.25% as inflation cools and the Israeli economy continues recovering from the war with Iran.

It is the central bank’s fourth rate cut of 2026, following reductions in January, May and July.

The move is important because it signals that policymakers believe the economy is strong enough — and inflation contained enough — to continue lowering borrowing costs despite ongoing geopolitical uncertainty.

For Israeli businesses and households, that means money is gradually becoming cheaper again.

Why the Bank Cut Rates

The Bank of Israel said inflation has moderated in recent months and is now running below the midpoint of its target range.

At the same time, the economy has been rebounding.

Second-quarter data show Israel’s GDP was 6.2% higher than in the fourth quarter of 2025 on an annualized basis.

That number partly reflects the sharp recovery from the disruption caused earlier this year by the military operation against Iran.

Even excluding production abroad by Israeli companies, GDP was still 3.8% higher than in the fourth quarter of 2025 on an annualized basis.

In simple terms:

The economy took a hit during the war, but activity has bounced back quickly enough that the Bank of Israel now has more room to lower rates.

What Lower Rates Actually Mean

Interest rates influence the cost of borrowing throughout the economy.

When the Bank of Israel cuts rates, commercial banks can eventually offer cheaper financing.

That can lower borrowing costs for:

  • Businesses financing expansion or equipment
  • Homebuyers taking mortgages
  • Consumers using credit
  • Real estate developers
  • Companies refinancing existing debt

It does not mean every loan becomes cheaper immediately.

But over time, lower central-bank rates usually work their way through the financial system.

Real Estate Could Feel It Quickly

Israel’s real estate market is especially sensitive to interest rates.

Higher borrowing costs made mortgages more expensive and put pressure on buyers and developers.

A lower benchmark rate could gradually make monthly mortgage payments more manageable and encourage buyers who have been sitting on the sidelines to return.

Developers may also find it easier to finance projects.

That does not automatically mean housing prices will surge.

But lower borrowing costs remove one of the major pressures that has been holding activity back.

Businesses Get Some Breathing Room

For companies, especially smaller businesses, interest expense has become a major cost.

A business borrowing money for inventory, equipment, real estate or expansion has been paying significantly more than it did several years ago.

Every quarter-point reduction helps.

If the Bank of Israel continues lowering rates, businesses could eventually see meaningful savings on financing.

That can also encourage companies to invest rather than keep projects on hold.

The Shekel Matters Too

The Bank of Israel also noted that the shekel has remained broadly stable.

That is important because cutting interest rates can sometimes weaken a currency.

A sharply weaker shekel could make imported goods, fuel and raw materials more expensive and push inflation higher again.

So far, the central bank appears comfortable that currency conditions remain stable enough to continue easing.

Israel’s risk premium has also declined substantially from the levels reached during the war.

That means investors currently view the country as less financially risky than they did during the height of the conflict.

But The Bank Is Still Cautious

The central bank made clear that uncertainty remains high.

Geopolitical tensions have not disappeared.

Another major escalation could affect energy prices, government spending, investment, the shekel and inflation.

That means policymakers are unlikely to promise a long series of cuts in advance.

They will continue watching inflation, economic growth, financial markets and security developments before each decision.

What It Means for Businesses

The message from the Bank of Israel is becoming increasingly clear.

The emergency economic conditions created by the war are easing.

Inflation is under better control.

Economic activity is recovering.

And the central bank is gradually shifting from protecting against inflation toward supporting growth.

For businesses, homeowners and borrowers, that is an important change.

Israel entered 2026 with borrowing costs still relatively high.

The benchmark rate is now down to 3.25% after four cuts this year.

If inflation remains contained and the recovery continues, businesses could enter 2027 with meaningfully cheaper financing than they had at the beginning of this year.

That is good news for investment, construction, hiring and consumer spending.

But the Bank of Israel is still walking a narrow line:

Support the recovery without allowing inflation or geopolitical risk to return.

For now, it believes another quarter-point cut is a risk worth taking.

JBizNews Desk | Jerusalem

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — Oil prices climbed again Tuesday morning as renewed U.S.-Iran fighting revived fears of disruption around the Strait of Hormuz, keeping pressure on gasoline and transportation costs just as an emergency federal fuel waiver takes effect.

Brent crude rose roughly 2% to about $92.21 a barrel, while U.S. crude traded near $87.88.

The move matters because crude oil remains the single biggest input into gasoline prices, and the national average for regular gas is still around $4.08 a gallon — roughly 90 cents higher than a year ago.

That means consumers are feeling the impact directly at the pump.

But the effect does not stop there.

Higher oil raises the cost of diesel, trucking, air travel, shipping and manufacturing. Those added costs can eventually work their way into groceries, online deliveries, airline tickets and other consumer prices.

The immediate concern is the Strait of Hormuz.

A significant share of the world’s oil moves through that narrow waterway, making any escalation involving Iran a direct threat to global energy markets.

Even when physical supplies are not actually disrupted, traders can push prices higher simply because the risk of disruption has increased.

That is why the federal government is now trying to create more breathing room in the gasoline market.

An EPA emergency waiver takes effect September 1, allowing refiners and fuel suppliers to shift away from more restrictive summer-blend gasoline requirements earlier than normal.

The change is intended to increase available supply.

The EPA says the waiver could add hundreds of thousands of barrels per day to the gasoline market, giving refiners more flexibility at a time when crude prices remain elevated.

The waiver does not guarantee lower prices.

If oil continues climbing because of geopolitical risk, the extra gasoline supply may only soften the increase rather than reverse it.

Still, it gives the market another source of supply at a critical time.

The timing is important because consumers are already dealing with elevated borrowing costs, expensive insurance and stubborn food inflation.

A sustained move higher in energy would add another layer of pressure.

For households, the most visible sign will be the gas station.

But the broader risk is that higher oil becomes another inflation problem.

If crude remains above $90 and geopolitical tensions intensify, gasoline prices could remain elevated well into the fall — and the cost of moving goods and people across the economy could rise with them.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The federal government has launched one of its most aggressive crackdowns yet on commercial-driver training, immediately removing more than 110 truck-driving schools from the federal system and putting more than 160 additional schools on notice.

The move is aimed at a problem that reaches far beyond driving schools.

It strikes directly at the pipeline that supplies drivers to America’s trucking industry — the network responsible for moving food, fuel, retail goods, construction materials and nearly everything else businesses and consumers depend on.

The Department of Transportation said the 110 schools being removed from the Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration’s Training Provider Registry were connected to more than 5,000 commercial drivers who later failed federal English-language proficiency requirements.

Those schools must immediately stop operating as federally recognized entry-level driver-training providers.

That means they can no longer provide the classroom instruction, behind-the-wheel training or certification required for new commercial drivers entering the profession.

And that is only the first part of the crackdown.

Federal investigators also conducted nearly 400 investigations across 40 states, uncovering serious violations at other training providers.

The problems included instructors who were not properly licensed, training facilities that did not have enough space for required maneuvers, missing testing records and even one provider that claimed its classroom was inside a school bus positioned in the back of a trailer.

Those investigations resulted in more than 160 proposed removals from the federal Training Provider Registry.

According to DOT, drivers certified by those providers were linked to 239 commercial-vehicle fatalities.

Why This Matters

Truck drivers cannot simply decide to drive an 80,000-pound tractor-trailer.

They need a commercial driver’s license, and new drivers generally must complete federally recognized entry-level training before they can qualify.

That makes driving schools one of the first gates into the trucking industry.

If the gate is weak, the entire system can be weak.

A school that improperly certifies drivers can potentially place people behind the wheel of extremely heavy commercial vehicles without the training or qualifications federal regulators expect.

That becomes a safety issue.

But it is also a business issue.

The trucking industry already operates with tight margins, high insurance costs, driver turnover and enormous pressure to keep freight moving.

Removing hundreds of training providers from the system could make it harder for some trucking companies to recruit drivers quickly.

Washington Is Going Much Further Than the Schools

The crackdown is not limited to training providers.

The Department of Homeland Security launched a synchronized enforcement sweep involving more than 200 driving schools across 23 states.

Federal investigators are examining allegations involving CDL fraud, unauthorized employment, identity-document fraud, financial crimes, money laundering and labor exploitation.

Officials are also investigating possible connections to human smuggling, drug trafficking and organized criminal networks.

That turns what might appear to be a licensing story into something much larger.

Federal authorities are asking whether parts of the commercial-driver system have been exploited by organized networks that help people improperly obtain licenses, jobs or documents.

The Justice Department has also created a multi-state task force involving federal prosecutors and law-enforcement agencies across Illinois, Indiana, Michigan and Ohio.

Its mission includes identifying fraudulent trucking operations, reducing highway fatalities and prosecuting criminal activity connected to commercial transportation.

The Driver Crackdown Is Already Huge

DOT says more than 28,000 commercial drivers have been taken off the road for failing English-language proficiency requirements since June 2025.

The department also says states have been forced to cancel more than 30,000 commercial licenses that were improperly issued to foreign drivers.

And federal regulators have already removed more than 8,000 unqualified training schools from the FMCSA registry during the past year and a half.

The scale shows that Washington does not view this as a handful of isolated bad schools.

It is treating it as a systemic problem.

Federal regulators are now launching a nationwide audit of third-party CDL skills testers as well.

Those are the people and organizations that actually test drivers before licenses are issued.

If regulators conclude a state is failing to properly oversee its CDL program, the consequences can become severe.

Federal highway funding can be withheld.

In extreme cases, a state’s CDL program could even be decertified, preventing it from issuing, renewing, transferring or upgrading commercial licenses until problems are corrected.

What It Means for Trucking Companies

For trucking companies, this creates both risk and responsibility.

Hiring a driver may increasingly require more than simply checking whether that person has a valid CDL.

Carriers may face growing pressure from regulators, insurers and customers to verify where drivers were trained, whether their documentation is legitimate and whether they meet federal qualification standards.

Companies that depend heavily on newly licensed drivers could also see their recruiting pipelines shrink if more training schools disappear.

That could tighten driver supply in certain regions.

And when driver supply becomes tighter, labor costs can rise.

Insurance companies may also respond.

If insurers become more concerned about poorly trained drivers or fraudulent CDL credentials, they may impose stricter underwriting requirements on trucking companies.

That could mean higher premiums or more detailed driver screening.

What It Means for the Economy

Trucking sits underneath almost every part of the U.S. economy.

Factories depend on trucks.

Supermarkets depend on trucks.

Construction companies depend on trucks.

Retailers, farms, ports and warehouses all depend on trucks.

If the federal government successfully removes unsafe or fraudulent operators, the long-term result could be a safer and more professional industry.

But in the short term, removing large numbers of schools and drivers could also reduce capacity in parts of the freight system.

That matters because fewer qualified drivers can mean higher transportation costs.

And higher freight costs eventually show up somewhere — in the price of groceries, building materials, manufactured goods or other products.

The government’s message is clear.

Washington is no longer treating commercial-driver fraud as a paperwork problem.

It is treating it as a public-safety, national-security and economic issue affecting one of the most important industries in America.

And the crackdown is only beginning.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SANTA CLARA, Calif. — Nvidia is investing $3.5 billion in Taiwan-based chipmaker MediaTek, deepening a partnership that stretches from artificial intelligence data centers to personal computers and vehicles.

The investment is being made through MediaTek convertible bonds as part of a broader financing round.

But the bigger story is not simply that Nvidia is buying into another semiconductor company.

It is that Nvidia is increasingly helping finance the companies that will build products around its own technology.

MediaTek is one of the world’s largest chip designers, best known for processors used in smartphones, televisions and connected devices. It is now pushing deeper into AI computing and data-center chips.

Under the expanded partnership, MediaTek will use Nvidia’s NVLink Fusion technology, which allows custom processors to connect directly with Nvidia’s computing systems.

That matters because large AI data centers are increasingly built from many different types of chips working together.

Nvidia dominates the graphics processors used to train and run artificial intelligence. But companies such as MediaTek are developing specialized chips designed for particular customers or workloads.

By making those chips easier to connect with Nvidia hardware, Nvidia can remain at the center of an AI system even when another company designs part of it.

The two companies are also expanding their work in AI-powered PCs and automobiles, giving Nvidia another path into markets beyond giant cloud data centers.

For Nvidia, the strategy is becoming clear.

The company is no longer simply trying to sell as many AI chips as possible. It is building an ecosystem in which chipmakers, cloud providers, computer manufacturers and other technology companies increasingly design their products around Nvidia’s architecture.

That can create an enormous competitive advantage.

The more companies that build around Nvidia technology, the harder it becomes for customers to replace Nvidia entirely with a competing platform.

The $3.5 billion investment also shows how Nvidia is using the extraordinary cash generated by the AI boom to strengthen the network surrounding its business.

In other words, Nvidia is not just benefiting from the expansion of artificial intelligence.

It is increasingly helping finance the infrastructure, companies and technology that could determine where the next wave of AI spending goes.

JBizNews Desk | Santa Clara, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

One of the lessons from the war with Iran was that the country’s leadership is “really, really crazy” and is willing to take extreme measures to disrupt the flow of oil and gas in the Gulf, US Vice President JD Vance told Fox News in an interview on Monday night.

According to Vance, the United States is now at a stage where a significant portion of its activity in the region is aimed at ensuring freedom of navigation and trade through the Strait of Hormuz.

He said the US recently responded to Iranians who, he claimed, were preparing to lay mines in the strait.

“What strikes me as strange is that sometimes they even fire on their own allies, just to prevent the free flow of oil and gas,” Vance said.

Asked whether this was the reason behind US moves in Venezuela aimed at increasing oil production, he responded: “That is not the reason we are doing it, but it is certainly a positive benefit of the move.”

US Vice President JD Vance said recently, ‘We want our allies to be like Israel – strong, independent, and capable of defending their own interests so we don’t have to.’  (credit: Spencer Platt/POOL/AFP via Getty Images)

US strikes Iran for first time in weeks

On Sunday night, the US military struck two Iranian launchers on Larak Island after Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) forces were seen preparing to fire towards the Strait of Hormuz, a US official confirmed to The Jerusalem Post.

This strike marked the first US strike on Iran in several weeks.

Esther Davis, Amichai Stein, and Jerusalem Post Staff contributed to this report.

This post was originally published on here

Kfar Saba-based ParaZero Technologies has secured its first order from a U.S. federal customer for its DefendAir counter-drone system, giving the small Israeli defense company an important entry into the American government market.

The order includes DefendAir net launchers, Net Pods and an on-site training program that ParaZero personnel will provide to the customer’s operators.

The company did not identify the federal agency involved or disclose the order’s financial value.

That missing number is important. The contract represents a strategic milestone and possible validation of ParaZero’s technology, but investors cannot yet determine whether it will materially affect the company’s revenue.

The market nevertheless reacted sharply. ParaZero shares, traded on Nasdaq under the symbol PRZO, jumped more than 31% following the announcement, closing at approximately 82 cents as trading volume surged above 74 million shares.

DefendAir is designed to stop hostile drones by physically capturing them with a net. Unlike systems that depend solely on electronic jamming, net-based interception can be useful in locations where disrupting radio signals could interfere with communications or other sensitive equipment.

The system is intended to protect government installations, critical infrastructure, military operations and other locations where unauthorized drones present a security threat.

ParaZero said the package goes beyond delivering equipment. Its team will train the federal customer’s operators in deploying the system and responding quickly during an attempted drone intrusion.

The order follows a series of recent commercial developments for DefendAir. ParaZero previously received an order from a major U.S. defense company, secured integration agreements with Israeli defense businesses and reported a purchase order worth more than $1 million from another American customer.

It also received an initial order from a major European defense manufacturer for integration of DefendAir equipment into an autonomous counter-drone platform.

The federal purchase therefore matters less for its undisclosed immediate value than for what it could unlock. Government procurement processes are difficult for small foreign defense companies to enter, and a first customer can provide operational experience and credibility when competing for larger orders.

The wider opportunity is expanding rapidly. Governments, airports, military facilities and infrastructure operators are searching for ways to counter inexpensive drones that can conduct surveillance, disrupt operations or carry explosives.

ParaZero was established in 2013 and initially became known for parachute-recovery systems designed to protect drones and the people or property below them. Its expansion into counter-drone technology places the company on the opposite side of the same problem: safely stopping an aircraft that should not be there.

The first U.S. government order does not by itself establish a large federal business. It does, however, move ParaZero from demonstrating its technology to supplying and training an American government customer—an important distinction for a small Israeli defense company seeking international growth.

JBizNews Desk | Kfar Saba, Israel

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Venezuela has the largest proven oil reserves in the world. For years, much of that oil has effectively been trapped underground by sanctions, deteriorating infrastructure, political instability and a state energy industry that has struggled to maintain production.

That may now be changing.

A newly announced U.S.-Venezuela energy agreement is no longer simply about bringing some additional Venezuelan crude back to market. If the production targets are reached, it could begin changing the balance of global oil supply itself.

Venezuela’s interim president Delcy Rodríguez said Sunday that the agreement will run for 25 years, begin with the development of 17 strategic oilfields and target production of more than 1.5 million barrels per day.

The plan also includes eight additional oil blocks.

President Donald Trump said Friday that U.S.-backed partnerships would gain majority control over development tied to more than 65 billion barrels of Venezuelan proven reserves, while Venezuela maintains sovereign ownership of the oil itself.

That distinction is important.

The agreement does not mean the United States suddenly owns Venezuela’s oil reserves. It means American companies and U.S.-backed investment could gain substantially more control over how a large portion of those reserves are developed, financed, produced and brought to market.

And that is where this becomes much bigger than Venezuela.

Venezuela currently produces roughly 1.25 million barrels of oil per day, a fraction of the more than 3 million barrels a day it produced at its peak.

If American capital, technology and oilfield expertise can restore even part of that lost production, millions of additional barrels could eventually become available to the global market.

That would create a new source of supply at exactly the moment the world is dealing with instability in the Middle East, constrained traffic through the Strait of Hormuz and uncertainty surrounding Iranian and Russian energy exports.

The timing could hardly be more significant.

For months, oil markets have carried a geopolitical premium because so much of the world’s energy supply depends on regions vulnerable to war, sanctions or shipping disruptions.

A revived Venezuelan oil industry would give the United States and global refiners another major supply source in the Western Hemisphere.

It could also reduce America’s dependence on crude traveling through vulnerable international shipping routes.

But none of this happens overnight.

Venezuela’s oil infrastructure has suffered from years of underinvestment, equipment failures and declining technical capacity. Pipelines, refineries, storage facilities and production sites will require enormous amounts of capital.

Trump has said the broader effort could attract close to $100 billion in private investment.

Chevron is already moving toward expanding its Venezuelan operations, while oil-services giant SLB has secured access to key Venezuelan oilfield data as part of efforts to modernize the country’s energy infrastructure.

The Treasury Department has also been steadily removing legal barriers to U.S. participation.

On August 27, Treasury amended a series of Venezuela-related licenses covering oil, petrochemicals, services and transactions involving state oil company PDVSA. Treasury said the changes were designed to support U.S. businesses reinvesting in Venezuela following investment reforms there.

That means this is no longer simply political rhetoric.

The legal framework, corporate participation and capital structure are beginning to move into place.

The impact could eventually reach consumers directly.

More global oil supply generally puts downward pressure on crude prices, which can eventually feed through to gasoline, diesel, airline fuel, trucking costs and the price of goods transported across the economy.

It could also change the calculations inside OPEC+, where producers carefully manage supply in an effort to influence global prices.

If Venezuela eventually adds hundreds of thousands — or potentially more than a million — barrels per day of sustainable production, other producers may have to decide whether to cut their own output, accept lower prices or fight for market share.

There is still substantial execution risk.

Venezuela has a long history of political intervention in its oil industry, unpaid obligations, nationalizations and disputes with foreign companies. Rebuilding production on this scale will require not only money but years of stability and confidence that contracts will be honored.

That is why investors should not treat 1.5 million barrels per day as oil that will suddenly appear tomorrow.

But they also should not dismiss what is happening.

For decades, one of the world’s largest pools of oil has been operating far below its potential.

If U.S. capital and technology begin unlocking that supply again, the consequences could stretch far beyond Caracas or Washington.

It could change where America gets its oil, reduce some of the world’s dependence on Middle Eastern supply routes, pressure OPEC’s market power and ultimately change what consumers pay for energy.

That is why the real story is no longer simply that Washington reached an oil agreement with Venezuela.

It is that one of the largest untapped sources of additional oil supply in the world may be coming back into play.

JBizNews Desk | Washington / Caracas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Markets — Oil Above $90 Pushes Stocks Lower and Rate-Hike Bets Higher

Wall Street finished August on the defensive Monday as renewed U.S.-Iran fighting pushed crude oil sharply higher and added another inflation problem for investors already preparing for the possibility of a September Federal Reserve rate increase.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 53,179.77, down 380.22 points, or 0.71%. The S&P 500 finished at 7,684.37, down 27.39 points, or 0.36%, while the Nasdaq Composite ended at 26,360.91, down 41.51 points, or 0.16%. All three indexes nevertheless finished August with gains, and the Dow recorded its fifth consecutive positive month. 

Brent crude settled at $90.49 a barrel, while the 10-year Treasury yield moved to roughly 4.76%. Futures markets were pricing roughly a two-thirds probability of a quarter-point Fed rate increase in September. 

For businesses, the connection is straightforward: higher oil raises transportation, manufacturing and delivery costs, while higher Treasury yields feed directly into mortgages, commercial loans and corporate borrowing.

AI Advertising — ChatGPT Ads Reach a $1 Billion Run Rate

OpenAI said Monday that ChatGPT Ads has reached a $1 billion annualized revenue run rate, only months after the company began testing advertising inside ChatGPT.

The company is now opening its Ads Manager to advertisers across India, Europe, the Middle East and North Africa after initially launching it in the United States. OpenAI said small and midsize businesses already represent a meaningful share of advertisers using the platform. 

This matters well beyond OpenAI.

Google and Meta have dominated digital advertising for years because businesses follow consumer attention. ChatGPT is now demonstrating that conversational AI can become another major place where businesses pay to reach customers.

For small businesses in particular, this could eventually create a third major advertising channel alongside search and social media.

The $1 billion figure is an annualized pace, not $1 billion already collected this year. But reaching that level this quickly shows how aggressively OpenAI is trying to monetize its enormous user base ahead of a potential public offering.

Insurance — Aon Makes a $17 Billion Bet on the American Middle Market

Aon agreed to buy USI Insurance Services for $17 billion from KKR, one of the largest insurance-brokerage transactions in recent years.

USI is the 10th-largest U.S. insurance broker, with roughly $3 billion in annual revenue, more than 10,500 employees and nearly 200 offices. The acquisition follows Aon’s $13 billion purchase of NFP in 2024 and dramatically expands its reach among midsize American businesses. 

Aon shares fell roughly 9% as investors focused on the price of the transaction and the additional debt needed to finance it.

For business owners, this consolidation matters because insurance brokers increasingly control access to commercial property, casualty, employee-benefit and specialty insurance markets.

Larger brokers can bring more negotiating power and data to clients, but fewer independent competitors can also mean businesses have fewer places to shop for coverage.

AI Infrastructure — An Oilfield Giant Makes a $4.1 Billion Data-Center Move

SLB, historically one of the world’s largest oilfield-services companies, agreed to acquire German cooling-equipment manufacturer Kelvion in a transaction worth about $4.1 billion, including assumed debt.

The reason is not oil.

It is artificial intelligence.

Kelvion provides cooling equipment increasingly used inside data centers, where high-powered AI chips generate enormous amounts of heat. SLB expects its combined data-center businesses could produce $4.5 billion to $5 billion in annual revenue by 2028. SLB shares rose roughly 3.8% Monday. 

The deal shows how far the AI investment boom is spreading.

The money is no longer flowing only to Nvidia, cloud providers and software companies. It is reaching cooling systems, electricity generation, construction, engineering and industrial equipment.

For traditional industrial companies, AI infrastructure is becoming a diversification strategy in its own right.

Semiconductors — Nvidia Invests $3.5 Billion in MediaTek

Nvidia disclosed a $3.5 billion investment in Taiwan’s MediaTek through convertible bonds, deepening a partnership that now spans artificial-intelligence chips, personal computers and vehicles.

MediaTek customers will be able to use Nvidia’s NVLink Fusion technology to build custom AI processors that connect directly with Nvidia-powered computing systems. Alphabet also participated in MediaTek’s bond offering, although the size of its investment was not disclosed. 

The strategic logic is clear: Nvidia wants more companies designing products that ultimately connect back into Nvidia’s architecture.

The financial structure, however, is attracting attention.

Nvidia is increasingly financing companies and projects that also generate demand for Nvidia technology. Investors are beginning to ask whether some AI-industry growth is becoming circular — where suppliers finance customers who then spend part of that money buying the suppliers’ products.

That does not make the demand artificial, but it is becoming an increasingly important question for investors trying to value the AI boom.

Cybersecurity — Global Watchdog Says AI Cyber Risk Is Now the Immediate Financial Threat

The Financial Stability Board warned Monday that AI-driven cybersecurity risk is its most immediate concern for the global financial system.

FSB Chair Andrew Bailey said advanced AI could dramatically change the speed, scale and economics of cyberattacks. Regulators are particularly concerned that banks and financial institutions depend heavily on a relatively small number of technology providers, creating concentrated vulnerabilities if one major system is compromised. 

For businesses, the significance is practical.

AI can help attackers find vulnerabilities faster, automate attacks and operate at a scale that previously required large teams.

That means cybersecurity spending is increasingly becoming a basic operating expense rather than simply an IT department issue.

Insurers are also beginning to rewrite cyber policies as AI changes the types of risks businesses face.

Corporate Governance — SEC Moves Toward Ending Federal Shareholder-Proposal Rules

The Securities and Exchange Commission took a significant step Monday toward potentially eliminating the federal rule governing shareholder proposals at public companies and handing greater authority to individual states.

The current rule allows qualifying investors to require companies to include certain shareholder proposals in annual proxy materials. SEC Chairman Paul Atkins has questioned whether the agency has legal authority to impose the rule and is considering rescinding it. 

The change could significantly reduce the ability of smaller shareholders and activist investors to force votes on executive compensation, environmental policies, corporate governance and other issues.

It could also create a patchwork system.

Texas, for example, has adopted rules that in some cases could require an investor to own as much as $1 million of stock before submitting a proposal, compared with federal thresholds that can begin around $2,000.

For corporate boards, this could substantially reduce shareholder resolutions. For investors, it could shift more influence toward large institutions capable of meeting state thresholds.

Consumers — August Becomes the Most Expensive August Ever at the Gas Pump

Average U.S. gasoline prices remained above $4 a gallon every day during August, according to AAA data cited by the Associated Press.

That made August 2026 the most expensive August for gasoline on record. 

For households, gasoline acts almost like a tax: the more consumers spend getting to work, school and stores, the less money remains for restaurants, clothing, entertainment and other discretionary purchases.

For businesses, the effect travels through delivery fleets, trucking, airlines, food distribution and virtually every supply chain.

That is why the oil market is now connected directly to the Federal Reserve debate.

If energy costs continue spreading into broader inflation, policymakers could feel forced to raise rates even as the labor market is slowing.

Key Market Movers

Aon fell roughly 9% following its $17 billion USI acquisition. SLB gained about 3% to 4% after announcing its Kelvion deal. GameStop rose roughly 3% after projecting higher quarterly profit despite falling sales, largely because of investment gains. Exxon Mobil gained about 2.1% and Chevron rose around 1.5% as crude prices jumped. Nvidia gained about 1% following the MediaTek investment announcement. 

The biggest losers were utility companies, although that California wildfire-liability development was already part of JBizNews coverage Monday.

What to Watch Tuesday, September 1

Tuesday brings several reports capable of moving both stocks and interest-rate expectations.

At 9:45 a.m. ET, investors get the final August U.S. manufacturing PMI. At 10:00 a.m., the more closely watched ISM Manufacturing Index is expected to show continued factory expansion, while the JOLTS job-openings report will provide another look at whether employers are still competing heavily for workers. 

Those numbers matter more than usual because markets are now pricing a substantial probability of a Fed rate increase in September. Strong manufacturing or labor numbers could strengthen that case; unexpectedly weak numbers could complicate it.

Corporate earnings also return Tuesday.

Medtronic reports before the opening bell, while Dell Technologies, Palo Alto Networks, MongoDB and Credo Technology are among companies expected to report after the close. Dell will provide another important reading on AI-server demand, while Palo Alto Networks offers a direct view into corporate cybersecurity spending. 

Bottom Line

Monday’s market decline was not particularly large, but the business signals underneath it were.

Oil is again above $90, borrowing costs are rising, and the Fed may be moving toward another rate hike. At the same time, billions of dollars continue flowing into AI advertising, semiconductors, data-center infrastructure and cybersecurity.

The economy entering September is increasingly split between businesses struggling with higher operating and financing costs and industries attracting extraordinary amounts of capital because of artificial intelligence.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A Miami defense-technology company generating about $1 million in annual revenue is preparing to enter the public market in a deal that could value the combined company at $638 million. Its biggest advantage may be its growing access to Washington.

Space-Eyes develops artificial-intelligence software that detects and tracks drones while combining radar, radio-frequency and satellite data into a single operating picture for governments and security agencies.

Eric Trump joined the company during the second quarter as its third-largest private investor and a strategic adviser. Space-Eyes has agreed to merge with McKinley Acquisition Corp., a blank-check company, and expects the combined business to trade on the Nasdaq under the ticker CUAS.

The transaction assigns an enterprise value of approximately $370 million to the operating business—about 370 times its reported annual revenue. The larger $638 million figure represents the projected equity value of the combined company and assumes that McKinley shareholders do not withdraw their money before closing.

That distinction matters. Space-Eyes has participated in military exercises and was selected by the U.S. Space Force to develop tracking algorithms, but its valuation depends heavily on winning much larger government and commercial contracts as it moves beyond research and development.

The company opened a Washington office in January and has assembled a proposed post-merger board with extensive defense, financial and corporate experience. The nominees include retired Army Lieutenant Colonel and former Delta Force officer Jim Reese; former Morgan Stanley investment-banking executive Terry Meguid; Wharton professor Harbir Singh; and aerospace entrepreneur Norm Christensen.

Company executives said Eric Trump helped introduce prospective board members but will not serve as a director. McKinley Chief Executive Peter Wright said Trump brings experience assessing drone threats to high-profile properties, regardless of his relationship to the president.

The investment adds Space-Eyes to a growing collection of drone and robotics companies connected to President Donald Trump’s sons.

Eric Trump invested in Israeli drone manufacturer Xtend as part of its planned public-market transaction. Eric Trump and Donald Trump Jr. also backed Powerus through an investment vehicle, while Trump Jr. became an adviser to drone-components manufacturer Unusual Machines in late 2024. Eric Trump separately serves as chief strategy adviser to robotics developer Foundation Future Industries.

Several of those companies have secured or pursued government business. Powerus announced an agreement to supply interceptor drones to the U.S. Air Force, while Foundation Future Industries received a $24 million Pentagon contract to test humanoid robots for potential military applications.

Those connections have attracted congressional scrutiny. House Democrats asked the Defense Department’s inspector general in May to investigate the circumstances surrounding Pentagon business awarded to a drone company backed by the president’s sons. Lawmakers later sought a broader review of federal awards involving multiple defense companies connected to the Trump family.

Representatives for Eric Trump have said he is a passive investor in certain ventures, does not participate in their daily operations and plays no role in awarding or overseeing government contracts.

For investors, the immediate question is whether Space-Eyes can turn government relationships and promising technology into substantial revenue. The merger still requires shareholder and regulatory approval, and its expected fourth-quarter closing is not guaranteed.

Buying into the company would therefore mean wagering on contracts Space-Eyes expects to win—not on the approximately $1 million in business it produces today.

JBizNews Desk | Miami

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JERUSALEM — Israeli banks are approaching a Sept. 1 deadline that could sharply disrupt financial ties with the Palestinian Authority, threatening billions of shekels in trade and potentially creating economic fallout for businesses on both sides.

Bank Hapoalim and Israel Discount Bank have for decades served as correspondent banks connecting Israel’s financial system with Palestinian banks.

Those relationships allow payments to move between Israeli and Palestinian businesses and support more than NIS 20 billion in annual trade involving goods and services.

But the banking arrangements have become increasingly difficult to maintain because of legal exposure involving money laundering, terrorist financing and other compliance risks.

The Israeli government has provided the banks with indemnity and legal protections allowing them to continue operating, but those protections have repeatedly been temporary.

Without continued protection, the banks have warned they could sever their relationships with Palestinian financial institutions.

The Sept. 1 deadline now brings that question directly into focus.

The Bank of Israel has asked the banks to continue providing services in order to prevent a potentially severe economic disruption, and discussions have been underway over postponing the cutoff.

No final long-term solution had been reached when those discussions were reported.

The economic stakes are significant.

A complete break in correspondent banking ties would make it much more difficult for Palestinian businesses to pay Israeli suppliers and for Israeli companies to collect payments from Palestinian customers.

It could also interfere with salary transfers, commercial transactions and the movement of shekels through the Palestinian banking system.

Israeli officials have previously approved the creation of a government company that could eventually take over the correspondent-banking role from commercial banks and shield them from the legal exposure they say has become increasingly difficult to accept.

That system, however, has not yet become operational because of legislative and bureaucratic delays.

For now, Bank Hapoalim and Israel Discount Bank remain the financial bridge.

The issue has also drawn international attention because of concerns that a sudden banking cutoff could destabilize the Palestinian economy and create wider economic and security consequences in the West Bank.

The Palestinian economy is heavily dependent on the Israeli shekel and on access to Israeli financial institutions.

Any disruption therefore extends well beyond banking.

Israeli manufacturers, wholesalers, food suppliers, construction companies and other businesses that sell into Palestinian markets could also be affected if payments are interrupted.

The Bank of Israel’s intervention reflects those broader concerns.

The immediate question entering Sept. 1 is whether another temporary arrangement will be reached or whether the banking relationship will begin moving toward an actual cutoff.

Either way, the deadline highlights a larger unresolved problem Israel has been trying to address for years: how to maintain necessary commercial activity with Palestinian financial institutions while protecting Israeli banks from legal and regulatory exposure.

Until a permanent mechanism is established, each extension simply pushes that decision further down the road.

JBizNews Desk | Jerusalem

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A new global bank designed specifically to finance defense spending is moving closer to reality — and Canada wants to put itself at the center of it.

The proposed Defence, Security and Resilience Bank, or DSRB, is seeking to raise roughly €100 billion, about $116 billion, to provide lower-cost financing and loan guarantees for governments and defense contractors.

Canada, Belgium, Greece, Latvia, Luxembourg, Romania, Turkey, Ukraine and Albania have already backed the concept.

So far, however, the project has secured only about €5 billion in commitments, according to officials involved in the effort.

The bank’s broader target is approximately €20 billion in paid-in capital, with another €80 billion available to support future lending.

The idea is simple.

Governments across Europe and NATO are being asked to spend dramatically more on defense.

Large contractors can usually finance themselves.

Smaller suppliers often cannot.

That creates a bottleneck.

A company capable of manufacturing drones, missile components, ammunition, radar systems or military electronics may have government demand waiting for it but still struggle to borrow enough money to expand a factory, hire workers or build inventory.

The proposed bank is designed to solve that problem.

It would lend to governments and defense companies while also providing guarantees that could encourage commercial banks to finance smaller or riskier suppliers.

That could create an entirely new financing system around the defense industry.

And that matters because the global rearmament push increasingly depends not only on military budgets, but on whether companies can actually raise the capital needed to produce what governments are ordering.

Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney has strongly backed the project and wants the institution headquartered in Canada.

But there is a major obstacle.

Several of the world’s largest economies have not joined.

Germany and Britain remain outside the project, while Japan has not committed.

That matters because the DSRB wants a triple-A credit rating.

A high rating would allow it to borrow money cheaply in global bond markets and then pass those lower financing costs on to governments and defense companies.

Without major sovereign backers, obtaining that rating could become more difficult.

There are also questions about duplication.

The European Union already has its €150 billion SAFE defense-financing program, while Britain is developing a separate Multilateral Defence Mechanism with several European partners.

Some governments are asking why another institution is necessary.

Supporters argue that the DSRB would be different because it would become a permanent multilateral financial institution rather than a temporary government program.

It could also finance companies outside the European Union.

That is particularly important for countries such as Canada, Turkey and Ukraine.

Major financial institutions are already paying attention.

Around a dozen banks, including JPMorgan and Deutsche Bank, have provided approximately $10 million in funding or services to help establish the institution.

Those banks could eventually earn substantial fees arranging defense projects financed through the DSRB.

For investors and businesses, the significance is bigger than the bank itself.

Defense spending is increasingly becoming an industrial-policy story.

Governments are not simply buying more weapons.

They are trying to rebuild factories, expand supply chains, increase ammunition production and create domestic manufacturing capacity that has been allowed to shrink for decades.

That requires enormous amounts of private capital.

If the DSRB succeeds in raising €100 billion and leveraging that money into even larger amounts of lending, smaller defense companies could gain access to financing previously available mainly to the largest contractors.

That could create new factories, new suppliers and new investment opportunities throughout the defense economy.

But the project still has to prove that it can attract enough large governments to make the economics work.

Canada is prepared to move ahead with the countries already committed.

The real test now is whether Britain, Germany and other major economies decide that joining is worth the cost.

If they do, the DSRB could become something much larger than another international institution.

It could become a permanent global financing engine for the defense industry.

JBizNews Desk | Ottawa / London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A teenager in a Ford Mustang reportedly smashed through the perimeter fence of a New Hampshire airport Saturday night, drove onto an aircraft parking area and struck both a tractor and a small parked plane.

Nobody was killed. Authorities say the 17-year-old driver was intoxicated and fleeing police. There is no indication the incident was terrorism.

But that is exactly why what happened should get Washington’s attention.

If an allegedly intoxicated teenager being chased by police can drive through an airport perimeter and reach aircraft, America should be asking a much larger question: What happens when someone actually intends to cause damage?

That question carries far greater weight today.

The United States is confronting renewed hostilities with Iran, whose Revolutionary Guards have vowed retaliation following American military action against Iranian positions. Tehran has repeatedly demonstrated that its responses do not have to remain confined to a traditional battlefield. Iran has options ranging from attacks on energy and shipping infrastructure to cyber operations, proxies and other forms of asymmetric warfare.

And economic disruption itself can be a weapon.

The latest confrontation has already demonstrated how quickly geopolitical conflict can reach American businesses and consumers. Renewed fighting around the Strait of Hormuz sent oil prices sharply higher Monday. The waterway is one of the most important energy corridors on Earth, and disruptions there immediately affect transportation, manufacturing, shipping, inflation and ultimately the price Americans pay for everyday goods.

America therefore cannot think about homeland security only in terms of military bases or government buildings.

Airports are economic infrastructure.

So are ports, power grids, water systems, telecommunications networks, rail lines, fuel terminals, data centers and major logistics hubs.

Disable enough of them—even temporarily—and the damage does not stop at the physical site. Flights are canceled. Cargo stops moving. Workers cannot get where they need to go. Supply chains back up. Businesses lose revenue. Insurance costs rise. Markets react. Consumers pay more.

That is precisely why hostile governments and terrorist organizations increasingly look at economic disruption as part of modern warfare.

Iran has also previously been accused of cyber activity targeting Western utilities and American water infrastructure. Recent reporting on Tehran’s potential retaliation options has identified energy facilities, shipping routes, utilities, cyberattacks and sabotage among the vulnerabilities security officials must consider.

None of that means Saturday’s incident in New Hampshire was anything more than what police say it was.

It means America should learn from it.

According to New Hampshire State Police, the Mustang crashed through the perimeter fence at Portsmouth International Airport, crossed an aircraft apron and struck a tractor and an unoccupied stationary aircraft before stopping.

That should be treated as a real-world security test that nobody intended to conduct.

The question for airport authorities around the country should now be straightforward: Could the same thing happen here?

Could an ordinary passenger vehicle penetrate the perimeter? How quickly would it be detected? Could it reach a commercial aircraft, fuel storage area or other sensitive infrastructure? Where are physical barriers strong enough to stop a vehicle rather than merely mark a boundary? And are smaller airports being protected with the same urgency Americans expect at the largest hubs?

Security planning cannot begin after a hostile actor finds the weakness.

September 11 taught America what happens when civilian transportation infrastructure is turned into a weapon. Twenty-five years later, the threat environment has changed enormously. Drones, cyberattacks, inexpensive technology and decentralized terror networks have expanded the number of ways an adversary can create enormous economic damage without fielding an army.

The lesson from New Hampshire is therefore bigger than one teenager, one fence and one damaged airplane.

The United States is again facing enemies who openly want to impose costs on America. Protecting the country means protecting not only American lives but the infrastructure that keeps the American economy moving.

A fence that can be smashed through by an intoxicated teenager should not simply be repaired.

It should trigger a question across the country:

Where else are we this vulnerable—and are we going to find those weaknesses before our enemies do?

JBizNews Desk | New Hampshire

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A new global bank designed specifically to finance defense spending is moving closer to reality — and Canada wants to put itself at the center of it.

The proposed Defence, Security and Resilience Bank, or DSRB, is seeking to raise roughly €100 billion, about $116 billion, to provide lower-cost financing and loan guarantees for governments and defense contractors.

Canada, Belgium, Greece, Latvia, Luxembourg, Romania, Turkey, Ukraine and Albania have already backed the concept.

So far, however, the project has secured only about €5 billion in commitments, according to officials involved in the effort.

The bank’s broader target is approximately €20 billion in paid-in capital, with another €80 billion available to support future lending.

The idea is simple.

Governments across Europe and NATO are being asked to spend dramatically more on defense.

Large contractors can usually finance themselves.

Smaller suppliers often cannot.

That creates a bottleneck.

A company capable of manufacturing drones, missile components, ammunition, radar systems or military electronics may have government demand waiting for it but still struggle to borrow enough money to expand a factory, hire workers or build inventory.

The proposed bank is designed to solve that problem.

It would lend to governments and defense companies while also providing guarantees that could encourage commercial banks to finance smaller or riskier suppliers.

That could create an entirely new financing system around the defense industry.

And that matters because the global rearmament push increasingly depends not only on military budgets, but on whether companies can actually raise the capital needed to produce what governments are ordering.

Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney has strongly backed the project and wants the institution headquartered in Canada.

But there is a major obstacle.

Several of the world’s largest economies have not joined.

Germany and Britain remain outside the project, while Japan has not committed.

That matters because the DSRB wants a triple-A credit rating.

A high rating would allow it to borrow money cheaply in global bond markets and then pass those lower financing costs on to governments and defense companies.

Without major sovereign backers, obtaining that rating could become more difficult.

There are also questions about duplication.

The European Union already has its €150 billion SAFE defense-financing program, while Britain is developing a separate Multilateral Defence Mechanism with several European partners.

Some governments are asking why another institution is necessary.

Supporters argue that the DSRB would be different because it would become a permanent multilateral financial institution rather than a temporary government program.

It could also finance companies outside the European Union.

That is particularly important for countries such as Canada, Turkey and Ukraine.

Major financial institutions are already paying attention.

Around a dozen banks, including JPMorgan and Deutsche Bank, have provided approximately $10 million in funding or services to help establish the institution.

Those banks could eventually earn substantial fees arranging defense projects financed through the DSRB.

For investors and businesses, the significance is bigger than the bank itself.

Defense spending is increasingly becoming an industrial-policy story.

Governments are not simply buying more weapons.

They are trying to rebuild factories, expand supply chains, increase ammunition production and create domestic manufacturing capacity that has been allowed to shrink for decades.

That requires enormous amounts of private capital.

If the DSRB succeeds in raising €100 billion and leveraging that money into even larger amounts of lending, smaller defense companies could gain access to financing previously available mainly to the largest contractors.

That could create new factories, new suppliers and new investment opportunities throughout the defense economy.

But the project still has to prove that it can attract enough large governments to make the economics work.

Canada is prepared to move ahead with the countries already committed.

The real test now is whether Britain, Germany and other major economies decide that joining is worth the cost.

If they do, the DSRB could become something much larger than another international institution.

It could become a permanent global financing engine for the defense industry.

JBizNews Desk | Ottawa / London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Israel and Greece signed the largest defense agreement in the history of their relationship Monday, putting Israeli missile-defense technology at the center of Greece’s military buildup as tensions with Turkey continue to intensify across the eastern Mediterranean.

The agreement, valued at approximately €3 billion, or roughly $3.5 billion, will give Greece a comprehensive multi-layered air-defense network built around three Israeli systems: Rafael’s David’s Sling and SPYDER systems and Israel Aerospace Industries’ BARAK MX.

The project, known as the “Achilles Shield,” represents one of the largest defense export agreements ever signed by Israel.

Israel’s Ministry of Defense Director General Maj. Gen. (Res.) Amir Baram and his Greek counterpart Ioannis Bouras signed the agreement Monday at Israeli Defense Ministry headquarters.

For Israel, the deal is much bigger than another weapons sale.

It establishes Israeli technology as the backbone of the air defenses of a NATO member and strengthens an emerging strategic relationship among Israel, Greece and Cyprus at a time when all three are increasingly concerned about Turkey’s regional ambitions.

Greece has accelerated its military modernization as tensions with Ankara grow over islands, maritime boundaries and control of the Aegean Sea.

Those tensions were again visible in recent days when Greek F-16 fighter jets were reportedly scrambled after a Turkish drone operated near the Greek islands of Samothraki and Lemnos.

Turkey and Greece are both NATO members, yet their longstanding disputes over territorial waters, airspace and islands have repeatedly pushed the two countries toward confrontation.

Israel’s relationship with Turkey has also deteriorated sharply under President Recep Tayyip Erdogan, making Greece increasingly important to Jerusalem both strategically and economically.

The new defense system will give Greece multiple layers of protection against aircraft, drones, cruise missiles and ballistic threats.

David’s Sling provides the longer-range layer. BARAK MX covers medium-range threats, while SPYDER can defend against aircraft, helicopters, drones and missiles at shorter ranges.

Together, the systems are designed to operate as one integrated defensive network.

Delivery is expected within approximately 35 months.

Greek companies will also receive a significant share of the work, with approximately €700 million expected to be carried out by Greece’s domestic defense industry.

That provision is particularly important as European countries increasingly seek not only to purchase weapons but also to develop their own manufacturing capabilities and secure their supply chains.

For Israel’s defense industry, the implications are enormous.

Rafael and Israel Aerospace Industries are already seeing surging global demand as governments across Europe dramatically increase defense spending and seek air-defense systems proven under real combat conditions.

Israel’s systems have gained particular attention because of their repeated operational use against missiles, drones and rockets during recent conflicts.

The Greece agreement follows Israel’s record Arrow 3 sale to Germany and a growing list of major European defense contracts.

It also comes only months after Greece signed a separate approximately $750 million agreement for Elbit Systems’ PULS rocket artillery system.

Together, the agreements are turning Greece into one of Israel’s most important defense customers.

But the larger story may be geopolitical.

Israel increasingly views Greece as a strategic gateway into Europe and as part of a broader network of countries whose security and economic interests overlap with its own.

That relationship could eventually extend beyond the purchase of individual missile-defense systems.

Closer integration among Israel, Greece and Cyprus could allow the countries to share radar information, sensors and command-and-control capabilities, creating a much broader picture of aerial threats across the eastern Mediterranean.

For Greece, the objective is deterrence.

For Israel, it is exports, alliances and strategic depth.

And for Israel’s defense industry, the agreement is another sign that air defense has become one of the country’s most valuable exports.

A technology developed primarily to protect Israel is rapidly becoming part of the defense architecture of Europe.

JBizNews Desk | Israel

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent heads into the G20 finance ministers meeting in Asheville on Monday carrying an unusually heavy agenda.

He wants the world’s largest economies to talk about trade imbalances, economic growth, debt transparency and cutting financial ties with Iran.

But the meeting is also likely to turn the spotlight back on the United States itself.

Washington is now dealing simultaneously with new tariffs, a $40 trillion federal debt load, elevated long-term Treasury yields, intervention in currency markets and growing questions about how aggressively the government should try to influence borrowing costs.

That makes this G20 gathering more than a routine diplomatic meeting.

It is becoming a test of how much confidence the rest of the world still has in the way the United States is managing global finance.

Bessent is expected to push countries to address what Washington sees as excessive trade imbalances and industrial overcapacity, particularly from China.

He is also expected to press governments and financial institutions to reduce or cut economic relationships with Iran as the administration expands secondary sanctions.

That could put several G20 members in an uncomfortable position.

Many of them agree that Chinese overproduction has distorted global markets.

But they are also wary of Washington using tariffs, sanctions and financial pressure in ways that can disrupt their own economies.

The U.S. position is complicated further by its own borrowing needs.

Federal debt crossed $40 trillion earlier this month, while the 30-year Treasury yield recently reached its highest level in nearly two decades.

Treasury responded by expanding purchases of older long-dated government bonds, doubling the maximum size of certain buyback operations to $4 billion.

The government says those purchases are designed to improve market liquidity, not artificially control interest rates.

But investors and foreign officials are watching closely.

The United States still depends heavily on global investors to finance its debt.

Foreign governments, central banks, pension funds and institutions are major buyers of Treasury securities.

If those investors begin demanding higher yields because they are concerned about inflation, deficits or intervention in financial markets, borrowing becomes more expensive not only for Washington but eventually for American businesses and households.

That is why this week’s G20 discussion matters far beyond diplomacy.

A Treasury yield is not simply a Wall Street number.

It helps determine the cost of mortgages, corporate loans, commercial real estate financing and enormous infrastructure investments now being planned across the U.S. economy.

Bessent is therefore walking into Asheville asking other countries to change their economic behavior while simultaneously defending some unusually aggressive U.S. policies of his own.

The administration has imposed or threatened tariffs against dozens of countries.

It has expanded sanctions pressure on Iran.

Treasury has intervened alongside Japan to support the yen.

And Washington has increased bond buybacks at a time when markets are already nervous about the amount of debt the government must sell.

The official American G20 agenda is built around growth, modernizing financial regulation, reducing excessive global imbalances, improving debt transparency and strengthening cross-border payments.

Those are familiar economic goals.

The environment surrounding them is not.

The world’s largest economies are entering the meeting with energy markets disrupted, trade relationships under pressure, inflation still elevated in several countries and central banks again considering higher interest rates.

That means the conversation in Asheville could quickly move from long-term economic cooperation to a much more immediate issue:

How much government intervention can global markets absorb before investors begin demanding a higher price for uncertainty?

For American businesses and consumers, that question matters because the answer will eventually show up in borrowing costs, currencies, tariffs and prices.

Bessent goes into the G20 trying to persuade the world that Washington has a coherent plan for stronger growth and more balanced trade.

This week, the world gets a chance to ask him the same question about America’s own finances.

JBizNews Desk | Asheville, North Carolina

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Federal Reserve spent much of the summer trying to convince markets that patience would be enough.

Kevin Warsh just changed that conversation.

In his first Jackson Hole address as Fed chair, Warsh made clear that the central bank’s 2% inflation target is not negotiable and that policymakers may still need to raise interest rates again if inflation does not move convincingly lower.

That was enough to immediately reset expectations across global markets.

Before the speech, traders saw roughly a 35% chance of a September rate increase.

After Warsh spoke, that probability jumped to around 60%.

The two-year Treasury yield climbed, the dollar strengthened, gold fell sharply and stocks struggled as investors adjusted to the possibility that the next major Fed move may not be a cut.

That matters because only weeks ago, much of Wall Street was focused on when rates could begin moving lower.

Now the question is different:

Will the Fed have to raise them again?

Warsh did not promise a September hike.

He deliberately avoided that kind of guidance.

Instead, he laid out the conditions that would force the Fed to act.

Inflation remains well above target.

The labor market remains relatively strong.

And Warsh said financial conditions do not appear broadly restrictive enough to guarantee inflation will return to 2%.

That combination gives the Fed room to tighten further if upcoming data do not improve.

For businesses, this matters immediately.

A higher Fed rate increases the cost of short-term borrowing, credit lines, floating-rate debt and business loans.

For consumers, it can keep pressure on credit cards, auto loans and eventually mortgages.

For investors, it changes how stocks are valued.

Growth companies — particularly expensive technology names — become harder to justify when safer government bonds offer higher returns.

That is why the market reaction went far beyond the Fed funds futures market.

Gold dropped sharply after the speech.

The dollar strengthened.

U.S. stocks finished Friday lower.

And global markets are now entering the new week with the possibility of tighter U.S. monetary policy firmly back in the conversation.

Warsh’s message is especially important because he appears determined to run the Fed differently from his predecessors.

He has criticized excessive forward guidance and suggested that markets should rely less on carefully choreographed hints from the central bank.

That means investors may receive fewer promises about what the Fed will do next and more pressure to react directly to inflation, employment and financial conditions.

In practical terms, that could make markets more volatile.

Every major inflation report now matters more.

Every employment report matters more.

And the September Fed meeting is no longer being treated as a routine hold.

The next major test comes as policymakers review the latest inflation and employment data before their September decision.

If inflation remains near current levels, the argument for another increase becomes stronger.

If price pressures cool meaningfully, the Fed can wait.

But the important shift has already happened.

Rate hikes are no longer a remote possibility sitting somewhere in the background. They are back at the center of the conversation.

And that means businesses, borrowers and investors need to start planning for a world in which money may become more expensive before it becomes cheaper.

JBizNews Desk | Jackson Hole, Wyoming

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Japan has spent more money defending its currency in the past month than ever before.

The country’s Finance Ministry says it used 15.3993 trillion yen — roughly $96.5 billion — between July 30 and August 26 to support the yen after it fell to its weakest levels in roughly four decades.

That would already be a major story for Japan.

But the reason global markets are paying attention is that the consequences do not stop in Tokyo.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent warned that a disorderly collapse in the yen could force investors around the world to unwind large financial positions, disrupt bond markets and ultimately raise borrowing costs for American households and businesses.

That is because the yen has spent years at the center of one of the most important trades in global finance.

Japan kept interest rates extremely low for decades.

Investors could borrow cheaply in yen and use that money to buy higher-yielding assets elsewhere — including U.S. Treasuries, corporate bonds and stocks.

That strategy is commonly known as the yen carry trade.

It works well when the yen is stable.

It becomes dangerous when the currency begins moving violently.

If the yen suddenly strengthens, investors who borrowed in yen can face rapidly growing losses and may be forced to sell other assets to repay those loans.

If the yen collapses instead, Japan faces higher import costs, more inflation and pressure on households and businesses.

That puts Tokyo in a difficult position.

Japan cannot simply allow the yen to fall indefinitely.

But defending it on this scale also has consequences.

The July intervention was particularly unusual because the United States joined Japan in buying yen, a rare example of coordinated currency intervention between the two governments.

Japan’s Finance Ministry later confirmed that the July 31 action was carried out together with the U.S. Treasury.

The government has also said it is prepared to intervene again if markets become disorderly.

The yen had weakened to around 164 per dollar before the intervention, its lowest level in about 40 years. The operation temporarily strengthened it, but the currency has since drifted back toward the 160 level.

That is why the pressure has not disappeared.

Japan is also increasingly expected to raise interest rates again.

The Bank of Japan lifted its benchmark rate to 1% in June, and economists now expect another increase could come as soon as September.

Higher Japanese rates would help support the yen.

But they could also encourage Japanese investors to keep more money at home instead of buying U.S. bonds.

That creates another potential problem for Washington.

Japan is one of the largest foreign holders of U.S. Treasury securities.

If Japanese investors find domestic bonds increasingly attractive, demand for U.S. government debt could weaken at exactly the moment Washington needs enormous amounts of financing for a federal debt load that has already surpassed $40 trillion.

Less demand generally means Treasury must offer higher yields to attract buyers.

And higher Treasury yields eventually filter through to mortgages, corporate loans, commercial real estate and other borrowing costs.

That is the connection Bessent is warning about.

A currency problem in Japan can become a financing problem in the United States.

For businesses and investors, the bigger lesson is that currencies are no longer moving quietly in the background.

Governments are intervening directly.

Central banks are changing rates.

And enormous pools of capital can move from one country to another very quickly when the economics change.

Japan has already spent nearly $100 billion trying to stabilize the yen.

If the currency remains under pressure, the next intervention could be even larger.

And the biggest question for Americans may ultimately not be what happens to the yen itself.

It may be what happens to U.S. borrowing costs if one of the world’s largest sources of capital begins bringing more of its money home.

JBizNews Desk | Tokyo / Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Russia is keeping more of its diesel at home.

Moscow has extended its ban on diesel exports through September 30, as repeated attacks and refinery disruptions continue to tighten domestic fuel supply and reduce the amount available to foreign buyers.

The restriction covers diesel, marine fuel and gas oils exported by Russian producers.

That matters far beyond Russia.

Russia is one of the world’s largest diesel exporters, and when those barrels disappear from the global market, buyers in Europe, Turkey, Africa and Asia have to compete more aggressively for supply from the United States, India, the Middle East and other refiners.

The result can be higher prices even when crude oil itself is not surging.

That distinction is important.

A trucking company does not buy crude oil.

It buys diesel.

An airline does not buy crude oil.

It buys jet fuel.

A construction company does not care what Brent crude is trading at if the refined fuel it actually needs remains expensive.

That is why refinery outages can create a different kind of energy shock.

Russia may still have crude oil available, but if damaged refineries cannot turn that crude into diesel, gasoline and other usable fuels, the global market can look adequately supplied on paper while the products businesses actually need remain tight.

The pressure has already forced buyers to change trade routes.

Turkey has sharply increased diesel purchases from the United States and India as Russian supply has become less dependable.

That means fuel is traveling farther, shipping costs are rising, and buyers are becoming more exposed to international freight and insurance costs.

For businesses, the impact can spread quickly.

Higher diesel prices raise the cost of trucking.

That pushes up freight bills.

Retailers, manufacturers and food distributors then have to decide whether to absorb those costs or pass them on to customers.

The result can be another layer of inflation even if headline oil prices are easing.

For Russia, the export ban is an attempt to stabilize its own domestic market.

Refinery disruptions have tightened supplies at home, and Moscow is prioritizing Russian consumers and businesses over foreign buyers.

But every barrel kept inside Russia is one less barrel available elsewhere.

That makes the ban part of a broader problem now affecting global energy markets:

the world may have enough crude oil, but it does not always have enough functioning refining capacity in the right place.

That is becoming especially important as the Iran conflict, shipping disruptions and geopolitical sanctions already complicate the movement of fuel around the world.

For investors, the lesson is straightforward.

Do not look only at crude prices.

Watch refinery outages, diesel inventories, export restrictions and shipping routes.

Those are the numbers that can determine what businesses actually pay to keep trucks moving, factories operating and goods delivered.

Russia’s latest move is another reminder that energy inflation does not always begin at the oil well.

Sometimes it begins at the refinery.

JBizNews Desk | Moscow

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Fuel surcharges were created for a simple reason: when diesel or jet-fuel prices rise sharply, carriers need a way to recover those extra costs without rewriting every shipping contract.

But the system is now doing something more complicated.

Some transportation companies are collecting more in fuel surcharges than they are actually spending on fuel, turning what customers may assume is a pass-through expense into an additional source of profit.

Union Pacific is one of the clearest examples.

During the second quarter, the railroad collected $91.1 million more in fuel-surcharge revenue than it spent on fuel. That difference translated into an estimated $83.2 million boost to operating profit.

That does not mean Union Pacific is improperly charging customers. Fuel surcharges are generally determined by formulas written into contracts, often tied to published fuel-price indexes and adjusted with a lag.

That lag is where the economics become important.

When fuel prices rise quickly, surcharges climb. But if fuel prices later fall faster than the surcharge formula resets, a carrier can continue collecting elevated fees even though its actual fuel expense has already declined.

For manufacturers, retailers and small businesses, the distinction matters because transportation costs ultimately flow through the economy.

A retailer paying a higher freight bill may raise prices.

A manufacturer may pass the cost to distributors.

A small business shipping packages may absorb the increase in its margin or charge the customer more.

The issue is not limited to railroads.

Residential-package fuel surcharges at UPS and FedEx are now above 24%, compared with roughly 9% in 2021.

The sharp rise in energy prices tied to the Iran conflict has given carriers a legitimate reason to increase surcharges. But because many of those formulas do not move perfectly in real time with actual fuel expenses, periods of volatility can widen the gap between what carriers collect and what they spend.

That creates a second-order inflation problem.

Oil does not have to remain permanently high for transportation bills to stay elevated. A surcharge can remain in place even after the underlying fuel price has begun falling.

For businesses negotiating shipping contracts, the practical question should therefore no longer be simply, “What is the fuel surcharge?”

It should be:

How is the surcharge calculated, how quickly does it reset, and does it actually track the carrier’s fuel cost?

For investors, there is another lesson.

Just as one-time accounting benefits can make corporate earnings look stronger, favorable fuel-surcharge economics can also temporarily lift transportation-company margins.

The money is real.

But investors still need to ask whether it is repeatable.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Attacks are disrupting the ports that load a major share of the world’s wheat, and prices are responding.

Chicago wheat futures closed Thursday at $7.60¾ a bushel, up 1.7% and their highest level since July 2023. The contract had surged to its daily trading limit Wednesday and has gained approximately 18% since the beginning of August.

The reason is straightforward. Russia and Ukraine normally account for nearly 30% of globally traded wheat, making the Black Sea one of the most important corridors in the international food system. Both countries are now struggling to move grain through that corridor.

Ukrainian attacks damaged two major grain terminals at Novorossiysk, Russia’s largest Black Sea grain-export port. The affected facilities have combined annual capacity exceeding 14 million metric tons.

Russian strikes have meanwhile sharply curtailed operations at Ukraine’s principal Black Sea ports, forcing exporters toward smaller Danube River routes. As many as 70 ships were recently waiting near the Sulina Canal, where air-raid interruptions, pilot shortages and limited capacity have slowed vessel movements.

The effect on Ukrainian shipments could be severe. Ukraine’s Agriculture Ministry reduced its projected agricultural exports for the 2026-27 marketing year to approximately 29.6 million metric tons—54% below its previous forecast. Its wheat-export projection was cut 53% to 8.3 million tons.

Russian shipments have also slowed, although estimates vary as analysts assess terminal damage and possible alternative routes. Agricultural consultancy SovEcon recently projected approximately 2.2 million tons of Russian wheat exports in August, compared with 4.5 million tons one year earlier.

American farmers are receiving the benefit of higher market prices, but that has not yet translated into stronger export volumes.

U.S. wheat export inspections totaled 425,668 metric tons during the week ended Aug. 20, down from 514,363 tons the previous week and approximately 1.05 million tons during the comparable week last year. Marketing-year inspections also remain well below last season’s pace.

For shoppers, the effect will be slower and less dramatic than the futures chart. Raw wheat accounts for only part of the cost of a loaf of bread, with labor, packaging, transportation and retail expenses making up much of the final price. A jump in wheat therefore reaches supermarket shelves gradually rather than overnight.

The wider concern is that wheat is not rising alone. The United Nations food-price index reached its highest level in more than three years in July, while its cereal component climbed 3.4% from June. Global wheat prices rose 5.8% during that month as Black Sea disruptions and difficult growing weather tightened expectations.

A restoration of safe shipping lanes or stronger harvests elsewhere could interrupt the rally. Ukraine has proposed an agreement protecting civilian grain vessels in the Black Sea, but Russia has demanded that any arrangement also restrict Ukrainian attacks on Russian energy infrastructure.

Until the ports and shipping routes become more dependable, grain buyers are likely to keep paying a premium for supplies that may not arrive on schedule.

JBizNews Desk | Chicago

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A bet is a bet, no matter what the app calls it.

That was the finding of a three-judge panel of the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals on Aug. 28, which ruled unanimously that Nevada’s gaming regulators may oversee the prediction market Kalshi. The decision hands states the power to police prediction platforms the same way they police sportsbooks, and it lands hard on a business that has grown by arguing it is something else entirely.

Kalshi sells contracts on the outcome of events, including games. Buy a contract that a team wins, and it pays out if the team wins. The company’s position has been that those contracts are financial instruments called swaps, traded on a market that answers only to the federal Commodity Futures Trading Commission, and therefore beyond the reach of any state gaming board.

Circuit Judge Ryan Nelson, writing for the panel, rejected that. He wrote that what Kalshi offers is sports gambling regardless of the label the company puts on it, and that federal commodities law does not push state gaming rules aside. Judges Kenneth Kiyul Lee and Bridget Bade joined him. All three were appointed by President Trump, who has backed prediction markets and favored exclusive federal oversight of them.

The case grew out of a lawsuit the Nevada Gaming Control Board brought earlier this year accusing Kalshi of running unlicensed gambling in the state with the largest gaming revenue in the country. Board Chair Mike Dreitzer said the ruling confirms the state’s position that this is sports betting and belongs under state regulation.

Kalshi said it will seek further review. A spokeswoman said the company still reads the federal rules as permitting sports contracts and noted that the commission is working to clarify them.

The ruling now collides with an April decision from the Third Circuit, which let Kalshi keep operating in New Jersey while its appeal moves ahead and found the company likely to win its federal preemption argument. Two appeals courts have now reached opposite conclusions, which is the classic setup for the Supreme Court to step in.

Until it does, the map is split. Twenty states are in active litigation over whether they can regulate these platforms, and last month 44 states signed a letter telling the commission it has no authority over sports-related event contracts. Friday’s decision makes it easier for the states pressing that case to move.

For anyone trading on these apps, the practical question is now geography. What is a federally regulated contract in one state may be unlicensed gambling in the next, and the answer will vary by jurisdiction until the Supreme Court settles it.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The court that issued arrest warrants for Vladimir Putin and Benjamin Netanyahu can no longer get its own officials into a bank.

On Aug. 18 the United States sanctioned the International Criminal Court’s president, Japanese judge Tomoko Akane, along with senior trial lawyer Abdoulaye Seye of Senegal. The measures freeze any assets they hold in U.S. jurisdictions or that touch the American financial system, and bar Americans from doing business with them. Secretary of State Marco Rubio said the two had worked to investigate or prosecute officials of governments that never accepted the court’s jurisdiction.

Nine of the court’s 18 judges are now under U.S. sanctions, along with both deputy prosecutors and the former chief prosecutor. The practical effect is closer to a commercial blacklisting than a diplomatic protest. One sanctioned Canadian judge lost the use of her credit cards. Fearing that Microsoft would cut ties, the court dropped Microsoft Office for a German open-source system that has slowed its daily work, officials told The Wall Street Journal.

The pressure campaign is doing what it was designed to do. Washington opened a diplomatic offensive in July urging partner countries to quit the court, and Chad and Venezuela have already announced they are leaving. That brings to five the number of countries pulling out within the past year, though each withdrawal takes a year to become final.

The institution was also gutted from the inside. On July 24, member states voted 82-to-13 with 15 abstentions to remove chief prosecutor Karim Khan for serious misconduct and a serious breach of duty — the first removal of a sitting chief prosecutor in the court’s 24-year history. Khan, who denies wrongdoing, is the prosecutor who sought the Netanyahu warrant.

Enforcement was thin even before the sanctions. The court has taken 23 people into custody under its warrants while 35 remain at large. Putin has since visited two member states, Mongolia and Tajikistan, and neither arrested him. European governments have signaled they may not act on the Netanyahu warrant either.

Built in The Hague in 1998 as the heir to Nuremberg, the court was always missing the biggest players. The United States, Russia, China and India never ratified the treaty, and neither did Israel.

The court says it is not folding. It called the latest sanctions an attack on judicial independence, Akane has said judges are replaceable and the work is not, and human rights groups have gone to U.S. courts to challenge the sanctions program. Member states must now elect a new chief prosecutor — the choice that will decide whether the court keeps pursuing great-power cases or retreats to the ones nobody contests.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

LOS ANGELES — The cost of moving goods across the United States is climbing again, and this time the pressure is coming from fuel surcharges layered onto shipping bills.

UPS and FedEx have both pushed those charges sharply higher in recent years. An analysis by AFS Logistics cited Friday puts the surcharge on everyday packages at roughly 24.25% for UPS and 23.75% for FedEx, compared with about 9% for UPS in 2021.

Those fees are added on top of base shipping rates.

For retailers, manufacturers and small businesses, that means every package costs more to move. And those higher transportation costs rarely stay confined to the shipping department.

They eventually work their way into delivery charges, product prices and the overall cost of doing business.

The increase is not limited to parcel delivery.

Container-shipping fuel surcharges have risen by as much as 75% this year, even though marine fuel costs increased by roughly 30%, according to VesselBot data.

That gap is drawing attention because fuel surcharges were originally designed to help carriers recover higher energy costs.

Critics now argue that in some parts of the transportation industry, those fees are generating profits beyond the underlying increase in fuel.

Union Pacific provides the clearest public example. The railroad collected $91.1 million more in fuel-surcharge revenue than it spent on fuel in the second quarter, boosting profit by $83.2 million.

UPS has said fuel surcharges had only a modest effect on its overall operating profit. FedEx said the charges were not a material driver of adjusted operating income.

Still, the broader trend is clear.

The transportation system is becoming more expensive at nearly every level — rail, trucking, parcel delivery and ocean freight.

For consumers, the impact may not appear as a line item marked “fuel surcharge.”

Instead, it can show up as a higher online delivery fee, a more expensive appliance, a higher grocery bill or a small-business owner quietly raising prices to cover logistics costs.

That is why the surge matters.

Fuel prices are not just hitting drivers at the pump.

They are increasingly working their way through the entire supply chain — and ultimately into the price consumers pay at checkout.

JBizNews Desk | Los Angeles

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — President Donald Trump says the United States has secured majority control over more than 65 billion barrels of Venezuela’s proven oil reserves through a sweeping new partnership with the country’s interim government and private American businesses.

The oil is not being transferred to the United States, and America will not immediately receive 65 billion barrels. Venezuela will retain legal ownership of its natural resources, while American interests gain majority control over the development, production and commercial operation of oil fields containing those reserves.

That distinction matters—but so does the enormous scale of the agreement.

Sixty-five billion barrels would equal nearly nine years of total U.S. oil consumption at current levels. It also represents more proven oil than the United States currently holds within its own borders, giving American companies potential access to one of the largest concentrated pools of petroleum anywhere in the world.

Trump said the arrangement was negotiated by Secretary of State Marco Rubio and Secretary of War Pete Hegseth in cooperation with Venezuelan interim President Delcy Rodríguez. He described it as coming at no cost to American taxpayers because the investment and development work would be handled through private businesses.

Rodríguez said the energy agreement will remain in effect for 25 years and preserve Venezuela’s sovereignty over its resources. The plan covers the redevelopment of 17 strategic oil fields and eight additional blocks that have not yet been fully developed.

The initial target is to raise Venezuela’s production to 1.5 million barrels per day, compared with approximately 1.25 million today. That would still be far below the more than 3 million barrels Venezuela produced daily before years of political turmoil, mismanagement, sanctions and neglected infrastructure crippled its oil industry.

American companies would be expected to provide the capital, equipment and technical expertise needed to repair pipelines, reactivate wells and rebuild refineries and export facilities. Chevron, already the largest American oil company operating in Venezuela, is expected to play a significant role as additional companies negotiate exploration and production contracts.

For Trump, the deal is about far more than oil.

Bringing Venezuela’s energy sector into an American-controlled commercial system would weaken the influence China, Russia and Iran built there during years of hostility between Washington and Caracas. It could also redirect more Venezuelan crude toward American refineries, many of which were specifically designed to process the country’s heavy oil.

Over time, increased production could expand global supplies and place downward pressure on oil and gasoline prices. However, the effect will not be immediate. Venezuela’s infrastructure requires extensive repairs, and developing tens of billions of barrels will take decades and require enormous private investment.

The biggest unanswered question is what Trump means legally and financially by “majority U.S. control.” The complete agreement has not been publicly released, leaving unclear which companies will hold the rights, how profits will be divided, what authority Washington will exercise and what protections investors will receive if Venezuela’s political leadership changes.

The announcement therefore represents a potentially historic shift in global energy power—but the 65 billion barrels remain underground. The true value of the deal will depend on whether American companies can successfully extract, transport and sell that oil under terms strong enough to survive the next 25 years.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© 2026 JBizNews.com. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction, redistribution or republication of this article, in whole or in part, without written permission from JBizNews is strictly prohibited.

WASHINGTON — The FDA has approved updated COVID-19 vaccines for the 2026–27 respiratory-virus season, clearing new formulations from Moderna, Pfizer-BioNTech and Novavax-Sanofi ahead of the fall vaccination campaign.

The updated shots are designed to target the XFG variant, the strain selected for the new season.

The approved vaccines include Moderna’s mNEXSPIKE and Spikevax, Pfizer-BioNTech’s Comirnaty, and the protein-based Novavax-Sanofi vaccine.

The decision gives pharmacies, physicians and health systems the green light to begin preparing for another fall vaccination push as respiratory illnesses typically rise when colder weather returns.

The update matters because COVID-19 vaccines are reformulated periodically as the virus changes, much like seasonal flu shots are adjusted to better match circulating strains.

For consumers, the practical question will be which product is available locally and whether insurance covers it without out-of-pocket cost.

The protein-based Novavax option may also appeal to people who prefer a vaccine that does not use mRNA technology.

The FDA’s approval does not mean every person will necessarily be advised to receive the updated shot. Recommendations on who should get vaccinated and when typically depend on federal public-health guidance, age, health status and individual risk.

Older adults, people with weakened immune systems and those with underlying medical conditions generally face the greatest risk of severe COVID-19 illness.

The updated vaccines are expected to begin reaching pharmacies and healthcare providers ahead of the fall respiratory season.

For families planning flu and COVID vaccinations together, the approval provides clarity that the next generation of COVID shots is ready for distribution.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Friday produced major business developments across food, employment, interest rates, payments, artificial intelligence, healthcare, autos and emerging technology.

Washington moved toward changing how American beef can be processed and sold. New employment revisions showed private-sector hiring was weaker than previously believed. Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh kept another rate increase firmly in play. PayPal lost nearly 13% after a $53 billion takeover effort collapsed. Anthropic won a significant court victory against the Pentagon. Walmart settled a long-running federal opioid case. Toyota reported a 24% collapse in China sales. And a quantum-computing company with only about $19 million in annual revenue reached a roughly $2 billion public valuation.

Food & Agriculture — Washington Targets the Beef-Processing Bottleneck

A potentially significant change is coming to the way American beef gets from a ranch to a supermarket.

President Donald Trump said Friday that he is preparing a legal order aimed at giving farmers and ranchers greater ability to process and sell their own meat rather than relying on the handful of enormous companies that dominate U.S. beef processing.

Agriculture Secretary Brooke Rollins said the administration intends to begin making major beef-processing announcements on Monday, August 31, including measures designed to make interstate sales easier, expand opportunities for smaller processors and rescind regulations the administration considers outdated.

The concentration is enormous.

Four companies — Cargill, Tyson Foods, JBS USA and National Beef — control roughly 85% of U.S. meat processing.

That means a cattle rancher can raise the animal but often still needs access to a federally inspected processor before the beef can be sold broadly to consumers.

If Washington can legally create more room for smaller processors, it could give ranchers another route to market and create opportunities for regional slaughterhouses, refrigerated logistics companies and independent food distributors.

Whether it lowers supermarket prices is much less certain.

Large meatpacking plants achieve efficiencies precisely because of their scale. Industry groups are also warning that loosening processing requirements cannot come at the expense of federal food-safety inspection.

So Friday’s announcement is not yet a new meat system.

But it could become the beginning of an important fight over who controls the middle of America’s food supply chain — and how much of every beef dollar stays with the farmer versus the processor.

Jobs & Economy — America Had 178,000 Fewer Private Jobs Than Previously Estimated

A quieter government release Friday contained an important correction to the employment picture.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics said its preliminary annual benchmark indicates that total U.S. payroll employment in March was 79,000 lower than previously estimated.

That overall adjustment is relatively small — just 0.1% of total employment and below the average absolute benchmark revision of 0.2% over the past decade.

But underneath the headline, private employment was revised down by a larger 178,000 jobs.

The difference was partly offset by approximately 99,000 additional government jobs.

For employers and investors, the private-sector number is more revealing because it suggests businesses had been hiring somewhat less aggressively than the monthly jobs reports indicated.

Retail employment was substantially weaker than previously estimated, as were parts of manufacturing, wholesale trade, professional services, education and healthcare. Transportation and warehousing, financial activities and several other sectors were revised higher.

These figures are preliminary. BLS will not alter the official historical employment series until the final benchmark is incorporated in February 2027.

The timing matters because the Federal Reserve is deciding whether the economy can tolerate higher rates.

Warsh sees a labor market close to full employment. Friday’s benchmark says the overall picture remains relatively strong, but private hiring was softer than previously believed.

That makes next Friday’s August employment report considerably more important.

Rates & Consumers — Warsh Keeps Another Rate Hike in Play

Fed Chair Kevin Warsh used his Jackson Hole address Friday to make clear that the central bank is not declaring victory over inflation.

Warsh said inflation remains significantly above target, with the Fed’s preferred PCE measure running 3.7% over the past 12 months and 4.1% on a six-month basis.

He described the labor market as broadly stable and said overall financial conditions do not appear particularly restrictive.

His message was straightforward: the Fed must be confident inflation is moving clearly and sufficiently quickly toward 2%. Otherwise, policymakers still have work to do.

Warsh stopped short of promising a September rate increase, but investors took the speech as a warning that another hike remains possible.

That matters directly to businesses and consumers.

Another rate increase would mean continued pressure on mortgages, commercial real estate loans, credit cards, vehicle financing and small-business borrowing.

Consumer confidence also remains weak.

The University of Michigan’s final August Consumer Sentiment Index fell to 51.7 from 55.2 in July, leaving confidence 11.2% below a year ago. Thirty-six percent of consumers now identify inflation as the more serious economic hardship, up from 23% at the beginning of the year.

Payments & M&A — PayPal Loses Its $53 Billion Buyer

One of Friday’s largest individual stock moves came from a deal that did not happen.

A consortium led by private-equity firm Advent International and payments giant Stripe abandoned its pursuit of PayPal.

The group had offered approximately $60.50 per share, valuing PayPal at more than $53 billion.

PayPal shares collapsed 12.7% Friday as investors removed the takeover premium from the stock.

The story is remarkable when viewed against PayPal’s history.

At the height of the pandemic-era digital-payment boom in 2021, the company was worth approximately $360 billion.

Its problem today is not that online payments disappeared. It is that competition became much stronger.

Apple Pay, Shop Pay, Google Pay and other payment options increasingly sit directly between merchants and customers. PayPal must now prove that its enormous customer network, Venmo business and checkout infrastructure can grow strongly enough on their own.

New CEO Enrique Lores is reorganizing PayPal around checkout, consumer financial services — including Venmo — and payments and cryptocurrency.

The abandoned takeover means investors will now judge that turnaround without a buyer waiting in the wings.

For business owners accepting digital payments, this is another indication that the payments industry is entering a new competitive phase. The company that once largely defined online checkout is now fighting to defend its place at the register.

AI & Government — Anthropic Wins a Major Fight With the Pentagon

A federal judge delivered an important victory Friday to Anthropic, the company behind Claude.

U.S. District Judge Rita Lin blocked the Pentagon from designating Anthropic a national-security supply-chain risk, calling the government’s action unlawful.

The dispute arose after Anthropic refused to permit Claude to be used for certain U.S. surveillance activities or fully autonomous weapons. The Pentagon subsequently placed the company under an obscure procurement designation normally associated with supply-chain threats.

Anthropic argued that the label could cost it billions of dollars in business and reputational damage.

The significance extends well beyond one AI company.

Washington is becoming one of the world’s largest buyers of artificial intelligence. At the same time, AI developers are trying to decide what limits they place on how their systems can be used.

If refusing a particular military use meant losing access to government contracts across an entire company, Washington would have enormous leverage over those restrictions.

Friday’s ruling establishes an early judicial limit on that power.

A separate Anthropic case involving another government designation that could affect civilian contracts remains unresolved.

For the rapidly growing AI industry, this could become an important precedent in determining who ultimately controls the permissible uses of commercial artificial intelligence: the technology company, its customer or the government writing the contract.

Healthcare & Legal — Walmart Ends a Major Federal Opioid Case

Walmart quietly removed a significant legal threat Friday.

The retailer reached a settlement with the U.S. Justice Department over allegations that its pharmacies unlawfully dispensed opioid prescriptions in violation of the Controlled Substances Act.

The federal government filed the case in 2020 and alleged violations stretching back to 2013.

The financial terms of Friday’s settlement were not disclosed.

That is important because the potential penalties had once run into billions of dollars.

A federal judge narrowed the case in 2024 but allowed major government claims to continue, including allegations that Walmart pharmacists filled prescriptions even when company compliance personnel allegedly knew they were invalid.

This case is separate from the $3.1 billion settlement Walmart agreed to in 2022 with state and local governments over opioid-related claims.

For Walmart, settlement removes another long-running uncertainty from a pharmacy business that serves millions of customers.

For every company operating in healthcare, the broader lesson is about compliance risk.

A profitable transaction completed today can produce litigation years later if regulators conclude the company should have identified warning signs.

Autos — Toyota’s China Sales Collapse 24%

Toyota delivered another warning Friday about how dramatically the global automobile market is diverging by region.

The world’s largest automaker said global vehicle sales fell 4.8% in July to 856,125 vehicles, while global production declined 2.1% from a year earlier.

China was the biggest problem.

Toyota sales there plunged 24.3%, marking the company’s sixth consecutive monthly decline. Production in China fell an even steeper 32.7%.

U.S. sales slipped 0.8%, while Middle East sales collapsed 44.5%.

Japan moved in the opposite direction, with sales rising 11% and production increasing 12.4%.

Toyota has relied heavily on hybrids while many Chinese competitors moved aggressively into battery-powered electric vehicles and plug-in hybrids.

Higher gasoline prices are now making that positioning more difficult in China, at exactly the moment domestic manufacturers are competing intensely on price and technology.

For suppliers, dealers and investors, Toyota’s report shows why talking about “the auto market” as one business increasingly makes little sense.

The same manufacturer can be growing double digits in Japan while losing nearly a quarter of its sales in China.

Quantum Computing — A $19 Million Business Reaches a $2 Billion Valuation

The next speculative technology boom officially reached Nasdaq Friday.

French quantum-computing company Pasqal surged on its first day of public trading after completing a merger with Bleichroeder Acquisition Corp II.

The transaction valued Pasqal at approximately $2 billion and delivered about $360 million in new cash to expand the company.

Its shares rose as much as 73% intraday and were still roughly 40% higher later in the session.

Here is what makes that valuation striking: Pasqal generated only approximately €16.5 million, or $19 million, in revenue during 2025.

Investors are therefore not paying for today’s business.

They are paying for what quantum computing might become.

Traditional computers process information in bits that are either 0 or 1. Quantum systems use quantum states that can represent and manipulate information in fundamentally different ways, potentially allowing certain extremely complex calculations to be solved much faster.

Pasqal uses neutral atoms as the physical foundation for its machines and is targeting applications including drug discovery, finance and industrial optimization.

It has deployed only seven quantum computers so far, although its factories in France and Canada can currently produce as many as 13 machines annually. Saudi Aramco is among its customers.

That makes Friday’s debut both exciting and risky.

Commercial quantum computing remains extremely early. Error rates remain a major problem, and nobody yet knows when quantum machines will consistently outperform conventional computers on commercially valuable work.

Yet investors just placed a multibillion-dollar public valuation on one of the companies trying.

That tells businesses and investors where some of the capital searching for the “next AI” is beginning to move.

Energy — Oil Ends a Difficult Week Below $90

Oil prices slipped again Friday.

Brent crude settled at $89.31 a barrel, down 39 cents, while West Texas Intermediate finished at $83.40, down 13 cents.

For the week, Brent fell more than 5% and WTI lost more than 4%.

The decline came despite continued uncertainty surrounding the Strait of Hormuz.

Markets are weighing signs that alternative flows and diplomatic efforts could improve supply against the fact that actual shipping through the strait remains severely disrupted.

Warsh’s hawkish Fed message added another downward force because higher interest rates can weaken economic demand and strengthen the dollar.

For businesses, oil below $90 provides some relief for transportation and fuel costs.

But the geopolitical discount remains fragile.

A meaningful reopening of Hormuz could drive energy costs lower. A renewed deterioration could reverse that move quickly.

Markets — Major Movers Reflect the Day’s Biggest Business Stories

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 53,559.99, down 9.45 points, or 0.02%.

The S&P 500 fell 19.23 points, or 0.25%, to 7,711.76, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 138.93 points, or 0.52%, to 26,402.42.

The Russell 2000 fell 41.97 points, or 1.4%, to 2,972.37.

Among the biggest movers, Nvidia fell 4.6%, Marvell Technology plunged 10.3%, and PayPal dropped 12.7%.

Alphabet rose about 1.7% and Salesforce gained approximately 1.6%.

Despite Friday’s decline, the major indexes still finished the week higher, with the S&P 500 and Dow each gaining roughly 0.5% and the Nasdaq up around 0.8%.

The Russell 2000 fell about 1.5% for the week, reflecting renewed pressure on smaller businesses from higher interest-rate expectations.

What to Watch Next

There is no U.S. stock-market session Saturday, August 29, so the next major moves will come from developments over the weekend and Monday’s opening.

The first issue to watch is the Strait of Hormuz. Any confirmed agreement that materially increases shipping could push oil lower when futures reopen. A breakdown in talks could quickly send prices the other way.

Then on Monday, August 31, watch Washington’s promised beef-processing announcements. The exact legal mechanism will determine whether the administration is creating a meaningful new opening for independent processors and ranchers or something much narrower.

China also releases another important read on manufacturing. A continued factory contraction would matter for commodities, machinery, autos, luxury goods and American multinational companies selling into China.

Next week then quickly becomes a U.S. labor-market week.

The Bureau of Labor Statistics releases July JOLTS job-opening data Tuesday, September 1 at 10:00 a.m. ET, followed by the August Employment Situation Friday, September 4 at 8:30 a.m. ET.

After Warsh’s Friday message, that jobs report could become one of the most important economic releases of the month.

Strong employment could give the Fed more room to raise rates to fight inflation.

A visibly weakening labor market could make that decision considerably more difficult.

Friday’s broader business message was spread across very different industries.

Food policy could change how ranchers reach consumers. Employment revisions showed private hiring was softer than believed. Interest-rate risk remains elevated. PayPal showed how quickly a takeover premium can disappear. Anthropic’s court victory could shape the relationship between AI companies and government. Walmart removed a major legal risk. Toyota showed how difficult China has become for foreign automakers. And Pasqal demonstrated how aggressively investors are betting on quantum computing.

The common thread is capital, competition and control — who owns the customer, who controls the technology, who reaches the market, and who carries the risk.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Markets & Interest Rates — Stocks Slip, but Bonds Send the Bigger Warning

Wall Street ended Friday modestly lower after Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh made clear that the Fed remains focused on bringing inflation back toward its 2% target.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 53,559.99, down 9.45 points, or 0.02%.

The S&P 500 fell 0.25% to 7,711.76, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 0.52% to 26,402.42.

The declines were relatively small, but the bigger reaction came in interest-rate expectations.

Investors increased bets that the Federal Reserve could keep rates elevated longer — or potentially raise them again — if inflation fails to cool sufficiently.

That matters directly to businesses because higher-for-longer rates keep pressure on commercial loans, mortgages, credit cards, real-estate financing and corporate borrowing.

Among Friday’s major movers, Gap surged about 13.5%, while PayPal fell roughly 12%, Marvell Technology dropped about 10%, and Nvidia declined around 4% following Thursday’s powerful AI-driven rally.

Health & Pharmaceuticals — Mounjaro Gets a Much Bigger Medical Opportunity

The FDA approved Eli Lilly’s Mounjaro to reduce the risk of heart attack and stroke in adults with type 2 diabetes who are at high cardiovascular risk.

That takes Mounjaro beyond simply lowering blood sugar.

A major clinical trial showed the drug reduced serious cardiovascular events more effectively than Lilly’s older Trulicity treatment.

Mounjaro is already one of the fastest-growing medicines in the world, with quarterly sales approaching $10 billion.

The approval could strengthen Lilly’s argument to insurers, employers and government health programs that GLP-1 medicines can prevent expensive medical events rather than simply treat diabetes or obesity.

That could materially expand insurance coverage and the long-term size of the GLP-1 market.

Biotech — BioNTech Cancer Vaccine Suffers a Significant Setback

BioNTech stopped a mid-stage trial of its personalized mRNA colorectal-cancer vaccine after an independent monitoring committee concluded the treatment was unlikely to improve survival.

Investigators also observed a numerical imbalance in survival between the vaccine group and the control group.

BioNTech shares fell sharply following the announcement.

The result does not mean mRNA cancer vaccines cannot work. Other companies have shown encouraging results in different cancers.

But it is a reminder that the enormous investment flowing into personalized cancer vaccines remains scientifically risky.

For investors, it is a meaningful read-through across the emerging mRNA-oncology industry.

Quantum Computing — Pasqal Surges in Nasdaq Debut

French quantum-computing company Pasqal jumped sharply in its first day of Nasdaq trading, after climbing as much as 70% during the session.

Its SPAC combination valued the company at roughly $2 billion and provided approximately $360 million in cash for expansion.

The comparison between valuation and current business size is striking.

Pasqal generated only about €16.5 million in revenue in 2025, yet investors are already assigning the company a multibillion-dollar valuation.

The excitement reflects growing expectations that quantum computing could eventually solve problems conventional computers struggle with, including drug discovery, financial modeling, materials research and complex optimization.

The risk is equally clear.

Investors are placing enormous values on businesses whose commercial revenues remain tiny.

Global Capital Markets — Jio Moves Closer to Historic India IPO

India’s securities regulator approved Jio Platforms’ planned $3.8 billion IPO, potentially setting up the largest public offering in Indian history.

Jio has more than 533 million mobile subscribers and has expanded beyond telecommunications into cloud computing, artificial intelligence and enterprise services.

Its ownership also makes the deal globally important.

Meta owns roughly 9.9% and Google owns about 7.7%.

Most of the IPO proceeds are expected to help repay debt at Reliance Jio Infocomm.

A successful offering would put a public-market valuation on one of the world’s largest digital platforms and provide another major test of international investor appetite for India.

It would also give Meta and Google a clearer market value for investments they made years ago.

Google & Online Business — Europe Forces a Change in Search Enforcement

Google announced that it is changing how it enforces part of its search-spam policy across the European Economic Area following pressure from regulators.

The dispute centered on Google’s site reputation abuse policy, which targets third-party commercial content placed on established websites partly to benefit from those sites’ stronger Google rankings.

Publishers argued that Google was also penalizing legitimate commercial partnerships.

Beginning August 30, certain manual demotions under that policy will no longer affect users in the European Economic Area.

The policy remains unchanged elsewhere.

For online businesses, this matters because search rankings determine enormous amounts of revenue for publishers, affiliate businesses, retailers and marketers.

It also shows how European regulation can force Google to change the actual mechanics of its products — not simply pay fines.

Consumers — Confidence Falls Again

The University of Michigan’s final August consumer-sentiment reading came in at 51.7, down from 55.2 in July and significantly below where it stood a year earlier.

Consumers remain concerned about inflation and their future financial situation.

Year-ahead inflation expectations remained around 4%, while longer-term expectations stayed above the Federal Reserve’s target.

For retailers, restaurants and service businesses heading into the fall, that means consumers may continue spending — but they are becoming increasingly selective about where the money goes.

Lower- and middle-income households remain especially sensitive to food, fuel, housing and borrowing costs.

Labor Market — Job Growth Was Even Weaker Than Previously Reported

The Bureau of Labor Statistics’ preliminary benchmark revision indicated that the U.S. economy created fewer jobs during the 12 months through March than previously estimated.

That comes after recent employment reports already showed weaker hiring momentum.

The revision creates a difficult situation for the Federal Reserve.

Inflation remains high enough to argue against easier monetary policy, while the labor market is beginning to show more weakness.

For business owners, a softer hiring market could reduce some pressure finding workers.

For investors, it means every major employment report now carries even more weight.

Investor Money — Billions Flow Out of U.S. Stock Funds

Investors withdrew more than $22 billion from U.S. equity funds during the latest weekly reporting period, the largest weekly outflow in months.

Large-cap funds saw particularly heavy withdrawals, while smaller-company funds attracted some money.

Bond funds continued receiving inflows.

The headline stock indexes remain near record territory, but money underneath the market is becoming more defensive.

That does not necessarily predict a major selloff.

It does show that investors are increasingly looking for income and protection while becoming more selective about highly valued large-cap stocks.

What to Watch This Weekend and Monday

U.S. stock and bond markets are closed Saturday, but developments from Jackson Hole could still affect markets when futures reopen Sunday evening.

Investors will be watching for additional comments from Federal Reserve officials about inflation, interest rates and the strength of the economy.

Oil and Iran also remain important weekend risks.

Any escalation affecting the Strait of Hormuz or Iranian energy exports could immediately move crude prices and inflation expectations.

Looking into next week, investors will increasingly focus on employment data, the next round of corporate earnings and whether the strong AI trade can continue after the volatility surrounding Nvidia and other major technology companies.

The bigger message from Friday is that the economy is becoming increasingly divided.

Consumers are under pressure, hiring is cooling and financing remains expensive — while extraordinary amounts of capital continue flowing into AI, pharmaceuticals, quantum computing and other high-growth industries.

That divide is likely to remain one of the defining business stories heading into September.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Federal regulators on Friday cleared Juul Labs to sell a new version of its e-cigarette that can be locked until the user verifies that they are old enough to buy it.

The Food and Drug Administration’s decision allows Juul to introduce an updated device in the United States for the first time since the original launched more than a decade ago.

The Juul2 will be sold with updated tobacco- and menthol-flavored cartridges. Its age-verification feature is optional: users can activate it through an online app, requiring the device to remain locked until the verification process is completed.

The legal age to purchase e-cigarettes in the United States is 21.

The technology is central to Juul’s attempt to rebuild its business after years of controversy over teenage use. The company laid off hundreds of employees and agreed to pay roughly $3 billion to settle government and private lawsuits. In 2019, it stopped selling the fruit and candy flavors that had become especially popular among teenagers.

Regulators emphasized that Friday’s decision is a marketing authorization—not an FDA approval or endorsement. The agency continues to warn that people who do not already use tobacco products should not begin using Juul or any other e-cigarette.

The FDA’s finding is narrower: adult smokers who switch completely from combustible cigarettes to Juul products may reduce their exposure to carcinogens and other harmful chemicals produced by burning tobacco.

Company studies reviewed by the agency found that between 20% and 50% of smokers using Juul products had stopped smoking cigarettes after six weeks, depending on the flavor, nicotine strength and measurement used.

The commercial challenge is more complicated.

Juul is no longer America’s best-selling vape brand. That position belongs to Vuse, made by Reynolds American, the tobacco company behind Camel and Newport. Teen vaping has also declined overall, while many young users who continue vaping have shifted to unauthorized disposable products imported from China and sold in the fruit and candy flavors Juul abandoned.

That is the competitive problem the age lock does not solve. Unauthorized disposable vapes generally do not require digital identity verification, face little meaningful FDA oversight at the point of sale and often undercut authorized products on price.

The clearance also comes amid a changing regulatory climate. In May, the FDA authorized the first fruit-flavored e-cigarettes intended for adult smokers—a significant shift following months of lobbying by the vaping industry directed at President Donald Trump and his administration.

For retailers, the practical question is whether consumers will choose an app-connected device with optional age controls over a roughly $15 disposable vape that works immediately out of the package.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — Mortgage rates barely moved this week, leaving would-be homebuyers stuck with borrowing costs that remain high enough to keep monthly payments elevated.

Freddie Mac said the average 30-year fixed mortgage rate was 6.66% as of August 27, up slightly from 6.65% a week earlier and above 6.56% a year ago. The average 15-year fixed rate rose to 5.98%, from 5.95% the prior week. 

The bigger story is not the one-basis-point move.

It is how stubbornly mortgage rates remain in the mid-to-upper 6% range.

For a buyer taking out a $300,000 mortgage, a rate around 6.5% produces a principal-and-interest payment of roughly $1,896 a month. At 7%, that rises to about $1,996 — roughly $100 more every month before taxes, insurance or homeowners association costs are included. 

That difference becomes much larger on a $500,000 or $700,000 mortgage.

Freddie Mac said the broader economy remains resilient, while more homes coming onto the market and slower price growth in some regions are giving buyers more choices.

But affordability remains the obstacle.

A buyer can negotiate on the price of a house.

It is much harder to negotiate away the cost of financing it.

Mortgage rates are influenced heavily by movements in the bond market, inflation expectations and investor views about future Federal Reserve policy. Even when the Fed eventually cuts short-term interest rates, mortgage rates do not automatically fall by the same amount.

That is why buyers waiting for a dramatic drop have largely been disappointed.

Rates have moved around during the summer, falling as low as 6.43% in early July before climbing back toward their current level. 

For existing homeowners with mortgages locked in at 3% or 4%, today’s market also creates another problem.

Selling a home often means giving up that cheap mortgage and replacing it with one carrying a rate closer to 7%, discouraging some owners from putting properties on the market.

More inventory is beginning to ease that pressure in parts of the country, but financing remains expensive enough to keep many transactions from happening.

For consumers, the message is straightforward.

Mortgage rates are not surging this week.

They are simply refusing to come down enough to materially improve affordability.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Gap shares surged after the retailer moved to address weakness at Old Navy while raising its annual profit outlook.

The company named Michael Francis as chief executive of Old Navy, putting an experienced retail executive in charge of Gap’s largest brand at a moment when its performance has become one of the biggest obstacles to the company’s turnaround.

Old Navy comparable sales fell 4% during the quarter, their first decline in 12 quarters.

That weakness stood in sharp contrast to the Gap brand, where comparable sales rose 10%.

Overall quarterly revenue fell 2% to roughly $3.65 billion, while adjusted earnings came in stronger than Wall Street expected.

Gap raised its full-year adjusted earnings outlook to $2.35 to $2.45 a share.

But there is another important number buried inside the quarter.

Gap recorded approximately $417 million in net tariff recovery tied to IEEPA duties.

The company says its adjusted outlook excludes the impact of that recovery, meaning investors should not simply treat the $417 million as evidence that Gap’s underlying retail operation suddenly became dramatically more profitable.

The market reaction reflects both sides of the story.

Shares jumped sharply because investors see stronger performance at the Gap brand, improved pricing discipline and a concrete attempt to fix Old Navy.

But Old Navy still matters enormously.

It is Gap’s largest banner, and the company’s broader turnaround will be difficult to sustain if Old Navy continues losing sales momentum.

The quarter therefore provides another example of why investors increasingly need to separate operating performance from temporary tariff-related financial benefits.

The real question for Gap is not how much tariff money came back.

It is whether the new leadership at Old Navy can get customers buying again.

JBizNews Desk | San Francisco

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

CUPERTINO, Calif. — Friday, August 28, 2026

Apple is raising the price of Apple TV again, taking the streaming service to nearly three times what it cost when it launched in 2019.

The monthly subscription now costs $14.99 in the United States, up $2 from $12.99. The annual plan rises from $99 to $119, a $20 increase.

Apple also raised the Apple One Individual bundle from $19.95 to $21.95 per month. That package combines Apple TV, Apple Music, Apple Arcade and 50GB of iCloud+ storage.

The Apple One Family and Premier plans remain at $27.95 and $39.95 per month, respectively. Those two packages were already increased by $2 last month when Apple raised its music-subscription prices.

The latest changes take effect immediately for new customers. Existing subscribers are expected to receive notice before the higher rate reaches their next billing cycle.

For consumers, paying for Apple TV monthly will now cost $179.88 over a full year. The $119 annual subscription saves nearly $61 compared with paying month to month, making the yearly plan considerably cheaper for customers who intend to keep the service.

Apple TV originally launched at $4.99 per month in 2019. Its price later rose to $6.99, then $9.99, $12.99 and now $14.99 as Apple expanded its original programming and live-sports offerings.

The increase adds another expense for households already juggling multiple streaming subscriptions and gives customers another reason to review whether they are paying separately for services that might cost less when bundled.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Israel’s largest bus operator is going into business with a Chinese state-owned manufacturer designated by the Pentagon as a Chinese military company and restricted under separate U.S. transit-procurement legislation.

Egged Group and Auto Chen Mobility, part of the Belilios Group, announced Thursday that they are forming a joint venture with CRRC to import, market and sell the Chinese manufacturer’s buses. Egged said the goal is to build a full, long-term operation around CRRC products in Israel while working with the company to enter additional European markets.

Despite how the agreement has been described, this is a distribution and service venture—not a bus-manufacturing operation, at least for now.

The scale of the Chinese partner is the headline. CRRC was created in 2015 through the merger of CNR and CSR and now operates in more than 100 countries through 46 subsidiaries, employing more than 150,000 people.

The state-owned company generated approximately $38 billion in revenue last year, earned about $2 billion in profit and invested roughly $3 billion in research and development. It has sold more than 85,000 buses since entering the segment in 2006 and produced approximately 6,000 during 2025 alone.

Each partner brings a specific advantage. Auto Chen has delivered more than 4,000 Golden Dragon buses in Israel over the past decade and understands the country’s import, sales and service infrastructure.

Egged contributes experience operating large transportation fleets in Israel and Europe. Its European holdings include Mobilis in Poland, EBS in the Netherlands and a majority stake in Lithuania’s TOKS, giving the new venture an existing operational base from which to pursue European contracts.

CRRC vehicles are already beginning to reach Israel. Its electric-vehicle division has shipped minibuses to the country, while a 26-meter bi-articulated bus is expected to arrive under a Transportation Ministry tender. The vehicle is scheduled to be operated by Superbus on the Haifa Metronit system.

Executives involved in the partnership have also identified autonomous vehicles as a longer-term opportunity.

The complication is CRRC’s ownership and status in Washington.

The company is owned by the Chinese government and appears on the Pentagon’s list of Chinese military companies. Under Section 805 of the 2024 National Defense Authorization Act, the Defense Department is prohibited from entering into, renewing or extending certain contracts with companies on that list.

Congress separately enacted the Transportation Infrastructure Vehicle Security Act in 2019, restricting the use of federal transit funding to purchase buses and rail cars from Chinese state-owned or controlled manufacturers.

CRRC’s growing role in Israeli transportation has previously drawn scrutiny. In 2022, Chinese companies lost a major Tel Aviv light-rail contract amid reported American pressure and security concerns raised in both Israel and the United States. CRRC later became involved in a separate controversy surrounding the procurement of trains for Jerusalem’s Blue Line.

This agreement is different because it is being formed by commercial transportation operators and initially involves buses rather than the construction of a government rail network. U.S. transit-procurement restrictions do not govern purchases made for Israeli fleets without American federal funding.

Nevertheless, modern electric buses contain connected systems—including cameras, telematics and remotely updated software—that Israeli regulators may examine as the venture expands.

For Egged, the commercial calculation is straightforward: Chinese electric buses are competitively priced, readily available and increasingly capable, while European transportation tenders are often decided heavily on cost.

The unanswered question is whether Israeli regulators—and American officials monitoring the transportation infrastructure of a close ally—will view the partnership strictly as a commercial venture or as part of a broader strategic concern surrounding Chinese technology.

JBizNews Desk | Tel Aviv

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A federal judge has struck down the Pentagon’s attempt to blacklist Anthropic as a national-security supply-chain risk, ruling that the government unlawfully retaliated against the artificial intelligence company for publicly resisting unrestricted military use of its technology.

U.S. District Judge Rita F. Lin said the Defense Department’s actions were “illegal and baseless” and violated Anthropic’s First Amendment rights. The court also found that the company was denied due process under the Fifth Amendment and that the Pentagon’s designation was arbitrary and capricious.

The dispute began after Anthropic refused to remove safeguards preventing its Claude AI models from being used for domestic mass surveillance or fully autonomous weapons. The Pentagon wanted technology suppliers to permit their systems to be used for any lawful military purpose.

Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth subsequently designated Anthropic a supply-chain risk under rarely used federal procurement authorities. President Donald Trump also directed federal agencies to stop using Anthropic’s products, potentially cutting the company off from billions of dollars in government and contractor business.

The government argued that Anthropic’s restrictions created an operational risk because a private technology supplier could limit how the military uses a critical system after it becomes integrated into defense operations.

Lin rejected the government’s broader justification, finding insufficient evidence that Anthropic presented a genuine threat to the defense supply chain. She concluded that the designation was imposed because the company publicly disagreed with the administration’s AI policy.

The ruling requires the government to withdraw the challenged designation and related directives. It does not require the Pentagon to purchase or continue using Anthropic’s technology; the department remains free to select another supplier for legitimate contracting or operational reasons.

That distinction is important. The Pentagon can decide that Anthropic’s restrictions make Claude unsuitable for a particular military mission, but the court said it cannot use a national-security blacklist to punish the company across the federal government simply because the two sides disagree over acceptable uses of AI.

The decision represents a significant victory for Anthropic and could affect how Washington handles other technology companies whose products carry privately imposed safety rules. It also raises a larger question for government buyers: whether an AI developer can retain control over how its models are used after those systems become embedded in military operations.

Anthropic said it remains willing to work with the government on national security while maintaining safeguards against autonomous weapons and mass domestic surveillance.

The administration can appeal the ruling. A separate case involving another legal basis for the Pentagon’s designation remains pending in Washington.

JBizNews Desk | San Francisco

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — 10:00 a.m. ET, Friday, Aug. 28, 2026. U.S. stocks opened with little movement Friday as Wall Street shifted almost immediately from Nvidia’s AI-driven rally to Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh, whose closely watched Jackson Hole address began at 10 a.m. Eastern.

At the opening bell, the Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 42.5 points, or 0.08%, to 53,611.94. The S&P 500 gained 4.2 points, or 0.05%, to 7,735.17, while the Nasdaq Composite slipped 25.4 points, or 0.10%, to 26,515.99

The restrained opening followed Thursday’s technology rally, when Nvidia’s strong outlook reinforced expectations that enormous spending on artificial-intelligence infrastructure could continue for years. Friday’s question is different: how aggressively will the Federal Reserve respond to inflation that remains well above its 2% target?

Warsh Takes Center Stage

Warsh’s keynote at the Federal Reserve’s Jackson Hole symposium began at 10:00 a.m. ET, making monetary policy the dominant market catalyst for the remainder of the morning. Investors are listening for any indication that the Fed is leaning toward another interest-rate increase, remaining on hold, or becoming more concerned about slowing economic growth. The Fed’s official calendar confirms the 10 a.m. keynote. 

Treasury yields were already elevated heading into the speech, with the 10-year Treasury yield around 4.69%. Higher long-term yields are particularly important for technology and other high-valuation growth stocks because they increase the discount rate investors apply to future earnings. 

Consumer Sentiment Remains Weak

The final University of Michigan reading showed consumer sentiment at 51.0 in August, unchanged from the preliminary reading and sharply below July’s 55.2.

That leaves sentiment down roughly 12% from August 2025, reflecting continued concern about household finances, inflation and future business conditions. The preliminary survey had shown particularly sharp deterioration in expectations for the economy, while year-ahead inflation expectations had risen to 4.3% and longer-term expectations remained around 3.3%. 

The message for businesses is important: consumers have not stopped spending, but confidence remains extremely fragile, making shoppers more sensitive to prices and potentially more cautious heading toward the fall and holiday spending periods.

Gap Surges as Old Navy Gets New Leadership

Gap jumped more than 20% in early trading after the retailer named veteran executive Michael Francis chief executive of Old Navy, its largest brand.

Gap also raised its annual profit outlook after beating quarterly expectations, although it narrowed its full-year sales-growth forecast because of economic uncertainty. Gap comparable sales rose about 10%, while Old Navy sales declined 4% — their first decline in 12 quarters. 

The stock reaction shows investors are betting that stronger management at Old Navy could unlock more of the turnaround already underway at Gap and Banana Republic.

PayPal Plunges as Takeover Hopes Fade

PayPal fell sharply after a report that Advent International and Stripe had abandoned their pursuit of the payments company.

The consortium had previously offered about $60.50 a share, valuing PayPal near $53 billion, but PayPal’s board considered the proposal inadequate. Shares had rallied nearly 30% after takeover speculation emerged, making the collapse of those talks especially painful for investors who had bought into expectations of a deal. 

PayPal now returns to the harder question of whether its own turnaround can produce enough earnings growth to justify a higher valuation without a buyer.

Marvell Drops Despite Strong AI Outlook

Marvell Technology fell about 8% despite reporting better-than-expected results and raising its longer-term revenue forecasts.

The problem was timing. Investors had hoped Marvell’s enormous custom-chip agreement with Google would produce more near-term revenue. Management indicated the Google contribution becomes substantially more meaningful beginning in fiscal 2029.

Marvell expects fiscal 2027 revenue of roughly $12 billion, up about 45%, and fiscal 2028 revenue near $18 billion, but those numbers were not enough to satisfy a market that had already pushed the stock up nearly threefold this year. 

That reaction is a useful warning for the broader AI trade: strong growth alone is no longer always enough when expectations are already extraordinary.

Affirm moved in the opposite direction, surging after stronger quarterly results. Revenue climbed 33% to roughly $1.2 billion, while gross merchandise volume jumped 36% to $14.1 billion, reinforcing demand for buy-now-pay-later services despite broader concerns about consumer finances. 

Oil Provides Some Inflation Relief

Oil prices were heading toward their first weekly decline in three weeks.

Brent crude traded around $89.30 a barrel and U.S. West Texas Intermediate around $82.77, with both benchmarks down roughly 5% for the week as increased shipments through the Strait of Hormuz reduced some immediate supply fears.

The situation remains volatile, however. Shipping through the strait is still below normal levels and negotiations involving Iran remain unresolved. 

Lower oil prices would be welcome for the Fed because they could eventually reduce gasoline, transportation and manufacturing costs. But businesses are still confronting unusually large fuel surcharges imposed by freight and delivery companies following months of Middle East disruption. 

What to Watch for the Rest of Friday

Warsh’s speech is the immediate market-moving event. Treasury yields, the dollar and rate-sensitive technology stocks could react sharply to any language indicating that inflation requires additional tightening.

Investors will then turn toward next week’s economic calendar. The August employment report arrives Friday, Sept. 4, and could become the decisive data point ahead of the Fed’s September meeting. Recent payroll data have weakened, meaning a surprisingly strong jobs report could revive expectations for another rate increase, while another weak report would complicate the Fed’s inflation fight. 

The corporate calendar also remains important. Broadcom’s upcoming earnings will give investors another major reading on AI-chip and infrastructure demand following Nvidia and Marvell.

For now, Wall Street is essentially standing still while waiting for the Fed chairman to speak. Nvidia has reassured investors that the AI boom remains powerful. Warsh now has to tell markets whether inflation will allow the economy — and valuations — to keep running this hot.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. goods trade deficit widened sharply in July as imports surged and exports declined, adding another potential drag on economic growth.

The Census Bureau reported that the goods deficit increased by $17.4 billion in a single month, to $118.8 billion from $101.4 billion in June.

Exports of goods fell $6 billion to $199.4 billion.

Imports climbed $11.4 billion to $318.2 billion.

That combination — fewer goods leaving the country and substantially more entering — produced the widest goods deficit since early 2025.

The increase was driven in part by stronger imports of capital goods, including equipment tied to the enormous AI and data-center investment boom.

That matters because trade feeds directly into gross domestic product.

Imports are subtracted when GDP is calculated, meaning a sharply wider trade deficit can reduce the headline growth rate even when the imported equipment is ultimately being used for productive investment inside the United States.

Wholesale inventories also rose 1.3% in July to approximately $959.1 billion, while retail inventories increased 0.7%.

Those numbers suggest businesses were bringing in more merchandise and equipment and building inventories at the same time.

That can mean several things.

Companies may be preparing for stronger demand.

They may be importing equipment for new factories and AI infrastructure.

Or they may be accelerating purchases because of tariff uncertainty and concerns that future imports could become more expensive.

For investors, the trade report therefore has to be read carefully.

A wider deficit is normally considered a negative for near-term GDP.

But if part of the increase comes from companies importing machinery, servers and other capital equipment to expand U.S. production, the longer-term economic effect can be more positive than the headline deficit suggests.

The immediate message is clear:

America bought substantially more from the rest of the world in July while selling less abroad — and that gap is now large enough to materially affect third-quarter growth calculations.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

INDIANAPOLIS — The FDA has expanded approval of Eli Lilly’s Mounjaro, allowing the diabetes drug to be used to reduce the risk of heart attack, stroke or cardiovascular death in adults with type 2 diabetes who are at high cardiovascular risk.

The decision gives one of the country’s fastest-growing diabetes drugs a major new use beyond controlling blood sugar.

Mounjaro, whose active ingredient is tirzepatide, is already widely prescribed for type 2 diabetes and is also sold under the Zepbound brand for obesity treatment.

The expanded approval is based on a large head-to-head cardiovascular trial involving more than 13,000 patients with type 2 diabetes and elevated heart risk.

In that study, patients taking Mounjaro experienced an 8% lower rate of major cardiovascular events compared with patients taking Lilly’s older diabetes drug Trulicity.

Those events included heart attack, stroke and cardiovascular death.

The result is important because people with type 2 diabetes face a substantially higher risk of cardiovascular disease, making heart protection an increasingly important part of diabetes treatment.

The approval could also influence which drugs physicians choose for higher-risk patients.

Until now, Mounjaro’s primary role was improving blood sugar control. The new cardiovascular indication gives doctors another reason to prescribe the drug to patients who are already at elevated risk of heart attack or stroke.

It could also affect insurance coverage.

Health plans often make coverage decisions based partly on a drug’s FDA-approved uses. A formal cardiovascular indication gives Lilly another argument for broader access to Mounjaro among patients with diabetes and heart disease.

Mounjaro has become one of Lilly’s biggest products.

Sales reached approximately $9.9 billion in the second quarter, up 91% from a year earlier as global demand for GLP-1 and related metabolic drugs continues to surge.

The approval also intensifies competition with Novo Nordisk, whose Wegovy and other diabetes and obesity medicines have received cardiovascular-related indications.

For patients, the significance goes beyond weight loss or blood sugar.

The competition among the major GLP-1 drugmakers is increasingly shifting toward whether these medicines can prevent some of the most serious and costly complications associated with diabetes and obesity.

With Friday’s FDA decision, Mounjaro can now officially make that claim for high-risk adults with type 2 diabetes.

JBizNews Desk | Indianapolis

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

LAS VEGAS — Friday, August 28, 2026

A United Airlines flight carrying 183 passengers and crew members was forced to make an emergency landing in Las Vegas after encountering an engine problem while flying at 31,000 feet.

United Flight 1403 had departed Los Angeles International Airport for Newark Liberty International Airport on Thursday when trouble developed in one of the Boeing 757’s engines. The pilots diverted the aircraft to Harry Reid International Airport rather than attempting to continue across the country.

The plane landed safely at approximately 7 a.m. local time. Emergency crews were available as the aircraft arrived, but no injuries were reported.

All 176 passengers and seven crew members exited the aircraft safely after landing.

One passenger described the experience as “terrifying” and reported that the aircraft suffered an engine failure at 31,000 feet. Aviation authorities have so far characterized the incident only as an engine issue and have not confirmed precisely what failed.

United said it was arranging another flight to take the passengers to Newark following the unscheduled landing.

The incident could have ended very differently, but the aircraft’s crew followed emergency procedures and brought the plane down safely. Commercial jets are designed to remain controllable if one engine develops a problem, allowing pilots to divert to a suitable airport rather than continue to their original destination.

What caused the malfunction remains unknown. Investigators will likely examine the engine, maintenance records, cockpit warnings and flight data to determine what prompted the diversion.

The Federal Aviation Administration said it will investigate.

JBizNews Desk | Las Vegas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

JACKSON HOLE, Wyo. — Friday, August 28, 2026

Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh delivers his first Jackson Hole keynote at 10 a.m. Eastern this morning at Jackson Lake Lodge, in the shadow of the Tetons, with markets waiting on one question: is the Fed preparing to raise rates again?

He probably won’t answer it directly.

There is an irony in the setting. The Kansas City Fed titled this year’s symposium “Financial Innovation: Implications for Payments and Policy,” and Warsh signaled a month ago that he wanted to use the speech for big ideas rather than the tactical question of what the Fed does at its three remaining meetings. Events have not cooperated.

A visibly split committee. The Fed held its benchmark rate at 3.5% to 3.75% in July over three dissents in favor of a hike — the most since September 2016 — from Cleveland’s Beth Hammack, Minneapolis’ Neel Kashkari and Dallas’ Lorie Logan. Kansas City’s Jeffrey Schmid and St. Louis’ Alberto Musalem, who had no vote in July, later said they would have joined them. Minutes released this month showed many participants believed tightening would likely be needed if inflation did not come down.

But the data moved against them. July payrolls fell 23,000 against expectations of a gain near 80,000, and core inflation came in subdued, pulling market pricing for a September increase back sharply. Traders have largely shifted the next hike to December. That reordering is the most important change since Warsh last spoke, and much of the audience will be listening for whether he shares it.

The bond market is the live wire. The 30-year Treasury yield closed at 5.31% on Aug. 17, its highest since 2007, and the Treasury Department intervened on Aug. 19 to bring long-term borrowing costs down. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent’s move raises an uncomfortable question about who is setting the price of money. Sen. Elizabeth Warren sent Warsh a letter Thursday ahead of the gathering.

Warsh also has a credibility problem of his own making. At his July press conference he repeatedly pointed to sharply higher bond yields as welcome, implying the Fed was content to let markets do the tightening — a stance that pushed long yields higher still and left investors confused about the strategy. Standard Chartered’s economists argue he now has to say plainly that the Fed will raise rates if core PCE does not fall steadily.

How markets could break. If he puts a September move clearly in play, yields and the dollar rise, rate-sensitive tech sells off, banks gain and gold slides. If he flags inflation risk without endorsing a hike — the likeliest outcome — stocks hold, short yields ease and gold recovers. A genuinely dovish message blaming tariffs and energy for the price surge would spark the biggest rally, and is the least likely: inflation has now run above the 2% target for a sixth straight year, and disowning it would cost the Fed dearly.

The most probable speech is carefully hawkish. No promise for September, but a clear signal that the next move is more likely up than down.

That may knock stocks and gold lower on the day. But Warsh has been criticized for saying too little, too vaguely, for months. If he finally explains how he decides, markets may take the clarity even if they dislike the message.

JBizNews Desk | Jackson Hole, Wyoming

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Build-A-Bear had a multimillion-dollar Walmart program last year that put its stuffed animals inside another retailer’s stores. That arrangement was not renewed, and the company has now warned investors twice that its year will be weaker than previously expected.

The market’s reaction was brutal. Build-A-Bear shares plunged 27.3% Thursday to $28.44—their worst one-day percentage decline on record and their lowest closing level in about two years. The stock is now down 54% this year.

Revenue for the three months ended Aug. 1 fell 7.2% to $115.3 million. Retail sales declined 7.1% to $106.5 million, while online demand dropped 15.6%. Pre-tax income fell 24% to $11.6 million.

Management said store traffic remained weak and acknowledged that its summer merchandise failed to connect with shoppers as expected.

The guidance did the most damage. Build-A-Bear now expects full-year revenue of $500 million to $525 million, down from its previous forecast of $530 million to $550 million. Projected pre-tax income was reduced to between $60 million and $68 million from $72 million to $78 million.

It is the company’s second revenue-forecast reduction this year. The first came in May, when Build-A-Bear cited softer traffic at its stores.

The wholesale business is where the growth plan ran into trouble. Build-A-Bear had been counting on selling more branded merchandise through outside retailers, reducing its dependence on its own mall-based stores.

That segment had been expected to grow by at least 20% this year. It is now projected to remain approximately flat after the Walmart program was not renewed and other prospective wholesale arrangements progressed more slowly than management expected.

Someone paid for the miss. Build-A-Bear terminated Chief Growth Officer David Henderson without cause, effective Wednesday. Henderson joined the company as chief revenue officer in September 2024 and received the chief growth officer title in June—the same month Chris Hurt succeeded longtime chief executive Sharon Price John.

Tariffs are adding another layer of pressure. Build-A-Bear said its annual forecast includes between $10 million and $11 million in continuing tariff and related costs. The projected profit range also includes approximately $13 million in expected refunds involving previously paid tariffs.

The company is still pursuing the strategy that suffered the biggest setback: placing Build-A-Bear products inside other retailers. The Walmart program demonstrated that the brand could generate business beyond its own stores, but losing that arrangement exposed how quickly wholesale expectations can disappear.

Build-A-Bear must now prove that it can secure replacement partners while restoring traffic and demand inside its existing stores. Until then, investors are being asked to believe in a growth strategy that has not yet produced the promised results.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Dollar Tree got a $383 million check back from the government, and it plans to hand most of it to shoppers rather than keep it. That is why the stock fell about 9% Thursday even though the quarter was a blowout.

Here is the mechanism in plain terms. (cite index=“69-1”>The company had paid tariffs under emergency trade powers, and it got that money refunded — $369 million landed in cost of sales, $14 million as interest.</cite> (cite index=“74-1”>That refund alone added $1.31 to quarterly earnings of $2.70 a share, against $0.91 a year earlier and analyst expectations of about $1.15.</cite> Roughly half the profit came from the refund, not from selling more stuff.

The selling was fine too. (cite index=“74-1”>Net sales rose 7% to $4.9 billion for the quarter ended Aug. 1, with comparable sales up 3.7%.</cite> (cite index=“73-1”>Customer traffic rose 0.4%, the first increase after four straight quarters of decline</cite> — small, but it is people walking through the door rather than the same people spending more.

The problem is the guidance. (cite index=“68-1”>For the current quarter, Dollar Tree expects adjusted earnings of $0.80 to $0.95 a share, including a hit of about $0.50 tied to spending the refund money back into the business.</cite> Put simply: management is taking government money and putting it into lower prices and better-stocked shelves instead of into the profit line. (cite index=“68-1”>Full-year guidance went up to $7.70 to $8.05 a share from $6.70 to $7.10.</cite>

For shoppers, that spending is the point. (cite index=“67-1”>Items priced above the old single-dollar mark now account for 17% of sales, up about four percentage points from a year ago,</cite> and the refund is funding more of that range. (cite index=“68-1”>Chief executive Mike Creedon said the strategies are unlocking a better assortment in better-run stores.</cite>

The back half looks harder. (cite index=“67-1”>The company expects higher freight costs and broad inflation to squeeze margins through year-end, and a helium shortage already cost about $15 million in sales last quarter</cite> — balloons matter more to a party-supply aisle than they sound.

What happens next comes down to whether traffic keeps rising once the refund money runs out. (cite index=“73-1”>Strip out the tariff benefit and the full-year range implies about $7.10 to $7.45 a share, still an increase</cite>. The refunds are one-time. The customers, if the price investments work, are not.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

South Korea’s National Pension Service reported a first-half investment return on Friday that would be extraordinary in any year, and largely irrelevant to where the fund stands today.

The NPS returned 27.22% in the six months through June, well ahead of the 18.82% it posted for all of 2025 — itself the best annual result since the fund was founded in 1988. Assets reached 1,866 trillion won, or about $1.35 trillion, at the end of June, up from 1,458 trillion won at the close of last year.

The driver was almost entirely domestic. Korean equities returned 107.37% over the half. Overseas equities returned 17.81%, helped by the AI investment cycle and strong results at large technology companies. The fund credited easing Middle East tensions and solid corporate earnings, particularly in semiconductors.

Then came July.

The KOSPI peaked at an all-time high of 9,385.59 on June 19 — three trading sessions before the reporting period closed. By July 8 it had fallen more than 20% below that high, entering bear territory as global investors soured on AI plays and the market’s extreme concentration showed itself. On July 29 the index closed down 5.98% at 5,663.24, following a 10.84% collapse the previous session — roughly 40% below the June peak, with sidecars and circuit breakers triggered on consecutive days. It was still sliding this week, dropping more than 4% intraday Tuesday on heavy foreign selling.

NPS Chair and CEO Kim Sung-joo acknowledged the gap directly, saying second-half volatility has moved returns around while performance remains solid.

The policy question underneath. At the start of the year the government temporarily suspended the ceiling on the fund’s domestic stock holdings. The NPS had effectively hit its limit as the KOSPI climbed and was facing mechanical selling. Critics argued at the time that the public’s retirement savings were being used to prop up the market; as the fund ballooned past 1,700 trillion won in four months, the decision was recast as prescient.

That debate is now reopening on less favorable terms. The suspension is what made a 107% domestic equity return possible. It is also what left the country’s retirement system unusually exposed to a single trade. Samsung Electronics and SK Hynix together account for roughly half the KOSPI’s market capitalization, and SK Hynix passed Samsung as Korea’s most valuable company on June 22, the first time in more than 25 years that the top spot changed hands.

The volatility has been historic in its own right. By late June the exchange had logged close to 30 sidecar activations and five circuit breakers for the year, both exceeding the full-year records set during the 2008 financial crisis.

Why it matters beyond Seoul. The NPS is the world’s third-largest pension fund and a meaningful allocator into U.S. equities, private credit and real estate. More than half its financial assets sit overseas. A drawdown of this scale at home changes its rebalancing math, and Korean institutional flows are large enough that American managers notice when they turn.

It also lands against a demographic clock. Contribution rates began rising this year, climbing half a point annually toward 13% by 2033 under reforms meant to extend the fund’s solvency. Investment returns were supposed to buy time. Returns this volatile buy less of it than the headline suggests.

JBizNews Desk | Seoul

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The country that helped build OPEC is now thinking about walking out, and the reason is sitting in Washington.

The Trump administration is negotiating with Venezuela’s interim government for an ownership stake in the country’s oil fields, two U.S. officials told Axios. The talks cover a set of high-yield producing fields holding roughly 90 billion barrels of proven crude — about one of every three barrels in Venezuela’s 300-billion-barrel reserve base, the largest of any country on earth. One official called the deal massive and said it would more than double American oil reserves.

OPEC is the obstacle. The cartel exists to set production ceilings for its members, and a country that has just handed drilling rights to American companies does not want a committee in Vienna telling it how fast it can pump. Venezuela is currently exempt from OPEC+ quotas — a courtesy extended because sanctions and broken infrastructure had already crushed its output — but any real ramp-up would run straight into those limits. Leaving solves the problem before it starts.

It would be a remarkable exit. Venezuela was one of the five countries that founded OPEC in 1960, alongside Saudi Arabia, Iran, Iraq and Kuwait. The United Arab Emirates already walked out effective May 1, and a second departure inside four months, this one by a founding member, would leave the group visibly weaker.

Washington’s urgency is easy to read. The wars in Iran and Ukraine have disrupted global supply and pushed prices up, and the U.S. Strategic Petroleum Reserve has fallen to a 40-year low. Heavy crude in the Western Hemisphere, under American control, is a hedge against both.

Getting the oil out is another matter. Venezuelan production has been stuck near 1.1 million barrels a day for three months, after climbing from about 920,000 at the start of the year, and early talk of a fast jump to 1.5 million has quieted as investment fails to show up. Analysts at Rystad Energy put the cost of meaningfully rebuilding capacity at around $180 billion over the next decade. Decades of neglect under PDVSA left pipelines, terminals and refineries in poor shape.

The politics shifted fast. Trump authorized the January 3 capture of Nicolas Maduro, who now faces narco-terrorism charges in New York, and said that same month that Venezuela was probably better off staying inside OPEC. That view has clearly moved.

Secretary of State Marco Rubio and Venezuelan acting president Delcy Rodriguez are leading the talks, with deputy White House chief of staff Stephen Miller heavily involved. Energy Secretary Chris Wright has discussed traveling to Caracas as soon as next week. No agreement has been reached and no timetable is set.

For American drivers, none of this changes the price at the pump this month. It is a bet on the next decade, and on who controls the barrels.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

TRENTON, N.J. — New Jersey has pulled the plug on the remaining $250 million in tax credits that had been reserved for artificial intelligence and data center projects, marking a sharp reversal from the incentive race that only recently had states competing aggressively to attract the industry.

Governor Mikie Sherrill signed the End Data Center Tax Credits Act on Thursday. The law takes effect immediately and cuts the Next New Jersey program from $500 million to $250 million.

That distinction matters because the first half of the money is already committed.

CoreWeave secured a $250 million award for its planned AI data center at the former Merck research campus in Kenilworth. NJEDA records show the project involves roughly $1.76 billion in capital investment, a 392,600-square-foot facility and 143 new full-time jobs, with business operations expected to begin in early 2027.

That award is untouched.

The other $250 million is gone from the program.

The credits do not disappear from the state’s broader economic-development pool. Because the money had originally been carved out of the Aspire and Emerge programs, the repeal effectively reallocates the unused balance back to those programs.

The move comes as New Jersey rewrites the rules around data center growth.

At the same time Thursday, Sherrill signed separate legislation requiring data center owners and operators to report their energy and water use every six months to the Board of Public Utilities. Those reports must include overall electricity consumption, cooling loads, information-technology loads, peak daily water demand, water sources and backup-power systems.

That builds on legislation Sherrill signed in July creating a separate ratepayer class for data centers and requiring them to shoulder the costs of their own energy demand and related grid infrastructure instead of spreading those costs across residential and small-business customers.

The shift is being driven by a simple political reality: data centers consume enormous amounts of electricity, and New Jersey has been trying to keep rising power costs from falling on households and businesses.

The backlash is not theoretical.

Residents in Vineland have complained about a persistent humming noise they attribute to a nearby AI data center, while Andover Township moved to prohibit data centers entirely after strong public opposition.

The message to developers is now very different from the one New Jersey sent two years ago.

The state still wants AI investment.

It just does not want taxpayers and ratepayers underwriting it the same way.

For companies considering the Garden State, that means future data center projects will increasingly have to stand on their own economics — paying their own power costs, absorbing more of the infrastructure burden and operating under far greater scrutiny from both the state and local communities.

Two years ago, states were competing to give data centers money.

New Jersey just showed how quickly that race can reverse.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NASA is buying phone service for the Moon, and the contracts are going to American companies.

The agency published its latest Moon Base progress update this week, walking through the landers being built by five firms — Firefly Aerospace, Voyager, Blue Origin, Intuitive Machines and Northrop Grumman. Underneath all that hardware is a quieter build-out that gets far less attention: the communications backbone every one of those missions will have to plug into once it reaches the lunar south pole.

Start with the problem. The south pole is where NASA wants to go because there is water ice sitting in craters that never see sunlight, and water can be turned into drinking supply, breathable oxygen and rocket fuel. But a machine parked inside a permanently shadowed crater has no clear line of sight back to Earth and no sunlight to recharge on. It cannot phone home, and it cannot power itself. Everything NASA is now paying for is aimed at those two problems.

Northrop Grumman, based in McLean, Virginia, announced on Aug. 4 a run of missions it calls Lunar Infrastructure Demos — three flights meant to prove out power, heat management and data links that can survive the lunar night. That last part is the hard one. A night at the south pole runs about two weeks and drops far below anything commercial equipment on Earth is built to withstand. Hardware that works beautifully for fourteen days and then freezes solid is not infrastructure. It is a demonstration.

Houston-based Intuitive Machines is handling the orbit side. NASA handed the company a compact navigation payload on July 13 to fly on Altus-1, the first of its relay satellites, built under a services contract with the agency. The job is simple to describe: park spacecraft above the Moon so a rover sitting in a dark crater can bounce its data off something overhead and reach Earth that way. The same satellites carry navigation signals, which is how a rover or a suited astronaut knows where it actually is on a surface with no roads, no landmarks and no global positioning system.

The surface piece has already had its test, and it half worked. On March 6, 2025, Nokia Bell Labs put a functioning cell network on the Moon — a shoebox-sized unit built in Murray Hill, New Jersey, holding the radio, the base station and the network core of an ordinary cell site, assembled largely from off-the-shelf commercial parts on a $14.1 million NASA grant awarded back in 2020. It rode down on Intuitive Machines’ Athena lander, which came to rest on its side inside a crater roughly 250 meters off target. With the solar panels pointing the wrong way, the lander could never recharge.

Nokia got one 25-minute window of power. In it, the network switched on, reported itself live and traded commands and data with mission control in Sunnyvale, California, and the ground station in Houston. Base station, radio and core all checked out healthy and ran without interruption for the full window. What it never got to do was place a call — the handset-side modules on the rover and hopper had gone too cold to connect. The mission had been designed for roughly ten days of surface work and got less than half an hour of it. Intuitive Machines shares lost more than half their value in the days that followed.

The engineering read on that outcome matters more than the headline did. The failure was electricity and cold, not radio. Ordinary cellular technology, the same standard behind billions of phones, survived launch, survived a 239,000-mile trip and worked on the lunar surface. That is why the money kept flowing instead of drying up.

NASA has since put $57.5 million into Axiom Space, also in Houston, to build the same 4G link directly into the backpack of the moon suit, giving astronauts high-definition video and voice out to roughly a mile and a quarter from their lander. That sits on top of a first suit contract worth $228 million. NASA’s Glenn Research Center in Cleveland is separately running lab work on how 4G and 5G behave in lunar conditions, and engineers at Johnson have been walking the Nevada desert with radio backpacks to simulate spacewalk connectivity.

The timeline has stretched. Artemis II flew around the Moon in April. In February, NASA rewrote Artemis III into a test of the SpaceX and Blue Origin landers in Earth orbit, now targeted for late 2027, and moved the landing itself to Artemis IV in 2028. The four Artemis III astronauts were introduced on June 9.

NASA’s build order runs in stages: a five-satellite relay constellation first, a second provider added for coverage and redundancy, then equipment on the ground, then a coordinated network with navigation and timing woven in. Satellites first, towers later.

The commercial logic underneath it is straightforward. Every drill, rover, habitat and mining rig anyone lands up there is going to need bandwidth, and none of them will build their own system for it — the economics of each mission carrying private radios make no sense. Whoever owns the relay satellites and the base stations gets paid by everyone who arrives afterward. That is the business NASA is currently underwriting, and for now the companies at the front of the line are all American.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — U.S. stocks closed higher Thursday as blockbuster results from Nvidia and Salesforce reignited enthusiasm for artificial intelligence, lifting the Nasdaq sharply and pushing the S&P 500 close to a record.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 105.56 points, or 0.20%, to 53,569.44.

The S&P 500 gained 0.72% to 7,730.99, while the Nasdaq Composite surged 1.57% to 26,541.35.

Technology did most of the heavy lifting.

Nvidia jumped about 8.7% after reporting quarterly revenue of $96.2 billion and issuing another powerful growth outlook, reinforcing the view that spending on AI infrastructure remains exceptionally strong.

CEO Jensen Huang said AI has reached an “inflection point,” and investors responded by buying semiconductor and technology shares across the market.

Salesforce surged more than 22%, its strongest session in years, after stronger earnings and evidence that its AI products are beginning to translate into meaningful recurring revenue.

The combination helped turn Thursday into one of the strongest technology sessions of the week.

But the rally was narrower than the major indexes suggested.

Most S&P 500 stocks actually finished lower, meaning a relatively small group of large technology companies accounted for much of the market’s gain.

That distinction matters.

Investors are showing enormous confidence in companies directly benefiting from the AI spending boom, while many businesses tied more closely to ordinary consumer spending continue to struggle.

Best Buy fell roughly 4.5% despite raising its annual sales forecast, as investors focused on cautious consumers and rising electronics costs.

HP also declined more than 4% as higher memory-chip prices pressured the outlook for personal computers.

Dollar General gained about 2.5% after stronger profits, while Dollar Tree fell after its forecast disappointed investors.

The bond market remained another important pressure point.

Treasury yields stayed elevated as investors prepared for Federal Reserve Chair Kevin Warsh’s Jackson Hole speech Friday.

Strong labor-market data and inflation still running above the Fed’s 2% target have reduced expectations that policymakers will be able to lower interest rates anytime soon.

Oil also moved higher amid renewed uncertainty surrounding Iran and the Strait of Hormuz.

That keeps another inflation risk alive for businesses, particularly transportation, manufacturing and consumer-facing companies already dealing with higher borrowing costs.

Thursday therefore produced a clear split.

The AI economy is accelerating, with Nvidia, Salesforce and other technology companies showing extraordinarily strong demand.

The broader economy is much less uniform.

Consumers remain selective, financing remains expensive and energy prices remain volatile.

Friday could determine which side of that story dominates next.

Fed Chair Kevin Warsh is scheduled to speak at Jackson Hole, and investors will be listening closely for any indication that persistent inflation could keep interest rates elevated — or even require additional tightening.

For now, Wall Street’s message is clear:

Investors are willing to pay aggressively for proven AI growth, even while remaining cautious about almost everything else.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

for ripping off Amazon for nearly$ 10 million to purchase expensive sports cars

According to the Justice Department, an Atlanta woman who participated in a scheme that defrauded Amazon of practically$ 10 million was sentenced to more than 16 years in federal prison on Wednesday.

Brittany Hudson and her companion used a business partnership with Amazon to mislead the e-commerce large, according to a release from the U.S. Attorney’s Office for the Northern District of Georgia.

In March, Hudson was found guilty of 30 felony counts involving wire fraud, money laundering, crime ties, and a case involving the fraud of a national judge’s signature.

AMAZON PLANS PRIME AIR DRONE DELIVERIES MASSIVE Rise

According to U.S. Attorney Theodore S. Hertzberg,” Hudson and her companion orchestrated a massive fraud scheme against Amazon, stealing almost$ 10 million in just a few times.” &nbsp,

” Hudson then forged a national court’s personal in a failed attempt to mislead another company while on bond, showing total contempt for the law.” She is held responsible for her murder spree by today’s important sentence, which requires that she be served without the possibility of receiving a parole.

According to the DOJ statement, Hudson and her companion Kayricka Wortham defrauded Amazon between January and June 2022 by using a ruse to use fictitious vendors and invoices they had created in Amazon’s merchant system. The false vendor profiles, which were able to post invoices, were approved by Wortham and another Amazon conspirator.

Finally, in debunking their false claims that the fraudulent vendors had supplied Amazon with goods and services, Hudson and Wortham submitted more than 1, 000 fictional invoices. According to Wortham, the payments, which led to the transfer of about$ 9.4 million to bank accounts that she, Hudson, and their co-conspirators controlled, were approved.

Hudson and Wortham used the phony funds to purchase high-end real estate, including a nearly$ 1 million home in Smyrna, as well as a 2019 Lamborghini Urus, a 2021 Dodge Durango, a 2022 Tesla Model X, a 2018 Porsche Panamera, and a Kawasaki ZX636 motorcycle.

HOW ACCORDABLE CUSTOMERS CAN MAKE A REFUND? AMAZON PRIME SETTLEMENT

In September 2022, the two were charged with federal scams related to the system. By agreeing to start a pipe club in Midtown Atlanta while they were on bond, they made false pretenses that their criminal charges had been dropped. Their judicial discharge was revoked as a result of those activities.

They sent false court documents that contained the forged signatures of Cobb County Magistrate Judge Norman L. Barnett, the case’s attorney, and former Chief U.S. District Judge Timothy C. Batten, Jr. To secure the deal, Husson even emailed fabricated financial remarks with inflated account balances.

A blatant fraud activity is ultimately brought to an end with the punishment of this circumstance, according to Rob Donovan, unique broker in charge of the Atlanta Field Office of the U.S. Secret Service. Our company continues to work with our partners at the U.S. Attorney’s Office to take criminals like this to justice, continuing to be unwavering in our determination to stop fraud, protect victims, and protect victims.

AMAZON’S 30-MINUTE DELIVERY PUSH RAISES STAKES IN RACE FOR SPEED

Hudson was ordered to pay Amazon$ 9, 469, 731 in reparation, and the judge also ordered her to give$ 7, 859, 136 in confiscation money.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

After pleading guilty to forging the signature of a federal judge, Wortham was given a 16-year prison sentence in June 2023 and an extra time in March 2026. Additionally, she was required to pay$ 9,469, 731 in compensation, as well as the Smyrna home and personal belongings.

This post was originally published here

NEW YORK — Updated 10:30 a.m. ET, Thursday, Aug. 27, 2026. U.S. stocks were mixed but firmly technology-led by midmorning, with the Nasdaq extending its gains after Nvidia’s blockbuster earnings while the Dow slipped slightly into negative territory.

At the opening bell, the Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 149.8 points, or 0.28%, to 53,613.66. The S&P 500 gained 34.6 points, or 0.45%, to 7,710.34, while the Nasdaq Composite jumped 226.8 points, or 0.87%, to 26,356.98.

By roughly 10:30 a.m. ET, the picture had shifted. The Dow was down about 28 points, or 0.05%, near 53,436, while the S&P 500 was up about 31 points, or 0.41%, near 7,707, and the Nasdaq Composite was up roughly 296 points, or 1.13%, near 26,427

The divergence reflects exactly where investors are putting money today: AI and technology.

Nvidia was up around 6%, helping pull the Nasdaq sharply higher after the company reported another enormous quarter and issued a strong outlook. Salesforce also surged after strong earnings and an upgraded forecast, while CrowdStrike advanced on better-than-expected results and improved guidance. 

Nvidia reported $96.2 billion in quarterly revenue, including roughly $89 billion from its data-center business, and projected about $108 billion in revenue for the current quarter. The company also expects revenue growth of roughly 70% next fiscal year, reinforcing the view that AI infrastructure spending remains exceptionally strong.

That message is lifting not only Nvidia but the wider group of companies tied to data centers, chips, networking and cloud infrastructure.

The morning economic reports were also relatively supportive.

Initial unemployment claims fell by 4,000 to 203,000 for the week ended Aug. 22, while continuing claims declined by 18,000 to 1.778 million. Layoffs therefore remain low despite signs that hiring has slowed. 

At the same time, the U.S. goods trade deficit widened sharply to $118.8 billion in July, from $101.4 billion in June. Exports fell 2.9%, while imports increased 3.7%.

One notable detail was an 11.3% surge in capital-goods imports, which may partly reflect the huge amount of machinery and equipment being brought into the country for AI data centers and other infrastructure projects. 

That creates an unusual interpretation: a larger trade deficit is normally viewed negatively, but part of today’s increase may actually reflect businesses spending aggressively on productive equipment.

Retail earnings showed the consumer remains highly selective.

Dollar General rose about 5% after stronger results and an improved outlook, while Dollar Tree moved lower after disappointing guidance. Best Buy fell sharply despite beating expectations, as investors focused on weaker underlying electronics demand and persistent pressure from inflation. 

Treasury yields were relatively steady, with the 10-year yield around 4.67%. That stability is important because the Nasdaq’s rally becomes much harder to sustain if long-term rates begin climbing again. 

Oil was also back in focus. U.S. crude was near $82.79 a barrel, while Brent was around $87.78, both up roughly 1% as markets continued to monitor Iran, Oman and shipping through the Strait of Hormuz. 

For the rest of Thursday, Wall Street will be watching three things closely.

First is whether Nvidia’s gain continues pulling the broader semiconductor and AI complex higher.

Second is Treasury yields. If the 10-year remains around 4.65% to 4.70%, technology shares have room to hold their gains. A sharp move above that range would likely pressure the Nasdaq quickly.

Third is Jackson Hole. Investors are preparing for Fed Chair Kevin Warsh’s speech Friday, which could reset expectations for whether the Federal Reserve raises rates again this year. 

After the closing bell, Marvell Technology, Workday, Autodesk, Affirm and Ulta Beauty are among the major companies scheduled to report, with Marvell particularly important because of its exposure to AI networking and data-center infrastructure.

For now, the market is sending a very clear message: Nvidia has reignited the AI trade, but the rally is concentrated. The Nasdaq is surging while the Dow has already given up its opening gain.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A chunk of Himalayan glacier broke loose Wednesday morning and, within roughly half an hour, killed at least 362 people and wiped out Nepal’s main overland gateway to China.

There was no rain and no warning. At about 8:40 a.m. local time, a section of the lower glacier sheared off at around 17,000 feet and fell some 3,900 feet onto the valley floor, picking up rock and sediment as it went. The resulting ice-and-rock avalanche slammed into the Lhende River in Tibet, about 12 miles northeast of the Nepal-China border crossing, sending a wall of mud and water down the Bhotekoshi into Nepal’s Rasuwa and Nuwakot districts. The U.S. Geological Survey later determined that a tremor first logged as a magnitude 4.4 earthquake was in fact the energy released by the collapse itself.

Nepal Police put the death toll at 359 as of 5 p.m. Thursday, with three more reported dead in Tibet by Chinese state media. More than 1,300 people are still missing across both sides of the border, over 700 of them foreign nationals — better than one in two of the missing. Among them are 177 Indians, 63 Americans, 34 Australians, 33 Britons and 25 Canadians.

The commercial damage runs the length of the corridor. At Rasuwagadhi-Timure, the flood swept away the customs yard along with the vehicles and imported goods parked there awaiting clearance. More than 500 vehicles are feared lost, many of them Chinese-brand cars — BYD, MG, Wuling and others — brought in through the Kerung route for upcoming auto shows. Power generation stopped at more than ten hydropower projects, including the 111-megawatt Rasuwagadhi plant, Chilime and Trishuli-3A, knocking roughly 430 megawatts offline. Two bridges are gone and stretches of the Pasang Lhamu Highway, the road linking Kathmandu to the region, are closed. With the Dashain festival weeks away, Nepal expects goods shortages, and Finance Minister Swarnim Wagle is running a response team out of the Timure customs office.

This is the second time in fourteen months the same river has done this. A July 2025 flood out of Tibet killed nine people, took out the Friendship Bridge and damaged the same dry port and power plants.

The fix is not engineering, it’s information. Nepali analysts are pressing for joint hazard mapping of the corridor with China, formal cross-border rescue protocols and a shared alert platform linking agencies on both sides — built before the next collapse rather than improvised during one. With ice loss across the Hindu Kush Himalaya running at twice its 2000 rate, communities downstream may get only minutes of notice.

JBizNews Desk | Kathmandu

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

DUBAI — Passenger traffic at Dubai International Airport fell sharply in the first half of 2026 as the Iran war disrupted one of the world’s most important aviation and cargo hubs.

Dubai Airports said the airport handled 31.5 million passengers during the first six months of the year, down 31.3% from a year earlier.

Aircraft movements dropped 32.1%, while cargo volume fell 28.7% to 751,340 tonnes.

The numbers show how quickly a regional war can become a global business problem.

Dubai International is one of the world’s busiest international airports and a major connecting point between Europe, Asia, Africa and the Middle East. When flights are canceled, rerouted or reduced, the impact spreads far beyond travelers.

Airlines lose connecting traffic. Cargo shipments take longer or become more expensive. Hotels, restaurants, retailers and tourism businesses lose customers. Companies moving high-value goods through the region can also face delays and higher transportation costs.

The airport’s weakness was most severe earlier in the year, although passenger traffic improved during the second quarter as airlines gradually restored capacity.

That recovery is important, but the first-half decline remains enormous.

A 31% drop in passengers means millions fewer travelers moving through Dubai, while the nearly 29% decline in cargo highlights the wider effect on international trade.

For Emirates and other carriers using Dubai as a global transfer hub, continued geopolitical instability could make scheduling and fleet planning more difficult even if demand remains strong.

The broader lesson is that the economic impact of the Iran war is not limited to oil prices or shipping through the Strait of Hormuz.

It is also being felt in air travel, tourism, freight, logistics and international commerce.

Dubai’s traffic numbers provide one of the clearest measurements yet of just how large that disruption has become.

JBizNews Desk | Dubai

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

ARMONK, N.Y. — IBM has completed its acquisition of HRL Laboratories, the advanced research operation previously owned by Boeing and General Motors, giving IBM access to a second major technology that could help determine how future quantum computers are built.

Quantum computers work differently from ordinary computers.

Traditional computers process information through bits that are either 0 or 1. Quantum computers use qubits, which can handle information in more complex ways and could eventually solve certain problems that are extremely difficult for today’s computers.

That could matter for industries including drug development, finance, logistics, aerospace, manufacturing and energy.

IBM already builds quantum machines using superconducting qubits, tiny circuits kept at extremely cold temperatures.

HRL specializes in another approach called silicon-spin qubits, which use properties of electrons inside silicon.

That is important because silicon is already the foundation of the global semiconductor industry. If silicon-based qubits eventually prove easier to manufacture at large scale, they could become an important part of commercially useful quantum computers.

In simple terms, IBM is now pursuing two different ways of building the engine inside a quantum computer instead of relying entirely on one technology.

The biggest challenge in quantum computing is not simply building more qubits. Quantum systems are extremely sensitive and prone to errors. The industry is racing to develop machines capable of correcting those errors while performing millions of calculations reliably.

IBM says it remains on track to develop its Starling fault-tolerant quantum computer by 2029, designed to perform as many as 100 million quantum operations.

HRL could help IBM determine what comes next and how future quantum systems can eventually be manufactured at much larger scale.

For businesses, quantum computing is not expected to replace normal computers. Its potential is in tackling specialized problems that are currently extremely difficult to calculate — such as modeling new medicines, designing advanced materials or optimizing enormously complicated financial and transportation systems.

The acquisition therefore gives IBM more than another research laboratory.

It gives the company another technological route toward one of the technology industry’s biggest unanswered questions: how to turn quantum computing from experimental science into a commercially useful machine.

JBizNews Desk | Armonk, New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

in observation, almost 25K weight of frozen buffalo chicken were recalled.

The Food Safety and Inspection Service ( FSIS ) of the Department of Agriculture announced on Wednesday that nearly 25 000 pounds of frozen Buffalo chicken products had been produced without the benefit of inspection.

About 24, 900 weight of frozen, not-ready-to-eat Buffalo meat products are being recalled by Shanghai Ravioli Corporation in Boston.

The recalled products include cardboard boxes filled with 120 items of” Benedetto’s Buffalo Chicken Mozzarella Stick” and 100 pieces of” Buffalo Chicken Rangoon”

Greater BAKEHOUSE RECALLS CHOCOLATE-DIPPED DONUTS Next ALLERGIC REACTION AND MISLABELING ISSUE

The affected meat products ‘ labels list the sell-by dates from July 8, 2026, to June 29, 2027.

From July 8, 2025, to June 29, 2026, the food products were produced on several times.

The frozen food were delivered to Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Rhode Island, and Vermont as well as other food-service establishments.

Frozen Fruit Carrier Recalled Nationwide Over Potential Glass Containment

FSIS expressed concern that some recalled goods might be stored in restaurant freezers or refrigerators. These products are advised not to be served in catering establishments that have purchased them. The items should either be returned to the original purchaser or thrown aside.

FSIS claimed that the recall-related materials had “EST” marks on them when they were first tested. which is not subject to a national evaluation grant.

According to FSIS, meals produced without inspection may include hidden allergens, harmful bacteria, or other contaminants that could compromise consumer health and safety.

FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO: Press HERE.

According to the organization, FSIS surveillance actions led to the discovery of the problem.

No documented illnesses or injuries have been linked to these items ‘ use. Anyone who has a medical condition or damage is urged to get in touch with a medical professional.

This post was originally published here

Capture an Iranian tanker at sea, sell the crude, and send the money to the U.S. Treasury.

That is what the Justice Department is preparing to make routine. According to three people familiar with the plans, the department is moving to activate a wartime court that has sat unused since World War II, so oil and cargo taken from ships running the American blockade of Iran can be declared U.S. property outright.

The court is called a prize court, and the word is literal. In 18th and 19th century naval warfare, a ship or its cargo captured from an enemy was a prize, and a judge ruled on whether the capture was lawful and who owned the goods afterward. Aaron Reitz, the U.S. attorney in Houston whose office is working with department headquarters on the initiative, confirmed the department is “now reviving” prize courts, which he described as an “ancient body of maritime law.”

“Our national security interests may require the United States military to seize vessels or cargo supporting the enemy during military conflict,” Reitz said in a statement. “If that happens, our federal courts must be ready to adjudicate the disposition of these captured vessels and cargo.”

The plans are not finalized. The venue under consideration is the federal trial court for the Southern District of Texas, and Houston is the practical pick: its 50-mile port serves the largest petrochemical complex in the country and can store large volumes of crude while a case runs.

The point of the change is speed. Washington currently takes captured ships through civil forfeiture, the same route used against sanctions violators, and it drags because anyone with a claim can step in. In the pending case of a supertanker seized in December carrying Venezuelan crude that supported Iran, the shipping company and families of Iranian terrorism victims holding court judgments have all intervened, bogging the sale down. Under prize law, shipowners could still appear and object, but on far narrower grounds, according to Holland & Knight maritime attorneys Allison Luzwick and Michael Frevola.

Supporters see two payoffs — cash and a signal. “It helps offset the price of the war,” said Eugene Kontorovich, an international law professor at George Mason’s Antonin Scalia School of Law. “It also shows Iran that America is really treating this as a serious international blockade and is willing to use all the tools at its disposal.”

The legal ground is untested. Prize courts have gone largely unused since the Spanish-American War in 1898, and challenges are expected over whether the conflict qualifies under the Prize Act at all and whether captures are lawful without congressional authorization of the war. Jill Goldenziel, a law professor at the National Defense University, warned in April that the same doctrine could be turned around, opening the door for China to apply prize law against American and neutral merchant ships in a future conflict.

For owners, charterers and insurers moving cargo anywhere near the Strait of Hormuz, the practical read is simpler: a ship stopped by the U.S. Navy may no longer be tied up in years of litigation before its oil is sold — it may just be gone.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

By Duvi Honig, Publisher and Editor, JBizNews

Corporate earnings are becoming harder to read.

Billions of dollars in tariff refunds are now flowing back to American companies, creating an unusual situation in which profits can jump even when sales are falling, customer traffic is weak, or the underlying business is barely improving.

For investors, that creates a dangerous temptation: looking at the earnings headline instead of asking where the earnings actually came from.

Consider what we are seeing.

Walmart received roughly $2.9 billion in tariff refunds and is using part of that windfall to help finance price cuts on thousands of products. Yet its U.S. comparable-sales growth slowed to 2.6%, its weakest pace in six years, store-traffic growth slowed, and its next-quarter earnings guidance disappointed Wall Street.

The market noticed. Walmart shares fell more than 9% in one day, wiping out tens of billions of dollars in market value.

That is the market saying: We see the refund, but we also see what is happening underneath it.

Kohl’s provides an even clearer example.

It received approximately $150 million in tariff refunds during the quarter. About $100 million flowed directly through gross margin, helping Kohl’s raise its annual earnings outlook.

But comparable sales declined again, and quarterly revenue remained under pressure.

Kohl’s shares fell.

Again, Wall Street looked past the bigger profit number and focused on the weaker underlying business.

Bath & Body Works received about $80 million in tariff refunds. Reported adjusted earnings were 62 cents a share.

Without the tariff benefit, earnings would have been approximately 31 cents.

Meanwhile, store traffic remained weak, sales declined, and the company forecast another sales decline for the current quarter.

Its shares also fell.

Then there is Kimberly-Clark.

Its profitability benefited from tariff refunds even as sales missed expectations and the company reduced parts of its outlook because of softer demand and other pressures.

Those examples demonstrate the problem.

A higher profit number does not necessarily mean a healthier company.

But this story has another side — and that is just as important.

A Refund Does Not Automatically Mean the Earnings Are Fake

Target received nearly $1 billion in tariff refunds, a tremendous boost.

But Target also produced stronger comparable sales, higher customer traffic, stronger digital sales, and improved its outlook.

Its shares rose.

That is different from Kohl’s.

The refund made Target’s earnings look better, but there was also genuine operating improvement beneath it.

The same distinction applies to Abercrombie & Fitch.

Abercrombie received roughly $100 million in tariff benefits, but it also reported record quarterly sales and continued underlying brand growth.

Investors rewarded the stock.

J.M. Smucker also benefited from tariff refunds, but revenue rose, cash flow improved, and management raised its outlook.

Its shares moved higher.

Home Depot received roughly $730 million in tariff refunds, but sales also grew and the company produced stronger underlying operating results.

Its stock reaction was far more measured.

That tells us something important.

The market is not simply rewarding companies that receive tariff refunds or punishing those that do.

It is beginning to separate real operating performance from temporary financial assistance.

Why the Market Looks Confused

This is why investors are seeing stocks move in opposite directions even when companies announce apparently similar profit increases.

The market is essentially rebuilding the income statement.

Institutional investors are asking:

What would earnings have been without the refund?

Did customers actually buy more?

Did traffic increase?

Did the company gain market share?

Did margins improve because management became more efficient — or because the government returned money?

Is the improvement repeatable next quarter?

That is the correct way to look at these earnings.

But everyday investors can easily be misled by headlines.

“Profit jumps.”

“Company raises guidance.”

“Margins surge.”

“Earnings beat expectations.”

Those statements can all be technically true while still giving investors the wrong impression about the health of the business.

That is where the danger lies.

This Is About More Than One Quarter

The bigger impact may come later.

Wall Street values companies largely on future earnings, not the money they happened to receive yesterday.

Suppose a company normally earns $500 million annually.

It receives a one-time $150 million tariff refund and reports $650 million.

If investors apply a 20-times earnings valuation to the $650 million figure, that implies a business worth $13 billion.

But if sustainable earnings are actually $500 million, the same multiple produces a value of $10 billion.

That is a $3 billion valuation difference created without selling a single additional product.

Multiply that across corporate America and tariff refunds begin affecting far more than quarterly headlines.

They affect earnings-per-share estimates, analyst price targets, valuation multiples, executive compensation, lending decisions, acquisitions, share repurchases, and future investor expectations.

Every spreadsheet eventually has to answer the same question:

Is this recurring income or temporary income?

The 2027 Problem

There is another distortion coming.

Companies receiving large refunds in 2026 will eventually have to compare future earnings against these unusually inflated quarters.

Imagine a retailer earns $2 a share from operations this year plus 75 cents from a tariff refund.

Reported earnings: $2.75.

Next year, the business improves and generates $2.20 from operations.

That is actually 10% real growth.

But without another 75-cent refund, reported earnings fall from $2.75 to $2.20.

The headline could say:

“Earnings Fall 20%.”

The business actually improved.

The comparison simply became distorted.

Today’s tariff refunds can therefore make companies appear artificially strong now — and artificially weak later.

That will complicate earnings comparisons, analyst models, and corporate valuations well into 2027.

What Investors Should Do

My message is not to ignore earnings.

It is to reconstruct them.

When reading a corporate report today, start with four numbers:

Sales. Traffic or volume. Recurring operating margin. Cash flow.

Then look for unusual items such as tariff refunds.

Remove them.

And ask:

What would this company look like if that money had never arrived?

That is the business you are actually investing in.

Then ask a second question:

What is management doing with the windfall?

A company that uses temporary tariff money to reduce debt, improve technology, cut prices, modernize stores, or invest in productivity can turn temporary cash into permanent value.

A company that uses it mainly to make weak earnings look stronger, repurchase shares, or avoid confronting deteriorating operations may simply be postponing the problem.

Is the Market Being Fooled?

Not completely.

Walmart fell.

Kohl’s fell.

Bath & Body Works fell.

Target rose.

Smucker rose.

Abercrombie rose.

Home Depot barely moved.

That is not a market randomly reacting to headlines.

It is evidence that investors are already trying to distinguish between companies where tariff refunds are covering weakness and companies where the refund is sitting on top of genuine growth.

The bigger risk is to people who stop at the headline.

So when you see a company spreading enormous profit numbers across an earnings release like a peacock opening its feathers, do not stare at the feathers.

Look underneath.

Because the question that will determine corporate valuations over the next year is no longer simply:

How much did the company earn?

It is:

How much of those earnings will still exist when the tariff money is gone?

That is the number investors should be valuing.

Duvi Honig
Publisher and Editor, JBizNews

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — Wall Street finished Wednesday almost exactly where it started, as investors absorbed another stubborn inflation reading and largely stayed on the sidelines ahead of Nvidia’s highly anticipated earnings.

The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 113.52 points, or 0.21%, to 53,463.88.

The S&P 500 slipped 0.02% to 7,675.70, while the Nasdaq Composite declined 0.08% to 26,130.20.

The unusually quiet finish masked a more important shift in the bond market.

The 10-year Treasury yield moved back toward 4.65% after inflation remained hotter than investors wanted, reinforcing expectations that the Federal Reserve may have little room to lower borrowing costs anytime soon.

July inflation remained at 3.7% from a year earlier, still well above the Federal Reserve’s 2% target.

That left investors confronting the same difficult combination that has shaped markets in recent weeks: the economy is still growing, corporate profits remain strong and AI investment continues at extraordinary levels — but inflation is proving difficult to eliminate.

For businesses, that means interest rates could remain elevated longer than many hoped.

Higher Treasury yields eventually flow through to mortgages, commercial real-estate financing, corporate borrowing and other forms of credit.

Nvidia Keeps Wall Street Waiting

Nvidia fell 1.6% during regular trading, closing at $209.66 as investors reduced exposure ahead of its earnings release after the closing bell.

The company has become one of the most consequential stocks in the entire market because its results provide a direct measure of how aggressively technology companies continue spending on artificial intelligence.

After the close, Nvidia reported $96.2 billion in quarterly revenue, up 106% from a year earlier, while its data-center business generated approximately $89 billion.

The company also projected approximately $108 billion in revenue for the current quarter, suggesting that demand for AI computing infrastructure continues to accelerate.

That report arrived after Wednesday’s official market close, meaning Nvidia’s reaction could become one of the biggest drivers of Thursday trading.

Abercrombie Surges

One of Wednesday’s biggest winners was Abercrombie & Fitch, which jumped more than 35% after delivering stronger-than-expected quarterly results.

The move demonstrated that consumers have not stopped spending entirely. Retail performance is increasingly separating into winners and losers based on brand strength, pricing and customer demographics.

J.M. Smucker rose 4.3% following better-than-expected results.

Meanwhile, Intuit fell 3.2% after its profit outlook disappointed investors despite continued growth across QuickBooks and other financial-software products.

Meta Rises Following Major Settlement

Meta Platforms gained roughly 1.1% after agreeing to resolve litigation involving allegations that its social-media products harmed younger users.

The company could ultimately pay as much as $18 billion while implementing additional child-safety measures.

The financial cost is significant, but investors appeared relieved that one of Meta’s largest outstanding legal uncertainties was moving toward resolution.

Apple also gained more than 1%.

Oil Provides Some Relief

Oil prices finished slightly lower following several volatile sessions tied to Iran and uncertainty surrounding the Strait of Hormuz.

That provided modest relief for businesses exposed to transportation and fuel costs.

Energy prices remain important because another sustained rise in crude could feed directly back into inflation just as the Federal Reserve is deciding whether additional rate increases are necessary.

What Wednesday’s Market Really Said

Wednesday was not a dramatic trading day.

That was the point.

Investors were unwilling to make large bets before seeing Nvidia’s numbers and hearing more from Federal Reserve officials later this week.

The stock market remains close to record territory, corporate earnings remain strong and AI spending continues to expand.

But the bond market is sending a warning.

If inflation refuses to fall, expensive money may remain part of the economy much longer than businesses and investors expected.

Thursday will show whether Nvidia’s extraordinary growth is powerful enough to overcome that concern.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

MADRID — Thousands of Airbus employees in Spain have resumed strike action after workers rejected the aerospace giant’s latest proposal on pay and working conditions, creating another potential obstacle as Airbus races to meet an ambitious aircraft-delivery target.

The walkout matters well beyond Spain.

Airbus operates eight major sites in the country and employs more than 14,000 people, producing important parts for commercial aircraft as well as military planes, helicopters and satellites. Spanish facilities manufacture components used across the Airbus aircraft family, including the A321XLR, while Spain also hosts final assembly operations for military aircraft such as the A400M.

The three unions involved represent roughly 40% of Airbus employees in Spain. Union officials said participation in Tuesday’s strike was extremely high among eligible workers, and employees resumed industrial action Wednesday as negotiations continued.

The dispute comes at a sensitive time for Airbus.

The company is targeting approximately 870 commercial aircraft deliveries in 2026, after delivering 351 during the first half of the year. Airbus has repeatedly emphasized that hitting that goal depends on avoiding major disruptions to its factories, suppliers and internal operations.

That is why even a strike concentrated in one country can matter globally.

Modern aircraft are built through tightly connected production networks. A component manufactured in Spain can be required for an aircraft being assembled elsewhere in Europe. If production slows long enough, unfinished aircraft can begin accumulating while airlines wait for planes they have already ordered.

Airbus is already operating in an industry where airlines are waiting years for new aircraft because both Airbus and Boeing have enormous order backlogs.

Any prolonged labor disruption could therefore make an already tight delivery environment even more difficult.

For airlines, delayed aircraft can mean postponing new routes, keeping older jets in service longer or spending more money leasing replacement planes.

For Airbus, the larger concern is whether the dispute remains a limited labor disagreement or begins interfering with its ability to reach the 870-aircraft target that investors and customers are watching closely.

A new mediation meeting is expected as the company and unions continue trying to resolve the dispute.

JBizNews Desk | Madrid

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

HARRISBURG, Pa. — Pennsylvania health officials have confirmed two measles-associated deaths, the state’s first deaths linked to the highly contagious virus in 35 years, as the 2026 outbreak continues spreading across the Commonwealth.

Both individuals were unvaccinated residents of Lancaster County, according to the Pennsylvania Department of Health. Officials did not release additional identifying information out of respect for the families’ privacy.

The deaths come as Pennsylvania has confirmed 393 measles cases across 28 counties so far this year.

The outbreak began in April and has become serious enough that the state is expanding vaccination efforts ahead of the school year.

Pennsylvania has already operated 91 pop-up vaccination clinics and administered more than 4,100 MMR vaccinations through those sites. Another 40 clinics are expected to open in the coming weeks.

More than 35,000 Pennsylvanians received an MMR vaccine in July alone, roughly 10,000 more doses than during a typical month.

Measles is one of the most contagious diseases in circulation.

The virus spreads through coughing, sneezing and breathing and can remain infectious in the air or on surfaces for as long as two hours after an infected person leaves an area.

Symptoms typically begin with fever, cough, runny nose and red or watery eyes. A rash usually follows several days later, beginning around the head and spreading downward.

Symptoms can appear seven to 21 days after exposure, which means people may unknowingly spread the virus before realizing they are sick.

The disease is particularly dangerous for young children and people with weakened immune systems. Complications can include pneumonia and swelling of the brain.

Pennsylvania health officials say nearly 20% of people who contract measles are hospitalized, while deaths occur in roughly one to three cases per 1,000 infections.

The state is urging anyone who believes they may have been exposed and is experiencing symptoms to contact a healthcare provider before arriving at a medical office or emergency room, allowing staff to take precautions against additional exposure.

The MMR vaccine remains the primary protection against measles. State health officials say two doses provide approximately 97% lifetime protection.

The timing is especially important as children return to classrooms and families begin spending more time indoors, creating additional opportunities for an airborne virus to spread.

Pennsylvania had not recorded a measles-associated death since 1991.

JBizNews Desk | Harrisburg, Pennsylvania

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Bath & Body Works nearly doubled its quarterly profit and raised its earnings forecast for the year, but the numbers reveal a divided picture: the retailer is making more money while customers are spending less.

The company earned $118 million during its fiscal second quarter, up from $64 million during the same period last year. Earnings increased to 58 cents a share from 30 cents, while adjusted earnings reached 62 cents a share—far exceeding the 24 cents analysts expected.

Sales, however, declined 2.3% to $1.51 billion. Weak traffic at physical stores continued to pressure the business as consumers remained cautious about discretionary purchases such as candles, fragrances, soaps and body-care products.

A substantial tariff refund helped produce the sharp increase in earnings. Bath & Body Works received approximately $80 million in tariff refunds during the quarter. Without that benefit, adjusted earnings would have been approximately 31 cents a share—still ahead of analysts’ expectations, but only half the reported amount.

Operating income rose to $216 million from $157 million a year earlier, showing that the company also benefited from tighter cost controls and efforts to simplify its operations.

Bath & Body Works raised its full-year adjusted earnings forecast to between $2.60 and $2.80 a share, up from its previous projection of $2.40 to $2.65. Reported earnings are now expected to reach $3.13 to $3.33 a share, compared with the earlier range of $3 to $3.25.

The company also increased its expected free cash flow to approximately $650 million from $600 million.

The improved profit forecast does not mean Bath & Body Works expects sales to return to growth this year. The retailer now projects annual revenue will decline between 2.5% and 4%. That is only a modest improvement from its previous forecast for a decline of between 2.5% and 4.5%.

The company is working to become less dependent on shoppers visiting its traditional stores. Its products are now available through Amazon and Ulta Beauty, in addition to its own website, more than 1,900 stores in the United States and Canada and over 550 international locations.

Digital sales grew during the quarter, providing one of the clearest signs of progress. Bath & Body Works has been improving its online shopping experience, refreshing its brand, introducing new products and expanding distribution to reach customers who may no longer visit malls as frequently.

Chief Executive Daniel Heaf said the quarterly results exceeded the company’s sales and earnings expectations and showed progress in its broader transformation. The strategy is intended to turn Bath & Body Works from a store-centered specialty retailer into a brand that can sell through multiple physical and digital channels.

The immediate outlook remains difficult. For the third quarter, the company expects sales to decline between 2.5% and 5%. Adjusted earnings are projected at only 7 cents to 12 cents a share, down sharply from 35 cents during the comparable period last year.

That forecast matters because it shows the turnaround is not yet complete. Bath & Body Works has improved profitability, generated more cash and benefited from tariff refunds, but it has not solved its central challenge: attracting more shoppers and restoring consistent sales growth.

The fall and holiday seasons will provide the company’s most important test. Candles, fragrances and gift sets traditionally become stronger sellers during that period. If customer demand improves, Bath & Body Works could begin turning its financial progress into a broader retail recovery. If sales remain weak, the company’s higher earnings will continue to depend heavily on cost controls and benefits that may not be repeated.

JBizNews Desk | Columbus, Ohio

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

President Trump is preparing to retaliate against Canada after Ottawa announced new tariffs on nearly $20 billion in American goods.

The United States could respond with higher tariffs and other trade measures, according to a White House official. The administration has not yet disclosed what products could be targeted or when Trump will act.

The danger is a rapidly escalating cycle: Washington taxes Canadian products, Canada taxes American products, and Trump responds with still more tariffs. Businesses pay those charges at the border, but much of the cost can eventually reach families through higher prices.

Canada’s retaliation begins Sept. 8. Its new tariffs range from 15% to 50% and cover more than 700 American-made products, including steel, aluminum, milk, furniture, clothing, smartphones and video-game consoles.

Ottawa is also providing $7.5 billion in assistance to Canadian businesses and workers affected by the trade fight.

Trump already has another major escalation planned for Jan. 1, when he says tariffs on Canadian cars, trucks and automobile parts will double from 25% to 50%.

That could add thousands of dollars to the cost of some vehicles.

Take a $40,000 Canadian-built car containing $20,000 in American parts. If only its $20,000 in non-American content is taxed, the current 25% tariff equals $5,000. At 50%, it becomes $10,000.

The buyer may not pay that entire amount directly. Automakers, suppliers and dealerships could absorb portions of it. But the cost will still appear somewhere — through higher prices, smaller discounts, reduced production or lost jobs.

Trump announced the planned increase after accusing Canada of imposing excessive tariffs on American farmers and pointing to what he described as a $60 billion trade deficit.

“Not sustainable, and NOT ANYMORE!” Trump wrote, urging automakers to move production into the United States.

But North American manufacturing is deeply connected. Vehicle parts can cross the U.S.-Canada border several times before a car is completed. An American factory may therefore pay more for Canadian components even when the finished vehicle is assembled in the United States.

The two countries had been close to an agreement. Washington offered to reduce tariffs on Canadian steel, aluminum, automobiles and lumber. In return, it demanded greater access to Canada’s protected dairy market, the reopening of provincial liquor shelves to American products and changes to Canadian trade and media rules.

The negotiations collapsed after Canada said the United States introduced last-minute demands affecting Canadian sovereignty. U.S. Trade Representative Jamieson Greer said Canada simply demanded more than Washington would accept.

Now both governments are increasing the pressure.

For Trump, the tariffs are leverage intended to protect American farmers and bring manufacturing into the United States. For consumers and businesses, however, the immediate reality is simpler: everything from vehicles and building materials to electronics and groceries could become more expensive.

Canada’s tariffs take effect Sept. 8. Trump’s doubled auto tariffs are scheduled for Jan. 1. His next move could come much sooner.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — A major antitrust settlement involving Zillow and Redfin could reshape the online apartment-search business, restoring a competitor that federal regulators say Zillow paid $100 million to effectively remove from the market.

The Federal Trade Commission and attorneys general from Arizona, Connecticut, New York, Virginia and Washington reached an agreement with Zillow and Redfin resolving allegations that a 2025 partnership between the companies illegally reduced competition in online rental advertising.

Under that agreement, Zillow paid Redfin $100 million as Redfin shut down its independent internet-listing-services business, transferred advertising customers to Zillow and began displaying Zillow-provided rental listings across Redfin properties.

The FTC alleged the arrangement effectively eliminated Redfin as a major independent competitor for multifamily rental advertising.

Now, regulators are forcing much of that structure to be unwound.

Redfin must restart its independent rental-advertising business within six months after the court order becomes final, rebuild the necessary technology and hire a general manager, sales staff and customer-support team.

The company has also committed to substantial multiyear investment in the rebuilt operation.

That matters beyond Zillow and Redfin.

Apartment-search websites operate as two-sided marketplaces. Renters use them to find available homes, while landlords and property managers pay to advertise their properties and reach those renters.

When fewer major platforms compete for those advertising dollars, property managers can have less bargaining power — and higher marketing costs can ultimately become another expense embedded in the economics of renting apartments.

The FTC said restoring Redfin as an independent competitor should create more choices, increase innovation and potentially reduce advertising costs.

There is an important distinction for consumers: the settlement does not mean Zillow listings will disappear from Redfin.

Redfin can continue carrying Zillow listings. What changes is Redfin’s ability to separately pursue landlords and property managers, sell its own advertising services and display rental listings obtained independently of Zillow.

The order goes even further.

Zillow will be required to remove certain restrictions that could interfere with Redfin recruiting employees needed to rebuild the operation. Zillow must also provide some customers with opportunities to renegotiate contracts after Redfin reenters the market, giving property managers a meaningful chance to switch or add competing services.

The proposed order would remain in effect for 10 years, and Redfin could face financial penalties if it fails to meet its commitments.

The settlement still requires approval and signature from the federal judge overseeing the case before it has the force of law.

For renters, there will probably be no dramatic change tomorrow morning.

But over time, the consequences could become visible in something consumers increasingly take for granted: how many apartments they see online, which properties appear on different platforms and how much competition exists among the companies controlling the digital gateway to finding a home.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

, Florida Chamber CEO: Businesses are looking to Sunshine State “from all over the country.”

Business decision-makers are responding to the telephone just two weeks after the Florida Chamber of Commerce announced the wildly popular Times Square ad for Zohran Mamdani, the mayor of New York City, as the country’s “Economic Developer of the Year.”

As businesses look to leave democratic governance, Florida Chamber President and CEO Mark Wilson said in an exclusive interview with Fox News Digital that inquiries are coming in from professionals in violet states and other industries.

Wilson claimed that” this quickly became a national trend.” We received a text message from” Hey, I’m seeing this,” which was literally translated as”. Wow, that is wonderful. Of course, we need to discuss communism and free sector in our country. &rsquo”,

” The answer has been received from all over the nation,” he said. Businesses came from New York, California, Illinois, and of course, Washington. He continued,” This has really been a national response.” Previous governors and state lawmakers have been found in other states. Members of Congress have contacted us after hearing about this&hellip and saying,” OK, this is the chat our country needs to have.” &rsquo”,

FLORIDA STOCK RISING: HOW IT CHANGED THE 14TH LARGEST ECONOMY, BLUE STATES CONTINUE A, DEATH SPIRAL,

Web traffic to the Chamber’s” Free Enterprise” campaign increased by 500 % to 600 % after the billboard went live at West 43rd Street and Broadway, according to Wilson. He claimed that inquiries from businesses, blog candidates, and public officials amounted to five to seven contacts per day, which included New York.

A Rochester-based engineering firm in Rochester, New York, contacted me about moving to what they called the “land of opportunity” and saying,” I received a call from them.

Working-class New Yorkers are getting a second chance at New York City’s market, according to a City Hall director who recently told Fox News Digital in response to the ad. Wilson refuted that judgment, citing tax burdens and fiscal strains that, in his opinion, disproportionately strain middle-class workers, including electricians and nurses.

” This is not political, and it isn’t even individual.” With regard to this entire [socialist ] idea, Wilson asked which was better for the average American: free enterprise or more government and less freedom, of course. The budget is certainly balanced, so New York City is losing people, so they are looking for new income.

Financial auditors have warned of architectural budget cracks in the future because New York City approved a$ 125.8 billion budget for the fiscal time 2027 in June. Despite recent development, the population is still below the 2020 Census degree.

Despite having more than 23 million people in Florida and around 8.3 million in New York City, the provincial resources exceeds Florida’s$ 117.6 billion state budget by more than$ 8 billion.

What’s happening in New York City is that they are actually increasing the costs and reducing their freedom, he said,” If we’re talking about caregivers, tradespeople, and electricians, right, the skilled trades that are so important to America.”

Wilson refuted Wilson’s claims that Florida’s rapid population growth strains regional system, raises housing costs, and that higher earnings increase the appeal of blue states.

Let’s say there is an$ 80,000 [salary ] welder employed in Ocala, Florida, where median home prices are less than$ 300,000. That is a life of outstanding beauty. You can live in Florida without paying income taxes, and you can attend one of the best universities in the country. You’re only an hour away from the beach, fine? He claimed that the same person who lives in New York City could earn more money, but they couldn’t afford to.

Making more money is a “real estate market” that you can’t afford, and a “tax-paying” market that you didn’t purchase. And there is no one wanting that.

The chief of the Florida Chamber confirmed the organization’s plans for a” Free Enterprise” campaign to be run nationwide, noting that there are “plethora of locations ] to choose from” in New Jersey, California, and cities like Minneapolis and Seattle as part of the plan.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

What will soon appear like, according to the concept? What will the potential hold? So we’re attempting to accomplish that. Wilson said,” We’re attempting to create a center for technology where we can look at what the country’s future holds.”

We don’t look to different state for success, let me say again. If they succeed in doing something, we want to know from them. And Florida’s businesses are expanding as well as our population and our deductible earnings. And that’s exactly what we need to become vying for.

FOX BUSINESS: Extra

This post was originally published here

SAN FRANCISCO — Anthropic is preparing to tell investors that artificial intelligence could give the Claude maker access to a market worth more than $30 trillion a year, one of the largest estimates yet of the economic opportunity AI companies believe lies ahead.

The figure is not a forecast that Anthropic itself will generate $30 trillion in revenue.

It represents the company’s estimated total addressable market, or TAM — the maximum annual revenue opportunity available if a company theoretically captured 100% of the market it is targeting.

Anthropic is calculating that opportunity by looking at the broad range of work that could eventually be performed using AI models.

That distinction is critical.

The company is effectively arguing that artificial intelligence should not be viewed simply as another software industry. Instead, advanced AI could eventually compete for spending across programming, research, finance, customer service, professional services and other forms of work now performed by people.

Anthropic’s estimate would exceed the $28.5 trillion total addressable market presented by SpaceX ahead of its public offering earlier this year.

The size of the estimate is particularly striking when compared with today’s technology industry. The 191 technology companies in the S&P 1500 generated roughly $2.4 trillion in combined revenue last year, according to data cited by The Wall Street Journal.

Anthropic itself is already growing rapidly.

The company more than doubled quarterly revenue to approximately $11.6 billion in the second quarter, while it is projecting annual revenue of roughly $190 billion to $200 billion by 2028.

The Claude maker is also preparing for a potential initial public offering that could become one of the largest ever.

Anthropic may seek to raise as much as $100 billion at a valuation approaching $2 trillion, although the final size, valuation and timing remain under discussion.

For investors, the $30 trillion number is less important as a literal revenue target than as a statement about how Anthropic views the future economy.

A large TAM can help justify enormous valuations and the billions of dollars AI companies are spending on chips, data centers, electricity and computing infrastructure.

But it also creates a much higher bar.

Anthropic still has to prove that it can capture a meaningful share of that theoretical market while competing against OpenAI, Google and other increasingly powerful AI developers.

The company must also demonstrate that explosive revenue growth can ultimately translate into sustainable profits after the enormous cost of building and operating advanced AI systems.

That is likely to become one of the central questions surrounding Anthropic’s expected IPO.

Investors will not simply be deciding how much Anthropic is worth today.

They will effectively be deciding how much of the global economy they believe artificial intelligence can eventually capture — and how much of that opportunity will belong to Anthropic.

JBizNews Desk | San Francisco

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Apple is bringing the artificial-intelligence race directly onto personal computers with a new generation of Mac mini and Mac Studio desktops designed to run increasingly powerful AI models without constantly sending information to remote data centers.

The company unveiled its first 2-nanometer processor, the M6, alongside the M5 Ultra—Apple’s most powerful chip to date.

The new Mac mini will be available with either the M6 or M5 Pro processor, while the Mac Studio will offer the M5 Max or substantially more powerful M5 Ultra.

Prices are also rising.

The M6 Mac mini begins at $899, $100 more than its most recent starting price and $300 above the $599 price at which the M4 version originally launched. The M5 Pro model starts at $1,699.

The Mac Studio begins at $2,499 with the M5 Max and $5,499 with the M5 Ultra.

Preorders opened Tuesday, with the computers scheduled to reach customers and Apple stores on September 22.

The most important development is not simply that Apple has produced faster computers. It is that the company is redesigning the Mac around a future in which substantial AI work takes place directly on a user’s desk.

Today, many advanced AI applications depend on enormous cloud-based data centers filled with costly Nvidia processors. Every request is transmitted over the internet, processed remotely and returned to the user.

Apple’s approach is to move more of that work onto the device itself.

That can reduce dependence on cloud-computing services, improve response times and allow companies to keep proprietary documents, customer information, computer code and sensitive business data inside their own systems.

The M6 Mac mini is aimed at bringing that capability to a wider group of users.

Apple says the new model can deliver as much as four times the AI performance, twice the graphics performance, twice the storage speed and 40% faster central-processing performance compared with the M4 configuration used for its tests.

The M6 contains a 12-core central processor, a 12-core graphics processor and two 16-core Neural Engines dedicated to machine-learning workloads. It also supports as much as 32 gigabytes of unified memory.

For professionals requiring substantially more computing power, the M5 Pro Mac mini can be configured with as many as 18 CPU cores, 20 graphics cores and 64 gigabytes of unified memory.

The Mac Studio moves into an entirely different category.

Its M5 Ultra processor combines four pieces of silicon into what Apple describes as a single operating chip. It can be configured with a 36-core CPU, an 80-core graphics processor and as much as 512 gigabytes of unified memory.

That amount of memory is extraordinary for a compact desktop computer.

It allows developers and researchers to load extremely large AI models directly into the Mac rather than dividing the workload across remote servers or specialized data-center equipment. Apple says the system can run models containing hundreds of billions of parameters entirely on the device.

The M5 Ultra provides memory bandwidth of as much as 1.2 terabytes per second, allowing enormous volumes of data to move rapidly between the processor and memory.

Apple says the new Mac Studio delivers up to 4.3 times faster AI performance, twice the storage speed and as much as 1.8 times faster graphics performance than the previous generation, depending on the configuration and workload.

The machine can also play as many as 33 streams of 8K professional video simultaneously, illustrating how Apple is positioning it not only for AI developers but also for film studios, visual-effects companies, engineers and scientific researchers.

New Thunderbolt 5 connections will allow multiple Mac Studio systems to be linked together, producing as much as three times the AI-inference performance of a single machine. Wi-Fi 7 and Bluetooth 6 are also included for the first time.

That creates an intriguing alternative for smaller AI companies.

Instead of paying continuously to rent cloud-based processing power, a business could purchase several Mac Studio computers, connect them and build a private local AI system. The upfront cost would be significant, but the company could retain physical control over its data and equipment.

Apple’s higher prices also demonstrate how the AI boom is reshaping the broader technology market.

Data-center operators are purchasing enormous quantities of advanced memory and storage chips, creating tighter supplies and raising component costs for consumer-electronics manufacturers. Apple already increased prices on several Mac configurations earlier this year, and the newest models continue that upward movement.

The new computers therefore represent both sides of the AI economy.

Consumers and businesses are receiving dramatically more local computing power, but they are also beginning to pay the cost of a global race for processors, memory, storage and energy.

Apple is betting that users will accept those higher prices if a Mac can increasingly function as a private AI workstation rather than simply a traditional personal computer.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SEATTLE — Amazon has quietly changed the way millions of customers receive order-confirmation emails, replacing specific product names and images with broad labels such as “Household item,” “Essentials item” or “Beauty item” — a privacy-focused move that cybersecurity specialists warn could have an unintended consequence: making fake Amazon emails harder to identify.

Until recently, Amazon confirmation emails typically told customers exactly what they had purchased, often including the product name and image. That gave shoppers an immediate way to recognize whether an email matched an order they had actually placed.

The newer format removes much of that information from the email itself. Customers instead have to open Amazon’s app or independently visit its website to see precisely what was ordered.

Amazon has said the change is intended to simplify its communications and reduce the amount of customer information being shared outside Amazon-controlled channels.

That provides a legitimate privacy benefit. Purchase histories can reveal surprisingly sensitive information about a person’s health, finances, household, interests and daily habits, and keeping those details out of email reduces the amount of information sitting inside third-party inboxes.

But the change creates a tradeoff.

Fake order confirmations are already one of the tactics commonly used by scammers impersonating Amazon. Criminals send messages claiming that an unfamiliar purchase has been made, then pressure recipients to click a link, call a phone number or provide account information.

When legitimate Amazon messages themselves become intentionally vague, consumers lose one of the easiest clues they previously had for distinguishing a real confirmation from a generic fraudulent one.

There is currently no evidence that scammers are already exploiting Amazon’s new email design on a significant scale, making it important not to overstate the threat.

The vulnerability is instead about what the new format could make possible.

Amazon itself has warned consumers about fake order confirmations, shipping notifications and refund offers. The company says shoppers who receive a suspicious message should avoid relying on links inside the email and instead check their account directly through Amazon’s “Your Orders” page or the Amazon Shopping app.

That becomes particularly important under the new system.

If an email unexpectedly says an Amazon “Household item” or “Electronics item” has been ordered, consumers should not click the message simply to discover what the product is. They can independently open Amazon and check their order history.

If the purchase does not appear there, the email should be treated as potentially fraudulent.

For shoppers, Amazon’s change illustrates a growing tension in online commerce: protecting customer data can improve privacy while simultaneously removing information consumers once relied upon to recognize scams.

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street finished higher Tuesday, but the more important business story was what happened underneath the indexes. Bond yields and oil finally moved lower, giving investors some relief, while new housing and consumer data showed that high borrowing costs are increasingly affecting real purchasing decisions. Dick’s Sporting Goods lost nearly a third of its value after problems at Foot Locker, copper moved close to an all-time high despite an apparent global surplus, and Intuit’s results offered a fresh look inside the finances of millions of small businesses.

I screened Tuesday’s developments against JBizNews’ current news feed to avoid repeating stories already carried during the day. 

Markets — Tech Rebounds as Oil and Bond Yields Finally Retreat

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 53,577.17, up 160.01 points, or 0.30%. The S&P 500 gained 24.20 points, or 0.32%, to 7,677.20, while the Nasdaq Composite rose 171.64 points, or 0.66%, to 26,151.30

The rally was not especially large, but what drove it mattered.

The 10-year Treasury yield fell to 4.64% from 4.70% Monday, easing some of the pressure that has been hitting mortgages, business loans and highly valued technology stocks. Nvidia rose 1.8% ahead of Wednesday’s earnings report. 

Oil provided another major source of relief. Brent crude fell $3.59, or 3.9%, to $88.58 a barrel, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate dropped $2.65, or 3.1%, to $82.36. Both settled at their lowest levels in roughly two weeks. 

For businesses, the combination matters more than Tuesday’s index gains. Lower oil reduces pressure on transportation, manufacturing and inflation, while falling Treasury yields can eventually lower financing costs across housing, commercial real estate and corporate borrowing.

The biggest individual loser was Dick’s Sporting Goods, down 30.1%. That was not simply an earnings miss — it exposed a much bigger problem with one of the retail sector’s most important acquisitions. 

Housing & Consumers — Lower Home Prices Still Aren’t Bringing Buyers Back

The housing market delivered one of Tuesday’s clearest warnings about what high interest rates are doing to the real economy.

Sales of newly built single-family homes fell 10.5% in July to an annualized 607,000, the lowest level since January.

Even more striking, the median new-home price fell to $393,800 — its lowest level in four years.

Normally, lower prices should bring buyers back.

They are not.

Mortgage rates remain close to 7%, and the combination of expensive financing, insurance, property taxes and uncertainty over employment is keeping potential buyers on the sidelines. 

Consumer confidence reinforced the message. The Conference Board’s index slipped to 89.4 in August from 90.2 in July, its lowest level in seven months.

That matters far beyond homebuilders.

Every home sale generates additional spending on furniture, appliances, renovations, contractors, moving companies, landscaping and local services. When housing transactions freeze, an entire ecosystem of small businesses loses activity.

The important takeaway is that housing is no longer simply suffering from high prices. Prices are now falling in parts of the new-home market, and affordability is still not improving enough to unlock demand.

Retail — Dick’s $2.4 Billion Foot Locker Deal Runs Into Trouble

Dick’s Sporting Goods bought Foot Locker for $2.4 billion last year, betting that combining the two companies would give it greater control over the global sneaker and athletic-wear market.

Tuesday showed how quickly an acquisition can become a liability.

Dick’s cut its full-year earnings forecast to $11 to $12 a share and now expects Foot Locker comparable sales to range from flat to down 2%.

Management blamed bloated footwear inventories, aggressive discounting and weaker-than-expected sneaker launches.

The stock plunged 30.1%, potentially its worst trading day on record. 

This matters to more than Dick’s shareholders.

Foot Locker sits between major manufacturers such as Nike and Adidas and millions of consumers. If inventory is piling up, retailers typically respond with promotions. That pressures margins at stores, weakens pricing power for brands and can ultimately affect orders going back to manufacturers.

It is also a reminder for business owners that buying revenue is not the same as buying profitable growth.

Dick’s acquired thousands of stores and a major international brand. It also acquired Foot Locker’s inventory problems, weak product launches and turnaround costs.

Small Business — Intuit’s Numbers Show Where Businesses Are Still Spending

After Tuesday’s closing bell, Intuit reported fiscal-year revenue of $21.4 billion, up 14%, giving investors an unusually broad look at what is happening among small businesses and individual taxpayers.

Its Global Business Solutions division — which includes QuickBooks — generated $12.9 billion, up 16%. QuickBooks Online Accounting revenue jumped 23% for the year, while Intuit said higher prices, customer growth and customers moving toward more expensive products helped drive the business.

TurboTax revenue rose 7% to $5.3 billion, while Credit Karma increased 20% to $2.6 billion

But Intuit’s outlook shows growth moderating.

The company expects fiscal 2027 revenue of approximately $23.3 billion to $23.5 billion, representing growth of 9% to 10%. Its Mailchimp business is expected to range from a 1% decline to no growth at all. 

That split is particularly interesting.

Small businesses continue paying for accounting, payroll, payments and financial-management tools that are essential to operating. Marketing software is having a harder time.

In other words, businesses may still spend aggressively on technology that runs the company or saves labor, while becoming more selective about technology whose return is less immediate.

That distinction could become increasingly important as AI companies compete for small-business budgets.

Commodities — Copper Nears a Record Even Though the World May Have Too Much of It

Copper climbed as high as $14,343 a metric ton in London Tuesday, approaching its record of $14,527.50.

Normally that would suggest the world is running out of copper.

The reality is considerably stranger.

Analysts at CRU expect the global copper market could actually produce a 639,000-ton surplus in 2026. Yet available inventories on the London Metal Exchange have fallen toward 90,000 tons while inventories held in the United States have surged to records. 

Why?

The threat of U.S. tariffs is pulling enormous amounts of copper into America before the rules potentially change.

The United States imported roughly 885,000 tons of refined copper during the first half of 2026 — more than twice the volume imported during the same period in 2024.

That is creating an unusual situation where the world can have enough copper overall while specific regions suddenly feel tight.

For contractors, electrical-equipment manufacturers, utilities, data-center developers and construction companies, this is extremely important.

Copper is inside wiring, transformers, motors, air-conditioning equipment, EVs and practically every major electrical project. The AI data-center boom is already dramatically increasing expected electricity demand.

Now trade policy is adding another variable.

A commodity does not need to be physically scarce globally for businesses to experience a shortage locally. Tariffs and inventory movements can create scarcity all by themselves.

Healthcare — McKesson Pays $2.25 Billion to Move Deeper Into Drug Development

McKesson announced Tuesday that it will acquire Precision Medicine Group for approximately $2.25 billion, expanding beyond its traditional role as one of America’s largest drug distributors.

Precision Medicine provides clinical-research, laboratory and commercialization services to pharmaceutical and biotechnology companies.

McKesson plans to place the business inside its oncology and multispecialty division, where quarterly revenue recently jumped 33% to $14.2 billion

The strategy is important.

Major drug distributors historically made money moving medicines from manufacturers to pharmacies and hospitals — a massive business, but one with relatively thin margins.

McKesson is increasingly moving upstream, where it can participate in clinical trials, specialty medicines, oncology treatment and the process of bringing drugs to market.

That gives the company access to higher-margin revenue before a drug ever reaches the pharmacy counter.

For pharmaceutical companies, hospitals and independent medical practices, it also means another part of the healthcare supply chain is consolidating around a small number of enormously powerful companies.

Technology & Regulation — Meta Faces a Potential $200 Billion Test

Instagram chief Adam Mosseri was expected to take the witness stand Tuesday in what legal experts described as the largest court test yet of whether social-media companies designed their platforms in ways that harm or addict children.

Twenty-nine states are suing Meta, alleging that Facebook and Instagram were deliberately designed to maximize engagement among young users while failing to adequately protect them.

The states have indicated that Meta could potentially face nearly $200 billion in civil penalties.

Meta denies that it designed its platforms to addict children and disputes claims that research establishes a clear causal connection between social-media use and declining well-being.

The federal judge will decide liability, potential penalties and whether changes must be made to Facebook and Instagram. The trial is expected to continue through much of September. 

The business implications could be enormous even if the ultimate financial penalty is much smaller.

A ruling against Meta could force changes to recommendation algorithms, notifications, age verification and other features designed to keep users engaged.

Those same engagement systems are what make social-media advertising so valuable.

That means a case framed around children’s safety could eventually affect advertisers, influencers, retailers, app developers and practically every business that depends on social platforms for customer acquisition.

What to Watch Wednesday — PCE, GDP and Nvidia All Hit on the Same Day

Wednesday, August 26, could be considerably more important for markets than Tuesday.

At 8:30 a.m. ET, the Commerce Department’s Bureau of Economic Analysis releases two major reports simultaneously: the second estimate of second-quarter GDP and corporate profits, and July Personal Income and Outlays, which contains the Federal Reserve’s preferred PCE inflation measures. 

That gives investors three critical answers at once: how quickly the economy actually grew, what happened to corporate profits and whether inflation is moving in the direction the Federal Reserve wants.

Then comes Nvidia.

The company says its fiscal second-quarter results will be released at approximately 4:20 p.m. ET Wednesday, followed by its earnings call at 5 p.m. ET

Nvidia is no longer just another technology earnings report.

Hundreds of billions of dollars are being committed to AI data centers, chips, power generation, transmission equipment and financing based on the assumption that demand for accelerated computing will continue rising extraordinarily quickly.

Wednesday gives investors another chance to see whether the company at the center of that spending boom is still growing fast enough to justify what is being built around it.

That makes the setup for Wednesday unusually clear:

Tuesday gave markets relief from oil and interest rates. Wednesday will tell investors whether inflation is actually cooling — and whether the AI boom is still delivering enough growth to support the extraordinary amount of money chasing it.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — Mortgage rates remain stubbornly high even after the U.S. Treasury announced a major expansion of its long-term bond-buyback program, underscoring how difficult it may be for Washington to push down borrowing costs while inflation and federal deficits continue pressuring the bond market.

The Treasury said it will at least double the size of its liquidity-support purchases of longer-dated government bonds, increasing the maximum from $2 billion to at least $4 billion per operation.

The expanded purchases begin September 9 and will run through November 4.

That distinction matters.

The program itself has not yet started, meaning it is too early to say the buyback effort has failed.

What has happened is that the announcement has so far failed to produce a lasting decline in borrowing costs.

Long-term Treasury yields initially fell after the announcement, giving mortgage markets some relief. But much of that move quickly faded as investors returned their attention to inflation, government borrowing and the massive supply of Treasury debt.

Mortgage rates closely follow the bond market, particularly yields on longer-term government securities and mortgage-backed securities.

That means Treasury can improve liquidity by buying older bonds, but it cannot simply order mortgage rates lower.

HousingWire reported this week that 30-year conforming mortgage rates had reached 6.92%, while jumbo rates climbed to 7.14%.

Other national rate surveys showed somewhat lower averages, illustrating how mortgage-rate estimates vary depending on the lenders, borrowers and methodology being tracked.

Mortgage News Daily, for example, showed its 30-year jumbo index at about 6.88% Tuesday, while another national survey placed conventional 30-year borrowing closer to the upper-6% range.

The broader message is the same: financing a home remains expensive.

Treasury’s buyback program is designed primarily to improve liquidity in older, less-traded government securities and help stabilize parts of the long-term bond market.

It is not a direct mortgage-rate program.

And the size of the intervention remains relatively small compared with the tens of trillions of dollars in outstanding Treasury debt.

That is why economists and bond investors remain focused on the larger forces driving rates — inflation expectations, federal deficits, Treasury issuance and investor demand.

For homebuyers, the practical takeaway is that meaningful mortgage relief may require more than Treasury buybacks alone.

If long-term Treasury yields stay elevated, mortgage rates are likely to remain elevated as well.

The September 9 launch will therefore become the real test.

If larger Treasury purchases succeed in improving demand and keeping long-term yields down, mortgage borrowers could eventually benefit.

If inflation and fiscal concerns continue overwhelming the effect of those purchases, homeowners and buyers may be waiting longer for meaningful relief.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A new report by the Government Accountability Office (GAO) warns Americans’ retirement plans may be sharing or selling personal information that can be used to market financial products and services.

Over 126 million Americans are enrolled in employer-sponsored retirement plans, such as a 401(k) or similar account, with total assets in those plans exceeding $9 trillion, according to the GAO.

Those plans are typically administered by external providers of financial services and the report explained that employers share some personally identifiable information with asset managers, payroll providers and record keepers who manage the investment and processing of contributions.

Personal data that employers may share with those service providers can include information like a birth date, Social Security number, account numbers and balances, as well as other data.

The GAO noted that while service providers can use that data to market financial products and services, they may, in some cases, sell that data to third parties, which can increase the risk of inadvertent exposure.

MOST AMERICANS STILL TRUST FINANCIAL ADVISORS OVER AI TOOLS FOR MAJOR MONEY DECISIONS, STUDY FINDS

GAO’s analysis included a review of privacy disclosures from 31 service providers, of which 29 either explicitly allowed data sharing or didn’t specify whether participant data could be shared for marketing purposes.

Additionally, over half of the financial service providers – 17 of the 31 – didn’t limit their ability to sell participant data to data brokers or other third parties.

It also found that just 12 of the 31 service providers have privacy disclosures allowing plan participants to opt out of data sharing.

AMERICANS’ 401(K) BALANCES HIT RECORD LEVELS IN 2025

The GAO’s report included a recommendation that the Labor Department provide additional guidance about data privacy for participants in retirement plans for sponsors and service providers.

In particular, GAO said that the labor secretary “should clarify what participant information should be considered private and the circumstances in which service providers should obtain written permission before using or sharing this information.”

“Such guidance could also identify best practices including for providing individual participants with choice, to the extent practicable, about how their personal information may be used, sold or shared,” GAO added.

FIDELITY ESTIMATES RETIREES WILL SPEND $185,500 ON HEALTHCARE AND MEDICAL EXPENSES IN RETIREMENT

The Labor Department provided a response to the GAO’s analysis that said it “fully supports the goal of appropriately protecting the personal information of participants and beneficiaries of plans” though it neither agreed nor disagreed with the report’s recommendations.

The agency noted the GAO report’s discussion of a 2021 guidance on cybersecurity that discussed data privacy as a component of service providers’ fiduciary responsibilities to plan participants, which states that contracts should spell out the provider’s obligation to protect private information.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The Labor Department’s response added that while it believes the 2021 guidance makes it clear to fiduciaries that they’re obligated to include data privacy considerations in their contracts, as resources permit, the agency will “carefully consider whether supplemental guidance aligned with the recommendation could or should be issued.”

This post was originally published here

The Federal Reserve may need to raise interest rates again—and potentially as soon as its coming meetings—unless new economic data provide convincing evidence that inflation is finally moving lower.

Boston Federal Reserve President Susan Collins delivered that warning Tuesday, saying she supported the central bank’s decision to hold rates steady in July but would not support leaving them unchanged indefinitely if inflation remains elevated.

“Maintaining the current federal funds rate target range will require continued evidence that inflation is indeed coming down,” Collins said. “Should evidence of sustained inflation progress not materialize, I believe it will be appropriate to tighten policy soon.”

That is a far stronger message than simply saying the Fed intends to wait for more information.

Collins is effectively placing the burden of proof on the inflation data: Rates can remain where they are only if prices show sustained improvement. If that improvement does not appear, another increase becomes the appropriate next step.

The federal-funds rate has remained between 3.5% and 3.75% since December. That rate influences borrowing costs throughout the economy, including credit cards, auto loans, business financing and certain home-equity products.

Although Collins does not vote on monetary policy this year, her comments provide another indication that support for higher rates is growing inside the Fed.

Three officials voted to raise rates by a quarter percentage point at the central bank’s July meeting, while several other policymakers have since indicated that they also believed an increase was warranted or may become necessary.

The division reflects the Fed’s increasingly difficult position.

Economic activity continues to expand at what Collins described as a near-normal pace, while the labor market remains broadly consistent with full employment. Under ordinary circumstances, that would be viewed as a favorable economic balance.

But inflation has remained above the Fed’s 2% target for more than five years, and several new pressures threaten to prevent it from returning there.

Economists expect the Fed’s preferred underlying inflation measure—the core Personal Consumption Expenditures Price Index—to show prices rising approximately 3.3% from a year earlier in July. That would leave inflation substantially above the central bank’s goal and essentially unchanged from the previous month.

The July inflation figures are scheduled to be released Wednesday and could immediately influence expectations for the Fed’s September 15-16 policy meeting.

Collins said inflation reports for June and July had been “mildly encouraging,” but warned that one or two favorable monthly readings are not enough to establish a dependable trend.

Tariffs, elevated energy prices and the continued disruption surrounding the Strait of Hormuz remain significant risks. The massive construction of artificial-intelligence data centers and related infrastructure may also be placing upward pressure on demand and the prices of core goods.

Higher oil and gasoline prices are already reducing the discretionary income available to American households.

Collins said business owners and residents across New England describe high prices as a pervasive concern. Some lower-income workers are taking multiple jobs simply to keep up with household expenses.

That real-world pressure is one reason the Fed cannot treat inflation as an abstract statistical problem.

The longer prices remain elevated, the greater the danger that businesses and consumers begin assuming high inflation will continue. Companies may raise prices more aggressively, while employees demand larger wage increases to protect their purchasing power.

Once those expectations become embedded, inflation becomes considerably more difficult—and more economically painful—to control.

Collins still believes inflation can gradually decline without another rate increase. Previous tariff costs may have largely passed through the economy, energy pressures could ease if shipping through the Strait of Hormuz improves, and continued productivity growth may allow companies to produce more without raising prices as quickly.

Long-term Treasury yields have also increased, raising mortgage and corporate borrowing costs even without additional action from the Fed. Those higher market rates may slow spending and investment enough to reduce inflationary pressure.

But Collins made clear that this relatively favorable outcome is not guaranteed.

If inflation stalls or begins accelerating again, the Fed may have to tighten policy even as consumers face rising financial stress and the labor market shows signs of weakening.

That would mean higher borrowing costs for households and businesses at precisely the moment many expected the next major move to be a rate cut.

The focus now shifts to Wednesday’s inflation report and Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh’s closely watched address at the central bank’s Jackson Hole symposium. Together, they could determine whether the Fed continues waiting—or begins preparing markets for another increase.

JBizNews Desk | Boston

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

American consumers are increasingly uneasy about where the economy is headed—even though many believe their present circumstances have temporarily improved.

The Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence Index fell to 89.4 in August from a downwardly revised 90.2 in July, marking the lowest reading since January and the second consecutive monthly decline.

Economists had expected confidence to remain unchanged.

The headline decline was relatively small. The divide beneath it was far more significant.

The Present Situation Index, which measures how consumers view current business and labor-market conditions, climbed 6.8 points to 121.2 after falling for three consecutive months.

But the Expectations Index—which measures what Americans anticipate for employment, income and business conditions during the next six months—dropped 5.8 points to 68.2.

A reading below 80 has historically been associated with an increased risk of recession.

In other words, Americans are saying that conditions today may be manageable, but they are losing confidence that those conditions will last.

Consumers became more pessimistic about every major component of the six-month outlook.

Only 14.6% expected more jobs to become available, down from 16.4% in July. Meanwhile, 26.1% expected fewer jobs, up from 25.3%.

Expectations for household income also weakened, although more consumers still anticipated their income would rise rather than fall.

The disconnect was especially visible in the labor market.

Twenty-seven percent of respondents said jobs are currently plentiful, up from 24.4% in July. The share saying jobs are difficult to find fell to 19.5% from 21.7%.

That suggests many workers do not yet believe the labor market has collapsed. Their concern is about what comes next.

Those fears follow a surprisingly weak July employment report in which the United States lost 23,000 jobs. Government revisions also erased another 103,000 jobs that had previously been reported for May and June.

Although the unemployment rate declined to 4.1%, the improvement came largely because people left the workforce rather than because companies created more jobs.

Inflation is adding another layer of pressure.

Consumers now expect prices to increase 5.8% over the next 12 months, up from 5.6% in July. Those expectations are considerably higher than the inflation rates measured by the government, but they reflect what households are experiencing and fearing when they pay for gasoline, groceries, housing and other necessities.

Survey responses showed that complaints about prices remained widespread, while references to oil, gasoline, food costs, war, trade and employment increased.

The continued U.S.-Iran conflict has kept gasoline prices above $4 per gallon across much of the country, forcing households to spend more on transportation and leaving less money available for restaurants, retail purchases, travel and other discretionary expenses.

That is why consumer confidence matters far beyond public opinion.

Household spending represents roughly two-thirds of the U.S. economy. Consumers do not need to stop spending completely to create problems for businesses. If enough families postpone buying a car, replacing an appliance, taking a vacation or dining out, the slowdown moves rapidly through retail, manufacturing, hospitality and employment.

The August report does not show that Americans have stopped spending. It shows something more subtle: Consumers remain functional today but are becoming increasingly defensive about tomorrow.

That widening gap between present conditions and future expectations is now the most important warning inside the report.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Dick’s Sporting Goods suffered the worst stock-market collapse in its history Tuesday as investors confronted a troubling reality: The company’s core sporting-goods stores are still performing well, but the Foot Locker business it recently acquired is already weighing heavily on sales, profits and the retailer’s future.

Shares plunged as much as 25%, wiping billions of dollars from the company’s market value and pushing the stock to its lowest level in more than a year.

The collapse followed a second-quarter earnings report that missed Wall Street’s expectations and forced Dick’s to sharply lower its full-year profit forecast.

Dick’s reported $5.59 billion in quarterly sales, below the approximately $5.64 billion analysts expected. Adjusted earnings reached $3.53 per share, compared with Wall Street’s estimate of roughly $3.76.

Net income fell more than 17% to approximately $315 million.

But the most important number was Foot Locker’s 3.6% decline in comparable sales.

Dick’s own stores performed considerably better, delivering comparable-sales growth of 4.9%. That means the company’s original business remains relatively healthy. The weakness is coming primarily from Foot Locker, which Dick’s acquired in 2025 to expand its international reach and strengthen its position in the global sneaker market.

The timing has become increasingly difficult.

Foot Locker entered the combined company with a heavy concentration of older sneaker styles just as consumers began demanding newer products and competitors increased discounts. Several new footwear launches also failed to generate the sales retailers expected.

That left Foot Locker carrying too much inventory in a market where shoppers can easily compare prices and wait for promotions.

Dick’s is now being forced to discount merchandise to remain competitive and protect its market share. Those promotions may help move sneakers off shelves, but they also reduce the amount of profit the company earns on each sale.

The consequences are already showing up in the company’s outlook.

Dick’s now expects adjusted earnings of $11 to $12 per share for the year, dramatically below its previous forecast of $13.50 to $14.50.

Annual sales are projected to reach between $21.9 billion and $22.2 billion, down from the earlier range of $22.1 billion to $22.4 billion.

The company also abandoned its expectation that Foot Locker’s comparable sales would grow between 1.5% and 3%. It now expects them to range from unchanged to a decline of as much as 2%.

That reversal is what alarmed investors.

This is not simply a weak quarter caused by temporary weather, shipping delays or a late holiday. Dick’s is warning that Foot Locker’s merchandise problems and the industry’s aggressive discounting could continue through the remainder of the year, including the critical holiday shopping season.

The pressure also extends beyond Dick’s.

Nike shares fell approximately 3% following the report as investors questioned whether weak product launches and excess sneaker inventory reflect a broader problem across the athletic-footwear industry.

For Dick’s, the central question is whether it can repair Foot Locker quickly enough to justify the acquisition without damaging the stronger business it already owned.

The company did not buy Foot Locker merely to add more stores. It bought access to new customers, international markets and deeper relationships with the world’s largest sneaker manufacturers.

Those advantages may still prove valuable over time. But for now, Wall Street sees Foot Locker less as a growth engine and more as an expensive turnaround—and Tuesday’s historic selloff represents the price investors are demanding for that risk.

JBizNews Desk | Pittsburgh

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

NEW YORK — Updated 10:03 a.m. ET, Tuesday, Aug. 25, 2026. U.S. stocks opened higher Tuesday, with technology and semiconductor shares leading a rebound from Monday’s selloff as investors positioned for Nvidia’s earnings and a major inflation report Wednesday.

At the opening bell, the Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 177.8 points, or 0.33%, to 53,594.92. The S&P 500 gained 23.8 points, or 0.31%, to 7,676.66, while the Nasdaq Composite jumped 168.5 points, or 0.65%, to 26,148.71

The latest index reading available shortly after the open, at 9:41 a.m. ET, showed the Dow up 75.49 points to 53,492.65, the S&P 500 up 29.05 points to 7,681.91, and the Nasdaq up 194.45 points to 26,174.64

Chips Lead the Rebound

Technology was doing most of the heavy lifting. Nvidia rose 1.4%, Meta gained 0.9%, Intel climbed 3.1%, Micron advanced 3.9%, Western Digital gained 3.7%, and AMD jumped 3.4% after Raymond James upgraded the stock. Advancing stocks were outnumbering decliners on both the NYSE and Nasdaq. 

Nvidia remains the biggest single catalyst hanging over the market. The company reports Wednesday afternoon, and options traders are pricing in a roughly 5.4% move in either direction — equivalent to about $280 billion of market value. Investors will be looking beyond the headline earnings numbers for evidence that spending on AI infrastructure, chips and data centers remains strong enough to justify the sector’s valuations. 

The other major mover was decidedly negative. Dick’s Sporting Goods plunged 22.6% after cutting its full-year forecasts as weaker athletic-footwear demand and problems at its Foot Locker business weighed on results. Nike fell about 3.2% alongside it. Dick’s reported adjusted earnings of $3.53 a share on $5.59 billion in sales and lowered its annual sales outlook to $21.9 billion to $22.2 billion

Morning Economic Reports Send a Mixed Housing Signal

The morning’s economic data showed home prices continuing to rise nationally, but at a relatively restrained pace.

The Federal Housing Finance Agency said U.S. home prices increased 2.1% from a year earlier in the second quarter and 0.3% from the first quarter. The agency’s June index was unchanged from May. Prices rose year over year in 46 states and Washington, D.C. 

Separately, the S&P Cotality Case-Shiller National Home Price Index rose 1.5% from a year earlier in June, accelerating modestly from May’s 1.2% increase. That still leaves home-price appreciation running well below broader inflation, limiting real gains for homeowners. 

A more cautionary signal came from the Philadelphia Fed’s service-sector survey. Its index measuring firms’ own business activity fell sharply to -8.2 in August from +17.5 in July, meaning more firms reported declining activity than improving activity. 

The 10:00 a.m. ET economic batch — Conference Board consumer confidence, July new-home sales and the Richmond Fed business surveys — had not yet populated with verified actual readings on their primary-source pages as of this 10:03 a.m. update. JBizNews is therefore not substituting forecasts for actual results. The Census Bureau confirms July new-home sales were scheduled for release at 10:00 a.m., while the Richmond Fed says its August surveys are released between 10:00 and 10:10 a.m. 

Bonds and Oil Give Stocks Some Breathing Room

Treasury yields were easing early Tuesday, with the benchmark 10-year yield around 4.67%, removing some of the rate pressure that hit growth stocks Monday. U.S. crude was also sharply lower, trading around $82 a barrel, reducing immediate inflation concerns even as geopolitical tensions surrounding Iran remain elevated. 

Boeing also entered the session with a major new defense headline after receiving an indefinite-delivery contract with a ceiling of roughly $131.2 billion covering F-15 production, upgrades, integration and sustainment work. The contract could stretch work on the program into the next decade. 

What to Watch for the Rest of Tuesday

The first immediate test will be the delayed reaction to the 10 a.m. consumer-confidence, new-home-sales and Richmond Fed numbers as those reports become fully available. At 1 p.m. ET, the Treasury’s two-year note auction will provide another reading on investor demand for government debt and could move yields.

But Tuesday’s trading is likely to remain heavily influenced by what comes next. Wednesday brings Nvidia earnings along with the PCE inflation report and other major economic data, creating the potential for a significantly larger market move than Tuesday’s opening bounce. Fed Chair Kevin Warsh’s Jackson Hole speech Friday then becomes the week’s major monetary-policy event, with investors looking for clues on whether the Fed is prepared to raise rates again. Markets are currently pricing roughly one additional 25-basis-point increase by year-end. 

For now, the message from the opening tape is clear: Wall Street is buying back into technology, but investors are doing so immediately ahead of two potentially market-moving tests — Nvidia earnings and inflation.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Target has apologized for a circus clown Halloween costume that critics accused of evoking Blackface and 19th-century minstrel shows following online backlash.

The costume was sold as the “Kids’ Glows Under ‌Blacklight Circus Clown Halloween Costume,” according to the since-deleted listing. The costume was sold as part of the retailer’s seasonal Hyde and EEK Boutique brand.

Target removed the “offensive” costume and said that it should never have been featured in its stores.

TARGET RECALLS 200,000 CHILDREN’S SANDALS OVER POTENTIAL CHOKING HAZARD: CPSC

“As a company, we know we got this wrong, and we are deeply sorry. The costume is offensive and should never have been part of our assortment. It is no longer available for sale,” company spokesperson Brian Harper-Tibaldo said in a statement to FOX Business.

“We know this is especially hurtful for our Black guests, team members and partners. Removing the costume is an important first step, and the company is looking closely at how this happened and what needs to change to ensure this won’t happen again,” he continued.

The move to pull the costume comes after social media backlash in which critics accused the Minneapolis-based retailer of selling racist merchandise.

“You really don’t have anyone left in Minneapolis to say, ‘Hey, that’s racist’? Y’all cut DEI and now you’ve got a minstrel clown costume for kids on your website,” one user said on Threads.

This comes on the heels of several reputational hits for the retailer that have hurt sales in recent years, including Target’s handling of its Pride Collection in 2023 and its rollback of diversity, equity and inclusion initiatives after President Donald Trump returned to the White House.

POPULAR PRODUCT SOLD AT TARGET RECALLED DUE TO CONTAMINATION CONCERNS

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Target joined a broad corporate effort to scale back diversity initiatives after Trump issued a series of executive orders aimed at rooting out DEI.

The retailer scaled back initiatives aimed at increasing representation of Black employees and supporting Black-owned businesses and suppliers, saying it needed to stay in step with “the evolving external landscape.” The reversal drew backlash from some Black consumers and business owners who had supported or benefited from Target’s diversity efforts.

This post was originally published here

Hearing aids are moving deeper into artificial intelligence, and Phonak is betting that the biggest consumer benefit will not be louder sound. It will be making speech easier to understand when the room is noisy.

Phonak launched its new EON hearing-aid platform in the United States on Monday, introducing a new generation of devices built around real-time AI sound processing, automatic scene recognition and broader wireless connectivity.

The flagship model, Audéo EON Sphere, is designed to separate speech from surrounding noise in real time so conversations stand out more clearly in restaurants, family gatherings, public transportation and other environments where hearing-aid users often struggle most.

That problem has long been one of the industry’s hardest to solve.

Traditional hearing aids can amplify sound effectively, but amplification alone does not necessarily help when multiple voices, dishes, music and background noise are competing at the same time. Phonak’s approach is to use AI processing to identify speech and suppress distractions continuously rather than forcing the user to manually change programs.

The new platform is powered by Sonova’s HYPERSONIC chip and also includes AutoSense OS AI 8.0, which automatically adjusts the hearing aid as the wearer moves between different environments.

The EON lineup includes Audéo EON Sphere, Audéo EON R and CROS EON R, the latter designed for people with hearing loss primarily on one side.

Connectivity is also becoming a larger part of the product.

The devices support standard Bluetooth as well as Auracast, a newer broadcast-audio technology that can allow hearing aids to receive audio directly in places such as theaters, airports, conference rooms, gyms and other public spaces as Auracast adoption expands.

For consumers, that pushes hearing aids closer to the functionality people already expect from wireless earbuds while preserving the medical-grade processing designed for hearing loss.

Phonak says the new models are also smaller and lighter than previous generations, addressing another persistent complaint among users who wear the devices for most of the day.

The launch comes as hearing technology becomes increasingly competitive. Prescription hearing-aid manufacturers are adding AI processing, while consumer-electronics companies are introducing hearing-related features into earbuds and other devices.

That competition is changing expectations.

Consumers increasingly want hearing aids that do more than amplify sound. They expect automatic adjustment, phone connectivity, streaming, rechargeable batteries and better performance in noisy environments without constantly manipulating settings.

The United States is the first major launch market for EON, with additional European markets and Australia expected to follow in September.

The broader shift is easy to see.

For decades, hearing aids were essentially specialized amplifiers.

The next generation is becoming something closer to an AI-powered audio computer worn behind the ear.

JBizNews Desk | Stäfa, Switzerland

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.
:::

Chung-Ang University partnership with the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce connects businesses across South Korea, the United States and Israel

A university alumni association may not immediately sound like a force in international commerce.

But Chung-Ang University’s alumni network includes South Korean President Lee Jae Myung, Korea Development Bank Chairman and CEO Park Sang-jin, Hyundai Hospital President Boo-Seop Kim and corporate leaders across banking, pharmaceuticals, semiconductors, healthcare, manufacturing and technology.

Now that network is establishing a new channel into the American business community through an agreement with the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce.

The partnership could give businesses access to something that is often difficult and expensive to obtain: trusted introductions to executives, investors, government relationships and potential commercial partners in South Korea, the United States and Israel.

The memorandum of understanding was signed Aug. 7 during the Korea-U.S. Economic and Trade Cooperation MOU Signing Ceremony at the DoubleTree by Hilton Fort Lee–George Washington Bridge in New Jersey.

The agreement creates a framework for trade, investment, entrepreneurship, innovation, professional exchange and assistance for companies seeking to enter new markets.

For a Korean manufacturer, that could mean help identifying an American distributor, investor, lender or professional adviser. For an American business, it could provide a path to Korean customers, suppliers, executives or strategic partners that would otherwise be difficult to reach.

The Orthodox Jewish Chamber’s relationships in Israel add another market to the partnership, creating potential connections in technology, healthcare, finance, infrastructure, manufacturing and innovation.

Chung-Ang University is one of South Korea’s prominent private universities, with programs spanning business, law, medicine, pharmacy, engineering, technology and the arts. Its alumni association has cited a global network of approximately 280,000 graduates.

The university previously reported that 40 Chung-Ang alumni were serving as CEOs among Korea’s 1,000 largest publicly listed companies by sales.

Its prominent alumni include Lee, who graduated from Chung-Ang’s College of Law, and Park, the first Korea Development Bank chairman to rise from within the government-owned lender’s own ranks.

The business community also includes semiconductor entrepreneur and GEO Element Chairman Shin Hyun-kook and the late Auh June-sun, who led Ahngook Pharmaceutical and previously served as president of the Korea Pharmaceutical Manufacturers Association.

Chung-Ang’s global cultural reach includes Emmy Award-winning “Squid Game” actor Lee Jung-jae, actor Hyun Bin and actress Park Shin-hye.

That combination of government, corporate and cultural influence is what makes the agreement potentially valuable beyond the signing ceremony itself.

“Commerce is one of the most powerful ways to build lasting bridges between countries, CEOs and community leadership,” said Duvi Honig, founder and CEO of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce. “This partnership gives our members a platform to reach business leaders and opportunities that they would not ordinarily be able to access on their own.”

Honig said the Chamber’s role is to connect networks and then help turn those relationships into practical opportunities.

“The value we bring to our members is broader reach and trusted access,” Honig said. “We bring countries, companies, CEOs and leadership together and use commerce as the bridge. That is what ‘Uniting the World Via Commerce’ means in practice—giving businesses an opportunity to reach markets and decision-makers that may otherwise remain beyond their reach.”

“This agreement turns our shared relationships into a working platform for business,” said James Sungjin Kim, Korea Affairs Chair of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce. “By connecting Chung-Ang University’s influential alumni network with the Chamber’s members and international relationships, we can help companies identify partners, enter new markets and develop opportunities across South Korea, the United States and Israel.”

The agreement could be especially useful to small and midsized companies.

Large corporations can hire consultants, investment bankers and international development teams to enter foreign markets. Smaller businesses often have strong products and services but lack the relationships needed to identify a reliable distributor, approach a major customer or navigate an unfamiliar country.

A chamber-backed network can reduce that disadvantage by offering a credible starting point and access to organizations already operating in those markets.

An American healthcare company, for example, could use the relationship to seek introductions to Korean hospital or pharmaceutical leaders. A Korean technology company could look for an American distributor or Israeli innovation partner. A Chamber member providing legal, accounting, banking, insurance, logistics or commercial real-estate services could assist Korean companies establishing U.S. operations.

The agreement was signed during a U.S. visit by senior Chung-Ang alumni leaders.

Boo-Seop Kim, president of the Chung-Ang University Alumni Association and president of Hyundai Hospital, and Wonchul Choi, president of the North America Chung-Ang University Alumni Association, represented the Korean alumni organizations.

Honig participated live by Zoom. James Sungjin Kim, Korea affairs chair of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, attended in person and signed on the Chamber’s behalf.

Chung-Ang’s alumni leadership signed two additional agreements during the program, one with the Greater New York Chamber of Commerce and another with the Korean American Chamber of Commerce of the Northeast.

Mark Jaffe, president and CEO of the Greater New York Chamber, participated remotely. On-site participants included James Sungjin Kim and Amit Shah, co-chairs of international affairs for the Greater New York Chamber, and Kwang Suk Kim, chairman of the Korean American Chamber of Commerce of the Northeast.

The program also included a discussion of Empire State Development and potential future cooperation between Korean businesses and New York State.

The agreements do not guarantee that investments, contracts or jobs will follow. Their value will depend on whether the participating organizations identify companies ready to expand, organize targeted delegations and convert introductions into business.

The foundation, however, is now in place.

For an individual business owner, the most important result may be finding one international partner, reaching one decision-maker or entering one market that was previously inaccessible.

That is the tangible value behind the new network: trusted relationships and broader reach that many businesses could not build alone.

Disclosure: Duvi Honig is the publisher of JBizNews and the founder and CEO of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, one of the organizations participating in the agreement.

JBizNews Desk | Fort Lee, New Jersey

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street ended Monday split, with banks keeping the Dow positive while a sharp semiconductor selloff dragged the Nasdaq lower. But some of the day’s more consequential business developments happened away from the major indexes: a $13.7 billion AI-computing contract came with a major financing question, Tesla quietly ended one of Elon Musk’s best-known solar products, Shein returned to public markets at a fraction of its former valuation, and an EPA decision wiped out a large chunk of the value of ethanol credits.

Markets — Tech Slides While the Dow Holds On

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 53,418.68, up 141.67 points, or 0.27%. The S&P 500 fell 21.37 points, or 0.28%, to 7,653.00, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 200.80 points, or 0.77%, to 25,979.66.

Technology was the clear weak spot. The Philadelphia Semiconductor Index fell about 2.6%, with Micron down 5.6%, Nvidia down 2.3% and Broadcom down 2.1% as investors reduced exposure ahead of Nvidia’s earnings Wednesday. Financial stocks moved higher, with JPMorgan Chase and Visa helping keep the Dow in positive territory. The 30-year Treasury yield remained above 5%, keeping pressure on expensive growth stocks and borrowing-sensitive businesses. 

One of Monday’s biggest individual losers was Applied Optoelectronics, which sank roughly 12% after disclosing a new program that could sell as much as $600 million of stock into the market. The optical-networking company has benefited heavily from demand for AI data-center equipment, but the reaction shows investors are increasingly paying attention not just to AI growth, but to how companies are financing that growth. 

AI Infrastructure — A $13.7 Billion Contract With a Catch

RUM Group announced one of the largest AI infrastructure contracts of the day: a six-year agreement worth approximately $13.7 billion to provide GPU computing services to an unnamed U.S. cloud customer from a data-center site under development in Maysville, Georgia.

The size of the contract is extraordinary. But so is what RUM may have to spend to fulfill it.

The customer is receiving warrants allowing it to purchase as many as 50.8 million RUM shares for one cent each, with the shares vesting as portions of the agreement are completed. The facility itself is still being developed, meaning RUM will need significant capital to build the computing capacity required to deliver the service. Shares initially jumped about 10% on the announcement. 

That is becoming one of the defining questions of the AI boom. Winning billions of dollars of future business sounds spectacular, but GPUs, electricity, buildings, cooling systems and grid connections have to be paid for before that revenue arrives. Investors are beginning to distinguish between companies benefiting from AI demand and companies that may have to issue enormous amounts of debt or stock to serve it.

Retail — Shein’s $100 Billion Dream Becomes a $27 Billion IPO

Shein launched its Hong Kong IPO Monday at a valuation of as much as $27 billion, a remarkable fall for a company that private investors valued at $98.2 billion in 2022.

The fast-fashion company is seeking to raise as much as $1.77 billion by selling 280 million shares.

The roughly 70% collapse in valuation tells a larger story about global e-commerce. Shein built its model around shipping extremely inexpensive packages directly to consumers. That became far less attractive after the U.S. eliminated duty-free treatment for many low-value packages and governments began imposing additional tariffs, fees and regulatory requirements. Competition from Temu and Amazon has also intensified. 

For retailers, this is important because one of the competitive advantages that allowed Chinese direct-to-consumer platforms to dramatically undercut American stores is weakening. For consumers, it can ultimately mean higher prices on extremely low-cost imported merchandise.

Shein is still a huge company. But public investors are effectively saying it is worth less than one-third of what private investors believed four years ago.

Temu — Sales Keep Growing, but the Cheap-Shopping Model Is Getting More Expensive

The same pressure showed up Monday at PDD Holdings, owner of Temu.

Second-quarter revenue rose 8% to 112.36 billion yuan, or about $15.7 billion, but missed Wall Street expectations. Net income fell 12% to 27.2 billion yuan.

At home, PDD is fighting Alibaba, JD.com and ByteDance in an aggressive Chinese price war. Overseas, Temu faces tariffs, the loss of duty-free treatment for low-value U.S. packages and a new European Union fee on small imported parcels. PDD executives warned that the changes are increasing costs and slowing fulfillment. 

The takeaway is bigger than one quarterly earnings report.

Temu’s explosive rise was based partly on making the distance between a Chinese factory and an American consumer almost irrelevant. Governments are now putting costs back into that distance. If that continues, the economics of ultra-cheap cross-border shopping begin moving closer to those faced by traditional retailers that import inventory, warehouse it domestically and pay tariffs before making a sale.

Clean Energy — Tesla Gives Up on the Solar Roof

Tesla has stopped selling its premium Solar Roof, nearly a decade after Musk unveiled the product as a way to turn the roof itself into a power-generating system rather than mounting conventional solar panels on top of it.

The Solar Roof page now redirects customers to Tesla’s traditional solar-panel business.

Tesla once targeted 1,000 Solar Roof installations per week, but industry estimates indicated actual installations remained far below that goal. The company is now focusing on conventional solar panels manufactured in Buffalo, New York. 

This does not mean Tesla is abandoning solar. In fact, the company filed plans this month for a $10.1 billion solar-cell factory outside Houston that it says could create 9,712 permanent jobs.

What changed is the product strategy. Tesla appears to be moving away from an attractive but complicated customized roofing product and toward something easier to manufacture and install at scale.

For contractors and business owners, there is a familiar lesson: a product can be innovative and still fail if installation, labor and customization make it too difficult to scale profitably.

Energy & Agriculture — EPA Decision Knocks Down Ethanol Credits

A single regulatory announcement caused a dramatic move in an obscure market that ultimately affects refiners, farmers and fuel producers.

The price of conventional ethanol blending credits, known as D6 RINs, fell to $1.75 Monday, down 34 cents in one day and well below the $2.50 level reached in July.

The EPA extended a September 1 compliance deadline and said it plans to decide 34 pending requests from small refineries seeking exemptions from federal biofuel requirements. Market participants estimate those exemptions could free up between 1.2 billion and 1.8 billion RIN credits

For refiners, cheaper RINs can substantially reduce the cost of complying with federal blending rules.

For ethanol producers — and indirectly corn growers — the effect can run the other way. If refiners receive more exemptions or can satisfy mandates with cheaper credits, the economic incentive to blend additional renewable fuel can weaken.

It is a good example of how a regulatory decision in Washington can move hundreds of millions of dollars through the energy and agricultural economy without most consumers ever seeing the mechanism behind it.

Media — California Raises the Stakes on Paramount’s $110 Billion Warner Bros. Deal

California Attorney General Rob Bonta canceled settlement talks Monday over Paramount Skydance’s proposed $110 billion acquisition of Warner Bros. Discovery, accusing Paramount of acting in bad faith by leaking details of earlier discussions. Paramount denied being responsible for the leaks.

California and 11 other states sued in July seeking to block the acquisition, arguing that the combination could reduce competition and give the enlarged company greater power to raise prices in film and television.

A trial is scheduled for March, and California has indicated that any settlement could require structural changes — potentially including the sale of assets — rather than simply promises about future behavior. 

That matters financially because time itself is becoming expensive for Paramount. The longer the acquisition remains unresolved, the greater the financing, legal and contractual costs of keeping a $110 billion transaction alive.

For consumers, the eventual structure could determine which company controls a massive collection of studios, cable networks and streaming assets.

Robotics — $900 Million Says Investors Think AI Is Leaving the Screen

Chinese automaker XPeng’s robotics division raised more than $900 million Monday at a valuation exceeding $6.3 billion, the largest single private financing yet in China’s embodied-AI sector.

Tencent and Alibaba participated alongside investment firms including IDG Capital. XPeng says the money will fund hardware, software, AI models and mass-production facilities.

The company is targeting production of 1,000 IRON humanoid robots per month by the end of 2026, initially using them in retail stores and industrial campuses before broader commercial sales in 2027. 

For businesses, this is the next stage of the AI investment cycle worth watching.

The first wave was software that could write, analyze and generate information. Increasing amounts of capital are now moving toward “physical AI” — machines intended eventually to work in warehouses, factories, stores and other environments where human labor is currently required.

What to Watch Tuesday

Tuesday, August 25, brings a useful test of both the American consumer and the housing market.

The U.S. Census Bureau will release July new-home sales at 10 a.m. ET. Housing has become particularly sensitive to elevated long-term interest rates, so the report will offer a fresh look at whether buyers are continuing to absorb expensive mortgage financing. 

The Conference Board is also scheduled to release its August Consumer Confidence Index, while regional manufacturing data will provide another read on business activity. These reports matter because markets are trying to determine whether the economy can continue growing while inflation, energy costs and interest rates remain elevated. 

On the corporate side, Dick’s Sporting Goods reports before the opening bell, providing another indication of discretionary consumer spending. Intuit, Zoom, HEICO and Box are among the companies scheduled after the close. Intuit will be particularly useful for small-business watchers because its QuickBooks and tax businesses give it exposure to millions of businesses and consumers. 

And technology investors will be trading Tuesday with one eye on Wednesday: Nvidia reports earnings August 26. After Monday’s semiconductor selloff, the results are becoming more than another earnings report. They will help determine whether investors still believe the extraordinary amount of money being poured into AI infrastructure can continue producing growth fast enough to justify current valuations. 

Monday’s biggest message was not that AI is slowing or that consumers have stopped spending. It was that the cost of growth is becoming harder to ignore. AI companies need enormous amounts of capital. Cheap global e-commerce is running into tariffs. An innovative Tesla product could not reach scale. And government decisions are moving billions of dollars through energy and media markets.

That is where Tuesday begins.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Exxon Mobil is accelerating automation across its Permian Basin operations, with plans to have robots running about half of its drilling rigs by 2028 as the oil giant looks to increase production while reducing the number of workers exposed to some of the most dangerous jobs on a rig floor.

The company currently has two automated rigs operating among more than 30 in the Permian, according to Reuters. Those rigs use robotic systems to move heavy pipe, make connections and handle other repetitive tasks that traditionally required crews working directly around large machinery.

The technology is already showing productivity gains.

Exxon says its first automated rig drilled a roughly two-mile horizontal section in just over six days, demonstrating how robotics can speed up a process that is both physically demanding and operationally expensive.

The company’s broader goal is substantial.

Exxon is targeting nearly 40% growth in Permian production to 2.5 million barrels of oil equivalent per day by 2030, and automation is becoming one of the tools it is using to get there.

The Permian Basin, which stretches across West Texas and southeastern New Mexico, is already the most important oil-producing region in the United States. Any technology that allows operators to drill faster, more safely and with fewer interruptions can have an outsized impact on U.S. energy output.

That is what makes this more than a story about robots replacing manual tasks.

On a conventional rig, workers may need to handle sections of steel pipe weighing around 2,000 pounds while operating near rotating equipment, high-pressure systems and elevated platforms. Those jobs carry obvious safety risks.

Robotic systems can move that pipe without putting workers directly in harm’s way.

For Exxon, that means fewer injuries, lower downtime and more consistent operations.

For the workforce, the shift is more complicated.

Automation does not necessarily eliminate the need for rig crews, but it changes the skills that are valuable. Fewer workers may be needed for some manual tasks, while demand grows for technicians, engineers, software specialists and operators who can monitor and maintain automated systems.

That transition is already playing out across manufacturing, warehouses and logistics.

Now it is moving deeper into the oil field.

The economics are also important.

Drilling rigs are extraordinarily expensive to operate, and every hour saved during a well’s construction can reduce costs. If automated rigs can consistently drill faster while also lowering safety-related disruptions, the savings can compound across hundreds of wells.

That can help producers remain profitable even when oil prices fall.

The move also reflects a broader strategy across the energy industry: use automation and artificial intelligence not simply to reduce headcount, but to extract more production from existing assets with fewer delays and less risk.

Exxon has been investing heavily in the Permian since its acquisition of Pioneer Natural Resources, and the company is under pressure to prove that it can generate more output and better returns from that enlarged footprint.

Robotic drilling is becoming part of that answer.

The first stage is limited.

Two automated rigs out of more than 30 is still a small share of the fleet.

But if Exxon reaches its goal of automating half of those rigs by 2028, one of America’s most labor-intensive industries will have crossed an important threshold.

The oil field will still be powered by drilling equipment, steel and crews.

But increasingly, some of the hardest physical work may be done by machines.

JBizNews Desk | Houston

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

California Attorney General Rob Bonta canceled a planned settlement meeting Monday with Paramount Skydance over its proposed $110 billion acquisition of Warner Bros. Discovery, sharply escalating one of the biggest antitrust battles in the media industry.

The meeting had been expected to explore whether Paramount could resolve California’s lawsuit through concessions rather than proceed to a federal trial.

Instead, Bonta pulled out after accusing Paramount of leaking and misrepresenting confidential settlement discussions.

Paramount denied responsibility for the alleged leaks and said it remains willing to negotiate in good faith.

The breakdown matters because California is leading a coalition of 12 state attorneys general challenging the merger, which would combine two of Hollywood’s five major film distributors and two of the five largest owners of basic cable networks.

The states argue that the deal could reduce competition, raise prices, weaken bargaining power for workers and theaters, and give the combined company too much control over film and television distribution.

Paramount argues the opposite.

The company says the merger would create a stronger competitor to Netflix, Disney and other global entertainment companies and has pledged to increase theatrical output to roughly 30 films a year, with a 45-day exclusive theatrical window for releases.

California officials have been skeptical that operating promises alone are enough.

Bonta has signaled that any acceptable settlement may require structural remedies — meaning the sale or separation of actual businesses rather than promises about future behavior.

Among the remedies reportedly under consideration are the sale of certain cable channels and keeping Paramount’s movie studio operationally separate from Warner Bros.

That is where the business stakes become enormous.

Selling cable assets could reduce the value Paramount expects to capture from the transaction. Keeping the two studios separate could also limit cost savings and strategic integration that helped justify the $110 billion price in the first place.

The legal clock is already expensive.

Paramount has said delays beyond the merger agreement’s September 30 deadline trigger $7 million in daily ticking fees. The company has estimated those costs could reach roughly $1.3 billion by April if the transaction remains stalled.

Paramount has even asked a federal judge to require the states challenging the merger to post a $1.88 billion bond, arguing that the lawsuit could cause billions of dollars in delay-related costs.

The states oppose that request and say Paramount voluntarily accepted the financial risks built into its merger agreement.

The deal is already blocked from closing until at least June 1, 2027, or until the court rules, under an agreement California secured last month.

A federal antitrust trial is currently scheduled for March 2027.

That means Monday’s canceled meeting was more important than a routine negotiating session.

A settlement could have provided a path toward resolving the states’ challenge months before trial.

Instead, the relationship between Paramount and California has become more hostile just as both sides need to decide how far they are willing to compromise.

The merger has already received regulatory approval in dozens of countries, including China, making the U.S. state lawsuit one of the biggest remaining obstacles.

For Paramount, every month of delay adds financing costs, contractual penalties and uncertainty over what assets it may ultimately be allowed to keep.

For California, the case has become a test of whether state governments can force structural changes in a media deal of historic size even after much of the rest of the world has cleared it.

And for Hollywood, the outcome could determine whether two of the industry’s most recognizable companies are ultimately allowed to become one.

Monday did not kill the possibility of a settlement.

But canceling the meeting removed what had been the clearest near-term path toward one — and pushed the $110 billion merger one step closer to a full courtroom fight.

JBizNews Desk | Los Angeles

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Trump administration is moving to make a $103,265 fee for certain new H-1B visa petitions permanent, potentially turning what was once a several-thousand-dollar immigration expense into a six-figure hiring decision for employers seeking highly skilled foreign workers.

The Department of Homeland Security published the proposal Monday, targeting certain new H-1B petitions subject to the annual cap. The fee would not apply to renewals or to some applicants already in the United States, including certain students changing status. 

The H-1B program allows U.S. employers to hire foreign workers in specialty occupations including technology, engineering, science, finance and medicine. Congress currently allows 85,000 new cap-subject H-1B visas each year, including 20,000 reserved for applicants with advanced U.S. degrees.

The proposed fee is extraordinary because it would radically change the economics of using the program.

Employers historically paid several thousand dollars in government and legal fees for many H-1B petitions. Under the new proposal, some companies would have to decide whether a particular foreign hire is valuable enough to justify an additional cost exceeding $100,000 before salary, benefits and relocation expenses are even considered

That could have very different effects depending on the employer.

A large technology company hiring an engineer with unusually valuable artificial-intelligence expertise may decide the fee is manageable.

A smaller software company, laboratory, hospital, university-affiliated employer or startup competing for the same talent may not.

That difference is why the proposal could reshape more than immigration policy.

It could influence which companies are able to compete for specialized workers in the first place.

Supporters of the higher fee argue that the H-1B program has been used by some employers to bring in lower-cost foreign labor instead of hiring Americans and that making sponsorship more expensive would encourage companies to reserve the program for genuinely hard-to-fill, high-value positions.

Critics argue that the policy could instead make it harder for American companies to recruit scientists, engineers and other specialized workers who help build businesses and create jobs in the United States.

The proposal also arrives with significant legal history.

The administration previously imposed a temporary version of the six-figure charge, but a federal judge blocked it in June, finding that the government had exceeded its legal authority.

DHS is now attempting to establish the fee through the formal regulatory process before the temporary policy expires, potentially giving the administration a stronger legal foundation for defending it in court. 

That distinction matters.

Monday’s action does not mean every new H-1B petition suddenly costs $103,265.

This is a proposed rule. It must move through the regulatory process before becoming final, and additional lawsuits are likely if the administration adopts it.

But employers now have to prepare for the possibility that the economics of skilled-worker sponsorship could change dramatically.

For companies that rely heavily on H-1B workers, even a modest number of hires could become expensive very quickly.

Ten qualifying employees could mean more than $1 million in additional government fees.

Fifty could exceed $5 million.

For a company sponsoring 100 qualifying workers, the added cost could top $10.3 million before paying any of those employees.

That is what makes this more than an immigration story.

It is a labor-cost story, a competitiveness story and potentially a major change in how American companies decide where to locate highly skilled work.

If finalized, the administration would effectively be telling employers that access to the H-1B program remains available — but only at a price high enough to force companies to decide which foreign hires they truly cannot operate without.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A YouTube video no longer needs to hold someone’s attention for even a few seconds before the platform calls it a view.

Beginning Monday, Aug. 24, YouTube is standardizing its public view count across Shorts, long-form videos, podcasts and livestreams so that a view is recorded from the first frame a video begins playing.

That means a Short appearing in someone’s feed, a long-form video autoplaying on the home page or a livestream beginning to play can all register a public view immediately.

The old measurement is not disappearing. YouTube is renaming it “engaged views.” That metric will show how many people actually continued watching beyond the initial start or deliberately clicked to watch.

The distinction is important because public view counts are likely to rise faster under the new system.

A creator who previously saw 100,000 views may now accumulate a larger headline number simply because more starts are being counted. That does not necessarily mean 100,000 people meaningfully watched the content.

YouTube says the change is designed to eliminate confusion created by different counting methods across its various formats. Shorts had already moved toward first-frame counting, while longer videos were measured differently.

For creators, advertisers and sponsors, that makes the headline “views” number less useful on its own.

The more meaningful question becomes how many of those views turned into engaged views, watch time and actual audience retention.

YouTube is keeping those deeper metrics inside Analytics, and monetization is not being loosened alongside the public count. Creator earnings will continue to depend on engaged Shorts views and engaged watch hours, while eligibility for the YouTube Partner Program will continue to rely on qualified views and watch hours.

In other words, creators may wake up to faster-growing view counts without automatically earning more money.

That matters well beyond YouTube influencers.

Businesses increasingly use YouTube numbers to judge advertising campaigns, sponsorships, podcasts, product launches and the reach of branded content. A company comparing this month’s campaign with one from earlier in the year will need to understand that the underlying definition of a “view” has changed.

The same applies to media outlets and creators selling sponsorships based on audience size. A video with 500,000 public views under the new system may not represent the same level of attention as 500,000 views under the old one.

YouTube says a thumbnail merely appearing on a page still does not count. The video itself has to begin playing.

The change therefore measures exposure more broadly, while engaged views remain the better signal of whether anyone stayed.

For anyone using YouTube numbers to measure success, the headline view count just became easier to earn.

The harder number — and probably the more valuable one — is now the number of people who actually kept watching.

JBizNews Desk | San Bruno, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Do business with Iran and you lose the dollar.

That was the ultimatum Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent delivered Monday afternoon, and it was aimed at everyone — not at Tehran. Countries that keep trading with Iran will be pushed out of the dollar-based financial system, he said, giving them a short window to cut those ties. “If people do not want to meet our expectations than we expect, and they should expect that they will leave the dollar system,” Bessent said at the news conference.

The United States cannot arrest a bank in Shanghai or seize a tanker under a Turkish flag. It can cut them off from dollars, and since most of world trade is settled in dollars, that amounts to the same thing.

Bessent announced a wave of new sanctions targeting international companies that help move Iranian shipping, oil, cryptocurrency, gold and aviation business, and said President Donald Trump is personally calling world leaders with specific requests to stop trading with Tehran. He declined to name which countries would be hit, though China, Turkey and the United Arab Emirates are Iran’s biggest trading partners. “Let there be no ambiguity as to the position of the United States,” he said. “An economic engagement of any kind with this murderous regime will expose those responsible to the full reach of American power.” Operating in what he called the gray spaces is no longer acceptable.

China is the test. It has bought as much as 90% of Iran’s oil exports, making it Tehran’s largest trading partner, and analysts say any serious campaign has to reach Chinese banks to work. The administration has been reluctant to go there, wary of damaging relations with President Xi Jinping ahead of an expected state visit next month. Washington has sanctioned a large independent Chinese refinery, four Hong Kong firms and six shipping lines, while leaving Chinese financial institutions untouched. Beijing has told blacklisted refiners to ignore the penalties.

The pressure is landing in Iran. The rial opened Monday at a record 2.02 million to the dollar. Rice is up roughly 60% since the war began and beef has more than doubled, with the International Monetary Fund projecting the economy will shrink more than 5%.

Americans are paying too. Gasoline is running close to a dollar a gallon higher than a year ago as the Strait of Hormuz stays largely closed. For U.S. importers, banks and shipping firms, the practical effect is a fresh round of compliance work: verifying that no counterparty, vessel or correspondent bank anywhere in the chain touches Iranian cargo.

Notably, Treasury threatened the penalties Monday without actually imposing major new ones. The clock Bessent started is the real news — a short grace period, then a choice between Iranian business and the dollar.

JBizNews Desk | Washington, D.C.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

President Donald Trump’s social-media company is charging financial firms as much as $100,000 a month for faster, machine-readable access to his Truth Social posts—a potentially valuable advantage when a presidential message can move stocks, currencies or commodities within seconds.

Trump Media & Technology Group’s interim chief executive, Kevin McGurn, defended the service Monday, saying it provides only slightly faster access to information that is already publicly available and operates like the premium data feeds routinely sold by stock exchanges, news organizations and other technology platforms.

More than 10 customers have already signed up, according to the company. They reportedly include high-frequency trading firms willing to pay between $60,000 and $100,000 a month for the service, known as Truth API.

The company is also holding discussions with news organizations, major technology companies and artificial-intelligence developers.

The controversy centers on the difference between seeing a social-media post and receiving it in a format that a computer can immediately process.

Ordinary Truth Social users can still view Trump’s posts publicly. Paying customers, however, receive a direct stream of data designed to reach automated systems faster than standard app notifications or manually refreshing the website.

For most people, a difference measured in fractions of a second would be meaningless.

For an algorithmic trading firm, it can be worth millions.

A computer receiving a Trump post about tariffs, interest rates, sanctions, military action or a specific company can instantly scan the language, determine which assets may be affected and place trades before an ordinary investor has finished reading the first sentence.

Truth API provides continuous access to posts from 10 influential Truth Social accounts, including Trump’s, along with historical material dating to 2022. Trump Media says the product also offers companies a legal alternative to scraping information from its platform without permission.

McGurn characterized the service as a commercial data-licensing business rather than the private sale of government information. His argument is that the underlying posts are public and the company is charging customers for speed, organization and reliable technical delivery—not for exclusive access to the president’s decisions.

That distinction is now being tested in federal court.

The Intercept and the Freedom of the Press Foundation filed a lawsuit in Manhattan seeking to block the arrangement. The plaintiffs argue that official presidential communications concerning government policy should be distributed equally rather than through a system that gives wealthy financial firms a technological advantage.

The lawsuit also challenges restrictions governing how paying customers can redistribute information obtained through the feed. Critics say those conditions could allow sophisticated subscribers to act on presidential statements before news organizations and the broader public can circulate them as widely.

Trump Media rejects those claims and says paid, tiered access to public information is common throughout the financial-data industry.

Stock exchanges, for example, sell premium market feeds that deliver prices and trading information directly to financial institutions. News organizations license real-time reporting to trading platforms and data terminals. Technology companies charge developers for high-volume access to their platforms through application programming interfaces.

The difference is that Truth API includes communications from a sitting president whose words can immediately affect national policy and global markets—and whose family retains a major financial interest in the company selling the feed.

That creates an unusual collision between public office, private business and the speed of modern financial trading.

Trump’s social-media posts have repeatedly demonstrated their ability to move markets. A surprise message about tariffs can alter expectations for retailers and manufacturers. A statement about military action can send oil or gold prices higher. Comments about the Federal Reserve can move Treasury yields and the dollar.

In April 2025, a Trump post encouraging investors to buy stocks arrived shortly before he announced a pause in some tariffs, contributing to a powerful market rally. Episodes like that illustrate why financial firms would pay heavily to receive his messages as quickly as technically possible.

Even a one-second advantage can matter when automated systems are competing to buy or sell the same securities.

For Trump Media, the service also offers something the company urgently needs: a potentially lucrative source of recurring revenue.

If 10 customers each paid the maximum rate of $100,000 a month, the product could generate as much as $12 million annually before expenses. That would be significant for a company whose core social-media and streaming operations have produced limited revenue compared with its market valuation and operating costs.

Trump Media reported approximately $1.7 million in second-quarter revenue while posting a net loss of about $238 million. Much of that loss reflected changes in the value of its cryptocurrency holdings, but its underlying expenses continued to greatly exceed the income generated by its operating businesses.

The company’s shares fell approximately 8% following the results, leaving Trump Media valued at roughly $2.5 billion. Trump retains an economic interest of about 41% through a trust controlled by his family.

Truth API therefore represents more than a technical service. It is an effort to turn the president’s enormous political influence and online following into a high-margin financial-data business.

The company says it may eventually broaden access to retail investors, though it has not explained whether an individual product would offer the same speed or data quality provided to institutional customers.

That could become important to Trump Media’s legal and public defense. A service available only to firms capable of paying up to $1.2 million a year will inevitably raise questions about whether wealthy traders are receiving an advantage unavailable to ordinary investors.

The legal case will likely turn on several complicated questions: whether Trump’s Truth Social posts constitute official government communications, whether the administration may choose a privately owned platform to distribute them and whether charging for faster technical access violates constitutional protections for the press or the public.

There is also a broader question the courts may not resolve.

Presidents have always influenced markets through speeches, press conferences and policy announcements. What is new is the ability of a company financially connected to a sitting president to package those statements into a premium data product built specifically for traders racing to act before everyone else.

Trump Media argues that it is simply selling speed.

Its critics argue that when the information comes directly from the president of the United States, speed itself becomes privileged access.

JBizNews Desk | Palm Beach, Florida

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Justice Department has formally launched a new national division dedicated to fraud, creating a roughly 500-person operation designed to consolidate major federal cases involving healthcare, taxes, trade, government programs and other large-scale financial schemes.

The National Fraud Enforcement Division officially takes effect Monday, giving the department a single structure for investigations that previously could be spread across multiple offices and jurisdictions.

The new division will handle major criminal fraud matters involving federal healthcare programs, tax schemes, customs and trade fraud, misuse of government funds and other cases where losses can reach into the millions or billions of dollars.

The change is largely about scale and coordination.

Fraud investigations often involve enormous amounts of financial data, multiple agencies and defendants operating across state lines. By placing more attorneys and staff under one national operation, DOJ is trying to identify patterns faster, share intelligence across cases and pursue organizations rather than treat each incident as an isolated prosecution.

The division is also expected to rely heavily on data analytics, including claims data, tax information, financial records and other government databases that can reveal suspicious patterns long before a whistleblower or victim comes forward.

That could be especially important in healthcare fraud.

Medicare and Medicaid fraud cases can involve false billing, unnecessary procedures, kickback arrangements or claims for services that were never provided. Individual transactions may look small, but repeated across thousands of patients they can generate enormous losses.

Tax and trade fraud are another major focus.

The division will be able to pursue schemes involving false tax filings, customs duties, tariff evasion and fraudulent claims tied to federal programs, while also seeking restitution, forfeiture and other financial penalties.

For consumers, the connection is indirect but significant.

Fraud against Medicare, Medicaid and other federal programs ultimately raises costs for taxpayers and can expose patients to unnecessary treatments or compromised personal information. Large tax and government-benefit schemes similarly drain money from programs funded by the public.

The creation of the division does not introduce a new crime or change the burden prosecutors must meet in court. It changes how the government organizes the people investigating and prosecuting those crimes.

DOJ says the operation will include approximately 500 attorneys and staff, making it one of the department’s largest concentrated anti-fraud efforts.

The practical test will be whether the new structure produces faster cases, larger recoveries and more coordinated prosecutions.

Fraud itself has become more sophisticated, increasingly moving through shell companies, digital payments, stolen identities and cross-border networks.

The Justice Department’s answer is to build an enforcement operation designed to operate at the same scale.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

ChatGPT’s advertising business just made its biggest international move yet.

Beginning Monday, Aug. 24, OpenAI is rolling out ads across 31 European markets, including Germany, France, Spain, Italy, Sweden, Norway, Denmark, the Netherlands and Austria.

The expansion comes six months after OpenAI began testing advertising in the United States and follows earlier launches in the United Kingdom, Mexico, Brazil, Japan and South Korea.

For users, the most important distinction is simple: ads will appear only on ChatGPT Free and Go plans. Plus, Pro and Enterprise remain ad-free.

The ads are also designed to remain separate from ChatGPT’s answers. OpenAI says advertising does not influence the responses ChatGPT gives, conversations remain private from advertisers and customer data is not sold.

That matters because advertising inside an AI assistant is fundamentally different from advertising beside a search engine.

People do not only type short keywords into ChatGPT. They explain what they are trying to do.

Someone may ask for help choosing accounting software, planning a vacation, furnishing a home, comparing business services or deciding which product best fits a particular budget. That gives advertisers access to consumers much closer to the moment when a decision is actually being made.

OpenAI is building the business around that distinction.

Advertisers will initially access European ChatGPT inventory through OpenAI’s Ads Solutions team, agency partners and technology partners. A self-service Ads Manager is expected later this quarter.

The company has also expanded the advertising system beyond simple impressions and clicks. OpenAI now offers conversion optimization, geographic targeting, custom audiences and measurement tools designed to show whether an ad eventually leads to a purchase or other business action.

For businesses, that creates a potentially significant new advertising channel.

Google built one of the world’s largest businesses by placing ads beside search intent. Meta monetized social attention. ChatGPT is trying to monetize something slightly different: the decision-making process itself.

The consumer tradeoff is equally clear.

Advertising helps OpenAI keep a powerful version of ChatGPT available free or at relatively low cost, but users on those plans will increasingly encounter commercial messages while asking for advice, comparisons and recommendations.

That makes transparency especially important.

OpenAI says sponsored content will always be labeled and visually separated from answers, and users can control ad personalization. People who do not want advertising can move to one of the paid ad-free plans.

The European rollout is also a test of whether that model can work under some of the world’s strictest privacy and consumer-protection rules.

For OpenAI, 31 new markets represent another major step toward turning ChatGPT from a subscription-and-software business into a global advertising platform.

For users, the change is more immediate.

Starting today across much of Europe, using ChatGPT for free increasingly comes with the same tradeoff familiar across the rest of the internet:

the service costs less because advertisers are paying to be there.

JBizNews Desk | San Francisco

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street opened Monday under pressure as investors sold semiconductor and other high-growth technology stocks ahead of Nvidia’s earnings, while a fresh U.S. sanctions offensive against Iran and stubbornly high Treasury yields added another layer of risk.

By 9:45 a.m. ET, the Nasdaq Composite was down 164.5 points, or 0.63%, at 26,015.94. The S&P 500 fell 20.8 points, or 0.27%, to 7,653.60, while the Dow Jones Industrial Average bucked the weakness and rose 112 points, or 0.21%, to 53,389.19.

The split tells the story.

This is not a broad market panic. It is a concentrated selloff in the part of the market that has carried much of Wall Street’s gains: AI, semiconductors and other expensive growth stocks.

Nvidia fell 2.44% early Monday. Marvell Technology and Micron Technology each dropped more than 6%, while Sandisk plunged 10.62%. The S&P 500 technology sector fell 1.11%, making it the weakest major sector in early trading.

At the same time, advancing stocks actually outnumbered decliners on the New York Stock Exchange by roughly 1.15 to 1.

That is important.

The Dow is rising because money is not simply leaving the market. Investors are rotating away from the most expensive technology names and into other sectors while they wait to see whether Nvidia can justify the expectations already built into AI valuations.

Nvidia reports Wednesday.

Analysts are looking for quarterly revenue of roughly $92 billion — nearly double the level from a year earlier. That would normally be an extraordinary number.

The problem for Nvidia is that extraordinary has become expected.

The stock has become the most important single barometer of the AI investment boom, and its earnings now influence everything from semiconductor manufacturers to data-center operators, utilities, networking companies and the broader Nasdaq.

A strong quarter may therefore not be enough. Investors will be looking for evidence that orders remain strong enough to support the hundreds of billions of dollars being committed to AI infrastructure worldwide.

That concern is already spreading beyond Nvidia.

Alibaba’s U.S.-listed shares fell about 1.2% after the Chinese technology giant announced a $10.2 billion share sale specifically to finance additional AI investment. The financing reinforces a question increasingly hanging over the sector: how much capital will companies need to spend before investors see sufficient returns?

The second pressure on Monday’s market is coming from Washington.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent is scheduled to detail what he has called an “economic D-Day” against Iran, with the administration threatening sanctions not only against Iranian entities but potentially against companies and countries that continue trading with Tehran.

That raises the stakes considerably.

China remains the largest buyer of Iranian oil, meaning aggressive secondary sanctions could affect energy flows, shipping, international trade and relations between Washington and Beijing.

Oil prices were actually falling roughly 2% Monday morning, as traders took profits after last week’s sharp increase. But that decline could reverse quickly depending on what Washington announces and how Iran responds.

The third problem is the bond market.

The 30-year Treasury yield remained above 5% Monday, despite Treasury’s decision last week to expand purchases of older long-dated bonds.

That matters because high Treasury yields directly compete with stocks for investor money.

When investors can earn more than 5% lending to the U.S. government for decades, companies trading at extremely high valuations must offer an even stronger earnings argument to justify the additional risk.

That pressure is particularly severe for technology stocks, whose valuations depend heavily on profits expected years into the future.

Monday’s opening therefore is not simply about one bad morning for Nvidia.

It is a test of whether the market can continue supporting enormous AI valuations while long-term interest rates remain above 5%, companies borrow and raise billions more to fund AI expansion, and geopolitical risk threatens to push energy prices higher again.

There is also important economic data coming Wednesday.

The government will release the Personal Consumption Expenditures inflation index, the Federal Reserve’s preferred inflation measure, on the same day Nvidia reports earnings.

Markets have now fully priced in at least one quarter-point Federal Reserve rate increase before the end of 2026, although expectations for an immediate September move have eased.

That makes Wednesday unusually important.

If inflation comes in hot while Nvidia disappoints, Wall Street could face pressure simultaneously from higher interest-rate expectations and weaker confidence in the AI trade.

If inflation cools and Nvidia delivers another exceptional quarter, Monday’s chip selloff could instead become another buying opportunity.

For now, the message from the opening bell is clear: investors are not abandoning stocks — they are demanding a much higher burden of proof from the companies that have become the most expensive and important part of the market.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Apple is preparing to raise iPhone prices as the same memory shortage that already pushed up the cost of Macs and iPads reaches the company’s most important consumer product.

The exact increase has not been announced, but Apple has been watching competitors Samsung and Google, both of which raised flagship-phone prices by about $100. A similar increase would push the expected iPhone 18 Pro from $1,099 to about $1,199, roughly a 9% jump.

The pressure is coming from inside the phone.

Memory chips have become dramatically more expensive as artificial-intelligence data centers consume enormous quantities of advanced memory and manufacturers struggle to expand supply quickly enough. Apple has already acknowledged that its component costs are rising sharply.

Chief Executive Tim Cook recently described the situation as a “100-year flood” in memory pricing, saying Apple had reluctantly raised prices across other product categories because the increases had become too large to absorb.

Mac and iPad prices rose earlier this summer, while the current iPhone lineup was largely spared.

That protection now appears unlikely to last.

Apple is expected to introduce its next premium iPhones in September, including the iPhone 18 Pro and Pro Max, along with its first foldable iPhone. The new devices are also expected to use more expensive processors and camera components, adding another layer of cost beyond memory.

For consumers, a $100 increase matters beyond the sticker price.

Many buyers finance phones through carriers over 24 or 36 months, which can make a price increase appear small on a monthly bill. But households purchasing several devices can still end up paying hundreds of dollars more during an upgrade cycle, particularly once storage upgrades, AppleCare and accessories are added.

Apple also has an incentive not to push prices too far.

The company already raised prices sharply elsewhere in its product lineup, and an aggressive iPhone increase risks slowing upgrades at a time when consumers are keeping smartphones longer. A roughly $100 increase would keep Apple broadly aligned with competing premium phones rather than creating a substantially new pricing tier.

There is one important distinction for buyers: Apple has not announced the final prices yet.

The current expectation is based on rising component costs and reporting about Apple’s preparations, not an official price list. The final numbers are likely to arrive with Apple’s September product launch.

But the larger trend is increasingly difficult to avoid.

Artificial intelligence is not only making data centers more expensive to build. By consuming enormous amounts of memory and semiconductor capacity, the AI boom is beginning to raise the cost of everyday electronics as well.

The next place consumers may see that bill is in their pocket.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The federal government keeps what amounts to its primary checking account at the Federal Reserve, using it to collect taxes, receive borrowed money and pay the nation’s bills. That account currently holds roughly $950 billion—and Treasury officials say some of that enormous cash reserve could potentially be used to expand purchases of long-term government bonds.

Two senior Treasury officials said Monday that the Treasury General Account, commonly known as the TGA, could help finance larger bond buybacks. They did not say how much money could be deployed or when a decision might be announced, leaving markets to calculate how aggressively Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent may be prepared to intervene.

That uncertainty is the heart of the story.

Last week, the Treasury surprised markets by announcing that it would at least double the maximum size of certain buybacks of older long-term bonds, increasing them from $2 billion to at least $4 billion per operation. The purchases will target securities with maturities ranging from 10 to 30 years beginning Sept. 9.

Bond buybacks allow the government to repurchase older Treasury securities that may be more difficult to trade. That can improve market liquidity, support bond prices and place downward pressure on yields—the interest rates the government must effectively offer investors to hold its debt.

The unanswered question was how Treasury would finance a significantly larger program.

Ordinarily, Treasury buybacks do not eliminate government borrowing. The department typically issues new securities and uses the proceeds to retire older ones, effectively changing the mix and maturity of the national debt rather than reducing it.

Many investors therefore assumed Treasury would finance expanded purchases by issuing additional short-term bills—borrowing at the short end of the market to buy back debt at the long end. That strategy has been compared with the Federal Reserve’s former “Operation Twist,” which was designed to influence long-term interest rates without dramatically expanding the central bank’s overall balance sheet.

Using existing Treasury cash would change the immediate calculation.

Treasury could initially fund purchases without issuing an equivalent amount of new debt at the same time, giving Bessent considerably more flexibility than the announced $4 billion-per-operation limit appeared to provide.

But the entire $950 billion is not unrestricted money waiting to be invested. The account also serves as the government’s operating reserve, covering Social Security, Medicare, military spending, federal salaries, debt payments and countless other daily obligations.

Treasury has also projected that its cash balance could rise above $1 trillion later this year because of unusually large expected outflows. Any money used for bond purchases may eventually have to be replenished through future tax receipts or borrowing.

Still, the size of the account gives the government substantial short-term firepower.

Treasury had previously operated with cash-balance targets closer to $550 billion to $600 billion. Its current projections assume a balance of approximately $950 billion at the end of September, followed by $850 billion at the end of December. Officials have said the balance could temporarily peak near $1.05 trillion in late October.

Markets reacted immediately to the possibility that some of that cash could support the bond market. Treasury yields moved lower Monday morning, with the 10-year yield retreating from around 4.70% to approximately 4.64%. The 30-year yield also pulled back after recently climbing above 5.30%.

The reaction reflected renewed confidence that Treasury may be prepared to purchase more than the market initially expected.

The previously announced $4 billion operations are small compared with a Treasury market exceeding $32 trillion. Treasury had earlier projected up to $38 billion in long-term liquidity-support buybacks during the quarter—a meaningful amount for individual parts of the market, but not enough by itself to transform the government’s borrowing outlook.

A cash reserve approaching $1 trillion creates the possibility of a much larger intervention, even if Treasury uses only a fraction of it.

For households and businesses, the consequences extend well beyond Wall Street.

The 10-year Treasury yield is a critical benchmark for mortgage rates, corporate borrowing and other forms of credit. When long-term government yields rise, lenders generally demand higher rates from homebuyers, companies and consumers. When those yields fall, borrowing conditions can gradually ease.

The average 30-year fixed mortgage rate has been running near 6.7%, placing additional pressure on a housing market already strained by high prices and limited affordability. Businesses are also facing more expensive credit lines, equipment financing and construction loans.

That makes Bessent’s effort relevant to anyone trying to purchase a home, refinance debt, expand a company or finance a major investment.

The strategy is not without controversy.

Critics argue that Treasury is moving beyond routine debt management and attempting to influence long-term interest rates—traditionally the territory of the Federal Reserve. Lowering long-term yields could also loosen financial conditions while Federal Reserve Chairman Kevin Warsh is working to control inflation.

Treasury officials reject the suggestion that the department has abandoned its commitment to regular and predictable debt management. They say the expanded buybacks are intended to improve liquidity in older, less frequently traded securities—not to establish a permanent government program for controlling interest rates.

The distinction will become increasingly difficult to maintain if the purchases grow substantially.

With the national debt now above $40 trillion and annual federal interest costs approaching historic levels, rising bond yields have become more than a market problem. They directly increase the cost of financing the government and can consume money that would otherwise support federal programs, national defense or tax relief.

The question is no longer whether Bessent is willing to intervene in the Treasury market. He already has.

The question now is how much of the government’s enormous cash reserve he is prepared to put behind that intervention—and whether temporary support for bond prices can provide lasting relief from the deeper fiscal pressures driving yields higher.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Environmental Protection Agency Administrator Lee Zeldin is warning states and communities against broadly blocking new data centers, arguing that stopping construction across the United States could allow China to take the lead in artificial intelligence.

Zeldin acknowledged that communities have legitimate concerns about electricity costs, water consumption, pollution and the strain large data centers can place on local infrastructure. But he said those problems should be addressed project by project instead of through sweeping bans.

“What we can’t do is just say, well, let’s not have any data centers built all across the entire country and let’s just let China win,” Zeldin said Sunday.

His remarks come as opposition to data centers grows across the country. Residents and elected officials have raised concerns that the enormous facilities could consume large amounts of electricity, increase utility bills, require new power plants and place additional pressure on water systems.

New York imposed a one-year moratorium on permitting new large-scale data centers while the state studies their energy and environmental effects. Hundreds of local jurisdictions nationwide have enacted or considered restrictions, moratoriums or tighter approval requirements.

Zeldin has criticized New York’s approach as an “easy way to cop out,” arguing that state and local governments should remain engaged with developers and negotiate protections for their communities.

The EPA administrator said the federal government would not establish one nationwide environmental standard for every data center because conditions differ widely among states and individual projects. Some facilities, for example, use closed-loop cooling systems that sharply reduce their need for a continuous local water supply.

The Trump administration views data centers as essential national infrastructure. They house the advanced chips and computer systems needed to train and operate artificial-intelligence models, support cloud computing and process the rapidly expanding volume of digital information used by businesses and government agencies.

China is simultaneously investing heavily in domestic computing capacity, power generation and artificial-intelligence infrastructure. U.S. officials fear that delays in constructing American data centers could limit access to computing power and weaken the country’s position in the global technology race.

The challenge is finding a balance that protects communities without stopping development entirely.

Data centers can bring billions of dollars in construction investment and new tax revenue, but they generally employ fewer permanent workers than traditional factories of comparable size. The facilities can also require as much electricity as a small city, creating concerns that residential customers could ultimately shoulder part of the cost of expanding the power grid.

Zeldin’s position is that those risks require negotiation, transparency and local safeguards—not a nationwide retreat from building the infrastructure that will power the next generation of American technology.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Hedge funds are increasing bets against the U.S. dollar as investors question whether the Trump administration’s coming fiscal plan will be strong enough to calm concerns over America’s growing debt and budget deficit.

Leveraged funds expanded their short-dollar positions during the week ended Aug. 18, according to the latest Commodity Futures Trading Commission data cited by Bloomberg. A short position allows traders to profit if the dollar falls.

The shift reflects growing pressure across U.S. financial markets.

The national debt has crossed $40 trillion, the federal deficit is on course to exceed $2 trillion this fiscal year and interest expenses have climbed to nearly $1.2 trillion. Those concerns recently pushed the yield on the 30-year Treasury bond to its highest level since 2007.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent attempted to stabilize the bond market by announcing that the government would at least double planned purchases of longer-dated Treasury securities. The buybacks will increase from approximately $2 billion to at least $4 billion per operation beginning in September, with Bessent saying they could grow further if necessary.

The announcement initially lowered Treasury yields, but much of that improvement quickly disappeared. The dollar also weakened as investors concluded that buying back bonds could improve market liquidity without solving the underlying deficit problem.

Bessent has promised a broader fiscal-consolidation plan, expected as early as this week, developed with President Donald Trump and White House budget director Russell Vought. The administration is expected to focus on spending reductions, stronger economic growth, fraud prevention and additional tariff revenue.

Markets will be watching for specific numbers.

Investors want to know how much spending the administration intends to cut, how quickly the deficit could decline and whether the government can reduce its reliance on increasingly expensive borrowing. A plan lacking firm targets could place additional pressure on both Treasury bonds and the dollar.

A weaker dollar carries mixed consequences. It can make American exports more competitive and increase the overseas earnings of U.S. multinational companies. But it also raises the cost of imported products, international travel and commodities priced in dollars, potentially adding to inflation.

For businesses and consumers, the more immediate concern is the bond market. Persistently high Treasury yields feed directly into mortgage rates, business loans, auto financing and the federal government’s own borrowing costs.

Hedge funds are not necessarily predicting a collapse in the dollar. Their positions show that some of the world’s most aggressive traders now believe the risks are tilted toward further weakness unless Washington delivers a credible plan for controlling its finances.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The United States is putting another $500 million into seven domestic critical-mineral and battery projects, backing everything from lithium extraction in Utah to what could become the country’s only cobalt refinery as Washington tries to reduce one of the most consequential vulnerabilities in American manufacturing.

The Department of Energy selected the projects from hundreds of applications under its battery-materials processing and manufacturing programs. Three companies — Lilac Solutions, Jervois and Nth Cycle — are receiving $100 million each, while additional grants will support battery recycling, electrolyte chemicals and next-generation anode materials.

The money is not simply about electric vehicles.

Lithium, cobalt and other battery materials increasingly sit at the intersection of automobiles, consumer electronics, power storage, artificial intelligence infrastructure and national defense. Many of those supply chains remain heavily dependent on foreign processing, particularly China.

That dependence is what Washington is trying to change.

Lilac Solutions will receive $100 million for a direct-lithium-extraction facility at Utah’s Great Salt Lake. The BMW-backed company expects the operation to open by 2028 and eventually produce about 5,000 metric tons of lithium annually.

Direct lithium extraction is important because it attempts to pull lithium from brines without relying on the enormous evaporation ponds traditionally associated with lithium production. If the technology proves commercially viable at scale, it could open domestic resources that previously were difficult or uneconomic to exploit.

Another $100 million is going to Jervois, which controls a large cobalt deposit in Idaho.

The company plans to build what would be the only cobalt refinery in the United States.

That distinction illustrates the problem Washington is confronting. America can possess mineral deposits underground and still remain dependent on another country if it lacks the facilities needed to process those materials into usable industrial products.

Cobalt is used in certain batteries, electronics and defense applications. Jervois was taken private last year following a restructuring brought on partly by weak cobalt prices, demonstrating another difficulty in rebuilding domestic mineral supply chains: American projects must compete against global producers that can often supply material more cheaply.

The government is effectively trying to make strategically important projects viable even when commodity markets alone may not provide enough incentive to build them.

Nth Cycle will receive another $100 million to construct a facility processing “black mass” — the concentrated material created when used lithium-ion batteries are shredded.

Black mass contains recoverable lithium, nickel, cobalt and other valuable metals.

Instead of shipping those materials abroad for processing, Washington wants more of that recycling chain to remain inside the United States. The administration earlier this month blocked exports of black mass, increasing the pressure to develop enough domestic capacity to handle it.

Three additional companies will receive $50 million each.

Princeton NuEnergy is working on technology that reprocesses battery cathode materials. Arcanum Ventures produces chemicals used in battery electrolytes. Coreshell Technologies is developing silicon-based battery anodes as an alternative to graphite, another material whose global supply chain is heavily concentrated overseas.

The arithmetic explains why these projects matter.

Building a battery in America does not create a genuinely domestic supply chain if the lithium, cobalt, graphite, cathode materials and electrolyte chemicals still have to cross oceans before reaching the factory.

A disruption at any one of those stages can slow production regardless of where final assembly occurs.

That vulnerability has become more important as batteries move beyond electric cars.

Large battery systems increasingly stabilize power grids and support data centers. Defense contractors need critical minerals for weapons and electronics. Automakers are investing billions in U.S. battery plants. Consumer-electronics companies depend on many of the same materials.

The result is that minerals once treated largely as commodities are increasingly being viewed as strategic infrastructure.

President Donald Trump has said he wants the United States to become a global minerals superpower, and the administration has been using grants, loans, government investments, trade restrictions and other tools to accelerate domestic production.

The $500 million announced Thursday is relatively small compared with the tens of billions being invested in American semiconductor and battery factories.

But it targets something those factories cannot operate without: the materials entering through their front doors.

America has spent years building more capacity to manufacture advanced products domestically.

Washington’s next challenge is making sure the country can also supply what those factories are made from.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited. 

Iran says it has discovered more than 7.5 trillion cubic feet of natural gas in southern Fars Province, adding another significant resource to a country that already holds the world’s second-largest proven gas reserves.

Oil Minister Mohsen Paknejad said approximately 5.7 trillion cubic feet—or more than 72% of the gas discovered in the Takht-e field—may ultimately be recoverable.

The field contains “sweet” natural gas, meaning it has relatively low levels of sulfur compounds and should be easier and less expensive to process than sour gas.

Iran also says the discovery includes substantial gas condensate, a valuable liquid hydrocarbon produced alongside natural gas. Paknejad estimated that the condensate could be worth tens of billions of dollars, although realizing that value will depend on whether Iran can finance and develop the field.

On the surface, 7.5 trillion cubic feet sounds enormous.

But the practical impact is smaller than the headline figure suggests.

Before the latest war-related disruptions, Iran was producing approximately 650 million cubic meters of natural gas per day—the equivalent of about 8.4 trillion cubic feet annually.

At that rate, the field’s estimated 5.7 trillion cubic feet of recoverable gas would equal roughly eight months of Iran’s previous nationwide production.

Paknejad offered a different comparison, saying the recoverable reserves could supply one phase of the massive South Pars gas field for approximately 15 years.

Both comparisons demonstrate that the discovery is meaningful. But it is not large enough by itself to transform Iran into a substantially greater global gas supplier or dramatically alter international prices.

The bigger obstacle is not the amount of gas beneath the ground.

It is Iran’s ability to bring that gas to market.

Developing the Takht-e field will require drilling equipment, processing facilities, pipelines, financing and potentially export infrastructure. If Iran wants to sell the gas beyond neighboring countries, it would also need additional pipeline capacity or liquefied-natural-gas facilities capable of loading the fuel onto ships.

Iran currently lacks a major LNG-export industry comparable to Qatar’s, despite possessing far larger reserves than most gas-producing countries.

U.S. sanctions have historically restricted Iran’s access to the foreign investment, equipment and advanced technology needed to develop some of its largest energy projects. Sanctions also complicate payments, shipping, insurance and long-term supply agreements with international buyers.

The war has made those challenges even greater.

Iranian officials said attacks damaged energy facilities and eliminated approximately 230 million cubic meters per day of natural-gas production capacity—more than one-third of the country’s previously reported daily output.

The government expects approximately 100 million cubic meters of that capacity to return in the coming months. That would still leave Iran with a substantial shortfall unless additional repairs restore more production.

The disruption makes the latest discovery strategically important for Tehran, but commercially complicated.

Major natural-gas fields can take years and billions of dollars to develop. Companies must complete geological studies, drill production wells, build processing plants and connect the field to Iran’s national pipeline network before meaningful volumes can reach homes, power plants or industrial customers.

Iran therefore presents one of the world’s clearest energy contradictions.

It possesses enormous oil and natural-gas reserves, yet sanctions, aging infrastructure, underinvestment and now wartime damage severely restrict its ability to convert those resources into reliable supply and export revenue.

The Takht-e discovery could still strengthen Iran’s long-term energy security.

Iran depends heavily on natural gas for electricity generation, household heating, manufacturing and petrochemical production. New supplies could help replace declining output from older fields, reduce domestic shortages and support industrial activity—if the field is successfully developed.

But global consumers should not expect the discovery to produce cheaper natural gas anytime soon.

The continuing energy crisis has demonstrated that possessing resources underground is very different from having fuel available to consumers.

Iran may have discovered another 7.5 trillion cubic feet of natural gas. The more important questions are how quickly it can develop the field, who will finance the work, how much infrastructure will remain available to transport the gas and whether international buyers will be permitted—or willing—to purchase it.

Until those questions are answered, the Takht-e field remains primarily a strategic asset for Iran, not immediate new supply for the world.

JBizNews Desk | Tehran

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Walmart is expanding its fashion business with Scenario, a new women’s clothing brand offering current styles at prices designed for the retailer’s value-conscious customers.

The collection includes jeans, dresses, tops, footwear, handbags, belts, scarves and jewelry. Many clothing items are priced below $25, while shoes and larger accessories generally sell for approximately $20 to $40. Selected pieces are available in extended sizes up to 4X.

Scenario represents Walmart’s latest attempt to convince shoppers that its clothing departments can offer more than inexpensive basics. The brand features wide-leg and barrel jeans, textured tops, seasonal prints, faux-leather accessories and other designs influenced by current fashion trends.

The strategy could carry significant financial value for Walmart. Groceries bring customers into its stores regularly, but food typically produces narrow profit margins. Clothing and accessories can generate stronger returns, particularly when they are sold under a retailer’s own private label.

A customer who adds a $25 pair of jeans, a handbag or a pair of shoes to a grocery trip becomes considerably more valuable to Walmart. Because Scenario is a Walmart-controlled brand, the company can oversee its designs, pricing and distribution while avoiding direct comparisons with identical products sold by competitors.

Walmart has spent several years expanding and repositioning its clothing business. Its existing portfolio includes Time and Tru, Free Assembly, Scoop and No Boundaries, along with limited collections involving designers, celebrities and entertainment properties. Scenario gives the retailer another label that can target changing fashion preferences without altering its established brands.

The company is also using artificial intelligence to reduce the time required to identify trends and develop new merchandise. Walmart says its Trend-to-Product system can shorten the traditional fashion-production process by as much as 18 weeks, allowing certain products to move from an emerging trend to store shelves within six to eight weeks.

Speed is especially important in fashion because styles can rise and disappear before traditionally produced merchandise reaches stores. A faster process can help Walmart respond while a particular color, fabric or design is still popular and reduce the risk of being left with large quantities of unsold inventory.

For consumers, Scenario means greater access to fashionable clothing at prices closer to Walmart’s traditional value range. For the retailer, it is an opportunity to capture more of the money its existing customers currently spend at Target, Amazon, department stores and fast-fashion competitors.

Walmart does not need to transform every grocery customer into a dedicated fashion shopper for Scenario to succeed. Convincing even a portion of its enormous customer base to purchase one additional clothing item or accessory could produce substantial sales while making each store visit more profitable.

JBizNews Desk | Bentonville, Arkansas

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Jerusalem will begin operating its second light rail line Friday, becoming the first Israeli city to move from a single rail route to an interconnected urban network.

The first section of the Green Line, designated L3, runs approximately seven kilometers, or 4.3 miles, between HaTurim—near Mahaneh Yehuda—and Malha in southern Jerusalem. It includes 13 stations, 12 of them new, with trains expected every eight minutes during peak periods.

The practical change is larger than the distance suggests. Until now, Jerusalem’s light rail functioned primarily as one long corridor: the Red Line connecting Neveh Ya’acov in northern Jerusalem with Hadassah Ein Kerem Medical Center in the southwest. L3 gives passengers a second direction of travel and creates transfer points between separate rail services.

That moves Jerusalem ahead of the Tel Aviv metropolitan area, whose Red Line remains its only operating light rail route.

“This is a historic day for the capital and great news for Jerusalem residents and visitors,” Mayor Moshe Lion said. “This is a giant step in the transition from a city that has a light rail to a city with a light rail network.”

The new route connects some of Jerusalem’s most concentrated centers of employment, government, education and recreation. Stops serve the International Convention Center, the government complex, Hebrew University’s Givat Ram campus, its high-tech park, the Botanical Gardens, Teddy Stadium, Pais Arena and Malha Mall.

It also reaches the Givat Mordechai, Pat, Gonenim and Malha neighborhoods.

For a worker or student, the difference is not simply having a train nearby. It is being able to move between neighborhoods, Israel Railways, city buses and the existing Red Line without completing the entire journey by car.

L3 connects with the Red Line at HaTurim and again near the Central Bus Station and International Convention Center, behind Yitzhak Navon railway station. That second connection allows passengers arriving in Jerusalem by intercity train to transfer directly toward Givat Ram, Malha and the city’s sports district.

The sports connection has an immediate consumer effect. Visitors arriving from outside Jerusalem for soccer games at Teddy Stadium or basketball events at Pais Arena can now use Israel Railways and the light rail instead of driving into Malha and searching for parking.

That option will exist only on weekdays. Like the Red Line and most public transportation in Israel, the new service will not operate on Shabbat. People attending Saturday events will still need private transportation.

Friday’s opening is not the completion of the Green Line. It is the first operational segment of a much larger system that has been delayed by the war and is now scheduled to open in stages.

The next major step is expected in December, when the L4 service is scheduled to connect the Central Bus Station with Gilo, Jerusalem’s largest neighborhood, home to more than 100,000 residents. That will give Gilo passengers faster access to Givat Ram and the Navon railway station.

The route is then expected to reach Hebrew University’s Mount Scopus campus in June 2027, passing through French Hill and the area near Israel Police national headquarters. A separate branch serving Givat Shaul and Har Nof is planned for the end of 2027.

Jerusalem is also building the Blue Line, which is intended to connect Gilo with the city center, Har Hotzvim and Ramot during the next phase of the network’s expansion.

The larger economic effect will depend on whether passengers actually leave their cars. Jerusalem’s narrow roads and mountainous geography leave little room to keep widening streets. A functioning rail network can move more people through the same corridor while reducing the time businesses, employees and delivery vehicles lose to congestion.

The first seven kilometers will not solve that problem. They do, however, change the structure of the system. Jerusalem no longer has one train running across the city. It now has the beginning of a network—and every extension that follows will make the lines already operating more useful.

JBizNews Desk | Jerusalem

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Boeing’s engineers and technical workers have rejected the company’s proposed four-year labor contracts and overwhelmingly authorized their union to call a strike, creating a new threat to the aircraft manufacturer’s already strained recovery.

The vote does not mean workers are walking off the job immediately. The current contracts remain in effect through October 6, making October 7 the earliest date a strike could begin.

Members of the Society of Professional Engineering Employees in Aerospace, or SPEEA, rejected the agreements despite their own negotiating team having recommended approval.

Among Boeing’s professional employees, including engineers and scientists, 64.3% voted against the contract. Technical workers rejected their agreement by an even wider 71.9%.

The separate strike-authorization votes were much stronger. Nearly 88% of professional employees and approximately 90% of technical workers gave union leaders permission to call a strike if a satisfactory agreement is not reached before the existing contracts expire.

SPEEA represents approximately 17,000 Boeing employees, most of them concentrated in Washington state. The workforce includes engineers, technicians, analysts, planners and other specialists whose work supports aircraft design, testing, certification and production.

That makes the potential disruption different from a traditional factory strike. Boeing could continue operating some assembly lines, but losing thousands of engineers and technical specialists could slow the work required to resolve manufacturing problems, approve design changes and certify new aircraft.

The timing is especially sensitive. Boeing is still working to obtain regulatory approval for the 737 Max 10 and the long-delayed 777-9, while also attempting to increase production without compromising safety or quality.

Boeing said its proposal included the largest wage package it had offered SPEEA employees in approximately four decades, along with additional paid leave, limits on mandatory overtime and improvements to health and dental benefits.

The proposed wage structure would have produced approximately 32% compounded growth over four years for many employees, according to Boeing. But union members objected to provisions tying parts of their compensation to inflation and performance measures, while also raising concerns about job security, outsourcing and whether the agreement would keep pace with Seattle’s rising living costs.

SPEEA said the vote demonstrated that Boeing’s terms fell short and that employees were prepared to strike unless meaningful improvements were made.

Boeing responded that it was disappointed with the rejection and had begun implementing a strike contingency plan. No additional negotiations are currently scheduled.

The company now faces a narrow negotiating window and a difficult decision. Improving the offer could raise Boeing’s labor costs for years, but an engineering strike could create far greater costs by delaying aircraft certifications, deliveries and customer payments.

Boeing experienced the financial consequences of a large work stoppage in 2024, when approximately 33,000 machinists went on strike for seven weeks, halting production of several commercial aircraft. SPEEA’s last major strike occurred in 2000 and lasted 40 days.

For airlines and passengers, there would be no immediate interruption to flights. But a prolonged strike could delay new aircraft deliveries, complicate airline expansion plans and further limit the supply of planes in an industry already struggling with manufacturing backlogs.

The contract was rejected. The strike was authorized. But the walkout has not begun—and Boeing still has until October 7 to prevent it. ⁠

JBizNews Desk | Seattle

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Hungary is preparing to restore more generating capacity at its Paks nuclear power plant after emergency work raised the Danube River near the facility’s cooling-water intake, easing an energy threat that had forced the country’s most important power station to operate at a fraction of its normal output.

Paks ordinarily supplies nearly half of Hungary’s electricity. But exceptionally low Danube levels caused by prolonged drought and extreme heat forced the plant to sharply reduce production, leaving only two of its eight turbines operating and cutting overall output to roughly 25% of capacity.

The government now expects the six idle turbines to begin returning gradually, with the plant potentially reaching full output later in the week if river conditions and safety requirements permit.

The recovery is not being driven by rainfall alone. Hungarian authorities used emergency engineering measures to increase the water level around the plant’s intake system by approximately 10 to 15 centimeters. The work included positioning barges in the river and beginning construction of a submerged riverbed barrier designed to hold more water upstream near the facility.

The plant’s nuclear reactors generate heat, but the Danube provides the water needed to remove excess heat and operate the electricity-producing turbines safely. When the river falls too low, the plant cannot draw enough cooling water, forcing operators to reduce or stop production even if the reactors themselves remain functional.

That distinction is important: Hungary is not restarting a reactor that failed. It is restoring electricity-generating equipment that was taken offline because the river could no longer reliably support normal cooling operations.

The disruption exposed a major weakness in Hungary’s energy system. With Paks producing nearly half the country’s power, a prolonged shutdown could increase electricity imports, raise wholesale prices and force Hungary to rely more heavily on natural gas and other fossil fuels.

Solar generation helped prevent a more serious shortage. At certain points during the nuclear reduction, solar power supplied more than half of Hungary’s electricity, providing critical daytime support. But solar production falls sharply in the evening and cannot independently replace the stable, round-the-clock electricity normally produced at Paks.

The crisis stretches beyond Hungary. Romania shut down nuclear generation at its Cernavoda plant because of low Danube water levels, while Bulgaria reduced output at its Kozloduy nuclear facility for the first time in its history for the same reason.

For European businesses and consumers, the episode demonstrates how drought can affect far more than farming and shipping. Low rivers can interrupt electricity production, increase industrial energy costs and place additional pressure on regional power markets.

Hungary’s immediate danger is easing, but the larger problem remains. If severe droughts become more frequent, countries that depend on rivers to cool nuclear and conventional power plants may need new cooling systems, greater renewable capacity and stronger cross-border electricity connections.

The Danube’s recovery is allowing Paks to return—but it has also delivered a warning about how closely Europe’s energy security is tied to its water supply. ⁠

JBizNews Desk | Budapest

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A new analysis has identified 152 Polymarket wallets that collectively made about $8 million betting on U.S. military and defense outcomes with an average win rate of 97.2%, raising a disturbing question for the rapidly growing prediction-market industry: what happens when a profitable trade may also reveal a government secret?

The findings were published Thursday by the nonprofit Anti-Corruption Data Collective, which analyzed settled markets on Polymarket International and looked for unusually successful bets placed on low-probability outcomes.

The researchers focused on what they called “long-shot” wagers — at least $2,500 placed within an hour on outcomes priced at odds of 35% or less.

They identified 556 wallets with unusual trading patterns and labeled them “Orcas.” Among them were 152 particularly successful accounts concentrated in military and defense markets.

Those 152 wallets earned about $8 million combined.

Their average winning rate: 97.2%.

That number is extraordinary, but it is not proof that all of the traders possessed classified information.

The researchers explicitly acknowledged that some patterns could have other explanations, including luck, sophisticated analysis or information obtained legally. Wallets on Polymarket are also anonymous, making it difficult to determine who was actually behind individual trades.

But the concern becomes more serious when the trading patterns are considered alongside recent real-world cases.

A U.S. soldier was charged earlier this year with allegedly using classified information to make roughly $400,000 betting on the removal of Venezuelan President Nicolás Maduro. He has pleaded not guilty.

The new research suggests the potential problem may extend far beyond a single trader.

Prediction markets allow users to buy contracts tied to whether future events will occur. Prices function almost like probabilities: a contract trading at 30 cents broadly implies the market sees roughly a 30% chance of that event happening.

That makes them useful for forecasting.

It can also make them valuable intelligence signals.

Because Polymarket International records trades publicly on a blockchain, outsiders can watch anonymous wallets place unusually large bets in real time.

If a wallet with an exceptional record suddenly places a large wager that a military strike will occur within hours or days, other traders can copy the position.

According to the researchers, that is already happening.

Large investors and automated trading bots sometimes follow unusually successful wallets, meaning a trade potentially based on confidential information can rapidly influence the broader market price.

That creates a problem far larger than unfair betting.

Foreign intelligence services can watch those same markets.

A sudden surge in betting on a specific military operation, target or date could theoretically provide clues about activity that governments intended to keep secret.

Polymarket says it has controls for suspicious trading and has referred dozens of wallets to authorities. The company has also argued that the transparency of blockchain trading makes questionable activity easier to identify than it might be in less transparent markets.

The Department of Defense declined to comment on the findings.

The regulatory question is becoming increasingly important because prediction markets are moving rapidly into the financial mainstream.

Billions of dollars now trade on political elections, economic data, government decisions, wars and other events that can be influenced by information known to a relatively small number of people before the public learns it.

Traditional stock markets have established insider-trading rules for corporate information.

Prediction markets are now forcing regulators to confront a different version of the same problem: what rules should apply when the inside information belongs to the government — and the event being traded is a military operation?

The 97.2% winning rate does not answer that question.

But it makes it increasingly difficult to ignore.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Taiwan is proposing the largest defense budget in its history, putting nearly 29 cents of every dollar in next year’s central government spending plan toward the military, coast guard and related security costs.

The Cabinet approved NT$1.1225 trillion, approximately $35.2 billion, for defense in 2027. That is an 18% increase from this year and the first time Taiwan’s annual defense allocation has exceeded NT$1 trillion.

The money carries two messages. To Beijing, Taiwan is signaling that a blockade or invasion would become increasingly expensive. To Washington, it is answering demands that the island spend more of its own money on defense rather than assume the United States will absorb the cost of protecting it.

The arithmetic is more complicated than the record headline suggests. The allocation equals approximately 3.01% of Taiwan’s projected 2027 economic output, slightly below this year’s 3.32%, because the economy is expected to expand sharply. President Lai Ching-te wants defense spending to reach 5% of GDP by 2030, which would require tens of billions of dollars in additional annual commitments.

The proposal includes NT$691.9 billion for the Ministry of National Defense, NT$218.2 billion in special budgets and NT$60.7 billion in other special funds. Military pensions account for NT$103.8 billion, while the coast guard receives NT$47.9 billion.

New procurement will emphasize drones, missiles, air defense, coastal surveillance and other systems designed to make Taiwan difficult to blockade or occupy. The strategy is not to match China ship for ship or aircraft for aircraft. China’s military budget remains many times larger. Taiwan instead wants mobile weapons that can survive an initial attack and continue threatening Chinese forces afterward.

That creates a substantial commercial pipeline for American defense contractors as well as Taiwan’s domestic drone, electronics, shipbuilding and missile industries. But it also exposes production bottlenecks: approving money does not guarantee that weapons can be manufactured and delivered quickly enough.

The largest uncertainty is political. Taiwan’s opposition-controlled legislature must approve the budget and has delayed or reduced previous defense requests. Earlier this year, lawmakers approved only about two-thirds of an additional military package, excluding some domestic programs.

The debate therefore reaches beyond the size of one budget. Washington will judge whether Taiwan is prepared to finance its own survival, while Beijing will measure whether the money produces real weapons and trained forces—or remains trapped in Taiwan’s divided parliament.

JBizNews Desk | Taipei

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street recovered Friday, but the rebound did not erase what changed underneath the market this week. Long-term borrowing costs remain near levels not seen in almost two decades, oil has climbed for six consecutive sessions, and investors are moving money into gold and cryptocurrency even as the American economy is showing surprising strength.

The most important economic news Friday was actually positive: U.S. businesses are growing considerably faster than economists expected. At the same time, several developments in technology, privacy regulation and global shipping showed where new costs and risks are appearing for companies.

Markets — Dow Jumps More Than 500 Points, but Bonds Remain the Problem

The Dow Jones Industrial Average closed at 53,280.14, up 520.93 points, or 0.99%. The S&P 500 gained 32.94 points, or 0.43%, to 7,674.10, while the Nasdaq Composite rose 112.20 points, or 0.43%, to 26,179.37.

All three still finished the week lower. The S&P 500 and Nasdaq snapped three-week winning streaks, while the Dow recorded a second consecutive weekly decline. 

The issue investors have not solved is the bond market. The 10-year Treasury yield climbed to roughly 4.73% Friday, while the 30-year yield remained near its highest level since 2007. That matters well beyond Wall Street. Treasury yields flow directly into mortgages, commercial real-estate financing, corporate borrowing and the valuation investors are willing to place on expensive technology stocks. 

Oil added another source of pressure. Brent crude settled at $94.39 a barrel, up 6.4% for the week, while U.S. crude finished at $87.06, after President Trump threatened economic consequences for countries continuing to trade with Iran. 

Gold moved in the opposite direction from the dollar. U.S. gold futures jumped 2.4% to $4,680.60 an ounce, while spot gold climbed above $4,600 for the first time since May. Investors increasingly appear to be using gold as protection against uncertainty surrounding government debt, inflation and monetary policy. 

Crypto stocks were among Friday’s biggest winners. Bitcoin moved above $77,000, helping Robinhood jump about 13% and Coinbase roughly 8%. Freeport-McMoRan climbed about 7.6% alongside stronger metals prices. On the downside, security-equipment maker OSI Systems fell more than 8% after weaker revenue and delays tied to Middle East disruptions. 

Economy — U.S. Business Activity Suddenly Accelerates

The strongest economic development of the day may have received less attention than the stock rally.

S&P Global’s preliminary August survey showed the U.S. services PMI jumping to 56.8 from 54.6, its strongest reading since December 2024. The broader Composite Output Index rose to 56.0, its highest level since April 2022.

Anything above 50 indicates expansion.

Manufacturing moved in the other direction, slipping to 53.2, a five-month low, as supply disruptions and reduced inventory building slowed factory activity.

But services are so strong that S&P Global said its surveys currently point toward annualized third-quarter economic growth approaching 3%, roughly double the 1.5% pace recorded in the second quarter. Services companies also increased hiring at the fastest pace in 19 months. 

For business owners, this is an important distinction.

The economy is not broadly slowing. Restaurants, financial companies, professional services, travel and other service businesses are expanding rapidly even while manufacturers face higher energy costs and supply problems.

That makes the Federal Reserve’s job harder. Strong growth reduces the urgency to cut interest rates, while oil and elevated business costs keep the inflation threat alive.

AI & Infrastructure — Nvidia Moves Beyond Chips and Into the Land and Power Behind Them

Nvidia made another move Friday showing that the AI boom is becoming as much an infrastructure business as a semiconductor business.

The company took a minority stake in Cloverleaf Infrastructure, a developer that works with utilities, energy companies and investors to secure powered sites for large data centers.

Financial terms were not disclosed.

Cloverleaf says it has already delivered multiple gigawatt-scale projects in North America. Under the partnership, the company will use Nvidia’s DSX platform to coordinate decisions involving land, electricity, cooling and computing capacity. 

The important part is what Nvidia is becoming.

It is no longer simply waiting for Microsoft, OpenAI, Amazon and other customers to build data centers and buy its GPUs. Nvidia is increasingly investing in the power developers and infrastructure companies that make those data centers possible.

The bottleneck in AI is shifting.

Chips remain scarce and expensive, but electricity, grid connections, water, land and construction capacity are increasingly determining how quickly new computing capacity can actually come online.

That means utilities, contractors, electrical-equipment manufacturers, real-estate developers and communities with available power are becoming part of the AI investment story.

Regulation — Uber Hit With $966 Million Fine Over Automated Worker Decisions

Europe delivered one of its strongest warnings yet about allowing algorithms to make employment decisions without meaningful human involvement.

The Dutch Data Protection Authority fined Uber €825 million, approximately $966 million, after finding that driver accounts had been automatically deactivated without drivers receiving adequate explanations or human review.

It is the second-largest penalty issued under Europe’s GDPR privacy law.

Uber disputes the decision and said it will appeal. The company says its current system includes human review and allows drivers to challenge suspensions. 

The broader business implication goes well beyond Uber.

Companies are increasingly using software and AI to screen job applicants, detect fraud, determine creditworthiness, evaluate employees and decide which customers or workers should be removed from platforms.

European regulators are signaling that when an automated decision can cost someone their livelihood, businesses cannot simply point to an algorithm and consider the matter finished.

That creates a new compliance requirement for companies deploying AI: automation may save labor, but consequential decisions increasingly require explanation, appeal procedures and human oversight.

Technology & Consumer Privacy — TikTok Agrees to $400 Million Children’s Privacy Settlement

TikTok and the U.S. Justice Department reached a $400 million settlement Friday resolving allegations that TikTok and parent company ByteDance violated federal children’s privacy law.

The government sued in 2024, alleging TikTok knowingly allowed children younger than 13 to use regular accounts and collected personal information without obtaining required parental consent.

Under the settlement, the government’s lawsuit is being dismissed with prejudice.

The case is especially important because TikTok now serves more than 200 million Americans and recently reorganized its U.S. operations through a majority American-owned joint venture. 

For technology companies, retailers and websites collecting customer information, the message is straightforward.

Age verification, parental consent and data-retention rules are moving from technical compliance issues into nine-figure financial risks.

As companies use increasingly sophisticated AI systems to identify and target customers, regulators are simultaneously demanding much tighter controls around children’s information.

Global Trade — Low Rhine River Levels Trigger New Container Fees

A less glamorous development Friday could soon show up on invoices paid by importers.

French shipping giant CMA CGM announced an emergency inland surcharge because unusually low water levels on the Rhine and other European rivers are reducing barge capacity and causing congestion and longer terminal stays.

The company will charge €50 per container for certain shipments moving through Belgium and the Netherlands and €75 per container for shipments connected to Germany, Switzerland and France.

The fees apply to inland shipments routed through major European ports including Rotterdam, Antwerp and Zeebrugge

The amount itself is relatively small compared with an ocean freight bill.

The warning behind it is more important.

Low river levels reduce the amount of cargo barges can safely carry. That forces freight onto additional barges, trucks and rail networks and can create bottlenecks extending far beyond the river itself.

For American importers buying European machinery, chemicals, automotive components or manufactured goods, it is another reminder that weather can become a supply-chain cost almost immediately.

Corporate Tax — Apple Paid Ireland $17.1 Billion in One Year

Apple disclosed Friday that it paid $17.1 billion in taxes to Ireland during its last fiscal year, representing roughly 40% of the company’s entire worldwide income-tax bill.

Apple paid $43.2 billion in income taxes globally.

The Irish figure was unusually large because it included roughly €13 billion in back taxes Apple was ordered to pay after the European Union’s highest court concluded that Ireland had provided the company with illegal tax advantages. 

The number demonstrates just how consequential international tax structures have become for multinational companies.

For years, U.S. technology and pharmaceutical companies used Ireland as a European headquarters because of its business environment and tax system. Governments are now scrutinizing those structures far more aggressively.

The Apple payment shows that a tax dispute that begins as an accounting question can eventually turn into a liability measured in tens of billions of dollars.

What to Watch Saturday — and the Setup for Monday

U.S. markets are closed Saturday, August 22, so the immediate watch is for developments that could change prices before futures reopen Sunday evening.

The first is Iran and the Strait of Hormuz. Oil has now risen for six consecutive sessions, and any weekend escalation, sanctions announcement or movement toward reopening shipping routes could produce a sizable move when energy trading resumes.

The second is the bond market. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent’s effort to calm long-term yields produced only temporary relief this week. If investors continue demanding higher returns to hold 10- and 30-year U.S. debt, borrowing costs will remain one of the biggest obstacles facing stocks, housing and business investment. 

And the next major test for technology arrives Wednesday, August 26, when Nvidia reports earnings. Investors will be looking beyond chip sales to determine whether the enormous amounts of money being committed to AI data centers are still translating into sufficient demand and profits. Fed Chair Kevin Warsh’s Jackson Hole appearance and the next PCE inflation report will follow later in the week. 

Friday’s message was therefore more complicated than a 500-point Dow rally suggests.

American businesses are growing faster. But money remains expensive, oil is rising, AI infrastructure is consuming extraordinary amounts of capital, and regulators are beginning to impose enormous costs when technology moves faster than oversight.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Supreme Court handed President Donald Trump an important victory Friday, allowing construction of his $400 million White House ballroom to continue while the justices consider the administration’s emergency appeal.

Chief Justice John Roberts temporarily blocked a lower-court order that would have forced above-ground construction to stop, giving the administration the immediate result it was seeking: the project stays active while the legal fight continues.

That matters because this is no longer an early-stage proposal.

The approximately 90,000-square-foot complex is already about 65% complete, according to court filings. Roughly 250 workers are operating as much as 20 hours a day, seven days a week, and major structural work is already in place.

The project includes far more than a ceremonial ballroom.

Court filings describe an integrated White House complex with extensive underground construction, hardened structural elements, secure communications areas, medical facilities and other security-related infrastructure.

The administration says millions of pounds of reinforcing steel and thousands of cubic yards of concrete have already gone into the project, with portions extending roughly 50 feet underground.

That helps explain why the Supreme Court’s intervention is so significant.

Stopping a project at this stage is not the same as delaying construction before ground is broken. Contractors, workers, equipment, materials and engineering schedules are already committed. A prolonged shutdown could create substantial additional costs and threaten the timetable for completing the complex.

The legal battle centers on a much larger constitutional question: how much authority does a president have to make major changes to the White House without specific congressional approval?

The National Trust for Historic Preservation argues that Trump exceeded presidential authority by demolishing the East Wing and moving ahead with a project of this scale without Congress.

Lower courts agreed sufficiently to order the construction stopped.

The Trump administration argues that presidents have historically exercised broad authority over White House renovations, security improvements and executive-property management, and that courts should not interfere with decisions tied partly to presidential security.

The Supreme Court has not yet decided who is right.

Roberts’ order is temporary and does not guarantee that the administration will ultimately win the underlying case.

But for Trump, the immediate victory is substantial because construction itself is time-sensitive.

The main concrete structure is expected to be completed by November 2026, according to the project schedule submitted in court. The exterior facade is expected to be substantially completed by April 2027, with the full complex currently targeted for completion in August 2028.

That would put completion approximately five months before the end of Trump’s second term.

A lengthy shutdown now could have threatened that timetable.

Instead, workers can continue pushing toward the November structural milestone while the Supreme Court considers whether to grant longer-term relief.

The financing also raises the stakes.

Private donors have committed about $355 million toward the estimated $400 million project, with roughly $200 million already spent or committed, according to administration filings.

That means the legal dispute now involves not simply an architectural vision, but hundreds of millions of dollars in construction contracts, materials, labor and private commitments already tied to the site.

For contractors and suppliers, Friday’s ruling means schedules continue.

For workers, it means the job site remains active.

For donors, it means their money remains attached to a project that is still moving forward.

And for Trump, it prevents lower courts from stopping one of the most visible projects of his second term at the moment when construction is already roughly two-thirds complete.

The Supreme Court could still eventually rule that the administration lacked authority to proceed without Congress.

But that decision may come after significantly more of the project has been built.

That is what makes Friday’s action so consequential.

The Supreme Court has not yet ruled that Trump can ultimately keep the ballroom. It has ruled, for now, that he can keep building it — and on a $400 million project already about 65% complete, every additional day of construction matters.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Meta is spending hundreds of millions of dollars a year buying artificial-intelligence access from Microsoft, even as it commits extraordinary sums to building competing models, chips and data centers of its own.

The relationship makes Meta one of Microsoft’s largest customers for Azure AI Foundry, the cloud marketplace through which companies can access models from OpenAI and other developers. Meta consumes trillions of tokens through the service each week, according to a person familiar with the arrangement. Neither company has confirmed the figures.

A token is the small unit into which an AI system divides words, numbers and code before processing them. One trillion tokens can represent hundreds of billions of words. Meta’s reported weekly usage therefore points to industrial-scale use rather than employees occasionally asking a chatbot questions.

Meta developers use outside models for software development and to evaluate the output of the company’s own AI systems. Chief Technology Officer Andrew Bosworth has previously acknowledged that Meta rents leading models from outside providers when availability, cost or performance makes doing so useful.

The arrangement reveals how tangled the AI business has become. Meta competes with Microsoft for engineers, advertising customers and leadership in artificial intelligence. Yet it also pays Microsoft to access models and computing capacity that help it develop competing products.

For Microsoft, the revenue is real. The larger question is where the money ultimately originates. Microsoft says Foundry has reached 100,000 customers, but many of its largest users remain technology companies, including Meta, ByteDance, Adobe, Perplexity and customer-service AI company Sierra.

OpenAI alone generated $24.1 billion in commercial revenue for Microsoft during the fiscal year ended in June. Bloomberg estimated that this represented roughly 70% of Microsoft’s total AI-related sales.

That concentration matters because technology companies are simultaneously investing in one another, purchasing one another’s computing capacity and using one another’s models. A dollar can move from an AI developer to a cloud provider, then to a chipmaker or data-center operator, producing revenue at several companies before a customer outside the technology industry has paid for a finished service.

The arrangement does not mean the demand is artificial. Meta’s willingness to spend heavily on outside models suggests that AI computing remains constrained enough that even one of the world’s largest data-center builders cannot supply everything internally. Renting also allows Meta to compare competing models without waiting for its own infrastructure to be completed.

But it does complicate the investment case. The industry still must prove that factories, hospitals, retailers, banks and ordinary consumers will eventually generate enough economic value to support the hundreds of billions of dollars now circulating among technology companies.

Meta may eventually replace much of its Microsoft usage with its own models and an internal model marketplace, just as it previously used Microsoft’s Bing search technology before developing alternatives. For now, one of Microsoft’s biggest AI customers is also one of the companies working hardest to need Microsoft less.

JBizNews Desk | Redmond

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Airbus has backed away from a plan that would have required white-collar employees to work in the office four days a week, allowing managers to continue offering roughly two remote-work days after weeks of protests and strikes.

The aerospace giant had planned to reduce remote work to just one day a week beginning in September, part of a broader push by CEO Guillaume Faury to get more employees back on site.

That plan is now effectively suspended.

Managers have been told they can maintain existing arrangements that allow employees to work from home an average of two days a week, according to people familiar with the decision. Airbus says it still wants more employees working on site, but will make the transition more gradually. 

The reversal follows significant employee resistance.

In Spain, about 40% of Airbus’s 14,000 workers have participated in strikes over issues including remote work, transportation, holidays and pay. Protests have also taken place in France. 

The dispute is especially important because Airbus is not a traditional office company.

It is one of the world’s largest industrial manufacturers, building aircraft through enormous networks of engineers, production workers, suppliers and technical teams that often need to collaborate in person.

Management argues that increased office attendance improves knowledge transfer, collective efficiency and faster decision-making.

That concern has grown because Airbus has hired aggressively since the pandemic.

French unions estimate that 25% to one-third of Airbus employees joined the company within the past three years, meaning a large share of its workforce is relatively new and still learning from more experienced colleagues. 

At the same time, aerospace companies are competing for younger engineers, software developers and other skilled employees against technology and AI companies that frequently offer more flexible work arrangements.

That creates a difficult trade-off.

Airbus wants employees physically together to improve collaboration and transfer technical knowledge.

Workers increasingly view remote work as part of their compensation and quality of life.

For employers everywhere, that tension has become one of the most persistent workplace issues left behind by the pandemic.

Many large companies have tightened return-to-office policies, arguing that collaboration, training and corporate culture suffer when employees spend too much time apart.

Employees often see the issue differently.

Remote work can eliminate hours of commuting, reduce transportation costs and make childcare and family responsibilities easier to manage.

Airbus’s experience shows that even a company with enormous industrial demands cannot always impose a stricter office mandate without risking significant employee resistance.

So far, the strikes have not disrupted aircraft production.

But that may be precisely why Airbus chose to compromise before the disagreement escalated further.

For businesses watching the return-to-office debate, the message is becoming clearer: companies may still have the authority to demand more office attendance, but skilled employees increasingly have enough leverage to influence how quickly — and how aggressively — those mandates are imposed.

JBizNews Desk | Toulouse

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Uber has been fined €825 million, about $966 million, by the Dutch Data Protection Authority over the way its automated systems suspended driver accounts, creating one of the largest penalties ever imposed under Europe’s GDPR privacy law. 

The case centers on European drivers whose accounts were temporarily or permanently restricted after Uber’s systems flagged behavior such as suspected fraud, unnecessary detours or low customer ratings.

Dutch regulators said Uber violated drivers’ rights by relying on automated decision-making in situations that could have major consequences for their ability to earn a living, while also failing to adequately explain how those decisions were made.

Under GDPR, companies generally cannot make important decisions about a person solely through an algorithm without meaningful human review and a way for the affected person to challenge the outcome.

That principle is now becoming much more expensive to ignore.

The €825 million fine would be the second-largest GDPR penalty ever issued, behind the €1.2 billion fine imposed on Meta in 2023.

Uber strongly disputes the decision and says it will appeal.

The company says its policies include human review and opportunities for drivers to dispute suspensions, and it argues the regulator’s penalty is disproportionate. Uber also says the number of drivers affected was relatively small and that it no longer permanently deactivates accounts solely through automated systems.

The dispute matters far beyond Uber.

Companies across transportation, banking, insurance, hiring and other industries increasingly use algorithms to determine who gets access to work, credit, insurance coverage or other economically important services.

The Dutch ruling sends a clear message that regulators may treat those automated decisions differently when they directly affect someone’s livelihood.

For gig-economy platforms, that creates a new layer of risk.

Automation is one of the main ways companies such as Uber can manage millions of drivers at relatively low cost. But if every serious suspension requires additional human review, documentation and appeals processes, that can increase operating expenses and slow decision-making.

The case also raises a larger business question about artificial intelligence and automated management.

Algorithms are increasingly being used not simply to recommend products or personalize advertising, but to make decisions about people.

Those decisions can determine whether someone gets hired, receives a loan, keeps an insurance policy or continues earning income through a digital platform.

Europe is now demonstrating that companies may face enormous financial consequences when those systems operate without sufficient transparency and human oversight.

For Uber, the immediate issue is a nearly $1 billion regulatory fight.

For every business relying on automated decision-making, the longer-term message may be more important: using an algorithm does not eliminate responsibility for the decision it makes.

JBizNews Desk | Amsterdam

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian is publicly pressing Tehran to end its war with the United States, arguing that Iran should pursue an agreement now while it can still claim it is negotiating from a position of strength.

“We should end the war now, when we are in a position of power and dignity,” Pezeshkian said, claiming that the world recognizes what he characterized as Iran’s success against the United States.

The message was directed as much toward Iran’s own political establishment as toward Washington.

Powerful hard-line factions inside the Islamic Republic have resisted concessions and continue to portray prolonged confrontation as proof of revolutionary strength. Pezeshkian’s argument is that extending the conflict could squander whatever leverage Iran believes it still possesses while deepening the economic damage at home.

Vice President JD Vance recently described the division inside Tehran bluntly, saying some Iranian officials want the war to end while “crazy radicals” want it to continue. Pezeshkian’s latest remarks appear to confirm that a real internal struggle remains over whether Iran should accept a negotiated settlement or continue fighting.

The timing is critical. President Donald Trump’s administration is preparing what Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent has called the toughest sanctions ever imposed on Iran. The measures, expected to be detailed Monday, are designed to isolate Tehran from oil revenue, foreign trade and international financial channels while reducing the need for another major American military escalation.

Iran is already facing a U.S. naval blockade, restricted oil shipments and the loss of important regional commercial connections. The United Arab Emirates, historically one of Iran’s most important trading gateways, has suspended trade following Iranian missile attacks.

Pezeshkian is therefore attempting to present diplomacy not as surrender, but as a way to preserve Iran’s remaining leverage before the country’s economic position deteriorates further.

Hard-liners are offering the opposite message. Parliament Speaker Mohammad Baqer Qalibaf said Friday that Iran must develop ways to overcome what he called “unjust sanctions,” urging deeper trade with Iraq and greater use of national currencies to reduce dependence on the U.S. dollar.

The competing statements expose Tehran’s central choice: negotiate while claiming victory, or continue a confrontation that Washington is increasingly shifting from the battlefield to Iran’s economic lifelines.

JBizNews Desk | Tehran

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The U.S. dollar has acquired an unusual new source of pressure: the government department responsible for financing America’s $40 trillion debt load.

Citigroup strategists led by Daniel Tobon have turned bearish on the dollar over the next three months, cutting their forecast for a broad dollar index from 102.12 to 98.34. The shift follows the Treasury Department’s decision to at least double certain purchases of older, long-dated government bonds.

Beginning Sept. 9, Treasury will raise the ceiling for buyback operations covering bonds with 10 to 30 years remaining from $2 billion to at least $4 billion apiece. The objective is to improve trading conditions and relieve pressure in a market where the 30-year yield recently reached 5.34%, its highest level since 2007.

But the government is not eliminating debt. It generally must sell new securities to finance the repurchase of old ones. In practical terms, Treasury could remove more long-term bonds from the market while issuing more short-term bills—a change in the maturity of the debt rather than a reduction in what Washington owes.

That distinction is behind the dollar warning.

Reducing the supply of long bonds can push their prices higher and their yields lower. Lower yields make dollar-denominated assets less attractive to overseas investors, weakening one of the principal forces drawing foreign capital into the United States.

The dollar index fell roughly 0.8% after the Treasury announcement, reaching its weakest closing level since May. The euro climbed above $1.16, while the British pound approached $1.36.

The immediate intervention is modest compared with the market it is intended to influence. A $4 billion operation represents little more than one-half of 1% of the $739 billion Treasury expects to borrow during the current quarter. Yet investors are reacting to the signal as much as the size: Washington has shown that sharply rising long-term rates can provoke an official response.

That creates a credibility problem. If traders conclude that the government intends to hold down long-term yields for political or budgetary reasons, they may demand a larger premium to own American debt. Treasury could then obtain temporary relief while increasing longer-term anxiety about inflation, deficits and government influence over markets.

For businesses, a weaker dollar produces clear winners and losers. American exporters receive more dollars when foreign revenue is converted home, while manufacturers competing against imported goods gain pricing room. Multinational companies with large overseas operations can also report stronger dollar earnings even if their underlying sales do not change.

Importers face the opposite arithmetic. A European component costing €1 million equals approximately $857,000 when the euro trades at $1.166, versus $833,000 at $1.20 per euro-dollar inverse? The useful comparison is direct: at $1.166 per euro, that component costs $1.166 million, roughly $66,000 more than when the euro was worth $1.10. Retailers, automobile suppliers and businesses purchasing foreign machinery may eventually pass part of that increase to consumers.

Investors should not confuse Citi’s short-term call with a prediction that the dollar is entering a permanent decline. The bank’s longer-range view remains more constructive because American growth and corporate earnings continue to compare favorably with many other developed economies.

The next test is whether Treasury’s expanded purchases can keep long-term yields down once operations begin—or whether investors decide that buybacks treat the symptoms of America’s borrowing problem without addressing the deficits creating it.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

China has made an unusually large spot purchase of Saudi oil, but the deal is less a return to normal buying than an emergency adjustment to a supply system reshaped by the Iran war.

State-owned PetroChina and Sinochem, along with Sinopec’s trading arm Unipec and private refiner Rongsheng Petrochemical, purchased a combined 10 million barrels of Saudi Arab Medium and Arab Heavy crude through a rare tender. Additional Saudi barrels were secured through long-term contracts.

The purchase is large enough to supply China’s refineries for roughly 20 hours. It is still small compared with the volumes that have disappeared from the country’s normal import system.

China imported 8.41 million barrels of crude a day in July, 24.3% less than a year earlier and more than 3 million barrels a day below levels seen before the conflict disrupted the Strait of Hormuz. Refineries responded by reducing fuel production, limiting exports and drawing on oil already stored inside the country.

The new Saudi cargoes are designed to reduce the shipping risk. At least 4 million barrels are expected to load from facilities outside the Strait of Hormuz, allowing the tankers to avoid the waterway that once carried approximately one-fifth of the world’s oil and gas shipments.

That alternative route has become increasingly valuable as Iranian supplies disappear. Iran’s shipments have fallen to approximately 534,000 barrels a day in August from an average of 1.4 million last year. China historically purchased more than 80% of Iran’s exported oil, much of it at discounts attractive to smaller independent refineries.

The Saudi purchase therefore does not necessarily signal stronger Chinese consumer demand. It shows Chinese refiners replacing oil they can no longer obtain safely or cheaply from Iran while protecting themselves against another tightening of Gulf shipping.

The shift matters beyond China. Saudi Arabia can charge for the security of crude loaded outside Hormuz, while Brazil, Iraq and other exporters gain an opportunity to replace Iranian barrels. Tanker operators, insurers and refiners must also recalculate the value of routes that avoid the Gulf’s most dangerous bottleneck.

China has enough stored oil to avoid panic buying, which has helped prevent the disruption from pushing global crude prices even higher. But inventories can only delay the decision. If Iranian supplies remain blocked and Chinese refineries begin rebuilding production, Beijing may have to return to the international market for far more than 10 million barrels.

JBizNews Desk | Beijing

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Offers of Iranian crude to Chinese buyers have declined and prices have jumped this week as the US blockade has cut Tehran’s shipments, according to trade sources, with the threat of more sanctions from Washington looming.

The US re-imposed its blockade of Iran’s shipping and ports on July 13 as a deal to halt the war between them broke down in an attempt to cut off oil sales – Tehran’s primary source of hard currency – compounding earlier losses from wartime strikes on its energy infrastructure.

The number of offers for Iranian oil cargoes to China for September and October delivery has declined from July and August cargoes, four trade sources familiar with the matter said. The offers have declined as barrels already in ships on the water have been sold, they said.

Iran’s oil exports have fallen since mid-July, with no visible crossings of the Strait of Hormuz by supertankers carrying Iranian crude since then, according to data from ship-tracking company Kpler, although many vessels turn off their location transponders, making them difficult to track.

The squeeze threatens a key feedstock for independent refiners, known colloquially as teapots, located in China’s eastern province of Shandong, which account for about a fifth of China’s refining capacity and are the top buyers of sanctioned oil.

A vendor pumps petrol from Iranian fuel oil tankers for resale near the Bashmagh border crossing on March 11, 2026.  (credit: Ozan KOSE / AFP via Getty Images)

Three of the trade sources said some Iranian crude, typically sold at discounts, was being offered at premiums to ICE Brent futures, with one source citing a premium of about $2 a barrel. That was an abrupt shift as cargoes of Iranian Light were being offered earlier this week at a discount of around $3 a barrel, the same as a month earlier.

Iranian crude held in floating storage outside the US blockade zone has fallen to about 80 million barrels from about 105 million barrels before the blockade was reinstated, Kpler data showed.

Two of the sources estimated that only about 30 million barrels of Iranian crude remained in Asian waters, half of the usual levels.

Kpler Senior Crude Oil Analyst Muyu Xu estimated there are 40 million barrels of Iranian oil held on ships in Malaysian waters east of Singapore, though most of that has been promised to buyers.

“This suggests buyers could face virtually no new Iranian supplies available for late-September delivery onwards since no laden Iranian tankers have so far managed to break through the US blockade,” she wrote in a LinkedIn post on Friday.

Uncertain supply

With the uncertainty over Iranian supplies, one teapot bought Brazil’s Lapa crude this week, while others were looking at Iraq’s Basrah crude, two of the sources said.

“Given the thin Iranian availability amid the US blockade, Chinese teapots are now looking beyond Russia and Iran,” said Sun Jianan, a senior oil analyst at Energy Aspects.

China’s Iranian oil imports have dropped from a year ago following the start of the US-Israeli war on Iran in February that has cut Middle Eastern oil exports. Shipments fell to 785,000 barrels per day in June, the lowest since February 2023, provisional data from analytics firm Kpler showed.

Imports in July likely rose to 823,000 bpd but the intake so far in August has dropped to 534,000 bpd, the data showed.

Last year, China’s Iran purchases averaged 1.4 million bpd, according to Kpler.

Wary of sanctions

On Thursday, US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent threatened Iran with “the toughest sanctions in history,” with details to come on Monday, to pressure Iran to reopen the Strait of Hormuz and end the war.

That has China’s independent refiners on alert for further sanctions targeting specific buyers, a source at one of the plants said.

However, the source said new sanctions were unlikely to significantly deter purchases, noting that refiners which have been previously sanctioned continued processing Iranian oil.

China, the world’s biggest crude importer, buys more than 80% of Iran’s shipped oil, according to 2025 data from Kpler. Beijing has said it rejects unilateral sanctions, and a Chinese foreign ministry spokesperson said on Thursday sanctions will not solve the conflict.

This post was originally published on here

Target has reduced prices on more than 10,000 products as the retailer fights to win over households that are comparing prices more carefully and limiting purchases that are not essential.

The cuts span groceries, baby products, health and wellness items, household supplies and other frequently purchased goods. Target is betting that lower everyday prices will bring shoppers into its stores more often, even if they are buying fewer discretionary products such as furniture, electronics and home décor.

The strategy is showing results. Comparable sales increased 3.8% during the latest quarter, customer traffic rose 3.6% and digital sales climbed 8.7%. Target raised its annual sales forecast for the second time this year.

Lower prices normally squeeze a retailer’s profit margin, but Target received nearly $1 billion in tariff refunds during the quarter. That unusual benefit helped absorb some of the cost of its price reductions and contributed significantly to stronger earnings.

The company is also expanding baby-care and wellness products, improving store conditions and adding more affordable merchandise. Those categories are designed to make Target a more regular stop for necessities, rather than a place consumers visit mainly for discretionary purchases.

For shoppers, the price cuts are meaningful, but they also reveal how intensely major retailers are competing for households whose budgets remain strained. Target’s improvement does not necessarily mean consumers are spending freely. It means the company is becoming more effective at capturing the dollars they are still willing to spend.

JBizNews Desk | Minneapolis

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

BJ’s Wholesale Club delivered a strong second-quarter report Friday, with consumers continuing to reward warehouse clubs even as spending becomes more selective across the broader retail economy.

For the quarter ended August 1, BJ’s reported $6.23 billion in total revenue, up 15.7% from a year earlier. Net sales rose 15.9% to $6.09 billion, while net income increased 15.4% to $173.9 million. Diluted earnings were $1.36 a share, up from $1.14 a year earlier and comfortably ahead of Wall Street expectations.

The headline sales increase, however, needs some explanation. Comparable-club sales rose 11.9% overall, but only 3.1% when gasoline is excluded. That means higher fuel sales accounted for a substantial portion of the reported growth. Even so, the 3.1% merchandise increase was stronger than analysts expected and showed that shoppers were still increasing purchases inside BJ’s clubs.

Membership is becoming an increasingly important part of the business. Membership-fee income rose 9.9% to $135.6 million, and BJ’s said its member count reached a record 8.5 million. The growth came from new-member acquisition, strong retention and more customers moving into higher-priced membership tiers.

Digital shopping is growing even faster. Digitally enabled comparable sales increased about 30%, showing that the warehouse-club model is no longer dependent entirely on customers making large physical shopping trips. BJ’s is increasingly combining its traditional bulk-discount model with online ordering, pickup and delivery.

The company also produced stronger operating results. Operating income rose 16.5% to $252.4 million, while adjusted EBITDA increased 14.3% to $347.2 million. BJ’s opened three clubs and one gas station during the quarter and repurchased roughly $124 million of its own shares.

Management responded by raising its fiscal 2026 adjusted earnings forecast to $4.60 to $4.80 a share, from its previous outlook of $4.40 to $4.60. BJ’s kept its forecast for comparable-club sales excluding gasoline at growth of 2% to 3% for the year.

For consumers, the report says something broader about the economy.

Households have not stopped spending, but they are increasingly looking for a clear value proposition. Warehouse clubs benefit because they can spread lower margins across high-volume purchases while generating recurring income from memberships. Bulk groceries, household products and discounted gasoline become particularly attractive when families are trying to stretch the same paycheck further.

BJ’s results therefore sit inside a larger shift in retail. Consumers may cut discretionary purchases, postpone expensive items or trade down from premium brands, yet continue spending heavily at stores where they believe the savings are measurable.

That is why the membership number may ultimately matter as much as the quarterly sales number. A record 8.5 million members gives BJ’s a larger recurring customer base and creates a powerful incentive for those households to concentrate more of their grocery, fuel and household spending inside the BJ’s ecosystem.

For investors, Friday’s report is evidence that value-oriented retail remains one of the more resilient corners of the consumer economy — even when the headline 16% revenue increase is adjusted for the unusually strong contribution from gasoline.

JBizNews Desk | Marlborough, Mass.

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The United States and Canada are heading into the final hours of a high-stakes trade negotiation that could determine whether a new 50% U.S. tariff on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods takes effect just after midnight.

Canadian Trade Minister Dominic LeBlanc said the two sides were “very close” after lengthy negotiations in Washington, but no final agreement had been announced as of Friday morning.

Negotiators are meeting again Friday as they try to resolve the remaining issues before the 12:01 a.m. ET Saturday deadline.

The agreement under discussion could materially reduce tariffs in two of the most important cross-border industries.

U.S. tariffs on Canadian-built vehicles could fall to 15% from 25%, while tariffs on Canadian steel and aluminum could be cut to 25% from 50%.

Those percentages matter because the U.S. and Canadian manufacturing systems are deeply intertwined. A vehicle assembled in Canada can contain engines, electronics, steel and other components produced on both sides of the border. Some parts cross the border multiple times before a finished vehicle reaches a dealership.

A 25% or 50% tariff therefore does not simply hit a foreign exporter. It can raise costs for American automakers, manufacturers, builders and consumers that depend on Canadian materials and components.

There are still unresolved details, including how Canadian content will be calculated and how exemptions for auto parts would work.

The negotiations have moved rapidly. Earlier this week, President Donald Trump temporarily delayed the new tariffs for three days while the two governments continued negotiating. Canada has said important work remains even as both sides report significant progress.

For businesses operating across the northern border, Friday is therefore more than another trade-policy deadline. A deal could lower costs almost immediately in autos and metals. Failure could force companies to reconsider sourcing, pricing and production decisions beginning Saturday morning.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street opened higher Friday morning, but the rebound is beginning under the same pressure that dominated the entire week: investors are still watching the Treasury market almost as closely as stocks.

At the 9:30 a.m. ET opening bell on Friday, August 21, the Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 9.7 points to 52,768.87, the S&P 500 gained 24.5 points to 7,665.68, and the Nasdaq Composite climbed 131.7 points to 26,198.84. The early recovery follows Thursday’s sharp selloff, although all three major indexes remain on course for weekly losses. 

The encouraging part for stocks is that the bond market is no longer moving violently. The 10-year Treasury yield was around 4.70% Friday morning and the 30-year yield near 5.25%. Those levels are still high enough to pressure mortgages, corporate borrowing and expensive technology valuations, but the relative stability is giving equities room to recover. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent’s decision this week to at least double planned purchases of certain longer-term government bonds briefly pushed yields lower, although much of that relief has since disappeared. 

Then, 15 minutes after the market opened, investors received a surprisingly strong reading on the American economy.

S&P Global’s August services PMI jumped to 56.8 from 54.6, its strongest level since December 2024 and well above economists’ expectation of 54.0. The broader composite index climbed to 56.0, its highest since April 2022, while the manufacturing PMI slowed to 53.2 from 53.9, a five-month low. Any number above 50 indicates expansion. 

The important takeaway is the split beneath those numbers. American factories are still expanding, but growth is slowing as the Iran war disrupts supply chains and higher energy prices interfere with production. Services, meanwhile, are accelerating rapidly. New service-sector business grew at the fastest pace since December 2024, and hiring increased at the strongest rate in 19 months. S&P Global said the surveys are consistent with U.S. economic growth approaching a 3% annualized rate in the third quarter, roughly double the 1.5% pace recorded in the second quarter. 

That is good news for businesses and employment, but not automatically good news for interest rates. A stronger economy gives the Federal Reserve less reason to lower borrowing costs and more room to raise rates if inflation remains stubborn. Minutes released Wednesday showed several Fed officials were already prepared to raise rates in July, while others indicated a hike may become necessary if inflation does not continue moving toward 2%. 

Retail is producing one of Friday’s clearest winners. Ross Stores rallied more than 5% in early trading after beating Wall Street expectations and sharply raising its annual profit forecast. The discount retailer now expects earnings of $8.61 to $8.77 a share, up from its previous forecast of $7.50 to $7.74. Second-quarter revenue rose about 13% to $6.26 billion, and management expects comparable sales to rise 6% to 7% this quarter. 

That result is particularly interesting one day after Walmart plunged more than 9% following its slowest comparable-sales growth in six years. Consumers do not appear to have stopped spending altogether. Instead, this week’s retail results increasingly suggest they are becoming more aggressive about finding value — a trend benefiting discount and warehouse retailers while putting pressure on companies that cannot clearly demonstrate lower prices. 

Crypto stocks are another major pocket of strength. Bitcoin was trading near $77,000 Friday morning, up more than 20% for the week, after President Trump urged Congress to advance legislation establishing clearer federal rules for digital assets. The rally is also being fueled by concerns about the dollar and government debt following Treasury’s bond-market intervention. Coinbase and Robinhood were both sharply higher in early trading, while Strategy and several bitcoin miners also extended their gains. 

SpaceX is also being watched closely after approximately 319 million previously restricted shares became eligible for trading Thursday. The stock was up less than 1% early Friday, suggesting the second major unlock has so far been absorbed without the type of heavy selling some investors feared. 

Oil remains the largest outside threat to Friday’s rebound. Brent crude was trading around $94 a barrel, roughly $20 above its level before the Iran war, as Washington threatens what Bessent described as the toughest economic sanctions yet against Tehran. The continued disruption around the Strait of Hormuz has pushed oil more than 5% higher this week and is feeding directly into concerns about inflation, transportation costs and consumer spending. 

There is also a trade deadline hanging over the market. U.S. and Canadian negotiators are meeting for a third consecutive day Friday as they try to finish an agreement before new 50% U.S. tariffs on roughly $20 billion of Canadian goods are scheduled to take effect at 12:01 a.m. Saturday. Canadian officials say the two sides are close, but unresolved issues remain. Any breakthrough — or breakdown — could move industrial, transportation, construction and consumer stocks before Friday’s close. 

For the rest of the trading day, the most important number may not be the Dow. It is 4.70%.

If the 10-year Treasury yield can remain around that level or move lower despite the stronger PMI report, Friday’s rebound has room to broaden. If yields begin climbing again toward the week’s highs, technology and AI shares could quickly come back under pressure.

Oil is the second number to watch. A renewed move toward $95 Brent would reinforce inflation fears. And after this morning’s surprisingly strong services report, investors have even less margin for another inflationary shock.

Friday may therefore determine whether this week ends as a temporary bond-market scare — or the beginning of a more serious reassessment of what higher borrowing costs mean for stocks, consumers and the AI investment boom.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Canadian consumers continued spending in June, but the country’s longest retail-sales growth streak in years may have ended one month later.

Retail sales increased 0.6% in June to a seasonally adjusted C$74.28 billion, according to Statistics Canada. That exceeded economists’ expectations for a 0.4% gain and marked the sixth consecutive monthly increase.

The growth was also broader than in some earlier months. Sales advanced in seven of the nine retail categories tracked by the agency, led by general merchandise stores and clothing, clothing accessories, shoes, jewelry, luggage and leather-goods retailers.

Spending excluding gasoline stations and motor-vehicle dealers—the measure that more closely reflects everyday purchases—rose for a third consecutive month. That suggests June’s strength was not simply the result of consumers paying more for fuel or purchasing expensive vehicles.

The warning came in Statistics Canada’s preliminary estimate for July, which indicated that total retail sales fell approximately 0.8%. If confirmed, it would be the first monthly decline since late 2025 and would end the six-month expansion.

The timing matters because household spending has been one of the Canadian economy’s strongest supports. A recovering housing market and improving labor conditions helped consumers continue purchasing goods despite U.S. trade tensions, higher energy costs and slower wage growth.

Some economists believe households may have maintained that spending by saving less or taking on additional debt. That becomes harder to sustain if wage growth remains weak while essential expenses absorb a greater share of household income.

The June increase points to solid consumer activity during the second quarter and supports estimates that Canada’s economy expanded at its fastest pace in roughly three years. The preliminary July decline, however, suggests that momentum may not carry fully into the third quarter.

For retailers, the question is whether July was a temporary pause after six unusually strong months or the beginning of a broader consumer pullback. Statistics Canada will revise the preliminary estimate when it publishes the complete July report.

JBizNews Desk | Ottawa

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The Trump administration will temporarily allow as much as 300,000 metric tons of ground beef into the United States without triggering higher tariffs, an emergency move intended to bring relief to shoppers facing record beef prices.

President Donald Trump said the imported beef would enter over the next 90 days and be sold at prices 25% below prevailing market levels. The White House has not yet identified the supplying countries, participating retailers or how the promised discount will be enforced.

The additional supply would equal roughly 660 million pounds of beef. That sounds substantial, but it represents only about 2% of the approximately 29 billion pounds Americans are expected to consume this year. The plan may therefore place some downward pressure on ground-beef prices without producing an immediate, across-the-board reduction at supermarket meat counters.

Ground beef is the administration’s focus because the United States relies on imported lean trimmings, which processors blend with fattier domestic beef to produce hamburger. Expanding that supply can reach grocery stores and restaurant chains faster than rebuilding the nation’s cattle population.

America’s cattle herd is now the smallest since the 1950s after years of drought, high feed costs and ranchers reducing their herds. Reversing that decline will take years because ranchers must retain breeding cows instead of sending them to market, temporarily tightening the supply even further.

The import plan consequently creates a difficult balance. Consumers and restaurants want immediate price relief, while American ranchers fear that a sudden influx of lower-cost foreign beef could weaken cattle prices just as they begin investing in rebuilding their herds.

Trump previously expanded the low-tariff quota for Argentine lean-beef trimmings by 80,000 metric tons in February. The new announcement is considerably broader, although critical details remain unresolved.

For shoppers, any savings are most likely to appear first in hamburger, frozen patties and other ground-beef products. Steaks and premium cuts are less likely to fall sharply because the policy is aimed primarily at the lean trimmings used in ground beef.

The administration is also pursuing longer-term measures, including support for smaller meatpacking operations and antitrust scrutiny of the country’s largest processors. Those efforts address the structure of the beef market, but the temporary import window is designed to do something far more immediate: place additional meat into the supply chain before high prices push more families and restaurants toward cheaper proteins.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Two things are happening in the grocery aisle at the same time, and they pull in opposite directions. Eggs have gotten much cheaper because the hens are back. Beef keeps getting more expensive because the cattle are not.

The average price of a dozen eggs is down 31% since President Trump took office last year, according to grocery-price data updated Wednesday by NBC News. Over the same stretch, ground beef is up 18% and orange juice is up 20%. The figures come from NIQ, a research firm that collects real checkout prices paid at grocery stores, drugstores, mass merchandisers, dollar stores, warehouse clubs and military commissaries.

The egg story is supply. Bird flu tore through American flocks in late 2024 and early 2025, farms culled birds by the millions, and the price of a dozen eggs shot past $6 last spring. Flocks have since been rebuilt, and production recovered. The Agriculture Department projects retail egg prices will fall 27.4% across 2026 as flock sizes and output continue to bounce back. Wholesale prices averaged about 67 cents a dozen in the second quarter, down nearly 28% from a year earlier — though they started creeping up again in early July.

Beef works on a much slower clock. A hen goes from chick to laying in about five months. A calf takes roughly two years to reach the meat case. The national cattle herd is in a cyclical contraction, which has kept supplies tight and pushed farm-level cattle prices 7.5% above last year, with the Agriculture Department forecasting an 11.6% rise for 2026. Wholesale beef prices were 12.7% higher in June than a year earlier. Drought across grazing country made it worse, and ranchers who sell off breeding stock to cut costs make the shortage last longer.

Put the two side by side and the arithmetic is stark. Ground beef averaged about $6.83 a pound in June; eggs averaged about $2.14 a dozen. A single pound of ground beef now costs more than three dozen eggs.

For a family running a weekly cart, the practical move is substitution. Ground pork and ground chicken carry most beef recipes at a lower price. Stretching a pound of beef with beans, rice, pasta or vegetables cuts the per-serving cost roughly in half. Eggs, cheap again, do real work as a dinner protein rather than only a breakfast one.

Overall, food inflation is running cooler than the beef number suggests. Grocery prices edged down 0.1% in July, and food overall is up 3% over the past year. But prices have climbed for most of the past six years, with the war in Iran, supply chain bottlenecks and the war in Ukraine all pressing on shoppers’ bills.

The fix for beef is not a policy lever. It is time. Herds rebuild over years, not months, and until they do, the meat counter stays where it is.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

When the U.S. government has to pay more to borrow money, everyone else does too. That is what happened this week. The yield on the 30-year Treasury bond reached 5.323% on Tuesday, a 19-year high, before slipping back to just under 5.3%, and lenders promptly repriced the loans ordinary Americans take out. The average 30-year fixed mortgage rate stood at 6.75% on Tuesday, up from 6.69% at the end of last week, according to Mortgage News Daily.

The mechanism is simple. Investors who lend to Washington for 30 years are demanding more compensation because they expect inflation to stay high and the government to keep borrowing heavily. The national debt is approaching $40 trillion, more than $11 trillion higher than in fiscal 2019. Banks price home loans off those same government yields, so when the government’s cost of money goes up, so does the rate on a mortgage.

The 10-year Treasury yield, the benchmark that fixed mortgages actually follow most closely, is now above 4.7%, compared with below 4% before the Iran war began at the end of February. It eased back toward 4.7% Wednesday as investors waited on the minutes of the Federal Reserve’s July meeting.

For a buyer, the arithmetic is unforgiving. On a $400,000 loan, the move from 6.69% to 6.75% adds roughly $16 to the monthly payment — small on its own. The bigger number is what the full term costs at today’s rate: about $2,594 a month, and roughly $534,000 in interest over 30 years. The buyer pays back more than twice what was borrowed.

It is not only housing. Buyers financing a new vehicle are facing rates near 7%, while used-car borrowers are contending with roughly 10.6%. Variable-rate credit cards, which move with the prime rate, are under the same pressure.

Inflation is the engine behind all of it. Consumer prices rose 3.4% in the year through July, well above the Federal Reserve’s 2% target, and up from 2.4% in January before the war. Minutes released Wednesday from the Fed’s late-July meeting showed many officials believed policy would likely have to tighten further if inflation does not come down, with some saying financial conditions may not yet be restrictive enough. The Fed has held its rate at 3.5% to 3.75%, with three members dissenting in July in favor of an increase.

So what can a buyer actually do? Lawrence Yun, chief economist at the National Association of Realtors, said borrowers should not count on a meaningful drop. “The impact on mortgage rates is directly related to higher bond yields,” he said, adding that inflation and long-term borrowing costs will keep rates elevated regardless of what the Fed does. His practical suggestion for buyers who expect to move before the fixed period runs out: a seven-year adjustable-rate mortgage, which carries a lower starting rate.

The other options are the familiar ones — a larger down payment to shrink the loan, paying points up front to buy the rate down, or a 15-year term, which carries a lower rate and far less total interest for buyers who can carry the higher monthly payment.

What would actually bring rates down is inflation cooling and the government borrowing less. Neither is in evidence this week.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wheat prices are climbing again as escalating attacks on Russian and Ukrainian Black Sea ports begin choking one of the world’s most important grain-export routes.

Chicago wheat futures have risen more than 17% since early July, as attacks on ports, ships and grain infrastructure delay cargoes during the peak export season. Russia and Ukraine are among the world’s largest wheat suppliers, which means disruption in the Black Sea can quickly reach food markets far beyond the region.

The pressure is already showing up in shipping.

Ukraine has lost roughly one-third of its Black Sea grain-export capacity, while attacks around Russia’s Novorossiysk port have disrupted another major outlet. Importers expecting cargoes this summer are now facing delays, cancellations or the need to buy grain elsewhere.

That replacement wheat is often more expensive.

Black Sea wheat has recently been offered around $260 to $280 a metric ton, while some Australian supplies have been quoted as high as $320. Buyers in Asia, the Middle East and North Africa are among the most exposed because many rely heavily on Russian and Ukrainian grain.

Egypt illustrates the dependence. More than 82% of its wheat imports in the first half of 2026 came from Russia and Ukraine.

For American consumers, the impact is less immediate but still important.

Wheat is not only flour. It sits inside bread, pasta, cereal, crackers, baked goods and animal feed. When the commodity rises sharply, food manufacturers eventually face higher input costs. Whether those costs reach supermarket shelves depends on how long the disruption lasts and how much cheaper grain can be sourced elsewhere.

The United States, Canada, Argentina and Australia can replace some lost Black Sea supply, but rerouting millions of tons of wheat across longer distances increases freight costs and puts additional demand on alternative exporters.

Global inventories provide some protection, so a 17% increase in wheat futures does not translate into a 17% increase in a loaf of bread. Wheat itself is only one part of the retail price; labor, packaging, transportation and store margins often matter more.

But the direction matters.

Consumers are already dealing with elevated energy and transportation costs. If Black Sea grain disruptions persist into the fall, another major commodity could begin pushing in the same inflationary direction.

The Black Sea has therefore become more than a battlefield.

It is again becoming a pressure point for the global grocery bill.

JBizNews Desk | Chicago

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Australia has passed a sweeping new law that can impose a levy of up to 2.5% of Australian advertising revenue on major technology platforms that fail to strike enough commercial agreements with local news publishers.

The legislation applies to digital platforms generating more than A$250 million, or about $178 million, in Australian advertising revenue, putting companies such as Google, Meta, TikTok and Microsoft’s LinkedIn directly in scope. 

The structure is designed less as a tax than as a pressure mechanism.

Platforms can reduce or eliminate the levy by reaching qualifying deals with Australian news organizations. To avoid the charge entirely, companies generally must reach agreements with at least eight publishers by the end of their financial reporting period. 

That is what makes the law important.

Australia is not simply ordering technology companies to write checks to media organizations. It is creating a financial penalty large enough to make negotiating those deals more attractive than refusing them.

The government says the policy is intended to preserve public-interest journalism at a time when much of the advertising revenue that once supported newspapers and broadcasters has migrated to large digital platforms.

The underlying economics have changed dramatically over the past two decades.

A local newspaper can spend money reporting a story, but much of the audience may ultimately encounter that journalism through search engines, social networks or other digital platforms. Those platforms can then sell advertising around the attention generated by the content without necessarily paying the publisher that produced it.

Australia has been trying to rebalance that relationship for years.

Its earlier News Media Bargaining Code pushed Google and Meta into more than 30 commercial agreements with Australian media companies. But officials concluded that the system had a major weakness: a platform could threaten to remove news rather than negotiate.

The new levy is intended to make that strategy much less attractive.

Even if a company stops displaying news, it could still face the charge because the liability is tied to Australian advertising revenue rather than simply to whether the platform carries news content. 

The law also gives platforms stronger incentives to deal with smaller publishers.

Commercial agreements with large publishers can receive a credit equal to 150% of their value against the levy, while deals with small and medium-sized publishers receive a 200% credit, although individual agreements are subject to caps. 

That detail matters because one criticism of earlier bargaining systems was that the biggest media companies had the negotiating power to capture most of the money.

Australia is now deliberately trying to push more of it toward smaller outlets.

For Google, Meta and other platforms, the immediate decision becomes financial.

They can negotiate with publishers and direct money toward journalism, or potentially surrender as much as 2.5% of their Australian advertising revenue to the government.

For publishers, the law could create a more predictable stream of revenue at a time when traditional advertising and subscription models remain under pressure.

The bigger question is whether other countries copy it.

Governments around the world have struggled with the same problem: how to support the companies paying reporters, editors and photographers when much of the advertising market has migrated to technology platforms.

Australia is now testing one of the most aggressive answers yet.

Instead of asking Big Tech to support journalism, it is putting a price on refusing to do so.

JBizNews Desk | Canberra

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A coalition of major national business groups sued New Jersey on Thursday seeking to block a new state law that can charge employers hundreds of dollars for every worker or dependent enrolled in Medicaid.

The lawsuit was filed by the National Retail Federation, American Hotel & Lodging Association, International Franchise Association and Restaurant Law Center, putting some of the country’s largest retail, hotel, restaurant and franchise interests directly against the state.

The new law applies to employers with 50 or more workers or dependents receiving Medicaid.

The annual charge depends on the size of the employer:

Companies with 50 to 249 Medicaid recipients would pay $325 per person.

Those with 250 to 499 would pay $525 per person.

Employers with 500 or more would pay $725 per person.

For a large company with 1,000 workers or dependents on Medicaid, that could translate into a bill of roughly $725,000 a year.

New Jersey estimates the program could raise approximately $145 million annually, money the state says is needed to help absorb rising Medicaid costs.

Gov. Mikie Sherrill signed the measure in June as New Jersey prepared for federal Medicaid funding changes that state officials expect will place additional pressure on its healthcare budget.

The state’s argument is straightforward: large employers whose workers rely heavily on taxpayer-funded health coverage should contribute toward those costs.

The business groups see it very differently.

They argue the law effectively penalizes companies for employing lower-wage workers and could make businesses think twice about adding employees in New Jersey.

Their federal lawsuit also argues that the state measure conflicts with ERISA, the federal law governing employer-sponsored benefit plans, and raises due-process and privacy concerns.

That creates an important issue for employers.

A company does not necessarily control whether an employee or dependent qualifies for Medicaid. Eligibility can depend on household income, family size and other circumstances that may have little to do with the health coverage an employer offers.

Yet under New Jersey’s system, the employer can still receive a bill based on those enrollments.

For industries employing large numbers of hourly workers — including retailers, restaurants, hotels, warehouses and franchises — the cost could become substantial.

Consider a large retailer with 2,000 workers or dependents enrolled in Medicaid.

At $725 each, the annual assessment could reach $1.45 million.

A company operating hundreds of locations would then have to decide whether to absorb the expense, change employee benefits, reduce hiring, increase prices or shift investment elsewhere.

That is why the case matters beyond New Jersey.

Other states are confronting many of the same Medicaid budget pressures. California has already considered a similar approach.

If New Jersey successfully defends the law, states around the country could begin looking at large employers as another source of Medicaid funding.

That could create an entirely new employment cost for companies with large hourly workforces.

Businesses already calculate payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health insurance, paid leave and other costs before deciding whether to add another employee.

Medicaid assessments could eventually become another number in that calculation.

For New Jersey, the dispute ultimately comes down to who should absorb the rising cost of public healthcare.

The state says large employers should contribute more when substantial portions of their workforce depend on Medicaid.

Businesses argue that shifting those costs onto employers could make hiring those very workers more expensive.

A federal court will now decide whether New Jersey is legally allowed to do it.

JBizNews Desk | Trenton

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Michael Cohen has converted one of America’s most bitter political and legal feuds into a high-value media moment, interviewing President Donald Trump for the first public conversation between the two men in eight years—even as Cohen seeks a presidential pardon.

The taped telephone interview aired Thursday on 77 WABC, where Cohen recently began hosting the weekly program “When You Know, You Know.” An extended version is scheduled to air Sunday.

The reunion gives Cohen’s young radio program the kind of exclusive that established broadcasters spend years pursuing. It also gives WABC a highly marketable event built around two figures whose relationship has generated criminal proceedings, bestselling books, congressional testimony and years of national headlines.

Cohen spent more than a decade working for Trump and the Trump Organization before becoming one of his fiercest critics. He pleaded guilty in 2018 to charges including tax evasion, campaign-finance violations, bank fraud and lying to Congress, and later served more than a year in prison.

He subsequently testified against Trump in the Manhattan criminal case that produced 34 felony convictions for falsifying business records. Cohen also built a second career from the rupture, publishing books, hosting a podcast and becoming a frequent television commentator on Trump’s conduct.

Now, the commercial and political incentives have shifted.

Cohen told CNN that he applied for a pardon from Trump after former President Joe Biden denied his request for clemency. He has also said that he felt pressured and coerced by prosecutors seeking testimony against Trump—a reversal that has angered many of the anti-Trump followers who supported his post-prison media career.

During the WABC conversation, Cohen again called Trump “boss,” while Trump praised him for having “recanted” his previous claims. Their discussion extended beyond the reconciliation to Iran, public opinion and the administration’s record, giving Trump access to Cohen’s audience while allowing Cohen to present himself as the person capable of securing an interview few expected ever to happen.

The pardon request nevertheless leaves a question hanging over the broadcast: whether Cohen’s change in tone represents personal reconciliation, a genuine reassessment of the prosecutions—or an effort to obtain clemency from the only person who can grant it.

For WABC, the answer may be less complicated. The station secured a national media event from a weekly program that had been on the air for barely more than a month.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Jerusalem Deputy Mayor Aryeh King is calling for Israel’s Shin Bet security agency to investigate severe damage to Jewish graves at the Mount of Olives cemetery, warning that the vandalism could represent more than an isolated criminal act.

Photographs published by King on X Thursday show multiple stone grave markers broken and cracked at the ancient cemetery overlooking Jerusalem’s Old City. King said the damage was documented three days earlier and described the images as unlike anything recorded there in decades.

“I very much hope that the Shin Bet investigated the matter thoroughly,” King wrote.

King said similar attacks against the cemetery 25 to 28 years ago were used as “entry tests” for terror cells that later carried out attacks against Jews. He did not present evidence connecting the latest vandalism to a terrorist organization, and no suspect or motive has been publicly identified.

His warning places pressure on Israeli authorities to determine whether the graves were targeted as an act of antisemitic vandalism, organized nationalist violence or ordinary criminal damage.

The Mount of Olives contains one of the world’s oldest and most sacred Jewish cemeteries, with graves dating back thousands of years. Prominent Jewish religious leaders and national figures are buried there, including former Prime Minister Menachem Begin, Nobel laureate S.Y. Agnon and Rabbi Abraham Isaac Kook.

The cemetery has endured repeated desecration throughout its history. During Jordanian control of eastern Jerusalem between 1948 and 1967, tens of thousands of gravestones were damaged, destroyed or removed. More recent decades have brought recurring incidents of smashed headstones, theft and attacks against visitors.

The latest images raise renewed questions about security at a location that carries exceptional religious and national importance. As of Thursday evening, neither the Shin Bet nor Israel Police had publicly announced an investigation or identified those responsible.

JBizNews Desk | Jerusalem

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The internet has crossed a historic threshold: Machines now generate more online traffic than people.

Bots accounted for 53% of web traffic during 2025, up from 51% one year earlier, according to Thales’ 2026 Bad Bot Report. Human activity fell to 47%, meaning businesses can no longer assume that most visitors reaching their websites, applications and digital storefronts are actual customers.

Some automated traffic is useful. Search engines crawl websites to index pages. Banks use bots to monitor transactions, retailers automate inventory updates and legitimate AI agents increasingly compare products or perform tasks for consumers.

The alarming number is underneath the total: 40% of all internet traffic was attributed to malicious bots. Only approximately 13% came from useful automation.

Bad bots do not merely visit websites. They attempt to break into customer accounts, steal inventory, scrape prices and proprietary content, create fake advertising impressions, overwhelm customer-service systems and distort the information companies use to make decisions.

AI is accelerating the problem. Thales said AI-enabled bot attacks increased from approximately 2 million per day to 25 million in one year—a 12.5-fold increase. The company blocked 17.2 trillion automated requests during 2025.

The change is not simply more volume. Earlier bots followed predictable scripts and could often be blocked by identifying unusual speeds or repeated actions. AI-powered bots can alter their behavior, move a computer cursor, pause between requests and imitate the browsing patterns of a real customer. That makes legitimate AI assistants, ordinary consumers and sophisticated attackers increasingly difficult to distinguish.

For retailers, the damage often begins before a customer reaches checkout. Bots can rapidly purchase limited merchandise, reserve inventory they never intend to buy or test thousands of stolen credit-card numbers through inexpensive transactions. Genuine shoppers see products listed as unavailable while criminals resell them elsewhere.

Bots also distort the numbers executives use to run their companies. A marketing campaign may appear to generate thousands of visits even though few came from people. Businesses then spend more money chasing audiences that do not exist, misjudge which products customers want and overestimate the effectiveness of their advertising.

This is especially costly because digital advertising is frequently priced by impressions or clicks. When a bot views or clicks an advertisement, the advertiser may still pay, although there was never a potential customer behind the activity. In severe cases, companies can spend substantial portions of their marketing budgets advertising to machines.

Financial institutions face the greatest direct exposure. The sector received 24% of recorded bot attacks and 46% of account-takeover attempts. Criminals use automated systems to test stolen usernames and passwords across banks, investment platforms and payment applications, exploiting the fact that many people reuse credentials.

The attack surface is also moving away from visible websites. Twenty-seven percent of bot attacks now target application programming interfaces—the digital connections that allow applications, payment systems and business partners to exchange information. By attacking an API directly, a bot can bypass the webpage and operate against a company’s underlying systems at machine speed.

Publishers and other content businesses face a different threat. AI crawlers can copy articles, images, product descriptions and databases without sending readers back to the original source. Cloudflare found that 52% of crawler requests in June were connected with AI training, up from 22% in spring 2025.

That breaks the traditional economic bargain of the open internet. Search engines historically copied enough information to index a page, then directed users to the website, where publishers could earn advertising or subscription revenue. AI systems can absorb the material and provide the answer directly, leaving the company that created it with the server expense but no reader, advertisement or payment.

Businesses cannot solve the problem by blocking every bot. Doing so could remove their products from search results, prevent legitimate AI shopping agents from finding them and disrupt outside services that depend on automated access. The challenge is deciding which machines create value, which should pay for access and which must be stopped.

Companies are responding with behavioral analysis, device verification, rate limits, stronger account authentication and tighter controls around APIs. Some website operators are beginning to charge AI crawlers for access, potentially replacing part of the advertising model with licensing or machine-access fees.

Consumers experience the consequences through additional verification screens, blocked transactions, disappearing inventory and stricter login requirements. Those inconveniences are the visible price of an internet in which a business no longer knows whether the visitor at its digital door is a person, a helpful assistant or a machine preparing an attack.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

CUPERTINO, Calif. — ChatGPT can now do something fundamentally different on a Mac: enter Apple’s Messages app, search conversations and send a text through the same account a person uses for iMessage.

Until now, a user could ask ChatGPT to write a response and then copy it into Messages. With the new Apple Messages integration, ChatGPT can work inside the messaging system itself — reading and searching iMessage, SMS and RCS conversations, preparing replies and, when permission is granted, sending them.

That makes the feature considerably more useful.

It also creates a privacy question that is easy to understand: the better ChatGPT becomes at helping with your messages, the more access it needs to conversations that may contain some of the most private information on your computer.

A user could ask ChatGPT to find what a contractor said last month, summarize a family group chat, locate an address buried inside an old conversation or draft a response to a customer without manually searching through hundreds of messages.

The integration is available through ChatGPT’s Mac desktop experience, including ChatGPT Work and Codex, and works with Apple Messages rather than turning an iPhone itself into a ChatGPT texting interface.

The important distinction is that Apple’s end-to-end encryption has not suddenly disappeared.

Encryption protects an iMessage while it travels between devices.

Once that message arrives on a Mac, is decrypted and becomes readable inside the Messages app, software with the proper permission can potentially work with that information.

That is the layer ChatGPT is now entering.

By default, actions such as sending a message can require the user to approve what ChatGPT is about to do. The user can see the proposed action before it happens.

But ChatGPT’s broader app-permission system can also allow users to reduce how often they are asked for approval.

That convenience creates the real trade-off.

Approving every outgoing message provides another human checkpoint.

Giving an AI assistant continuing permission to act makes the system faster, but it also gives the software more autonomy over communications coming from the user’s own account.

For businesses, the productivity potential is significant.

A salesperson could ask ChatGPT what a customer said about pricing last week.

A small-business owner could search months of customer messages without remembering the exact wording.

An executive could summarize a long thread and prepare a response.

An employee could ask ChatGPT to find a meeting location or phone number buried inside a conversation.

But there is another privacy issue that has nothing to do with whether Apple’s encryption remains secure.

Your messages contain other people’s information too.

A conversation with an accountant may contain financial information.

A message from a doctor’s office may contain medical information.

A customer thread may contain confidential business details.

A family group chat can contain personal information belonging to several people.

Allowing an AI system to search Messages therefore does not expose only information the user personally created.

It gives the system access to information other people sent to that user as well.

That distinction could become particularly important for companies operating in regulated industries or handling confidential customer data.

OpenAI’s app system allows administrators in managed workplaces to restrict whether connected applications can only read information or can also take actions, and whether employees must approve those actions before they occur.

That means businesses adopting the feature will have to make a decision that is becoming increasingly common across corporate AI deployments: how useful do we want the AI to be, and how much authority are we willing to give it to achieve that usefulness?

Users can also disconnect app access later, while businesses can limit permissions centrally depending on their ChatGPT workspace configuration.

The Apple Messages integration is part of a much larger shift in how ChatGPT works.

The original chatbot waited for a question.

The next generation of AI assistants is being designed to enter the software people already use, retrieve information from it and increasingly perform actions on their behalf.

That is why Messages matters.

Reading a private conversation is more sensitive than answering a web question.

Sending a message is more consequential than drafting one.

And sending that message from a person’s own Apple account begins to blur the line between software that assists someone and software that acts as them.

For Apple, the development also highlights a difficult tension.

The company has built a substantial part of its reputation around privacy, device security and tight control over personal information.

At the same time, modern AI assistants become more useful when they can reach deeper into the user’s digital life.

Those two goals are not necessarily incompatible.

But they require users to understand exactly what access they are granting.

The practical rule is therefore simple: users who enable the feature should pay close attention to its permissions and keep approval requirements in place when they want direct control over what ChatGPT sends.

The larger change is harder to ignore.

Messages was once simply where conversations lived. Now it can also become information an AI assistant searches, summarizes and acts upon.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

WASHINGTON — President Donald Trump has personally put Iran’s trading partners on notice, using Truth Social to warn that countries continuing to provide Tehran with an economic lifeline could face serious economic consequences from the United States.

The warning was followed Thursday by Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent, who said Washington is preparing what he described as the toughest sanctions campaign in history against Iran and specifically urged China to cooperate.

China is the critical target.

More than 80% of Iran’s exported oil goes to China, making Beijing by far Tehran’s most important remaining energy customer and one of the biggest reasons Iran has been able to continue generating oil revenue despite years of U.S. sanctions.

Trump’s message broadens the pressure campaign beyond Iran itself.

Rather than focusing only on Iranian banks, oil companies and government entities, Washington is increasingly threatening the foreign companies, financial institutions, refiners, shipping networks and governments that help Iran move money and goods.

That is what makes the strategy potentially far more powerful.

Sanctions against Iran can be circumvented by companies willing to operate outside the U.S. financial system. Secondary sanctions create a different calculation by threatening those companies with consequences in the American market.

A refinery may be willing to buy discounted Iranian crude.

It may be far less willing to do so if that transaction jeopardizes access to U.S. banks, dollar clearing, insurance markets, American suppliers or customers.

China has built substantial infrastructure around Iranian energy trade.

Iranian crude has moved through networks of intermediaries and shipping companies, while some transactions are conducted outside the dollar-based financial system. Independent Chinese refiners have also played a major role in buying Iranian oil.

That makes Beijing the most difficult test of Trump’s new strategy.

China is large enough to absorb economic pressure in ways smaller countries cannot, and many of the Chinese companies involved in Iranian oil purchases have limited exposure to the United States.

But China also has enormous interests tied to the American and global financial systems.

That gives Washington leverage.

Asked Thursday whether Chinese companies or institutions could face additional sanctions if Beijing continues purchasing Iranian oil, Bessent did not rule out further action, saying some discussions were better conducted privately.

The message itself was unmistakable.

Washington wants countries doing business with Tehran to decide which commercial relationship matters more.

Iran’s exposure extends beyond China.

Turkey maintains billions of dollars in annual trade with Iran and receives natural gas from the country.

Iraq remains deeply dependent on Iranian gas and electricity-related imports while maintaining significant cross-border commerce.

Pakistan has been seeking to expand bilateral trade with Tehran, while Oman and other regional economies retain commercial connections to Iran.

The United Arab Emirates has historically served as one of Iran’s most important commercial gateways, particularly through Dubai’s banking, shipping and re-export networks. But the UAE has recently moved to suspend financial dealings with Iran amid escalating regional tensions.

That is exactly the kind of response Washington hopes to replicate elsewhere.

The objective is not simply to prevent Tehran from selling oil.

It is to make every bank, refinery, insurer, shipowner, exchange house and trading company involved in Iranian commerce reconsider whether the revenue is worth the potential cost.

That calculation becomes especially powerful for multinational companies.

A business earning millions of dollars from Iran-linked trade may have billions of dollars of business tied to the United States or the dollar-based financial system.

Secondary sanctions force that company to choose.

The pressure campaign also carries risks for Washington.

China is one of the world’s largest energy importers and a major supplier of manufactured goods, industrial components and strategically important materials to the United States.

If Washington aggressively targets large Chinese financial institutions or major companies over Iranian commerce, Beijing could retaliate.

That could turn an Iran sanctions campaign into a wider U.S.-China economic confrontation.

Energy markets are already paying attention.

Oil prices climbed sharply Thursday after Trump’s warning, with Brent crude settling near $93.78 a barrel and U.S. crude near $87.83, reflecting concern that tougher sanctions could further restrict Iranian supply or complicate flows through the Strait of Hormuz.

For businesses and consumers, that means Trump’s economic offensive has consequences far beyond Tehran.

Stronger sanctions could squeeze Iranian revenue.

They could also raise oil prices, increase transportation and manufacturing costs and deepen tensions with countries that continue buying Iranian energy.

Bessent is expected to provide additional details on the sanctions strategy Monday.

The central question is no longer whether the United States can impose more sanctions on Iran.

It is whether Trump is prepared to impose enough pressure on China and Iran’s other trading partners to make continued commerce with Tehran more expensive than walking away from it.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

New applications for unemployment benefits fell to 206,000 last week, reinforcing one of the strangest features of the U.S. labor market: companies have sharply slowed hiring, but they still are not laying off large numbers of workers.

Initial jobless claims declined by 6,000 in the week ended August 15, according to Labor Department data released Thursday. Economists had expected about 210,000.

That keeps claims near the low end of this year’s range and suggests businesses remain reluctant to cut existing staff even as the broader job market has weakened.

The other side of the picture is more complicated.

Continued claims — people remaining on unemployment benefits after their initial application — rose by 18,000 to 1.799 million.

That combination matters.

Low initial claims indicate that relatively few workers are being newly laid off. Rising continued claims can suggest that people who do lose jobs are having a harder time finding another one quickly.

In other words, the labor market increasingly looks less like a traditional downturn and more like a freeze.

Businesses are not aggressively expanding payrolls.

But they are also holding tightly to workers they already have.

That makes sense after several years in which employers struggled to recruit and retain staff. Companies that remember labor shortages may be reluctant to cut trained employees unless demand deteriorates much more sharply.

July’s employment report showed how weak hiring has become.

The U.S. economy lost 23,000 jobs in July, driven largely by declines in local-government education, while private employers added only about 30,000 positions.

Yet the unemployment rate remained at 4.1%, still low by historical standards.

That is why weekly jobless claims have become particularly important for investors and the Federal Reserve.

If claims suddenly begin climbing, it would signal that slower hiring is turning into outright job destruction.

So far, that has not happened.

For workers, however, the distinction is important.

Someone already employed may still have relatively strong job security.

Someone trying to enter the workforce, switch careers or recover from a layoff may face a much more difficult environment because fewer companies are creating new positions.

The trend also complicates the Federal Reserve’s interest-rate decisions.

A sharply weakening labor market would strengthen the argument for lower rates. But persistently low layoffs give policymakers less reason to rush, particularly while inflation remains above the Fed’s 2% target.

The latest claims report therefore captures the current economy unusually well.

America is not experiencing a wave of layoffs.

It is experiencing something quieter: fewer companies are hiring, fewer workers are leaving, and the people who do lose jobs may be spending longer trying to get back in.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street’s Thursday selloff was about more than Walmart. The bond market’s brief relief disappeared, oil climbed above $93, and investors received an uncomfortable set of signals from the American economy: companies are still reluctant to lay workers off and factories are getting busier, yet the country’s largest retailer says shoppers are increasingly making trade-offs.

Markets — Dow Drops Nearly 700 Points as Wednesday’s Bond Relief Vanishes

The S&P 500 closed at 7,642.69, down 0.85%. The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 681.62 points, or 1.27%, to 52,781.43, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 1.00% to 26,067.81

The important move was again in bonds. The 10-year Treasury yield moved back toward 4.7% and the 30-year yield climbed again after Wednesday’s Treasury intervention had temporarily pushed long-term borrowing costs lower. Investors are increasingly questioning whether government bond buybacks can counter the larger forces pushing yields higher: government borrowing, inflation risk and enormous corporate capital needs. 

Oil added another layer of pressure. Brent crude climbed 2.4% to roughly $93.78 a barrel, while U.S. crude moved above $87 as Middle East supply risks remained unresolved. Higher energy costs hit airlines, cruise companies and consumer stocks while supporting the energy sector. 

Among Thursday’s major movers, Walmart fell 9.6%, Advance Auto Parts plunged 26.7%, Deere gained 6.8%, Norwegian Cruise Line dropped 5.3% and United Airlines fell 4.1%. 

Retail — Walmart Just Gave the Clearest Warning Yet About the Consumer

Walmart reported its slowest comparable-sales growth in six years, with U.S. comparable sales increasing only 2.6% versus the 3.8% Wall Street expected. Store-traffic growth slowed to 1.5%, while average spending per transaction increased just 1.1%, down sharply from 3.1% a year earlier. 

That is particularly significant because Walmart has been one of the biggest beneficiaries when households become more price conscious. Consumers normally trade down toward Walmart during difficult economic periods. Weakness there therefore suggests something different: some families may no longer simply be changing where they shop — they may be reducing what they buy.

Walmart said gasoline prices above $4 were forcing shoppers to make trade-offs and now expects roughly $2 billion more in fuel costs than previously forecast. The company is responding aggressively, rolling back prices on about 11,000 products, partly using $2.9 billion in tariff refunds to finance the reductions. Its e-commerce business remained much stronger, growing 24%, while advertising revenue jumped 43%. 

The contradiction is important. Walmart actually raised its full-year sales and profit forecast, yet investors erased tens of billions of dollars from its market value because they were more concerned about what the quarter revealed about the consumer.

For retailers, restaurants and other consumer-facing businesses, Thursday’s Walmart report may be more useful than a government survey: the customer is still spending, but increasingly deciding what can wait.

Industrial Economy — Deere Finds a New Growth Engine in AI Data Centers

John Deere reported its first quarterly profit increase in three years, but the surprise was where much of the strength came from.

Deere’s construction and forestry sales rose 18%, becoming its fastest-growing business as spending on infrastructure and the enormous buildout of AI data centers increases demand for heavy machinery. Customer backlogs in the division now extend well into fiscal 2027. 

Meanwhile, Deere’s traditional large-farm machinery business remains weak. Production and Precision Agriculture revenue declined 6% as lower crop economics continue to discourage purchases of expensive tractors and combines. Deere still believes 2026 will mark the bottom of the agricultural-equipment cycle. 

That makes Deere an unusually useful window into the U.S. economy.

Farmers are pulling back while data-center builders are buying.

Deere now expects full-year net income of $4.75 billion to $5 billion, raising the lower end of its prior forecast. It also received a $110 million tariff refund during the quarter, although management expects net tariff costs of about $750 million this year and approximately $1 billion in 2027. 

The AI boom is therefore no longer just creating revenue for Nvidia, chip designers and cloud providers. It is selling excavators and construction machinery.

Global Technology — Alibaba’s AI Bet Is Growing Faster Than Its Profits Can Handle

Alibaba reported a dramatic 75% decline in quarterly net profit even though revenue rose 9%.

The reason was not collapse in the underlying business. It was spending.

Alibaba is pouring enormous amounts of capital into AI infrastructure, cloud computing and chips. Capital expenditure jumped 75% to about 67.7 billion yuan, while cloud and AI-services revenue surged 45% to 48.44 billion yuan

Alibaba has already spent roughly half of the 380 billion yuan — about $56 billion — it plans to invest in AI between 2026 and 2029. CEO Eddie Wu said the company believes those investments can reach break-even within roughly three years. 

The business question is becoming familiar across the technology industry: companies no longer need to prove that AI demand exists.

They need to prove that the extraordinary amount of money required to serve that demand will eventually produce acceptable returns.

Alibaba’s U.S.-listed shares fell about 4.6% Thursday as investors confronted that arithmetic. 

Economy — Factories Are Accelerating Even as Consumers Become More Cautious

Thursday’s economic data complicated the slowdown narrative.

Initial unemployment claims fell by 6,000 to 206,000 for the week ended August 15, below economists’ expectation of 210,000. Continuing claims rose to 1.799 million but remain relatively low. The picture is increasingly one of a low-hire, low-fire labor market: companies are reluctant to add workers aggressively, but they are not conducting widespread layoffs either. 

Manufacturing data were considerably stronger.

The Philadelphia Federal Reserve’s manufacturing index jumped to 47.4 in August from 41.4 in July, its highest reading since April 2021. Nearly 57% of surveyed manufacturers reported increasing activity, while the employment index rose to its highest level since April 2022. 

Perhaps most striking, the index measuring manufacturers’ expectations for activity six months from now surged to 73.6, its highest reading since August 1983

But there is a catch for business owners: 38% of manufacturers said customers have become more price sensitive since last quarter. Among firms expecting near-term industry cost changes, 80% believe competitors will respond by raising prices. 

That is an unusual combination — businesses are increasingly optimistic about production while becoming more aware that customers may resist higher prices.

Food Distribution — A $1 Billion Hedge-Fund Bet Puts AI Inside Sysco’s Trucks and Warehouses

D.E. Shaw has accumulated a stake worth more than $1 billion in Sysco, the world’s largest food distributor.

The investment is particularly important because the hedge fund is supporting Sysco’s attempt to use artificial intelligence, automation and technology to transform its enormous distribution network. Sysco expects those initiatives to produce roughly $100 million in savings during fiscal 2027

Sysco is also adding directors with technology, e-commerce and food-distribution experience as it prepares for its planned acquisition of Restaurant Depot. D.E. Shaw is expected to help the company raise capital for that transaction. 

For restaurants and food businesses, this is more than an activist-investor story.

AI is increasingly moving into one of the least glamorous but most consequential parts of the economy: predicting how much food businesses need, routing trucks, automating orders, managing warehouses and reducing spoilage.

Enterprise AI — Anthropic Moves to Give Businesses More Control of Their Data

Anthropic is preparing to give enterprise customers greater control over how their data are retained when using advanced Claude models, according to a person familiar with the company’s plans.

The company is also preparing a new safety system expected later this year. 

For corporate AI adoption, data retention has become one of the biggest obstacles standing between experimentation and full deployment. Businesses are increasingly willing to use AI, but banks, healthcare companies, law firms, manufacturers and large corporations remain cautious about where confidential prompts, documents and outputs are stored.

Anthropic’s change shows where the enterprise AI competition is moving.

The winning model may not simply be the smartest one.

It may be the one a company’s legal, compliance and cybersecurity departments are willing to approve.

What to Watch Friday

BJ’s Wholesale Club reports Friday morning, with its earnings call scheduled for 8:00 a.m. Eastern. After Walmart’s rare sales miss, BJ’s becomes a particularly useful second reading on value-oriented consumers and whether warehouse clubs are seeing the same trade-offs in grocery, fuel and discretionary spending. 

At 9:45 a.m. ET, S&P Global releases its flash August U.S. manufacturing and services PMIs. Economists are looking for manufacturing activity to remain in expansion territory around the mid-50s, making the report important after Thursday’s exceptionally strong Philadelphia Fed reading. 

At 10:00 a.m. ET, the Bureau of Labor Statistics releases July state employment and unemployment figures. The report will show where the national labor slowdown is actually concentrated and could be particularly important for businesses evaluating regional hiring conditions. 

Oil and Treasury yields may still matter more than any single earnings report.

If Brent remains above $90 while long-term Treasury yields continue climbing, businesses could face a difficult combination going into the weekend: expensive financing, expensive energy and a consumer who is becoming increasingly careful about every dollar.

That was Thursday’s real business story.

The economy is not collapsing. Factories are busy, layoffs remain low and AI-related investment is booming.

But the cost of running a business is rising again at precisely the moment customers are becoming harder to convince to spend.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

SpaceX shares failed their second major post-IPO supply test on Thursday, falling 4.1% as approximately 319 million shares held by employees and early investors became eligible for sale.

The stock closed at $133.94, down $5.71, after falling as low as $130.43 during the session. That left SpaceX below its $135 IPO price for the first time at the close since its powerful rebound earlier this month.

At Thursday’s closing price, the newly unlocked shares carried a theoretical value of approximately $42.7 billion. That does not mean $42.7 billion of stock was sold. An unlock simply removes contractual restrictions and allows qualifying shareholders to sell, transfer or lend their shares.

The distinction matters because Thursday’s release did not create new stock or dilute existing shareholders. It increased the potential supply available to the market — and investors showed less willingness to absorb that supply at recent prices.

SpaceX’s first major unlock produced the opposite reaction. On Aug. 6, approximately 911.5 million shares became eligible for sale, yet the stock rose 6.1% that day to $114.92. It then jumped nearly 16% the following session and gained approximately 23% for the week, as buyers overwhelmed whatever selling emerged.

Thursday’s smaller unlock delivered a weaker result. SpaceX traded nearly 119 million shares during the session, meaning the entire 319 million-share tranche was equivalent to almost three times one day’s actual trading volume.

The pressure is not over. Another approximately 319 million shares are scheduled to become eligible in September, followed by a much larger release tied to SpaceX’s third-quarter earnings. Additional shares are expected to unlock in December.

Elon Musk’s holdings remain subject to longer restrictions and were not part of Thursday’s release.

For investors, the arithmetic is straightforward: the first unlock showed that additional supply can be absorbed when demand is strong. The second showed that the market’s appetite has limits — especially when the stock is approaching its IPO price and billions of additional shares are still waiting to enter the tradable market.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

European stocks slipped for a seventh consecutive session Thursday, their longest losing streak since September 2023, as rising oil prices revived inflation concerns and placed fresh pressure on travel, retail and other fuel-sensitive businesses.

The pan-European Stoxx 600 closed 0.12% lower at 650.35. The daily decline was small, but the uninterrupted run of losses points to a broader change in investor confidence after European shares approached record highs earlier this month.

Brent crude climbed more than 2% and moved above $90 a barrel as stalled U.S.-Iran negotiations and continued Middle East instability raised concerns about energy supplies. Higher oil prices benefit producers, but they also increase transportation, manufacturing and heating costs across a European economy that remains especially exposed to imported energy.

Energy stocks gained about 0.9%, while travel and leisure shares fell 0.7%. France’s CAC 40 declined 0.6%, hurt by weakness in luxury companies including LVMH and Kering. Germany’s DAX also finished lower, while Britain’s FTSE 100 was roughly flat.

Fresh German data added to the concern, showing producer prices rising at their fastest pace in more than three years as energy and goods costs increased. That creates a difficult calculation for the European Central Bank: slowing economic activity would normally support lower interest rates, but another inflation wave could prevent policymakers from providing relief.

JD Sports Fashion became one of the day’s largest corporate casualties, plunging more than 14% after cutting its profit outlook because of weaker North American sales. Danish biotechnology company Novonesis moved sharply in the opposite direction, gaining nearly 10% following strong results and a share-buyback announcement.

Europe’s decline remains modest in percentage terms, and the Stoxx 600 is still up for the year. The warning is in the consistency: investors have now sold the market for seven straight sessions as expensive energy, elevated borrowing costs and weaker corporate guidance begin pressing against the continent’s previously resilient earnings outlook.

JBizNews Desk | London

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Apple’s camera-equipped AirPods are still expected to arrive in late 2027, despite an apparent company video leak that made the unusual artificial-intelligence product appear ready for an earlier release.

The 13-second video was discovered inside the release-candidate version of macOS Tahoe 26.7, software normally distributed shortly before a public update. It shows a man wearing AirPods while looking at a physical book and asking Siri to remember it. The assistant describes a feature called Visual Intelligence that makes the user’s surroundings “saveable.”

The demonstration matters because it provides the clearest evidence yet of how Apple intends to move artificial intelligence beyond the iPhone screen. The cameras would not primarily take photographs or record conventional video. They would give Siri low-resolution visual information about whatever is in front of the wearer, allowing the assistant to identify an object, understand its context and respond to a spoken request.

A shopper could look at a product and ask Siri to remember it, compare it or locate it later. Someone preparing dinner could ask for recipes based on ingredients on a counter. Travelers could receive directions based on landmarks, while users with limited vision could ask the assistant to identify objects or describe their surroundings.

The leak, however, does not necessarily reveal the exact product Apple plans to sell in 2027.

Apple is reportedly developing at least two camera-equipped AirPods projects under the internal designations B790 and B798. References found inside macOS indicate that the leaked demonstration may involve B790, while the more advanced B798 model has been associated with the late-2027 release schedule. The video could therefore represent an earlier hardware version, a software demonstration or a product Apple is using internally to prepare Visual Intelligence before the final consumer device is ready.

That distinction is important because the most difficult part of the project is not placing a small camera inside an earbud. Apple must build visual-AI models capable of interpreting a constantly changing environment without producing dangerous or embarrassing mistakes. A phone camera is deliberately pointed at an object. Earbuds move with the wearer’s head, can be covered by hair or clothing and may capture incomplete or blurred information.

The project was reportedly intended for an earlier release but slipped partly because of Apple’s prolonged difficulties delivering its more advanced Siri. Without a reliable assistant capable of understanding context, remembering previous requests and connecting visual information with applications, camera-equipped AirPods would offer little more than expensive sensors.

Apple is also trying to solve a hardware problem that competing AI companies have approached through glasses. Meta’s camera-equipped Ray-Ban glasses place cameras near the wearer’s eyes, giving them a direct view of the scene. AirPods are less visually intrusive and already familiar to hundreds of millions of consumers, but the camera angle from a moving earbud could be less stable and less precise.

Privacy may become the largest obstacle. AirPods are small enough that people nearby may not realize they contain cameras. Apple reportedly does not intend the earbuds to function as covert recording devices and may include an external indicator when visual information is being processed or transmitted. But the company has not explained whether images would be analyzed entirely on the device, temporarily sent to an iPhone or uploaded to cloud servers.

Those details will determine whether consumers view the product as a useful assistant or an invisible surveillance device.

For Apple, the commercial opportunity is larger than selling another premium pair of earbuds. If AirPods can continuously connect Siri with the physical world, they could become an AI interface that users wear for hours—reducing the need to remove an iPhone, open an application and type a question.

The leaked video shows that Apple’s concept is no longer merely experimental. But it does not mean the finished product is imminent. The company still needs to prove that Visual Intelligence can see accurately, respond quickly, protect bystanders’ privacy and deliver enough practical value to justify putting cameras into one of the world’s most common personal accessories.

JBizNews Desk | Cupertino, California

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said the United States is unlikely to restart large-scale combat against Iran, signaling that Washington intends to rely on financial isolation and a continuing maritime blockade to pressure Tehran.

Bessent said the administration is preparing what he called “the toughest sanctions in history,” describing the combination of the blockade and expanded economic restrictions as a “one-two punch” designed to deprive Iran of oil revenue, foreign currency and access to international trade.

The strategy depends heavily on enforcement beyond Iran itself. Washington is expected to target foreign banks, refiners, shipping companies and trading networks that continue facilitating Iranian commerce, effectively forcing governments and businesses to choose between dealing with Tehran and retaining access to the American financial system.

China presents the largest test. It purchases more than 80% of Iran’s shipped oil and remains Tehran’s most important economic lifeline. Bessent urged Beijing to cooperate, arguing that China also has a major interest in stabilizing the Persian Gulf because roughly half of its energy supplies originate in the region.

Bessent said stronger economic pressure should reduce the likelihood that the United States will resume an expensive, large-scale military campaign. The administration’s calculation is that Iran can survive isolated strikes more easily than the sustained loss of oil revenue, banking access and commercial relationships.

The approach is not without risk. Cutting Iranian barrels from the market while shipping through the Strait of Hormuz remains constrained could push energy prices higher. Brent crude climbed above $94 Thursday as traders assessed whether the new campaign would further restrict supplies moving out of the Persian Gulf.

Bessent is expected to disclose additional details Monday, including how aggressively Washington will pursue companies and countries that continue doing business with Iran.

JBizNews Desk | Washington

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Five Americans were among seven people killed Wednesday when a helicopter carrying guests on a luxury safari crashed in the remote mountains of northern Kenya, turning a short flight between wildlife destinations into an international aviation investigation.

The Eurocopter EC130 B4 went down at approximately 9:13 a.m. near Mount Ololokwe in Samburu County, according to the Kenya Civil Aviation Authority. All six passengers and the pilot died.

The aircraft was flying from the Loisaba Conservancy toward the Ewaso Nyiro area, a route across one of Kenya’s most celebrated—and geographically isolated—safari regions. The excursion had been arranged for guests of luxury travel company &Beyond, while the flight itself was operated by Lady Lori Kenya.

That distinction will become important to the investigation. Safari companies often assemble a trip using independent aviation operators, lodges, guides and ground-transportation providers. Investigators will need to determine not only what happened in the air, but who controlled the aircraft, maintained it, approved the flight and assessed the conditions along the route.

Among those killed was José Alberto Suárez, a longtime Telemundo executive who served as president and general manager of the network’s stations in Orlando, Tampa and Fort Myers-Naples. NBCUniversal said Suárez had spent nearly two decades within its television operations and remembered him as a deeply respected leader.

Miami businessman Roger Edward Duarte was also killed. Duarte built George Stone Crab and later co-founded My Ceviche, developing a food business that earned him recognition on Forbes’ 30 Under 30 list.

The other American victims were identified as Adam Martin Hlavaty, Henry Parra and Stephany Maria Hollihan Vásconez.

Hollihan Vásconez was traveling with her husband, Michele Sensi-Contugi Ycaza, the director general of Ecuador’s Strategic Intelligence Center. Ecuador’s government confirmed his death, adding a national-security dimension to an accident that had initially been reported as a tourist aviation disaster.

The pilot, Josh Outram, also died.

The crash occurred in rocky, difficult-to-reach terrain, and a fire at the site complicated the initial recovery operation. Images from the region show why helicopters are used there: wildlife conservancies and river destinations can be separated by mountains, unpaved roads and hours of ground travel. Aircraft can turn that journey into a short transfer, but they also place passengers over areas where emergency crews cannot arrive quickly.

The EC130 B4 is a single-engine light helicopter commonly used for sightseeing and passenger transport because of its wide cabin and panoramic visibility. The aircraft type alone does not indicate what caused the crash, and Kenyan authorities have not reported evidence of a mechanical failure, pilot error or weather-related problem.

The Kenya Air Accident Investigation Department is leading the inquiry. Investigators are expected to examine the helicopter’s maintenance history, pilot records, weather conditions, flight planning and any recoverable aircraft data. The wreckage pattern and evidence of fire will also be analyzed to determine whether the aircraft experienced trouble before impact or whether the fire began afterward.

Lady Lori said it was cooperating with authorities. &Beyond said the cause remained unknown and that it was supporting those affected by the disaster. The U.S. State Department confirmed the deaths of five American citizens and said the U.S. Embassy was working with Kenyan authorities and assisting their families.

The crash strikes directly at Kenya’s high-end safari industry, where private aviation is not simply an attraction but part of the transportation system. Luxury itineraries frequently connect remote conservancies by helicopter or small aircraft, allowing travelers to reach wilderness areas that would otherwise require long and difficult drives.

That system depends heavily on confidence: confidence in operators, maintenance standards, pilots and the local regulators overseeing them. Until investigators determine why this helicopter went down, the most consequential question for Kenya’s safari business will remain unanswered—whether this was an isolated tragedy or a warning about a broader weakness in the aviation network carrying tourists into its most remote destinations.

JBizNews Desk | Samburu County, Kenya

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

A dollar wired to Israel today buys less than it did a month ago. The Bank of Israel set the representative rate on Monday, Aug. 17, at NIS 2.95 to the dollar, and over the past month the shekel has gained about 2.5% against the American currency — enough to make it the best-performing currency in the world over that stretch, according to Meitav.

The arithmetic is easy to follow. Send $1,000 to Israel in mid-July and it converted to roughly 3,020 shekels. The same $1,000 today comes out around 2,950 — about 70 shekels less. A family covering NIS 8,000 a month in Jerusalem rent for a child in school is now paying close to $66 more each month for the identical apartment. Nothing about the rent changed. The exchange rate did.

Two things are pushing in the same direction. The dollar itself has sagged to its weakest level in roughly two months, after softer American economic data cooled expectations for another Federal Reserve rate increase. Traders now put the odds of a hike at the Fed’s next meeting near one in three, down from about three in four at the end of July. At the same time, a strong run on Wall Street — the S&P 500 has added more than 3% in a month — tends to pull money toward the shekel, a pattern Israeli strategists have tracked for years.

The shekel is also simply outrunning its peers. The euro gained 1.5% against the dollar over the same month and the British pound 1.8%. Israel’s currency did better than both.

Inside Israel, the strong shekel is doing quiet work on prices. Imported goods, fuel and anything priced in dollars cost less in shekel terms, and annual inflation has drifted down to 1.5%, below the midpoint of the Bank of Israel’s 1% to 3% target range. IBI chief economist Rafi Gozlan cautions that the relief is temporary: much of the recent moderation came from the currency itself, and as that effect fades against a tight labor market with more demand for workers than supply, inflation is likely to pick back up later this year.

The pain sits with Israeli exporters and manufacturers, who collect revenue in dollars and pay wages and rent in shekels. Every point of appreciation shaves their margins. Their trade groups have spent months pressing the central bank for deeper interest rate cuts and for dollar buying to slow the climb — a tool the Bank of Israel used sparingly in June and has otherwise kept holstered.

That is the decision in front of Governor Amir Yaron. Cutting rates or buying dollars would ease the squeeze on factories and tech firms but risks reigniting the inflation that the strong shekel has been suppressing. For American families and businesses sending money to Israel, the practical takeaway is narrower: the cost of doing so has been rising for a year, and nothing in this month’s numbers suggests it is about to reverse.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Investors have poured approximately $366 billion into California companies since the beginning of 2026—more than three times the venture capital raised by companies in the other 49 states combined.

The arithmetic is difficult to overstate. The rest of the country together attracted less than approximately $122 billion. New York, the runner-up, received about $27 billion, meaning California raised more than 13 times as much as its nearest competitor. The state has already collected nearly twice as much venture funding as it did during its previous record year in 2025.

One industry explains most of it. OpenAI raised $122 billion in March, the largest financing round in Silicon Valley history. Anthropic secured another $95 billion across two rounds. Those two artificial-intelligence companies alone account for $217 billion—nearly 60 cents of every venture dollar invested in California this year.

That is enough money to distort an entire national map. Remove OpenAI and Anthropic, and California would still lead the country. Include them, and two companies headquartered within the same technology cluster raised substantially more than all startups in the other 49 states combined.

It is important to understand how the count works. Venture funding is generally credited to the state where the company is headquartered, not necessarily where the money will ultimately be spent. If a San Francisco AI company raises billions and uses part of it to purchase chips or build data centers in Texas, Georgia or another state, the entire financing round still appears in California’s column.

California therefore receives the investment headline, while other states can receive the construction jobs, electricity demand, land purchases and equipment orders created by that money.

The boom is broader than two enormous financings, although the largest rounds dominate the total. More than 4,000 California startups have raised capital this year. Torrance-based defense manufacturer Hadrian Automation announced a $1.37 billion round in August, while live-commerce company Whatnot raised $545 million.

Southern California is developing its own version of the boom around defense, aerospace and advanced manufacturing, while the Bay Area remains the center of AI models, software and venture financing. The result is not one California investment story but two: concentrated AI wealth in the north and a growing defense-and-space cluster in the south.

The jobs tell a more complicated story. California’s technology sector has lost roughly 110,000 positions since 2022, even as investment reached unprecedented levels. Technology companies are directing more capital toward chips, computing capacity, electricity and highly compensated AI specialists while reducing payrolls elsewhere.

Record venture funding, in other words, does not mean record hiring. A $10 billion AI financing can lift California’s investment total without creating anything close to the number of jobs once associated with a similarly large factory or corporate expansion.

The money is nevertheless reaching California’s broader economy. The state collected approximately $147 billion in personal-income taxes during the fiscal year that ended June 30, compared with the $126 billion previously projected. Rising technology compensation, stock-market gains and AI-related wealth helped produce the difference, giving Sacramento additional room for education, reserves and infrastructure.

California is also trying to protect its advantage. Gov. Gavin Newsom signed legislation in July extending the California Competes Tax Credit, which offers businesses tax incentives to remain, expand or create jobs in the state. That extension comes as California confronts high housing costs, extensive regulation and a proposed one-time 5% billionaire tax that critics warn could drive wealthy founders and investors elsewhere.

Tax incentives alone, however, do not explain the $366 billion. Capital is following a cluster that took decades to assemble: Stanford and Berkeley researchers, experienced founders, semiconductor specialists, AI engineers and investors capable of writing multibillion-dollar checks.

Other states may not be able to reproduce that network quickly. Their more immediate opportunity lies beneath it—providing the power plants, transmission lines, data centers, construction crews and land required to operate the AI systems California companies are financing.

That is the divide hidden inside the record. California is collecting the capital and creating much of the intellectual property. A growing share of the physical economy needed to support it may be built somewhere else.

JBizNews Desk | San Francisco

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

The damage from artificial intelligence in the job market is not spread evenly across the economy. It is concentrated in a handful of industries and falls hardest on the people trying to get their first job.

Goldman Sachs published the findings Wednesday in a report titled “Global Economics Comment: Is AI Impacting Global Labor Markets?” The bank found that industries more exposed to AI automation have seen slower growth in job openings since the second half of 2022, with the effect most pronounced in the United States, Germany and Australia.

The onset of generative AI tools, the report said, “may have led companies in highly exposed industries to reevaluate their hiring plans.”

The clearest casualty is the call center. Call center employment in the U.S. now runs 39% below where the long-run trend says it should be. Canada is 33% below, Germany 27%. That is not subtle. Roughly two out of every five call center jobs that would ordinarily exist in America are not there.

Software publishing, management consulting and advertising show the same pattern, and employment across information and communication services has slowed in nearly every major developed economy since 2022. Outside the U.S., however, employment in those industries still sits near or above its long-run trend — meaning American workers in these fields are absorbing more of the hit than their counterparts abroad.

The age split is the sharpest finding. Across more than 800 occupations, a 10% level of AI exposure costs about 0.1 percentage points of annual headcount growth overall in the U.S., France and Canada. For entry-level roles in the U.S., that drag runs above 0.2 points — double the effect. The work that used to train a new hire, summarizing documents, drafting first passes, answering routine calls, is precisely the work software now does for a fraction of the cost.

The scale is real but not catastrophic. Goldman’s earlier research estimated AI was trimming about 16,000 jobs a month from U.S. payroll growth, later revised to roughly 11,000 by June as hiring in construction and other less-exposed sectors offset the losses. That reflects roughly 25,000 positions displaced monthly against about 9,000 created around AI tools. Set against an economy that typically adds 150,000 to 250,000 jobs a month in an expansion, AI is shaving off something on the order of 1 in 20 of those gains.

Goldman economists also note a counterweight: when technology cuts the cost of producing something, buyers often want more of it, which pulls workers back in. Hiring tied to data center construction and broader productivity gains is not captured in the bank’s current estimate.

The practical read for anyone entering the workforce is to look at exposure, not headlines. Call centers, entry-level marketing and junior consulting are contracting. Construction, skilled trades, healthcare and the physical buildout supporting AI itself are not. The pressure, Goldman concludes, is measurable and visible in the data — but still confined to a relatively narrow set of industries and workers.

For now.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Washington Dulles International Airport is moving ahead with one of the largest airport reconstruction projects in U.S. history—a $19.9 billion overhaul that will rebuild its terminal, add new concourses and finally replace the slow passenger vehicles that carry travelers across the tarmac.

The Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority approved the plan Wednesday. It includes $6.2 billion to reconstruct the main terminal and $3.75 billion for underground tunnels and an automated passenger-transit system.

The tunnels would eliminate Dulles’ distinctive “people movers,” the aging mobile lounges that raise and lower passengers between the terminal and aircraft areas. Once considered innovative, the vehicles have become one of the airport’s most common passenger complaints.

The project will add or renovate approximately 5 million square feet. Work on the main terminal is expected to begin in late 2027, while major portions of the new transit system, terminal renovations and concourse construction are targeted for completion beginning in 2034. Other concourse work could continue into 2039.

Dulles needs the additional capacity. Passenger traffic increased 6.4% last year to a record 29 million, making it the fastest-growing large U.S. airport. United Airlines, which handles approximately 70% of Dulles traffic, will also begin using a new 14-gate concourse this fall.

Most of the overhaul will be financed through approximately $14.2 billion in municipal bonds rather than direct federal funding. But travelers may ultimately feel the cost. The amount airlines pay the airport for each boarding passenger is projected to rise from about $13 today to between $60 and $65 by 2038—an increase carriers could eventually reflect in ticket prices.

The approved $19.9 billion package also does not include the enormous parking garage and transportation center contained in President Donald Trump’s broader $22 billion vision for Dulles. Those additions would require separate approval and financing.

JBizNews Desk | Dulles, Virginia

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.

Wall Street opened lower Thursday as Walmart delivered a rare sales disappointment, Treasury yields moved back toward uncomfortable levels and another jump in oil prices reminded investors that the Iran confrontation is still capable of changing the inflation outlook almost overnight.

At the opening bell on Thursday, August 20, the Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 81.8 points to 53,381.22, the S&P 500 dropped 17.5 points to 7,690.49, and the Nasdaq Composite lost 119.6 points to 26,211.52.

The numbers themselves are not dramatic. The pressure underneath them is.

Long-term Treasury yields are climbing again after Wednesday’s extraordinary intervention by the Treasury Department, which announced it would at least double purchases of certain longer-dated government bonds. The move temporarily relieved a bond market that had been demanding increasingly high interest rates to finance Washington’s growing debt load, but Thursday morning the 10-year yield was again hovering near 4.7%.

Oil is adding to that pressure. Brent crude climbed to roughly $94 a barrel, while U.S. crude approached $87, after President Trump threatened a much tougher economic campaign against Iran. Higher oil prices matter far beyond energy stocks: they raise transportation and production costs and can make it harder for inflation to continue cooling.

Thursday’s economic data gave investors an unusual combination of low layoffs and very strong manufacturing activity.

New applications for unemployment benefits fell by 6,000 to 206,000 for the week ended August 15, below economists’ expectations of about 210,000. Continuing claims rose by 18,000 to 1.799 million. The message is that companies still are not laying workers off aggressively, even as hiring has softened.

At the same time, the Philadelphia Federal Reserve’s manufacturing index unexpectedly climbed to 47.4 in August from 41.4 in July, crushing expectations near 25 and reaching its strongest level in years. Employment inside the survey jumped sharply as well, while the prices-paid index dropped to 40.9 from 53.9.

The arithmetic for the Federal Reserve is complicated. A resilient labor market and stronger factory activity argue against rushing to lower rates, while easing price pressures argue that inflation may still be moving in the right direction. Investors already knew from Wednesday’s Fed minutes that a September rate increase has not completely disappeared from the discussion.

The biggest corporate story is Walmart.

Shares fell about 6% around the opening after Walmart’s U.S. comparable sales increased only 2.6%, versus expectations for roughly 3.8%. That was Walmart’s first comparable-sales miss in at least five years and a notable warning because the retailer has been one of the biggest beneficiaries of consumers trading down in search of lower prices.

Walmart itself is hardly collapsing. Quarterly revenue rose nearly 6% to $187.9 billion, U.S. e-commerce sales jumped 24%, its advertising business grew 43%, and the company actually raised its full-year sales forecast.

The concern is underneath those numbers: store traffic growth slowed and the average amount spent per transaction increased only 1.1%. Walmart also expects third-quarter adjusted earnings of 62 to 64 cents a share, below Wall Street expectations around 68 cents.

For investors trying to understand the consumer, that distinction matters. Americans are still shopping. They are simply becoming more selective about where the money goes.

Elsewhere, Alibaba’s U.S.-listed shares fell after adjusted profit missed expectations as the Chinese technology giant increased spending on artificial-intelligence infrastructure by 75%. Its cloud business is growing quickly — AI cloud and computing revenue jumped 45% — but investors are being reminded again that the global AI race requires enormous amounts of capital before those investments translate into profits.

Crypto is moving in the opposite direction. Bitcoin pushed above $70,000 after Trump urged Congress to pass the stalled Clarity Act following his White House meeting with cryptocurrency executives. Coinbase, Strategy, Circle, Robinhood and several crypto miners moved sharply higher.

Moderna, meanwhile, pulled back after Wednesday’s extraordinary 177% surge following successful late-stage results for its personalized mRNA melanoma treatment with Merck. The retreat is less a reversal of the medical news than investors recalibrating after one of the largest single-day moves ever for a major pharmaceutical company.

For the rest of Thursday, three markets deserve as much attention as the Dow itself: Treasury yields, crude oil and Walmart.

If the 10-year yield pushes materially above 4.7%, expensive technology and AI shares could again come under pressure. If oil continues climbing toward $90 in the U.S., the market will begin recalculating inflation expectations. And if Walmart’s decline spreads into other retailers, investors may start treating its sales miss as evidence of a broader consumer slowdown rather than a Walmart-specific quarter.

The Conference Board’s July Leading Economic Index is also scheduled for release at 10 a.m. ET and could provide another read on where the economy is headed.

JBizNews Desk | Wall Street

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited

American refineries are processing more crude oil than at any point since before the pandemic, and it still is not enough to bring prices down.

Refineries ran 17.4 million barrels of crude a day last week, according to Energy Information Administration figures reported Wednesday — above the previous wartime peak set in late July and the highest weekly pace since September 2019. Jet fuel output topped 2 million barrels a day for an 18th consecutive week, with gasoline and other fuels rising as well.

Here is why that matters. A refinery is the middle step between the oil well and the gas pump: it takes raw crude and turns it into gasoline, diesel and jet fuel. Early in the war, the problem was getting crude out of the Persian Gulf. The problem now sits one step further down the chain. Refineries are squeezed between the war and export restrictions, which limits how much crude they can convert into the fuels that actually move the economy. The world has crude. It is short of the finished product.

Drivers are paying for it. The national average for regular gasoline reached $4.07 a gallon Tuesday, up 30% from a year ago. Diesel is 48% more expensive than it was last summer.

Diesel is the one that reaches households indirectly. It powers the trucks, trains and farm tractors that move food and goods, so its price gets folded into the cost of nearly everything on a store shelf. Researchers at Brown University’s Climate Solutions Lab estimate higher diesel prices have cost American consumers close to $40 billion since the war began — roughly $300 per household.

The profit refiners are earning on that diesel explains why every plant in the country is running hard. The gap between the cost of a barrel of crude and what a barrel of diesel sells for hit $102 on Monday, an all-time record and nearly triple the level before the war. A barrel holds 42 gallons, so refiners are clearing roughly $2.40 on every gallon of diesel above what the crude cost them. Damage to Russian refineries has widened those margins further.

The uncomfortable part is what comes next. Refineries typically use the softer demand of autumn to shut down units for repairs. Plants running at maximum for months on end need that maintenance, and skipping it invites breakdowns that take capacity offline without warning. Deferring repairs to chase today’s margins is a bet that nothing breaks.

There is no quick fix available to Washington. Releasing crude from the strategic reserve does not help when the bottleneck is refining rather than oil supply. Building new refining capacity takes years. The realistic paths are a durable reopening of Gulf shipping, restored refining capacity in the Middle East and Russia, or demand cooling as consumers cut back.

For now, the fuel gauge is the honest indicator: American refineries have not run this hard in nearly seven years, and gas is still above $4.

JBizNews Desk | New York

© JBizNews.com All Rights Reserved. Reproduction or distribution without written permission is prohibited.